^      Λ  "      "Zf 


ν» 


S^c 


LIBRARY   OF   THE 


Ψ 


University  of  California. 


CIRCULA  TIXG    BRA X C Η . 


/ 


Ecturn  iu  nr*-  week^ ;  or  a  week  before  the  ena  c!  tre  lorn;, 


GREEK  EXERCISES- 


EXERCISES 

ON 

THE  SYNTAX 

OF  THE 


GEEEK  LANGUAGE. 


THE  REY.  WILLIA.AI  NEILSON,  D.  D. 


Λ  NEW  EDITION,  CORRECTED  AND  ENLARGED. 


TO  ΛνΠΙΟΙΣ  ARE  SCD JOINED, 

eji:ercises  in  metaphrasis,  paraphrasis^ 
dialects,  and  prosody. 

TOuET.IER  WITH 

AN  HISTORICAL  SKETCH  OF  THE  DIALECTS  ;    THE  DOCTHINK  OF 

THE  5IIDDLE  VOICE,  AVITII  EXPLANATORY  EXAMPLES; 

Λ   STATEMENT  OF  OPINIONS  RESPECTING  THE 

GREEK  ACCENTS ;    AND 

TWO    APPENDICES, 

ILLrSTRATIVE  OF  THE  LEADING  rRINCIPLES  OF  THE 
GREEK.  SYNTAX. 


CHARLES  ANTHON, 

JlPrcNCT  TROrESSOR  OF  LANGUAGES  IN  COLUMBIA  COLLEGE,  NEW-YORK. 


NEW-YORK: 

SWORDS,  STANFORD,  AND  Co. 

15"2  Broadway. 

Stereotyped  by  J.  Conner 

1S35 


3S&07 


Southern  Dislrkt  of  yeic-York;  g$. 

Be  it  ri'ineinl)crn<l,  that  on  the  ninth  ilay  of  March,  A.  D.  1825,  in  the 
49th  year  of  the  Iinh'pendence  of  the  United  Sutesof  Aineria»,  7'.  φ  J. 
Sicor'ds,  of  the  said  District,  have  depositi'd  in  this  Oflice  the  title  of  a 
book,  the  right  whereof  they  claim  as  Proprietor:;,  in  the  words  fol!owin«^, 
to  wit : 

"  Exercises  on  the  S  .-ntax  of  the  Grrrk  Langtiage.  r>y  the  Rev.  ΛΥϋ- 
liani  Ncilson,  D.  D.  Corrected  and  enlarL'<d.  To  which  are  sutjoined, 
Exercises  in  Atetaphrasii,  Paraphrasis,  Dialects,  and  Prosody  :  together 
with  an  historical  Sketch  of  the  Dialects;  the  Doitrine  of  the  Middle 
Voice,  with  ex|)lanalory  Examples ;  a  St;itenient  of  Opinions  resjiecting 
the  Greek  Accents;  and  two  Appendices,  illustrati\e of  the  londin;r  Prin- 
ciples of^the  Greek  Syntax.  By  Charles  Anthon,  A<ijunct  Professor  of 
Languagt*»!  in  Colunihia  College,  New-York. 

in  conformity  to  the  Act  of  the  Congress  of  the  United  States,  entitled 
"  All  Act  for  tlie  Encouragement  of  Learning,  hy  securing  the  Copies  of 
Maps,  Charts,  and  Hooks,  to  the  Authors  and  Proprietors  of  such  Copiei», 
during  the  tinie  therein  mentioned.•'  And  also  to  an  Act,  entitled  "An 
Act,  supplementary  to  an  Act,  enlitleil  An  Act  for  the  Encouragement  of 
Learning,  by  securing  the  Copies  of  Ma|>s,  Charts,  and  l5ot>ks,  to  the  Au- 
thors and  I'roprietors  of  such  Copies,  during  the  times  therein  mentioned, 
and  extending  the  lienefits  therev>f  to  the  Arts  of  Designing,  Engraving, 
and  Etching  Historical  and  other  l^ints." 

JAMES  DILL, 
Clark  of  the  Smithcm  District  of  Aftr-  York. 


^Aj^.sy 


h  '   ) 


TO  Λ    Η  ίζ" 

;     it  Hoi  ■%«• 


THE  REV.  WILLIAM  HARRIS,  U.  1). 


PRESIDENT  OF  COLUMBIA  COLLEGE,  SEW-YORK. 


Rev.  and  dear  Sir, 

As  a  feeble  return  for  numerous  acts  of  kindness, 
allow  me  the  privilege  of  inscribing  to  you  this  little 
volume,  and  of  indulging,  at  the  same  time,  the  flatter- 
ing hope  that  it  may  not  prove  altogether  unworthy  of 
your  notice.  I  shall  esteem  myself  peculiarly  fortunate, 
if  my  humble  labours  can  secure  the  approbation  of  one 
in  whom  private  and  public  worth  are  so  intimately 
blended,  and  under  whose  fostering  care  our  Institution 
has  made  so  rapid  a  progress  in  the  career  of  improve* 
ment. 

The  work  which  I  take  the  liberty  of  presenting, 
must,  of  course,  stand  or  fall  by  its  own  merits ;  yet  I 
cannot  omit  the  present  opportunity  of  trespassing  a  lit- 
tle on  your  kind  attention,  while  I  state  a  few  particulars 
respecting  the  plan  which  has  been  pursued  in  it,  '  The 
Greek  Exercises  of  Dr.  Neilson,  long  and  advantageously 
known  in  this  country  and  in  Great  Britain,  had  come 
into  very  general  use,  when,  by  an  occurrence  unfortu- 
nately but  too  common  in  the  case  of  some  of  our  most 
valuable  school-books,  a  blow  was  inflicted  which  ren- 
dered the  work  perfectly  useless.  From  a  strange  mis- 
eenception  of  the  true  mode  of  education,  an  edition  of 

a3 


(  vi) 

the  Exercises  made  its  appearance  in  this  country  some 
years  hack,  with  a  key  actually  annexed,  and  thus  the 
good  eflTects  of  a  work  which  would  otherwise  have  proved 
so  useful  an  auxiliary  to  the  student,  became  in  an  in- 
stant cornjiletcly  neutralized.  The  conseijucnce  has  been, 
tliat  the  Greek  Exercises  of  Dr.  Xeilson  have  gradually 
been  disused,  and  are,  it  is  believed,  retained  at  tije  pre- 
sent day  by  few  of  our  preceptors.  The  j)eculiar  and 
lasting  advantages  which  result  from  the  practice  of 
Greek  and  Latin  composition,  in  giving  a  closer  and 
more  accurate  view  of  the  granmiatical  forms  of  these 
languages,  must  be  conceded  by  all ;  and  it  is  therefore 
a  subject  of  deep  regret,  that  a  most  valuable  branch  of 
classical  instiuction  should  have  been  for  a  long  time  ]'en- 
deied  so  utterly  unproductive. 

The  object  of  the  present  work  is  to  suf^ply,  if  pos- 
sible, the  place  of  the  furmer  edition  of  Dr.  Xeilson's 
Exercises  ;  in  order  to  accomplish  wiiich  end,  such  al- 
terations and  additions  have  been  made  as  nnist  render 
the  key  to  the  previous  edition  of  no  value  whatever. 
The  general  outline  las  been  indeed  retained,  but  the 
materials  of  which  the  volume  is  composed  will  be  I'ound 
to  be  more  than  two-thirds  enlirdy  new,  Λ\Ίΰ1ο  the 
old  seleclions  have  been  pretty  generally  thrown  out, 
others  have  licen  called  in  to  supply  their  places  lVi)m 
the  best  ancient  writers,  and  n<it  a  tew  have  been  taken 
from  the  Greek  Exercises  ol"  Bishop  Huniiiig!"uril  ami 
Professor  Dunbar.  It  has  been  my  endeavour  t«)  select 
fi^m  the  two  works  last  mentioned  all  that  a()peared  use- 
ful, and  at  the  same  time  to  procure  whatever  was  valu- 
able from  every  other  accessible  quarter.  The  second 
part  of  the  volume,  commencing  with  the  Exercises  in 
iMetaphrasis,  is  all  new.  Here  the  plan  of  Dr.  Xeilson 
appeared  radically  defective,  in  annexing•  poetical  instead 
vi  prose  translations  to  the  Exercises  in  iMetaphrasis, 
Sec.  which  his  work  contained.  I  have  addeil  to  my  se- 
lections a  j)rose  version,  "  horrida  qitiiUm  el  barlnira," 
yet  necessarily  so,  in  order  to  be  of  any  real  use  to  the 
student.  The  Exercises  on  the  Greek  Dialects,  and  also 
those  ill  Prosodv,  have  been  all  taken  from  the  best  wri- 


(  vii  ) 

tcrs  of  antiquity  ;  and  it  is  hoped  that  the  History  of  the 
Dialects  will  not  prove  uninstjuctive.  Tlie  Doctrine  of 
the  Middle  Verb,  which  is  next  in  the  order  of  the  vo- 
lume, will,  I  trust,  not  be  unacceptable  to  the  pupil,  since 
it  will  serve  to  explain  v.hat  might  otherwise  appear  to 
him  a  strange  and  unaccountable  anomaly.  The  gram- 
marians of  the  present  day  have  thought  fit  to  attack  the 
doctrine  of  the  Middle  Voice,  and  have  been  led  to  view 
it  merely  as  another  form  for  the  Passive.  The  Perfect 
Middle  in  like  manner  they  have  dignified  with  the  np- 
pellation  of  the  Seconil  Perfect  Active,  insisting  that  its 
meaning  is  never  a  middle  one.  I  may  be  unibrtunate 
in  not  possessing  the  same  degree  of  critical  acumen 
with  those  who  imagine  that  they  liave  discovered  what 
has  hitlierto  escaped  the  observation  of  the  ablest  scho- 
lars, and  yet  I  cajmot  but  think  that  attempts  such  as 
(ficse,  to  remove  the  very  landmarks  of  a  language,  and 
ininjciuce  confusion  and  disorder  on  the  ruins  of  a  most 
beautiful  system,  are  at  once  unnecessary  and  uncalled 
lor.  The  Doctrine  of  the  Middle  Voice,  and  the  Rc- 
hiarks  on  the  Middle  Pc-rfect,  as  they  are  given  in  the 
present  work,  must  speak  for  tliemselves.  Should  the 
student  feel  desirous  of  any  farther  information  on  tho 
subject,  he  is  referred  to  the  adniirable  Treatise  of  Kiisi- 
ter. 

The  Statement  of  Opinions  respecting  i!ie  Greek  Ac- 
cents presents,  in  a  small  compass,  the  C(jljected  opinions 
of  some  of  the  al>U;st  scholars  on  this  long-agitate<i  to- 
pic. The  student  is  left  to  drav,'  his  ovv'n  conclusions. 
No  accents  have  been  given  in  the  present  work,  because 
it  is  my  misfortune  to  consider  them  as  "  mute  and  un- 
meaning marks  ;"'  and  until  vve  are  taught  in  what  way 
they  were  used  iuy\  applied  by  the  ancients,  1  shall 
always  consider  it  the  height  of  classical  affectation  to 
talk  and  argue  learnedly  of  things,  respecting  the  true 
nature  of  which  the  best  airn^ng  us  proicss  lo  be  pro- 
foundly ignorant. 

The  Appendices  which  are  annexed  to  the  volume, 
Aviil  account  for  the  absence  from  the  present  edition  of 


(  viii   ) 

the  chapter  on  Ellipses.  The  doctrine  of  Eljipscs,  in 
itself  very  plausible  and  captivating,  has  been  pushed  so 
far  by  its  advocates,  as  to  exhibit  a  complete  tissue  of 
the  most  egregious  trifling.  That  there  are  Ellipses  in 
Greek  as  well  as  in  every  other  language,  no  one  will 
deny.  The  very  effect  of  the  gradual  improving  of  α 
language  is  to  produce  them.  But  tliat  they  exist  in  eve- 
ry sentence,  nay,  in  ulmost  every  clause  or  phrase  of 
that  sentence,  is  what  can  never  be  assented  to.  Such 
a  doctrine  as  this,  while  it  servos  to  exclude  from  the 
view  of  the  student  the  simple  and  beautiful  principles 
which  regulate  the  operations  of  one  of  the  noblest  of 
languages,  cannot  fail  to  narrow  his  views  of  language 
in  general,  and  keep  him  continually  groping  after  some 
visionary  ellipsis.  It  is  on  this  account  timt  so  little  will 
be  found  in  the  present  work  on  this  subject.  In  stating 
the  rules  indeed,  as  they  have  been  handed  down  by  suc- 
cessive grammarians,  I  have  been  necessarily  led  to  adopt 
their  language,  but  in  the  first  Appendix  have  claimed 
the  privilege  of  giving  a  more  liberal  view  of  the  doc- 
trine from  the  best  writers. 

In  the  Rules  of  Syntax,  an  asterisk  has  been  affixed 
to  the  new  rules  which  are  added  in  this  edition,  and 
to  those  of  the  old  ones  which  h'lve  been  altered  in 
their  phraseology.  This  mark  was  afiixcd  in  the  pre- 
vious editiijns,  to  those  rules  which  were  supposed  to 
differ  from  i^atin  construction.  In  many  instances,  how- 
ever, it  was  necessarily  α  very  fallacious  cxpotlient, 
since  often  when  the  idioms  of  the  two  languages  ap- 
pear at  first  view  widely  remote,  they  may  be  found, 
on  a  closer  examination,  to  have  numerous  points  of 
rescniblanec. 

r 

Each  chapter  of  the  Exercises  is  divided  into  three 
parts.  The  first  contains  plain  and  easy  sentences, 
which  should  be  rendered  into  correct  Greek  before  the 
other  parts  of  the  chapters  are  attempted.  The  second 
embraces  more  variety  of  expression,  and  exemplifies 
the  rules  promiscuously,  as  well  as  the  particular  one 
prefixed  to  each  chapter  :  this  part  extends  from  the 
mark  IT  to  the  end  of  the  Enirlish  sentences.     The  thiixi 


(  ix  ) 

portion  is  small,  and  consists  of  Latin  sentences,  which 
are  to  be  rendered  into  Greek.  Tiicse  would  have  been 
given  in  English,  and  been  made  more  numerous,  had 
we  possessed  an  English-Greek  Lexicon  for  schools. 

In  order  to  occasion  as  little  trouble  as  possible  to  the 
pupil,  the  Greek  forms  of  the  verbs  have  in  general  been 
given  according  to  the  Lexicon  of  ISchrevelius.  This 
will  be  particularly  apparent  in  the  verbs  s-s-w,  st5;u,  and 
liL•.     To  the  first  of  these  ειτον  has  been  assigned  as  a 

sond  aorist,  when  it  properly  should  be  formed  from 
the  Ionic  sitcj  ;  and  ειοίω  is  used  with  the  meaning  of  "to 
know,"  and  e(5co  \viih  that  of  "  to  see,"  wlicn  in  fact  they 
are  one  and  the  same  verb,  ««^tw  contracted  siOu,  signify- 
ing "  to  know,"  and  having  in  the  second  aorist  the  mean- 
ing "  to  see." 

But  I  have  trespassed  loo  long,  I  fear,  upon  your  at- 
tention. Permit  mc,  in  conclusion,  to  entertain  the  hope 
that  my  labours,  in  the  present  instance,  m.ay  not  prove 
wholly  useless,  and  tliat  they  may  serve  in  some  little 
degree  to  aid  the  knowledge  of  a  language  "  which  has 
the  highest  claims  on  the  attention  of  mankind,  as  be- 
ing the  fountain  of  all  the  blessings  that  enrich  and 
adorn  society,  and  more  especially  as  the  sacred  deposi- 
tory of  that  revelation  which  is  ihc  fairest  gift  of  God 
to  man." 

1  have  the  honour  to  remain, 
Very  respectfully. 

Your  obedient  servant, 

CHARLES  ANTIION. 


To   Charles   Antho.v,  F.aq.,  Adjuncl    Vroftsaor   of 
Languages  in  Columbia  College,  AVic-  Yor/c. 

Columbia  College,  March  4,  1825. 

Dear  Sir, 

When  first  you  intimated  to  me  your  intention  of 
editing  the  Greek  Exercises  of  Dr.  Neilson,  I  had  little 
doubt,  from  my  knowledge  of  your  perfect  competency 
to  execute  the  work,  that  it  would  prove  worthy  of  public 
patronage ;  but  since  I  have  been  favoured  witii  the 
perusal  of  it,  in  justice  to  you  I  must  ac-knowledgo  that 
it  greatly  exceeds  all  the  expectations  I  had  entertained 
of  its  utility.  In  writing  Greek  or  Latin  exercises,  the 
student  is  benefited  chictly  by  the  use  of  his  powers  of 
judgment,  of  discrimination,  and  of  taste ;  but  when 
recourse  can  be  had  to  a  translation  or  a  key,  these  most 
important  ends  are  entirely  defeated.  Your  book  is  a 
complete  remedy  Ibr  this  evil,  and,  with  many  and  great 
additional  advantages,  su()plies  the  place  of  the  former 
edition  of  Dr.  Neilson's  Exercises. 

Permit  me.  Sir,  to  congratulate  you  on  the  completion 
of  the  work,  and  to  express  my  earnest  desire  that  it  may 
speedily  be  adopted  in  all  our  classical  schools. 

That  you  may  experience  this  satisfaction  from  your 
useful  labours,  and  may  long  be  continued  to  benefit,  by 
your  able  and  faithful  instructions,  the  youth  of  this  city, 
and  particularly  the  students  of  Columbia  College,  ia, 
dear  »Sir,  the  sincere  wish  of 

Your  obliged  and  faithful  friend, 

WILLIAM  HARRIS. 


(    xi    ) 


REMARKS  NECESSARY  TO  BE  OBSERVED  IN 
WRITING  GREEK. 


1.  The  final  letter  is  generally  cut  off  (except  in  verbs) 
fiom  ΛνοΓ(ΐ3  ending  in  a,  ε,  ι,  ο,  αι,  or  οι,  when  the  following 
word  begins  ^\■ith  a  vowel ;  as,  Παντ'  εΧιγον. 

2.  Most  words  ending  in  <fi,  and  aU  verbs  in  ί  and  i,  take 
V,  when  the  following  word  begins  \vith  a  νοΛνβΙ ;  as,  Eixotftv 
ανδζες. 

3.  Ν  is  changed  into  7,  in  compounds,  before  κ,  y,  χ,  and 
iiito  μ,  before  cr,  ^,  φ,  ψ  ;  as,  Εγχξΐω,  β'υμ.φλε/ω. 

4.  When  the  following  word  begins  with  an  aspirated 
vowel,  the  tenuis,  or  intermediate  consonant  preceding,  is 
changed  into  an  aspirate  ;  as,  Αφ'  ού. 

5.  Ex  is  used  before  a  consonant,  εξ  before  a  voAvel.  Ου  is 
lised  before  a  consonant,  oux  before  a  soft  voAvel,  ουχ  before  an 
aspiraied  one. 

6.  The  Attics  use  all  contractions. 

The  order  of  the  sentences,  in  each  voice,  in  the  first  chapter 
of  the  Exercises,  is  as  follows  :  Present,  Imperfect,  1st  Future, 
2d  Future,  1st  Aoiist,  2d  Aorist,  Perfect,  Pluperfect,  and  in 
the  passive,  Paulo  post  future. 

The  manner  of  expression,  in  which  each  tense  is  trans- 
lated in  the  first  chapter,  is  retained,  in  general,  throughout 
the  work :  but  as  this  could  not  be  always  done,  and  as  there 
are  many  varieties  of  expression,  which  the  most  literal  trans- 
lation could  not  ascertain,  small  EngUsh  letters  and  figures  are 
affixed  to  such  Greek  words  as  might  probably  be  rendered 
UTiproperlr. 
After  a  Λ'erb — 

*        denotes       Active. 

»»        .        -         Middle. 

i^        •        •        Passive. 


(  ^  ) 


*        denote 

3       Present. 

Imj>erfect. 

Ist  Future. 

2d  Future. 

1st  Aorist. 

2d  Aorist. 

Perfect. 

Pluperfect 

Indicative. 

Subjunctive 

Optative. 

Infinitive. 

Participle. 

Aftei  a  Substantive,  AJjcctlve.  Pronoun,  or  Participle 
"»        denotes        Ma-sculinc. 


f 

Feminine. 

ne 

Neuter. 

t 

Singular. 

«lu 

Dual. 

pi 

Plural.* 

η 

Nominative. 

g 

Genitive. 

Λ 

Dative. 

• 

Accusative. 

*  In  the  «ally  part  of  the  volume,  pi  w  ueeJ  (ϋ  dcuot•  the  plural,  aAe^ 
wards  the  letter  e  ak>uc  is  retained. 


RULES 


OP 


GREEK  SYNTAX. 


THE  ARTICLE. 


1.  Thc  article  is  used  to  mark  a  distinction  or  emphasis. 
"With  the  infinitive  it  supplies  the  place  of  nouns,  gerunds, 
and  supines.  With  a  participle,  it  is  translated  by  the  relative 
and  indicative.  With  μεν  and  oi  it  signifies  partly  ;  and  it  is 
often  used  for  ornament ;  as, 


Kaxwv  των  τ^ιν  μνειαν  εχίιν. 

Τα  εξω. 

Εν  TU1  φξονον. 

Ό  εξ^ομενος. 

Τ'  ανό^ωιτειον  γϊνος  τγι  μεν  αγα- 

όον,  771  6s  φαυλον. 
ΊΙ  vjxi]  ή  νικηίΤαίία  τον  χοίμον  ή 


ui^schylus  the  tragedian. 

To  remember  former  evils. 

The  things  without. 

In  wisdom. 

He  that  cometh. 

Mankind  are  partly  good,  and 

partly  bad. 
Faith,  the  victory  which  ovei^ 

comes  the  world•. 


CONCORD. 


AjDJECTIVE  AND  SUBSTANTIVE. 

*2.  Adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  participles,  agree 
with  their  respective  substantives  in  gender,  number,  and 
case  ;  as. 


Ανδξξς  αγα6οΐ. 
Πα^ον  μενο^. 


Good  men. 
This  city. 
Present  courage» 


2  coKcoti0t 

*3.  An  adjective  is  often  put  ab.solvUfly  In  the  neuter  gen- 
tler, "X^^il^oi,  cominonly,  χτήμα,  treaytia,  and  e^/6v,  iumetiu;iea 
being  understood ;  as, 

O»5ov  ή  α>.ηί:"•α  αί».  Truth  is  always  a  right  thing. 

*II  ι^ατξΐς  φιλτατον  /Djoroii.  To  men  their  country  is  rnosf 

dear. 

*4.  The  adjective  i.s  often  found  without  any  substantivo 
with  which  it  agrees,  the  latter  having  been  omitted,  or  being 
easy  to  be  supphed  by  the  nund  ;   as, 

Ό  βΌφοίτ.  The  wise  man. 

'il  iPir>.  The  straight  road. 

Τα  εμα.  My  property. 

5.  An  adjective  i.s  sometimes  put  in  a  different  gender  froiA 
tVie  sub.'tantive  with  which  il  .-itand.•?,  as  agreeing  with  some 
other  substantive  undcrstootl ;  a?, 

Airv»)  Διοί  τεχος  ατ^-τωνη.  .Minurva,  invincible  daughter 

of  Jove. 
Ω  ψυχή  ό;  fi»jo'  );rf()>;;.  Ο !  soul  who  hast  not  been 

gratified. 

6.  I^articiples  ami  adjectives  are  often  put,  by  ;ittraciion, 
in  the  same  case  with  the  noun  or  pronoim  to  which  they 
refer ;  as, 

Οιομ-ενων  είναι  oOipi;Tar:,;v  f.vjpu-      Thinking  thein.selvca  to  be  the 
ruvi  wisest  of  men. 


VERB  AND  NOMINATIVE. 

7.  A  verb  agrees  with  its  noiniiuitive,  in  nuuibor  and  per• 
9on  ;  as, 

Zs.^tC  ίγζη-Ι;.  Zeuicis  painted. 

0;??αλμυ  λημίΓίνον,  His  eyes  shine. 

Ka.rc'.iovin  6ξ\ιΙ\ίς.  Birds  sing. 

8.  Neuters  in  the  plural  have  cominonly  verbs  singlihir  ; 
as, 

Tit  /36λη  εκα-χΊα.  The  darL-  fall  out. 

T',.•  α^νξΐ-^  CTOTatftfsVai  r^aMra.     All  things  are  suhjecL  to  mo- 
ney. 
*9.  Nouns  of  multitude  take  either  a  singular  or  plurni 
▼rrt  or  participle,  and  eomciiiuea  both  in  the  same  sentence  : 


CONCORD.  8 

ΣιιΌυδϊ]  ί'  l^iro  Xaof,  ε^ητνίίν  And  the  people  sat  down  in 
(for  f^nTuirjCav)  5s  χα&Βδξας.         haste  and  kept  their  scat?, 

10.  Substantive  verbs,  verbs  passive  of  naming,  and  verbs 
of  gesture,  have  a  nominative  both  before  and  after  them,  be- 
longing to  the  same  thing  ;  as, 

Ύμεις  iclc  το  φως  του  κοβΊ^ον.         Ye  arc  the  light  of  the  world. 
Καχων  ειτίχαλυμμα  ζΰΐα  ό  "π-λου-     Wealth  is  the  cloak  of  evils. 
7off.  I 

11.  The  infinitives  of  substantive  verbs,  such  as  civci, 
yaetfiai,  &c.  have  the  same  case  after  them  that  goes  before 
ihem  ;  as, 

Toji  μίν  ειίοτα^  ταύτα  ηχίιτο  He  thought  that  those  who 
χαλου5  και  α^α^ουί:  εινα»,  tous  knew  these  things  were 
Jf  ayvooi/VTaj    avi^affo^wiiij  good  and  honourable  ;  but 

αν  διχαίω^  χεκλη^όαί.  that  those  who  were  igno- 

rant   of  them    should    be 
justly  called  slavish. 

12.  The  infinitive  mood  has  an  accusative  before  it,  when 
its  agent  or  subject  is  different  from  that  of  the  preceding 
verb  ;  but  a  nominative,  \vhen  thej  are  the  same  ;  as, 

Tj  βζοτονζ  φξο\ί>ν  Xs^ouii ;  "Why  do  they  say  that  mortal 

men  are  wise  ? 
ί,ζείξε  ifoX^iiios  είναι  βα'ίι'Κα.         He  showed  that  he  himself 

was  an  enemy  to  the  king. 

*13.  When  the  preceding  verb  and  the  infinitive  relate  to 
the  same  per.-;on,  the  pronoun,  unless  cinphatical,  is  omitted 
before  the  latter ;  but  when  they  relate  to  different  persons, 
the  pronoun  must  be  expressed  ;  as, 

Έφ-ή  ζ-η-ειν.  He  said  he  was  seeking* 

Αεγω  Cj  ειόεναι  ταιιτα,  I  say  that  thou  knowest  these 

ihino-s. 


RELATIVE  AND  ANTECEDENT. 

14.  The  relative  agrees  with  its  antecedent  in  gender  and 
number.  If  there  come  no  nominative  between  the  relative 
and  the  verb,  the  relative  is  the  nominative  to  the  verb  ;  but 
if  there  do,  the  relative  is  governed  by  some  word  expressed 
or  understood ;  as, 

Ανδξίς  οί  ίΐίΌνται,  Men  who  will  know. 

Ό  λr,Ύΰf  Iv  ftcre,  Tiie  wcid  which  he  ep(^. 


4  CONCORD. 

15.  The  Attica  and  Ionics  often  put  the  relative,  by  attrac- 
tion, in  the  same  case  with  the  antecedent ;  and  sometiuies 
the  antecedent  in  the  same  case  with  the  relative ;  as, 

11^05  τουτοΐί  οΊς  Χεγβι  Ξενοφών.      In  addition  to  the  tilings  wliich 

Xenojilion  says. 

OJrof  stfriv  όν  Χεγείζ  ανό^ω«ον.       This  is  the  man  of  whoni  tliou 

speakest, 

*16.  The  relative  with  its  clause  often  stands,  as  in  Latin, 
before  its  antecedent,  when  the  leading  idea  of  the  whole 
period  is  contained  in  it ;  as, 

'Λ  croiiiv  αιί-χζαν,  ταύτα  νομι^£     Think   that  it  is  not  even  be- 
μγ,δ:  Χεγειν  Sivai  χαλον.  coming  to  mention  what  it 

is  disgraceful  to  perform. 

*17.  When  the  relative,  by  means  of  a  verb  like  "/ooe," 
"  to  tiatne"  "  (0  believe"  is  joined  with  a  noun  in  the  same  case, 
It  conforms  itself,  in  gender  and  number,  to  this  noun,  and  not 
10  that  which  is  its  jiroper  antecedent ;  as, 

Τϊαξϋίην  αυτ-fj  φόβο?,  ήν  αι5ω     He  has  a  fear  which  we  call 
;i(aXoufisv,  $hamo. 


GENER.VL  RULES. 

18.  A  noun  of  the  dual  number  may  have  a  verb,  adjective, 
or  relative  plural  ;  but  a  plural  noun  can  only  have  a  verb, 
adjective,  or  relative  dual,  when  it  signifies  t\vo  ;  as, 

Αμφω  βλβ/βν.  They  both  said. 

Ώί  ανίμοι  δυο  o^iverov.  As  two  winds  excite. 

Φιλα^  ίτ:?ι  χΰΐ^ί  /3αλωμΕν.  Let  us  put  our  hantls  around. 

19.  Two  or  more  substantives  .singular  have  a  verb,  adjec- 
tive, or  relative  plural.  If  they  ho.  of  different  persons  ox  gen- 
ders, the  verb  or  adjective  will  agree  with  the  most  worthy  ; 
if  they  signify  things  without  life,  the  adjective  is  commonly 
in  the  neuter  ;  as, 

Eav  α5έλ(ρβ5  ij  αί'λφη  ^νμ«»  If    a    brother    or    sister    be 

wrafXwtf».  nakeil. 

Λ>  6\ivaolstai   xai  0  ιτΧοντος  6ia  Power  and  riches   are  de.«irT 

Tjjv  τ»μην  Ε(ί7»ν  α'ΐξίΐ-α.  able  for  the  sake  of  honour, 

Eyw  xai   tfu  τα  ίιχαια  "τΌΐτ,οΌ-  Thou  and  I  will  do  the  things 

μ^ν.  which  are  just. 

*20.  Two  singular  nouns  connected  by  a  conjunction, 
when  expressing,  not  two  distinct  tlungSj  but  ditierent  shaded 


CONCORD.  I 

of  tlic  same  idea,  require  the  verb  to  be  in  the  singular  num-  J^  Vt^ 
ber ;  as, 

Πτξυνε  μίνοί  χαι  Oj,ao;  σ.γψωξ,       His  spirit  and  manly  soul  in- 
cited him. 

*21.  Two  or  more  nouns  singular  have  also  the  con'espond- 
ing  Λ-erb  oflen  in  the  singidar  agreeing  Avith  that  which  is 
nearest ;  as, 

'Ewi  αν  ■rOfj5>Ji]  ό  ojt'avoi  xai  η     Until  ihe'hcavcn  and  the  earth 
^-η.  shall  pass  away. 

22.  When  an  infinitive  or  a  sentence  is  in  place  of  the  no- 
minative to  a  verb,  or  substantive  to  an  adjective,  the  verb  is  in 
the  tliird  person  singular,  and  the  adjective  in  the  neuter  gen- 
der ;  as, 

To   raiiy   «Pcifai    ύ-^ύαξϊσ'ΐατον     It  is  very  hard  to  please  aU, 


SUBST.VXTIVF,  .i.ND  SUBSTANTIVE. 

2.3.  One  .substantive  agrees  with  anGther,  .signifying  the 
same  thing,  in  case ;  as, 

Κ•οαζαξγ,ς  ύ  -καις  toj  Atfruayoy.      Cyaxares  thesofiof  Astyages, 

Aurokvxoj  &ογσ.-τ,!> μεγαΧν,τοξ',ς^     Anliclca,  the  daughter  of  the 

Αν-ίκλίια.  magnanimous  Autolycus,   . 

*24.  Noun^  connected  with  other  nouns  to  limit  their  sig^ 
nification,  are  couAerted  into  adjectives  ;  as, 

rXwfl'a'av  Έ/Οναία  εύιοαξί.  He  taught   the    Greek  lari» 

guage. 
Ολυμιποίίί  ΜουοΌι.  Olympian  Muses. 


GOYERNxMENT. 


S-UBSTANTIVES. 

25.  One  substantive  governs  another,  signif^-ing  a  different 
thing,  in  the  genitive  ;  as, 

Toy  Θ? oy  μακ^δδυ,αιο?.  The  long  suffering  of  Go4 

A2 


β  COVEHMMENT. 

26.  An  adjective  in  the  neuter  gender,  without  a  substan• 
tive,  governs  the  genitive  ;  as, 

To  λοιιτον  ς"ής  7ΐμ.εξας.  The  rest  of  the  da3'. 

To  xfaTi(f7ov  τ-ης  φιΧοίίοφιας.  The  best  pr.rt  of  philosophy. 

27.  The  primitive  pronoun  is  used  in  the  genitive,  instead 
of  the  possessive  pronoun  ;  as, 

IIuT-ήξ  μου,  for  «αττηξ  ίμ-ος.  "My  father, 

'*28.  But  when  an  emphasis  is  required,  the  posse-sive 
alone  can  be  used  ;  and  to  this  sometimes,  by  a  species  of  ap- 
position, is  added  a  genitive  case  ;  as, 

^ιαξ-^ΤΛξουιίι  τα  ί,αα,  coy  χακ:-     Thoj'  plunder  the  property  of 
JaifAovof.  uie,  the  miserable. 


ADJECTIVES. 

*29.  Adjectives  signifying ;?/<;«^),/,  wuri/i,  condemnation,  power, 
differmcp,  desire,  memory,  knowledge,  and  their  oppositcs.  require 
the  genitive  ;  as, 

Έ.ξγα.  •b-XsiCtou  άξια.  AVorks  wortliy  of  the  highest 

value. 
ΓιιμναΛα  ιιεύτα  ανδρών.  Places    of     exercise    full    of 

rnon. 
Ών  ^ledj^ftj  η(Τί'  net.  Of  \vhicli  you  wore  ;Uv.;;ys 

de.-iirous, 

.*30.  Verbals  cornpoiuided  wi;h  the  privative  n,  ν.ι.ά  thotc 
ending  in  ixop,  govern  the  genitive  ;  a«, 

Amino?  α^ροσ'υνη.ί.  Not     blamcablo     for    i;>:pru- 

dence. 
Πί^ι^ΤίΚΡ?  w^Γη^iι^Jv,  Capable  of  providing  neccsr 

saries. 

*31,  Parti;ivps,  and  words  used  p&rtitively,  comparativr•», 
fupcrla'ivce,  indelini'rs.  interrogativ»s,  and  some  nuiucrals, 
take  after  them  the  genitive  plural:  as, 

'Oi  nakiy.101  των  •Kai-qruv,  The  auf  irnt  poets. 

Movoff  βξοτων.  The  only  one  of  mortals. 

'Oi  vfwrf^oi  avt'^iuir^v,  The  younger  of  the  men. 

Καλλίίτίο^  «ΌΓαμμν.  The  most  beautiful  of  rivers. 

ΐ>κα<ίτ(ιξ  των  rra^ovTwv  fX£jf.  '       Each  of  those  NvliO  v/ere  pre- 
sent said, 


GOVERNMENT.  7 

32.  The  comparative  degree  governs  the  genitive,  when  it 

is  translated  b}'  than  ;  as, 

Βουλϊ;^  cuicv  εσ"7ιν  εχ^ιον  χαχη^.      Nothing  is  more  odious  than 

bad  counsel. 

*33.  The  adjective  pronouns  αλλοί  and  ϊτίξοζ  are  some- 
times used  as  comparatives,  iiud  construed  \vith  the  genitive  \ 

as, 

Αλλα  των  ojxaiwv.  Thingsother  than  those  which 

are  just. 
'Erf^ov  ?-2υτου.  Different  from  this. 

*34.  The  comparati^-e  is  sometimes  followed  by  the  geni- 
tive of  the  reciprocal  jironouns,  anil  the  same  subject  is  com- 
pared to  itself  Λνιΐΐι  regard  to  its  dilTerent  circumstances  at 
different  times ;  a.~, 

ΠλουσΊ^τί^οι  1«ΐ)των.  Richer  than  they  Avere  before. 

ΔίΓληαΊο^  iu-^ro-j.  As  great  again  as  it  was. 

35.  Adjectives  signilying  profit^  Uhrncss,  obedience,  fitness, 
ί,Ίίί'ΐ,  dcararss,  dcccnoj,  facility,  ami  their  contraries,  and  those 
(■■fjrvpowidcd  with  tfuv  and  όμου,  govern  the  dative  ;  as, 

'ίίμιν  ετ7αι  ;^?τ;οΊ,αον.  It  Λνϋΐ  be  useful  to  us. 

Συντ^οφοί:  -fj  άτλοττ-η.  Accustomed  to  simplicity. 

T.Kt-^&i'^ji  ανΰρι  ejxTsv.  To  be  \vi.-ihed  for  by  a  liberal 

man. 
Tot;  }  tvvaioij  το  αιίχρον  5χ(5^"€ν.     To  the  generous,  a  base  tiling 

is  detestable. 

-'36.  Comparatives  and  superlatives  govern  the  mea-ure 
cf  excess  mast  commonly  in  the  d<-''>ti'^  «Ί  sometimes  also  in  ύιβ 
accusative ;  as, 

Av^Pijrrwv  p.av.j^j  «pii-roj.  By  fir  the  best  of  men. 

Τίο.τ/ίζ  ΐολλον  ap.nvuv,  Aiiicli  braver  than  his  fati:ier^ 


VF.KBS. 


87.  When  ίιμι  and  ym^ai  signify  possess-ion,  pyopertij,  or 
duty,  they  govern  the  genitive  ;  as, 

Ό  ίΓΊττ^αίχομίνο^  ίτε|ου  yivirai.      lie  Vvho  is  sold  becomes  the 

property  of  another. 

*3S.  Verbs  of  beginning,  admiring,  zcaniingj  mnemheringy 


8  GOVERNMENT- 

ofcusing^  valuins;,  sharing^  and  the  like,  w'wh.  their  coiUrariea 
govern  the  genitive  ,  a*, 

Παγίων  rwv  xa/.tjv  r;^a.  He  loved  all  that  were  virtu- 

0115. 

Oude  rouTou  6ιημα^7$.  Neither  did  he  fail  of  haWiig 

thi.-i. 
AuiXfi.c  CUV  φίλων.  Υυΐι  nofflect  your  fVionds. 

A-roXajii  twv  ταί>οντ^ν.  He  enjoys  things  present, 

*39.  Λ'erbs  expressive  of  any  of  the  senses,  exccpL  thai  of 
sight,  govern  the  genitive  ;  as, 

ΑιΟΊίανομαι  ψο^ου.  I  hrar  a  noi-e. 

ΔϋΐίχΓ ■>>?  ψαυίιν  voijuvroff  uvo>ii;.     It  is  duntioroua  to  lonch  a  dle- 

oascd  person. 

*40.  Vorh.s  derived  fiorn  comparafires,  or  in  v.  hii  h  the  idea 
of  comparison  i.-i  involved,  together  with  many  verbe  coniing 
from  noif'ti!,  and  eipiivalenl  in  meaning  to  ihc  piiuiiiivc  with 
the  substantive  verb,  retpiire  the  genitive  ;  as, 

'Jlrracitti  rivij.  To  be  inf.^rior  to  any  ono. 

*ϊ(Ττ£?*ιί•έ  τγ.ς  μΜ-χτ,ς.  He  arrived  aficv  the  battle. 

1Τί^ΐ:(Τ-ι  ηλ)  ων  ^υναίχων.  She  excels  other  women. 

ETj^avvci'j  KoPivioj.  He  was  kmg  of  (.'orinih. 

*41.  The  genitive  is  put  wi'h  verbs  of  all  kinds,  even  "ttith 
those  which  govern  iho  acc\i.«;iiive,  when  the  action  do«  not 
refer  to  the  w/njle  object,  but  only  tu  n part ;  as, 

Εθωχ«  3Ό»  rwv  ^pjj-xarujv,  I  gave  thee  of  my  wealth. 

Ιντέμον  rr,f  ^r,j.  They  laid  waste  a  pari  of  the 

country•. 
'*^\α\'τιχτ,ς  ίχ^ν  •7:";^ντ)ί.  Pos.^e.-ising  ο  portion  of  the  alt 

of  divination. 

42.  T-tfri,  f;ik<'n  for  ε^ω,  (ο  fiavc,  governs  the  dative  :  a?, 
V-iri  μοι  ■χργ,ιχίτα.  1  have  riches. 

43.  All  verlM  put  acriuisliivtly,  i.  e.  verbs  of  ■■'^n-i,ig,  giring, 
using,  n'joiii/ig,  obfiji/i^',  ini.'tiiiig,  di^cotirsiiig,  fighting,  and  the 
hke.  v.-illi  their  coutrarie?,  govern  the  dative ;  as, 

Βοτ,ίί'ιν  ς•/)  ;rarfi'5i.  Τΰ  help  his  country. 

F.ixsiv  xoxoif.  To  yield  to  n^isfortune*'. 

Μαχ5ίι'αι  ηις  νοΚΒμκις,  To  encounter  with  the  eneftiy. 

Ilaf  «v/j^  a-jT(fi  covn.  Every  n^an  labours  for  hjin• 

pelf, 


OOVKRIXaiENT.  9 

*44.  The  verbs  siyai  and  yiyvs(f^at  are  often  accompanied 
by  a  participle  of  the  verb  " ίο  ioish"  "  ίο  hope"  arc.  in  the 
dative  ;  in  which  case  the  participle  onlv,  as  the  leading  idea, 
is  translated  bj  the  finite  verb ;  as, 

E*ei   ijio^evoftfiv   ijjxiv  o!  XojOi     Since  \\o  were  pleased  "witi^ 

γίγυναϋΐΜ.  thy  discourse. 

Njxia  -τβοίίεχομενΜ  r;v  ταύτα,        Nicias  exi^ected  these  things. 

45.  A  verb  signifying  actively  governs  the  accusative  ;  as. 

To'jTov  (fu  cl)i  ayaiJov  αν<5?α  τι-     Thou  honourest  him  as  a  gootl 
^9?.  nuuv 

*46.  The  Attics  frequently  make  verbs  of  hearing,  and 
sometimes  those  which  denote  the  operations  of  the  other 
senses,  govern  the  accusative  ;  as, 

Αχουω  raura,  I  hear  these  things. 

47.  Every  verb  may  take  an  accusative  of  a  ΰΟΓΓοβροηδ•- 
ing  noun ;  as, 

Δουλίυόΐν  ^ουλίιαν  ακίγ^ξαν.     ^       To  serve  a  base  slavery. 
Πολεμον  ιτολεμι^ίιν.  To  wage  war. 

*48.  Λ''erbs  of  accusing,  condemning,  and  acquitting,  with 
their  contraries,  take  after  them  the  accusative  of  the  person 
Aviih  the  genitive  of  the  thing  ;  as, 

TouTGu    Σωκ|ατηυ    ό    καΓηχο^ο^     The  accuser  blames  Socratea 

αιτιάται.  for  this. 

Γ^αφομκι  (Js  re-jTou.  1  accuse  thee  of  this. 

*49.  Some  verbs  of  accusing  and  condcnming  have,  on 
account  of  the  nature  of  their  composition,  the  person  in  the 
genitive,  and  the  crime  or  the  punishment  in  the  accusative ,  as, 

Jo-./  μω^ιαν  χατϊ3χο^ω.  I    accuse     thee    of     follj* — ^ 

(Charge  folly  against  thee.) 

*δΟ.  Verbs  of  comparing,  giving,  promising,  declaritig^  ana 
taking  aioay,  govern  the  dative  with  the  accusative ;  as, 

Δ05  μοι  ταύτα.  Give  me  these  things. 

Ίνιο'χνίομαι  tfoi  δέκα  τάλαντα.      I  promise  thee  ten  talents. 

51.  Verba  of  asking,  teaching,  doing  well  or  iU,  speaking 
well  or  ill,  taking  away,  putting  on  or  οβ,  cmicealing,  and  the 


10  COVEn.NMEN'T. 

like,  are  ioiivxl  wlih  two  .xccngatives,  the  one  of  the  person, 
the  other  of  the  thing  ;  or  with  one  accusative  and  an  adverb  ; 


OS. 


Χρη  aiTitv  ouf  dio'jf  α^αία.  "We    should  ask    good  thinge 

from  the  gotls. 
Αιταντα  Ci  όιόαξοααι.  I  will  leach  ihee  all  thinga. 

Arotfrsfii  μ,ί  χξτ,^ατα.  He   df^trives   me  of    iny    pro- 


Dcrtv. 


f  ASSIVE  V£RBa, 

52.  Passive  verbs  take  a  genitive,  of  the  agent,  after  them, 
vhich  is  governed  by  a  preposition  understood  or  expressed  ; 
ae, 

Jvai  *ρος  ίμων  XEiydrrfo.aoi  ;         Shall  I  be  left  by  you  also  V 
Φίλων  vixyvra)  φίλοι.  Friends  are  prevailed  ujx)n  by 

friends. 
Τίξος  diujv  ύ^μτ;μίν'.5.  Impelled  by  the  gods. 

53.  Someiiuies  passive  verbs  have  a  dative  of  the  agent 
after  them ;  &», 

To  μίγεβας  sxiivuj  των  νενζαγ-    The  greatness  of  bis  actions. 

^iVWV, 


iMPr.RSdNAi.  VF.nns. 

54.  An  inipcr.^onal  verb  govern.s  the  dative  ;  ni", 

Msyitfrov  a-jT'fi  soo^fv  £iv«i.  It  serm'-d  greatest  to  hirn. 

*55.  Χ?η  and  oji,  si;::nifving  it  behoveth^  are  followed  by  the 
accusative  wiih  tlio  intiniiivc  ;  as, 

'S.^r,  i(  ταύτα  τοί-ην.  It   behoveth   theo  to  ilo   ihoFG 

things, 

*ή6.    Afi,  sifrnifvincr  ητ<\<.<?/7»/  or  iravf^  μίλϊΐ,  μίτίθ'ΐΓΐ,  frpo(ir,xii^ 
ίία;;=ρ{ΐ,  (Kksix-t,  μίταμιλί•,  Γιιιρκ-ηιΐν  govern  the  datjvo  of  the 
pordon  with  iho  genitive  of  the  thing  ;  as, 
Δ(ι  οοΓω  χρημάτων.  He  has  need  of  money. 

Ewivwv  Toti  φαολοιρ  μϊ.-ίΐ'η.        The   wicked  have  α  share  of 

iho.-e  thuiire. 


GoSrEunMtUT.  It 


THE  INFINITIVE. 

*57.  The  infinitive  mood  is  governed  by  verbs,  pardcipki, 
(ind  adjectives ;  as, 

*0(i7tg  ξψ  ε«ΊΟυμε»  irsifasL•  vi-  \\'hoe;'er   desires    to  live,  let 

χαν.  him  try  to  conquer. 

Σιτευδων  ιτΧουτεη.  Desiring  to  be  rich. 

Aims  όξαν.  Frightful  to  behold, 

*58.  The  infinitive,  with  the  accusative  fi-equently  before 
it,  is  often  put  absokitcly,  being  preceded  by  the  particles  ώ^, 
ώίί-ί,  *piv,  αχ^ι,  μίχξΐ,  and  some  others,  either  expressed  or 
Understood ;  as, 

'Clg  e*os  si'TTStv.  So  to  speak. 

ΪΙξιν  ϋηλον  fivcti.  Before  it  is  evident. 

*-59.  The  infinitive  is  often  used  ellipticallv,  όξο.,  βλ$ιίε, 
tf^coiTs•!,  δοζ,  dsXw,  κέλίυω,  of  εύχομαι,  being  understood  to  govern 
it ;  as, 

Αυτοί  5VI  ίΤ^ωτοιΟΊ  iiayjiiai.  Do  thou    thj-self  fight  among 

the  first. 

60.  The  Greeks  use  μέλλω,  Avith  an  infinitive,  to  express 
the  future,  both  active  and  passive,  which  in  Latin  would  bo 
rendered  by  a  participle  of  the  future  and  the  verb  sum  ;  as, 

Πε^ι  wv  ίμεΐί  μελλετΐ  κ^ινειν.       Of  which  things  ye  are  about 

to  judge — {Judkaturi  esiis.) 


P.iRTIClPLES. 

61.  Participles  govern  the  case  of  their  ΟΛνη  verbs  ;  ae, 

Touj  vicoTi^ouff  Toiaura  τβη  *αι-     Instructin-g  the  younger  men 
δεοοντί?.  ift  such  manners. 

*62.  The  verbs  ειμί,  ταγχαν^^  ΰιτα^χω,  ^ινομκι,  χυ*ω,  εχω, 
φίανω,  λανθάνω,  and  some  others,  are  u.sed  Y\'ith  participles 
after  them,  which  require  to  be  renrlered,  in  Latin,  by  the 
raood  and  tei^e  of  the  verb  annexed,  wliile  the  verbs  them- 
selves are  most  generally  rendered  by  adverbs  ;  as, 

ΣίΜίξαη^ς  τύγχανε»  ?τε^»*«των.  Socrates  happens  to  be  walk- 
ing—(Ft/r/e  amhulat  So- 
crates.) 


a  cov.:r?iment. 

63.  Participles  are  often  used,  instead  of  the  infinitive,  after 
verbs  signifying  an  emotion  of  the  mind  ;  as, 

AyoTtJv  μί  (5ιαΓί>^κ  I  ίο  coniimies  to  love  me. 

Μί,ανημαι  τοίηίΤαί.  I  remember  that  I  did  it. 

*64.  The  participle  is  used  after  the  adjectives  ςαν.-^ο?, 
5ηλο5,  and  their  compounds,  after  αφαν»;^,  ετι^ϊονη?,  &c.  ;  and 
the  adjective  is  conunonl}'  rendered  in  English  by  its  adverb  ; 
αβ, 

Δηλοί  ην  ειηίνμων  μίν  rr'k'.j'roj     He    \vas    evidently    very    de 
»ίχυξως.  siro us  of  riches. 


THE  SUrri.VING  OF  GERUNDS  AND  SUtlNES. 

65.  The  infinitive  mood,  or  a  participle,  is  used  to  supply 
•he  place  of  geriuuls  and  supines  ;  a.--, 

K.-g  ro  ff'^actwras  Φ^\αγαγε>ν.  To  gather  the  soldiers  toge- 
ther. 

}'..ip-/eT-^.'j  a.T-.yj  ίκτη^Ταμην.  I    acquired    them   by   doing 

kindly. 

ricic'iv  ακίχρον.  Shameful  to  be  done. 

*6G.  \'cilial  adjectives  in  t^o.c,  are  frequonily  used  by  the 
'  rrtcks  w  hen  any  nccessitif  i.s  implied,  in  the  same  way  as 
the  future  participles  passive^  and  gerunds^  in  Latin,  and 
govrrn  the  dative  of  the  agei;•,  with  the  cases  of  their  own 
vcrbi? ;  a.'S, 

TfaTTtiv  μοι  ί^ιίτολην.  I  nuiFt  write  a  letter. 

»»μίλΓ,Γ£ον  (Tw  ccvTcn.  TliOM  mast  tako  euro  of  this. 


THE  CONSTRUCTION  ΟΓ  ClRCUMSTA.tCF.S. 

67.  'VY.fi  caup»\  manuJT,  or  ;r.3trun?.cnt,  ir  put  in  the  <ΐΗΐϊλ•ί> .; 
n?, 

KjOTti  ikr;^^a\cuc.  \\r  conqufT.-  by  Ftratagerr.P 

A^7.»faic  >Λ•γ•^α.ίΰΐ  μοχοι•,  και      Fight    with    .«iilver  wrapon?, 

•ovra  KfacrCii»  ί'-i-d  ihou  wdt  comiucr  all 

things 

BS.  The  q\iO£tion  xchither  ?  is   commonly  answered  by  fi; 
or  r^tfv.-.-.h  the  Kccusntivc  ;  where  f  by  ev  with  the  dtitivt 


GOVERNMENT.  13 

Vfhenee  ?  hy  tx  or  a*e  with  the  genitive ;  eind  hy  or  ikrougk 

tchai  place  I  by  ίια  wnth  the  genitive  ;  as, 

.Ev  'Ρωμ;?.  In  Rome. 

Eti  i-r)v  ΑνηοχΕ/αν.  To  Antioch. 

Ex,  or  αιτΌ  T*)5  "jroXswf.  From  the  city. 

Δία  /η?.  By  land. 

69.  Adverbs  in  ii  and  ίΊ  are  used  to  signify  at  a  plate ;  in 

if,  (Τε,  or  ^ε,  /ο  « />/«c«  ;  and  in  ^zv  and  ίε,  from  a  place ;  δβ  ie 
also  added  to  accusatives,  to  signify  ίο  a  place  ;  ae, 

ΚοξίνΜι  οικία  vaiwv.  Inhabiting  housas  at  Corinth. 

KXi<iirjucv  κνειλεΊο  χάλκοον  fy.     He  took  the  brazen  spear  from 

χοε.  the  tent. 

E/ju.1  Φ^ιηνίί.  I  will  go  to  Phthia. 

70.  The  distance  of  one  place  firom  another,  is  put  in  the 
accusative  ;  as, 

ΕφίβΌί  «τεχει,  τ^ιων  νι/χείων  όίο».     Ephesus  is  distant  three  days 

journey. 

71.  The  time  when  is  commonly  put  in  the  genitive,  sorne- 
timos  in  the  dative  ;  how  long,  in  the  accusative  ;  as, 

Ήμε^α^  χαι  vjxrog.  By  day  and  night. 

ΊΙμε^α  μια.  On  one  day. 

Οξγη    φιλουντων    ολίγον  Kf^jct     The  anger  of  those  who  love 
χ^ονον.  prevails  but  a  short  time. 

*72.  The  raaiicr  of  which  any  thing  is  made  is  put  in  the 
genitive  ;  as, 

Τον  διφξο/ STfoiritiiv  κίγνξ^ν  ξυ-     He  made  the  chariot  of  strong 
Xwv.  wood. 

*73.  The  price  or  measure  of  any  thing  is  put  in  the  ge- 
nitive ;  as, 

Δος  ουτον  'ημιν  δξα.χμ.•ης.  Give  him  to  us  for  a  drachma. 

λ>»δζΐΛζ  δ^δε-λκ  «••/)χεων.  A  statue  of  tw«lve  cubits. 

Β 


14  OOVERMMENT. 

'  ABSOLUTE  CASES. 

*74.  The  genitive  c?se  of  a  substantive  is  often  put  abso- 
lutely, the  former  substantive  being  understood  ;  as, 

Tnt  Πλα-uvo.c.  Tlie  v.jrks  of  Plato. 

Ολ^μ.ζιας  r,  AXi^avJ^oj.  Olyrnpias  the  mother  of  Alex- 

ander. 

*7  3.  The  Greek  writers  frequently  use  the  article  with  a 
noun  in  the  genitive,  governed  by  a  snbstajiiive  understood, 
by  way  of  periphrasis  for  the  noun  itself;  as, 

Τα  rr^  ofyr^g.  Anger. 

Τα  ττ,ς  Eii'jtifiug.  Experience. 

*76.  The  genitive  case  is  often  put  absolutely,  evixa,  χα^ιν, 
or  some  case  of  τις  or  hg  being  understood  ;  as, 

Eirff/vcj  τη?  φιλομοΰβΊα?.  I  commend  thee  for  thy  lovo 

of  music. 
Λέιλβίί  του  νου.  ΛVretched   on  accovmt  of  thy 

temper. 
Τούτων  γηαυ  μοι.  Become  one  of  these  for  me. 

ίΐίαν  Ttjv  (Tray^ujv.  There     were    some    of   the 

stakes. 

*77.  Exclamations  of  grief  or  surprise  aie  commonly  pui 
in  the  genitive    sometimes  in  the  accusative;  as, 

'ν•ης  μω^ια?.  AVhat  fully  ' 

Ai  τον  Λόωνιν.  Alas  !  Adonis  ! 

79.  The  dative  is  often  put  absolutely,  especially  after 
«LToi,  tfuv  being  understood  ;  as, 

Των  uvruv  εξγων  sxsmig.  Of  the  same  works  with  them. 

1  *    79    The  accusative  is  often   put  absolutely,  χατα  being 
.mderstood  ;  as, 

ΤΙατζίδα  'Γωμουο?.  By  country  a  Roman. 

ΜαΧα  βυμον  «χβλωίη.  lie  was  much  enraged  in  hi? 

mind. 

*.S0.  The  neuter  ό  often  stands  absolutely  at  tlie  begin- 
ning of  a  clause,  with  the  sense  of  ^tiod  aiiinct  ad  id,  quod^  a3 
the  Laiin  qi^od  ;  as, 


GOVERNMENT.  18 

Ό  5'  ί,^ηλωοΌί  τιμάς.  With  regard  to  that,  on  ac- 

count of  which  thou  enviest 
us. 

Ο  δε  (fv  igwraf.  With   respect  to  the  subject 

of  your  inquiry. 

*81.  A  participle  is  used  absolutely  with  a  noun  or  pronoun, 
most  commonly  in  the  genitive,  sometimes  in  the  dative,  and 
often  in  the  accusative,  especially  if  it  be  an  impersonal ;  in 
the  nominative  rarely  ;  as, 

Εμού  Ίταξοντος.  While  I  was  present. 

Πα^ιοντί  5*ιαυτω.  At  the  close  of  the  year. 

Λμφω  δ'  εξομ.$νω.  Both  sitting. 

Aeov  Ιτε^α.  When  other  things  agreed. 


*82.  Adverbs  are  joined  to  substantives,  adjectives,  verbs, 
participles,  and  other  adverbs  ;  as, 

Πολυ^ε  ijTTov,  Far  less  indeed. 

Βοτ^υδον  Ίτετονται.  They  fly  in  swarms. 

*83.    Adverbs  govern  the  same  case  as  the  adjectives, 
verbs,  &c.  whence  they  are  derived  ;  as, 

A|icjs  Xoyou.  Worthy  of  mention. 

Έιταξχουντωζ  μοι.  Sufficiently  for  me, 

84.  Adverbs  of  time,  place,  gi(a)Uity,  order,  exception,  and  the 
like,  govern  the  genitive  ;  as, 

Έ,γγυς  υΧος,  Near  the  sea. 

Π.-ί;α  διχΎΐς.  Contrary  to  justice. 

85.  Ntj,  and  αα,  govern  the  accusative  ;  άμα,  and  δμου,  the 
dative ;  as, 

Μα  Λια,  By  Jupiter. 

Άμα.  τω  ΰδατι.  Together  with  the  water. 

86.  Two  or  more  negatives  strengthen  the  negation ;  as, 

Ου  δυνατόν  οΐ/δε-τω'πΌτΗ  ουδέν  του-     It  is  impossible  ever  to  do  any 
των  *^αττειν.  of  these  things. 

*87.    But  if  the  two  negatives  belong   to  two  different 
verbs,  they  form  an  affirmative ;  as. 


IC  OOVERMMEMT. 

Owisv  li'riv  In  nx  \trsg-^iro.  He  promised  every  thing. 

Ov  JuvafAat  μη  /ϋ^ίμνηααι  avrov.      1  cannoi  but  remember  kini. 


PREPOSITIONS. 

83.  l^e  prejxjsit  10113  αντί,  ατβ,  ex  or  :ξ,  and  cio,  govorm 
the  g-eniiive ;  εν,  and  ίυν,  the  dative  ;  eij  of  «f,  fuid  ανα,  the 
accusative :  ai, 

r|  ΑτΤίΧί;^.  From  Attirn. 

K»  «K'^.  In  a  ho'ise. 

E;^  ίμί.  To  inc. 

*9<).  Ill  i}ie  L.nie  and  Doric  poiM.-,  ανα  .-«ometimes  govern• 
a  dative  cuoc,  denotini;  rkvation  or  upon  ;  as, 

Xjjiiryj  ανα  ίκτ,ί-τϊ^;.  Upon  a  golden  sceptre. 

X^.'ifaij  c'.v'  Ίίττη;.  Upon  golden  horses. 

*90.  The  par'iiclc  i;  is  often  put  ^viιh  the  accusative, 
generally  with  living  objocls,  very  seldom  with  iiiaiiimat• 
things,  the  prcpo-siiion  iij  being  understood  ;  as, 

Ώί  τον  ,βαβΊλβα.  To  the  king. 

9i.  Δία  and  ίτ5;  govern  the  genitive  or  accusative  ;  £ψ«?<, 
ετι,  Tc?!,  and  oirii,  the  genitive,  dative,  or  accusative ;  au, 

Δια  ίΤτοματο?,  or  οια  ΰΐιμσ..  In  the  mouth. 

Eir»  ίρονου.  Upon  a  throne. 

Eiri  i^ovQ'ji.  Uj)on  thrones. 

ϋφ'  icfTOj.  Upon  horseback. 

92.  Kara,  from  or  against,  commonly  governs  the  genitive ; 
ai  or  according  (o,  the  accu.sutive.  M^ra,  trith,  the  genitive,  or 
dative  ;  to  or  i^/if/•,  the  accu.sative.  Πα^α  and  «r^op,  /row,  the 
genitive ;  a(  or  w/M,  the  dative ;  /o,  UsiJe,  or  againit,  ih« 
accusative :  as, 

Kara  Tir^ijv.  From  the  rocks. 

Κότα  (5•.ναμ»ν.  According  to  my  power. 

Mora  φίλων.  With  friends. 

ΙΙα^α  xw^iov.  From  the  Lord. 

Π^ί  ^"υμναοΊίν.  To  school. 

*93.  Prepositions  are  often  used  as  adv<-ihs,  without  a  ca*« ; 
oepecially  sv  in  the  Ionic,  and  v^q(  i^  iU>;  Attic  dialect •  ai, 


GOVERNMENT.  \f 

Εν  <5s  Aetf/Sious  iiXf.  Among  others,  he  made  pii- 

soners  of  the  Lesbians. 
Ιϊξος  Ss  xat  ou  ϋιχα(ον.  Besides,  it  is  also  unjust. 

*94.  In  Ionic  writers,  prepositions  are  often  put  twice  ;■ 
once  without  a  case  adverbially,  and  again  with  a  case  or  in, 
tomposition  with  a  verb  ;  as, 

Ev  Ss  xat  fv  Msfj^t.  At  the  same  time  in  Memphie 

also. 
Av'  i'  05υ(ίενς  avufraro.  Up  arose  Ulysses. 

*95.  Prepositions  are  often  put  after  the  case  they  goVim, 
particularly  in  Ionic  and  Doric  writers,  and  in  the  Atti« 
poets  ;  but  in  the  Attic  prose  Λvriters,  only  ιτεξί  with  the 
g-enitive ;  as, 

JI  aXis  η  ε-ϊτι  ^η?.  Either  upon  sea  or  upon  lan4^ 

96.  A  preposition  often  governs  the  same  case,  in  conapor 
Rlion,  that  it  does  Λvi^hout  it ;  as, 

Ατψης  ξχχυλινίέται.  He  is  tossed  from  his  chariot. 

*97.  Prepositions,  in  composition,  have  in  general  thek 
original  signification.     The  compounds  of  αντί,  however,  hare 

mostly  the  signification  of  against ;  those  of  ανα,  ίο  ascend,  atwi 
those  of  χατα,  (ο  descend :  us,  ' 

Αντιταττειν.  To  array  against. 

AvTiXfyeiv.  To  contradict. 

Ανάβαιναν.  To  ascend. 

Ιίαταβαΐν-iv.  To  descend, 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

98.  The  conjunctiong  χαι,  τε,  δε,  άλλα,  (;«*ν,  ourg,  and  the 
like,  will  have  the  same  ca-se ;  and,  commonly,  the  same 
mood  and  tenee  after  them,  that  goes  before  them  ;  as, 

Παμιτολλου  όχλου  ovros,  χαι  {Αη     The    multitude    being    very 
f^cvTwv  CI  φαχωΛ.  great,    and    they    having 

nothing  to  eat. 
'Ew^xa  χαι  μίμ.αξτν^)\α.  I  have  seen  and  borne  wit- 

nesi. 

99.  Av,  2av,  ίΐτειίαν,  jvo,  οφζα,  Ό<τίως,  όταν,  Jiforav,  \a.v,  xiv,  and 
•jf ,  are,  for  the  most  part,  joined  with  the  subjuagiivfe  mood ; 

ftS, 

B2 


li  COVERNMKNT. 

Ίνα  yvu«.  That  yc  may  know. 

Kciv  «jxeivov  α^ωνιίωμαι.  Though  I  should  fight  better. 

100.    Av,  χάν,  ami  xc"v,  are  often  used  to  glre  a 

Bubjunctive  or  optative  meaning  to  the  other  mood.s ;  ns, 

Av  xo»  9υγχανιι  βα^ιλενς  ων.        Although  he  Avere  a  kijig. 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


CHAP.  I. 

Λ  verb  ag-rees  tcith  its  nominative  in  number  and  person. 


1.  I  AM  ΛνϊΠϊηρ-,  thoii  writest,  he 
honours,  ye  two  j;end.  they  two 
say,  we  strike,  yecive,  they  briiig•, 
he  wonders,  we  hear,  ihou  sufler- 
est,  ye  two  hinder,  they  two  phni- 
der,  they  rejoice. 

2.  I  M-as  digging•,  thou  Avast 
laughing,  he  was  hoping,  Ave  were 
(ringing,  they  were  huilding,  ye 
Avere  seeing,  they  two  were  weep- 
ing, I  Avas  conjecturing,  ye  two 
were  finding, .he  Avas  corning,  they 
v/ere  taking  awaj',  thou  wast  car- 
lying  out,  I  was  celebrating  a  fes- 
tival, they  were  pushing. 

3.  Ye  two  shall  sow.  I  shall 
uuurish,  they  shall  nm,  he  shall 
breathe,  thou  shalt  break;  we  shall 
cut,  I  shall  kindle,  they  two  shall 
praise,  ye  shall  suffice,  they  shall 
neglect,  he  shall  cause  to  wander, 
they  shall  sail,  I  shall  accomplish, 
ihou  shall  live,  we  shall  swirn,  ye 
fchall  tremble,  they  two  shall  cry 
aloud,  it  shall*^'t,  ye  shall  bum, 
thou  sha^t  spin,  we  shall  bind. 


Εόελω,     7fαφω^      «"'Wj 

ίωμ-ί,  φ3Ρ£ο,  όαυμαι^ω,  ακούω, 
ι:αΰ•χ^,  κωλύω,  ά^•τα(^ω, 
χαι^ω. 

Ο^υο'β'ω,  ^ίλαω,  ελιτι- 
ξω,  αοω,  οικοοομίω,  ό?αω, 
δο.χξυι>),  ειχβ^ω,  εύρκίχω, 
ίκο.νω,  αφαίξίω,  εκφέρω,  ίο^ 
Ttt^oj,  ωέεω. 


Στείλω,  τ^εφω,"  τ^εχω, 
*νεω,  o.yu,  τέμνω,  cvcw, 
β(νεω,  ο,ξχεω,  vuCt(x^w, 
ΊτΧαξ^^,  *λεω,  avj-w,  ^c/w, 
νεω,  τ-ρω,  κ^αξω,  ά^μο^ω, 
καίω,  νεω,  δεω. 


20 


GRELE  EXERCISEJS. 


4.  Thou  wilt  honour,  they  will 
phow,  it  will  burn,  we  will  hide, 
t.hey  will  dig•,  ye  two  will  leave,  he 
will  run,  they  two  will  fold,  they 
Λπΐΐ  eat,  I  Λ\'ϋ1  cause  to  cease,  thou 
wilt  owe,  Λνβ  will  seize,  they  will 
do,  ye  will  say. 

5.  I  feared,  they  taught,  he  pro• 
phesied,  ye  two  turned,  he  show- 
ed, they  gave,  I  brought,  ye  pol- 
luted, they  two  sent,  we  remained, 
he  judged,  I  conjectured,  ye  built, 
they  placed,  he  assigned,  we  sig- 
nified, it  broke,  ye  two  permitted, 
I  entertained,  ho  consumed,  I 
troubleil,  we  encamped,  they  were 
unfortunate,  we  were  well  pleased, 
thou  wast  offended,  he  condemned. 

6.  I  did  run,  they  two  did  strike, 
he  did  come,  ye  did  receive,  they 
did  learn,  ho  did  cause  to  cease, 
we  did  injure,  they  died,  ye  two 
ilid  give,  he  did  see,  I  did  cast, 
they  two  did  bury,  thou  didst  say, 
we  did  flee,  he  did  eat,  ye  two  did 
fold,  they  did  show. 

7.  Ye  have  laboured,  they  have 
ktkon,  I  have  guarded,  thou  hast 
^ignifitxl,  he  has  sworn  fal.-^ely,  ye 
two  have  seen,  thou  hast  got,  ye 
two  have  honoured,  Λνο  have 
?poken,  thou  hast  shown,  I  have 
feart»!. 

8.  He  had  struck,  ye  two  h;^^ 
composeti,  we  had  known,  ihey 
hud  overcome,  they  two  had  wril- 
ien,  I  had  taken. 


rvjui,  ς-ΡΕίτω,  φαιν6^',  6>ύ'^μι, 
φ£^ω,  μια»νω,  τιμβ-ω,  μίν^•, 
χρινω,  αχαζω,  οιχούοα•*•, 
ΐίΤτημι,  vίμw,C'r,μαιvl>;,α7i.', 
£αω,  ftfTiaw,  avaXtffxw,  ί.«- 

T\j-/Bu,  i-jaPiO'TiUJ,  u„Ca»ii- 
T»w,  χαΓαϋΐαίτα^'. 


Τ«χ'*•,  Γν«τ:,;,  ί^χρμ«;, 
λααρανω,  ^.oviavj,',  la.i•, 
SXa-KTU,  aToJvTiffxi.',  otOu- 

φξαξω,  φε-^γω,  r^w^w,  τλί- 


JTovi'jj,  αΙ»ίω,  ς5^λα<Γ<'α*5 
ίτίμαιν*),     irioPXfi»••,     ifOi«», 

\ω,   QelUUi. 


'>". 


MIDDLE, 


1.  'riiou  nppcarest,  he  turns 
himself,  we  cease,  ye  contend  lo- 
jretber,  they  fear,  ί  go,  they  two 
bihie,  )■*  two  taatc,  wc  an<wcr. 


Φαίνω,     r^irw,     «aiu, 
ανιθ•ί•ΐ)μι,  f^u,  a-Tw^vw. 


GREEK  EXEUCISES. 


21 


2.  I  Λνα3  enduring•,  ye  two  were 
hurtina;  yourselves,  he  was  accus- 
ing•, thou  Λ\\ΐ3ΐ  obeying,  ye  were 
*;tanding,  they  were  on  their  guard, 
wc  were  departing,  ye  vrere  deli- 
berating. 

3.  He  shall  receive,  thou  shall 
mourn,  ye  sluiU  reverence,  they 
i?hall  touch,  I  .«hall  lie  down,  we 
shall  prepare  ourselves,  thou  shall 
endure. 

4.  Ye  two  ^\■ill  turn  yourielvep, 
I  will  drink,  they  will  strike  theni- 
selve.s,  he  will  hurl  himself. 

5.  They  desired,  he  hung  him- 
self, ye  mourned,  Λνβ  bathed,  I 
used,  they  consulted  together,  I 
began,  they  inspected  the  entrails, 
he  borrowed,  ye  two  remembered, 
they  two  clothed  themselves. 

6.  We  tv.'O  did  place  ourselves, 
ye  two  did  fight  together,  I  did 
give,  ye  were. 

7.  I  have  confided,  we  have 
escaped,  ye  have  appeared,  they 
have  sown,  thou  hast  lain  con- 
cealed, he  has  suff"ered,  the}'  have 
Btruck  themselves,  I  have  hurt  ni}•- 
self 

8.  Fie  had  heard,  I  had  come, 
they  had  left,  we  had  said,  ye  had 
cried  aloud. 


φω,  Tetdcj,   ί(ίϊ•η_αι,  φυ>Λ(ί- 
Cu,  wsaWu.ffCu,  φ?αι?ω. 


Λίχβμαι,   χοττω,   εντζί- 
τίω,   άττω,  xsijxat,    ι:αρα^- 


βΧο•.-τ<ΐω, 

Οξίγω,  wea.'yyru,  χοττω, 


μι,  ^Ίνο,ααι. 

ΙΙε(/)ω,  φε•ογω,  φαίνω, 
fftrsi^oi,  λανθάνω,  •ταίΤ'χω, 
τυ•π••τω,  /3Xa5i7w. 


Ακούω,    £^ομα(,  Xsierw, 
Χεγω,  χξαζω. 


PASSIVE. 


1.  They  are  named,  he  is  main- 
tained, we  are  pleased,  they  two 
are  hindered,  thoiFfPrl  admired,  I 
am  called. 

2.  Tliey  were  assembled,  I  was 
compelled,  ke  was  struck,  wj  were 
driven,  ye  two  were  opposed,  they 
were  drawn  up. 


Ονομάζω,  c^fqjw,  £υφ^€ϋ• 
νω,  xuX'uw,  όα-^μκι^ω,  χα- 
λίω. 

Συνα^είΡω,     αναγχαζα, 

tfuvTaTTW. 


i2 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


3.  I  .^hall  bo  reveroncetl,  it  shall 
loosed,  they   shall   be   praised, 

.ju  shall  be  loved,  he  shall  be 
•nt,  .we  shall• be  honoured,  it  shall 
;  completed,  they  shall  be  found, 
e  shall  be  punished. 

4.  Ye  will  be  hurt,  he  will  be 
•eaten,  we  will  be  delivered,  thou 
"ill  be  turned. 

5.  I  was  blinded,  he  was  lulled 
to  sleep,  they  were  found,  we  were 
persuaded,  ye  two  were  sent,  it 
was  said,  they  were  strengthened, 
tiicy  two  were  loved,  thou  wast 
deliditod. 

6.  1  was  glad,  ho  was  corrupt- 
ed, they  were  struck  with  fear,  we 
were  sent,  ye  wvre  dismissed,  they 
two  were  buried. 

7.  I  have  been  persuaded,  it  has 
been  written,  thou  hast  been  main- 
tained, 3-e  two  have  been  struck, 
I  possess,  it  has  been  decreed,  we 
have  been  cast  out,  it  has  been 
consulted,  he  has  been  bruised. 

8.  He  had  been  prepareil,  it  had 
been  done,  they  had  been  judg■^d, 
he  had  been  honoiued,  1  was  dis- 
turbed, he  was  buried. 

9.  He  shall  roumin  enrolled,  it 
will  be  mixed,  thou  shall  possess, 
it  shall  instiintly  be  done,  they  shall 
instantly  be  biuietl. 


AtiiofMu,  λυω,  αινίω,  φι- 
λεω,  (Ττίλλω,  τιω,  τελβω, 
ίίξΐίχω,  χολαζω. 


Β>.αττω,  «■ληβ'ο'ω,  οταλ- 
Xatfrfcj,  τξί'ζω. 

Τυφλοω,  κοιμαω,  εύ^ιβ*. 
χω,  ΐΓϊ'ιίω,  (Ττίλλω,  Χεγω, 
^uvvyixi,  φιλϊω,  >;ύω. 


ΧαίΡω,  ίιαφίίΐ^ω,  εχ- 
ifXritfiTc,;,  ίτελλω,  αίΓολ-" 
Xaffdu,  ίατς-ω. 

ITsiicj,  γξαζ:ω,  τξεφω, 
τυΐΓτω,  χταο,ααι,  χυ^οω, 
avo^hiTTU,    /3ουλ?υω,    τζι- 


Τίαξα'ίχίυαξω,  τ^αο'ο'ω,         4 
χ^ινω,     τιμάω,      ταζαϋ^^ 

Υ.γγζσζι>3.,  μι^'νυμι,  xra.• 


PKOMISCLOrS  K.\A3IPLE9. 


1.  We  convict,  let  him  remain,  I 
was  sufFerinir, about  to  put  to  death, 
he  should  have  been  found,  tht>y 
made  an  incur.-ion,  having  left,  to  be 
about  to  announce,  thou  hasl  pro- 
tected and  dost  still  protect,  let 
mc  see,  thou  mi^^'est  become,  they 
might  wage  war,  I  will  get  myself 
instructed,  having  ])ersuade(l,  to 
call  out,  ye  had  sold,  wc  may  guard. 


Ελε^'χω,  μένω,  «σ,α-χω, 
ΟίτοχΓϊινω,  εύίΐίχω,*  ti<f- 
ΐδαλλω,"  Χίιπω,"  αγγεΧΚυ, 
αμφ"ί€οΛω,  ειίω,*""  ^ινο,ααι, 
τολΕμεω,  όιοαίχω,™  ιτίΐίω, 
αναχροξω,  ιτιτ^αίχω,  <pj- 
λοο'σ'ω. 


ϋκεεκ  exerciser. 


23 


2.  Thou  hast  heard,  having  said, 
about  to  say,  they  had  learned,  he 
was  teaching•,  he  may  be  saved,  I 
wrote,  I  have  Avritten,  the  plaintiff, 
the  defendant,  they  two  may  wish, 
we  liave  admired  and  do  still  ad- 
mire, to  be  about  to  announce,  he 
may  send,  having  been  accustom- 
ed, we  left,  I  would  be  ashamed, 
begone  ye,  let  us  fight,  may  they 
perish. 

3.  Thou  shouldest  have  distin- 
guished, the}'  may  have  been  slan- 
dered, let  us  save  ourselves,  to  have 
announced,  they  should  choose, 
being  about  to  find,  I  might  have 
been  remembered,  he  shall  in- 
standy  be  punished,  let  them  be 
cast  away,  to  have  sinned,  they 
h'ul  been  maintained,  they  were 
contented,  he  Λνϋΐ  be  taken,  about 
to  descend,  they  were  broken,  to 
have  been  hiu't,  they  should  choose, 
having  perceived,  he  Avent  up.  they 
were  advancing. 

4.  To  conquer,  they  were  rush- 
ing, loving,  do  thou  speak  out,  I 
sliould  hunt,  they  were  seen,  we 
may  acquire,  being  about  to  ac- 
cuse, they  were  praising,  thou 
mayest  croAvn,  the}'  grve,  think 
yourself  deserving,  having  been 
consecrated,  thou  mayest  be  op- 
posed, they  would  fill,  let  him  re- 
store, they  have  suffered  a  loss. 

5.  He  fives,  they  were  rich,  ye 
.«ail  awa}',  they  dismissed,  he  might 
say.  they  knovv',  ye  two  blame,  do 
ihou  let  me  go,  it  was  broken  open, 
let  us  attack,  he  would  be  able, 
fhey  may  know,  do  thou  buy,  to 
be  filled,  to  gird  themselves,  we 
would  yield,  he  points  out  thou 
hast  placed,  we  have  stood. 


Αχουω,  Xsyij,  Xsj^u, 
μαν6α.νω,  otdarfxcj,  ίω^ω, 
γξαφω,  γξαφω,  Ό  όιωχω,Β  ό 
φ€υγω,^  /:?ουλομαι,  όαυμα- 

ξω,      λειτω,     αίίίχυνομαι, 
αταλλαιίίω,'"     μαχομα»,* 


<ίωζω,  αγγεΧΚω,^  αιξΒω, 
εύ^κΐκω,  μνσΜ,  ιτληοΌ'ω, 
wffoi^iiTTU,  αμα^τανω,,  τξί• 
φι;,  apxsij,  αΧκίχω,  χατα- 
/Ηκινω,  ^ησ'ο'ω,  β'Κα.ΐίτω, 
uifisu,  αΐ(!βανομαι,°  αναβαι- 
vu,^  εξελαυνω. 


ISixau,  ό^,ααω,  αγα<χαω, 
χαταυδαω,  6'ηξαω,  ό^αω, 
κταομαί,    εγχαΧε•^,   αινεαϊ, 

ξο^},     εναν-ιοω,      τληροω, 
αιτοδιδωμι,  ^ημιοω. 


ZaWjffXovTSijj  αιτοτλεω, 
ας/ΐνιμι,  φημι,  ιίημι,  αιηα- 
ομαι,  μείιημι,®  αναξ^τ,γνι- 
μι,  ετιτιίημι,'"  ίυναμσι, 
ειτκίταμ,αι,.ιτξιαμαι,  εμτι*- 
λ»;μ»,  ^ωννυω,•"  υ^ιημι," 
ενιδειχνυμ,ι,  τιόημ»,  Ία-ημι. 


34 


CREEK  EXLRCISCe. 


β.  Xerxes  was  fleparlinrr,  Xe-  Βερξγ,ς    arf^yj^^t'^,  £i- 

nias  and  Pasioh  have  left  us,  Ilium  νιας   xut    IlaCiwv    avoXn- 

was    taken,    Joseph  was  greatly  -τω,"'  IXiwv  aXjcxw,*  Ιωδ'ηο 

moved  and  wept,  let  the  men  go^  •rafa.dS'J'  xai  ν^^ι•^,^  ανη^ 

Philip    had    COriquered,     Mucius  co^euuj,'"  «tiXjTc&i   νιχαω, 

confessed  who  he  was.  Darius  was  Mojxioj    ομολοχε^    ίς   κις 

besieging,  the  king  was  sick,  hear  ίίμι,  Aapfiog  co>jo^xcw,  βα^ 


mc  my  friends. 

7.  And  God  said,  Let  there  be 
light ;  Take,  cat,  this  is  my  body  ; 
and  Virtue  having  interrupted  her, 
said ;  be  thou  Avell  assured  that 
ι  hey  have  escaped  ;  I  .should  be 
reluctant  and  afraid  ;  Cyrus  was 
in  grout  perplexity. 


Και  fci;  ''  Θεο5  ^ινομα»' 
φωί,  λα.α/3ανω'  φαχυ  οί- 
τος  Είμι  δ  fixeg  (ί•^μα,  χαι  ό 
Α^ίτη  υτολαμ,βανοά'^  stu;, 
Γ»;  κΓημί  ότι  a-sO^iivyw,  ex- 
νΣω  αν  χαι  φοβίω,"*  «  οί 
Κυ^ο5  αιτο^εω.  ^ 


8.  Scribebam,  noverunt,  pugnabo,  timorc,•"  sede,  amavoram, 
percutietur,  cicidere,  currebam,  venisti,  accipiat,  puguiurem^, 
niagnificetur,  absurnptus  erat,  iiritur,  exisliuiabat,  cecinere, 
revocabo,  lecti  sunt,  convocantur,  potcrii,  veniamus,  \Tvere, 
parantur,  fugiebant,  ceperunt. 

9.  (irieci  pervenenuit,  inilites  profecti  stmt,  castra  locan- 
tur,  lex  erit,  nonnulli  aiunt,  Ari.stides  interrogabat,  Medea 
abut,  currus  ferebantur,  hostes  aderant,  avis  avolat.  majorbs 
videntur,  filius  etabat,  corona  abjicitur,  voo  nilimiiii,  abcal 
pater.  • 


CHAP.  11. 


.Λ/fjeciives,  adjective  pronouns  and  pariicijiks,  agree  u-ith  ihcir 
respective  substantives^  in  gentler ^  number,  and  case. 


1  NARROW  roads,  cities  ΟΤ'Τ- 
tiinied,  very  high  mountains,  these 
uationR.  a  handsome  youth,  pood 
»nen,  of  flyiag  Foldiers,  Ο  unfor- 
lunatc  AdoiiLs  !  of  ewift  steed-^^,  to 
inj»ole.nt  men,  yc  injured  children, 
i\\\  those   tilings,   whatever  bcne- 


IrrJog  Όδος,  coXij  ovaC- 

cog  ΐ6νος,  νεανιας  xoXcj,* 
α'.ηξ  a^aucc,"  φίυ^ων  (ίτζα- . 
TiijD;?:,  AOijvig  iuiflOracc, 
uxvro-jg  ΙττοίΓ,  avc'^c'-Tci 
ίιβ^ιαττ,;,  αϋίχον'μίνοί:  «-fx- 
vcv,  sxsivcc  ras,  1^τ>ς  ivfj- 


GRKEK  ExrncisEs. 


25 


2.  Martial  songs,  tlie  dark  night, 
nappier  men,  sweet  solitude,  two 
morose  men,  the  twelfth  woman, 
the  tenth  hour,  to  a  greater  man, 
of  a  laughing  woman,  to  a  right 
hand,  swift  ships,  to  us  two  still 
αΐΐλ'β,  of  the  bra\'est  soldiers,  two 
most  graceful  virgins. 

3.  Common  temples,  ΐΛνον/οπΙιν 
men,  of  a  holy  dav,  an  useful  man, 
to  two  black  eyes,  of  anjionourable 
fortune,  every  way,  true  horns,  to 
a  tender  heart,  more  persuasive 
r.rgumcnts,  they  two  being  young, 
to  you  being  wise,  unfading•  thanks, 
a  more  ample  way.  ■*• 

4.  Of  a  golden  sΛvord,  a  double 
cottage,  to  another  ship,  of  a  great- 
er father,  to  illiberal  men,  two 
beautiful  women,  Ο  immortal  vir- 
tue !  the  easiest  way,  of  senseless 
animals,  with  \vingect  words,  ruin- 
ous schemes,  mglorious  securitj'. 

5.  IF  Thou  wilt  be  a  very  happy- 
man  ;  good  men  profit,  but  bad 
men  hurt ;  the  Thebans  being  per- 
suaded, put  them,  to  flight;  the 
soldiers  raising  a  shout,  cheerfully 
ftjilowed  ;  all  having  laughed,  took 
courage  ;  in  a  short  time  all  were 
gone. 

6.  The  boat  was  already  crowd- 
ctl  ;  they  will  be  laughed  at ;  the 
ranks  lately  raised  were  moving 
on  ;  an  uncTisciphned  tongue  is  a 
most  bi-.neuil  pest ;  men,  when 
treated  unjustly,  are  more  angry 
liian  when  compelled  by  force. 

7.  Capita  multa,  rectre  rationi,  humanam  speciem,  maximas 
parti,  cranium  virile,  rex  potentissimus,  pars  decima,  milites 
redeuntes,  acies  insfructa,  urbs  opulenta  et  magna,  insidiai 
laanifestie,  hortus  amcenus  et  maximus,  mancipia  dirept», 
amieos  fidelee,  venientes  discipuli,  cogitantes  poetae. 


ΑξΎΪίος  «^μα,  νυζ  μίλα^ ,' 
ίοδαιμ-ων  ανηρ,  rjS-jg  ε^η,αια, 
iuCxoXog  ανΰζωτος,  δωδίχα.- 
7ος  γυνγ],  δίχατας  ύξα,  μέ- 
γας ανηρ,  yeXawv  ^υνη,  δί- 
ξιος  χει^,  οξύς  νανς,  εγω  ετ» 
ζαων,  αγαύος  οΊ-^ατιωτ/^, 
"χ^ΆΡΐίΐς  -ζαξύίνος. 

Ίεξον  'Μΐνοζ,•χξτ,<ϊτος  ανη^, 
7jix£pa  άγιος,  χ^ησ'το^  ανη^,» 
όμμα  μεΧας,  τύχη  τιμΎίεις, 
'ίτας  'οδ«ς,'^  χεξας  αληίηδ•, 
χεαξ  τζξψ,  iritfTixos  Xoyoj, 
νέος  ων  αυτό?,  tfu  ων  σΌφοί, 
χα^!5  αγ•ήξως,  αιτλους  Ιδοζ. 

X^uCeoc:  μάχαιρα,  (5ι*λους 
χκλυ?η,  \αυς  aXXoc:,  ητατ-ηζ 
μέγας,  ανεΧευ6εξος  ανί^ω- 
•sOff,  καλοί  γυντη,  αθάνατος 
ϋίξΐτ-η,  ^aoios  Όδος,  αφξων 
ζωον,  νττεξοεις  ε'κ'ος,  οΧοος 
/?ουλη,  αίφαλεια  «(Jo^oj. 

Ευδαίμων  ανόξω'Ζΰς  ειμί 
ο  αγαθός  ωφελεω  ό  δε  χα.χος 
/3λο"7Ττω,  Θ-η-αιος  •!;ει-ΐ6εις 
τξειτω,^  ο  ^τξατιωτης  αλα- 
λαι^ων  είΓομ.αι  νξοθνμος,ιίας 
γε\α<ίας  ευθυμεω,  βξο.-χ^ς 
χ^ονο£^  crag  αίταλλαο'Ο'ω."' 

Ήδΐ]  ίτληρηί  ειμι  το  ιτο^ί- 
μειον,  χαταγεΧαύτος  ειμι, 
νέον  (ίυνοξίνομενος  κινυμι™ 
ταζις,  α'λο\αΰτος  γ\ω<{<ία. 
ειμι  aid-χ^ξης  voCog,  αδικούμε. 
νος  α-νύξωνος  μάλλον  opy»- 
^ομα»  η  βιαζομ.ενος. 


C 


Μ 


cnr.EK  KXERCISE!». 


CHAP.  III. 


Λ  verb  signifying  actively  governs  the  accnsalive 
1.  Some  mdeed  buyin  preference, 


tfwse  corselets  trhich  are  variegated, 
and  those  which  are  overlaid  with 
gold. 

2.  Fear  the  Deity,  honour  your 
parents^  reverence  your  friends. 

3.  Two  certain  causes  Bccm  to 
<arc  given  birth  to  poetry. 

4.  Ο  wretched  creature,  vj/iat 
good  thing  have  you  in  you^  jios- 
Kcssion,  or  what  pleasure  do  you 
know  ? 

5.  Ifate^hose  that  fatter  as  tho.^e 
that  deceive  ;  for  both,  when  trust- 
ed, injure  those  who  trust  them. 

6.  Do  you  not  know,  that  the 
unjust  sL•U  not  infierit  the  hing- 
dom  ? 

7.  For  cither  time  consumes  or 
di.sease  impairs  beatify. 

8.  The  poets  know  that  this  is 
eo,  and  the  difference. 

9.  For  ye  have  the  poor  alway.s, 
but  ye  have  not  me  always. 

10.  I  did  one  work,  and  ye  all 
■WOuder. 

11.  Ti  For  it  has  not  s.'tcrs  by 
(lie  smith,  nor  arms  by  the  shoe- 
maker. 

12.  They  all  had  brazen  helmets 
and  purple  tunics,  and  greaves,  and 
their  s/iields  ic ell  polished. 

13.  And  thinkest  thou  this,  Ο 
man,  ύ\Ά\.  judgest  them  who  do  sucli 
things,  and  dost  the  samo,  that 
tiiou  shall  escape  the  judgmeiU  of 
tiod? 


Evioi  μίντο)  0  τοιχιλο^  xoi 

ωνίομαι. 

Ό  μίν  ίίο?  9oSiij,">  i  (5-: 
^ov;us  ί-ίμαω,  »  Of  φι>.»$ 
αιίχννβμ«ι. 

fi  τλν,μ^ν  Tij:  (fj  α^αίοί 
ίχω  η  Tig  jjiuc"'  siJtu  ;"»'' 


crfp  ό  ί^ατα.τσω,  αμ.^οτΒΡης 
γα.ζ  i:i3'TfjojP^  ό  ntfriuojff 
auixsij. 

II  ουχ  EiOfoi,'""'  in  aJixoff 
,βαίιλίια  ου  xλη|ovcμ5iJ ; 

Κάλλος Μ-ίν  j«»  r;  XJovci 
ava>.i3'xw^  τ,  νοίοίτμαξ'αινω.'' 

'Ort  oUT»f  oCtwj  fX".  '<ot* 
ό  Jiciipofrt  ι-ί^ίμι  ό  τοιητηί:. 

Ό  ίΓ7ωχοί  ^rt^  cavTcri 
εχο),  εχο)  us  i•  cavrcTS  εχυ. 

Έι;  f  ΡΛ  ον  β•6ΐεά),'  kai  ιτα^ 
6α.νμαζω. 

Οιδί  γαζ  0'Τ&5τ;μα  εχ'^ 
ϋια  ό  χαλχευ/,'  ouos  «■'■λα 
ίια  ό  (fx\jrivs.' 

Κχω  ό=  ίτας  y.ξcι.\•oc  χαλ- 
χεοί,  χαι  χκων  φοινίχο.?,  χαι 
χντ,μι;,  χαι  Ι  affrif  εχχεχα- 
όα^μενοίΤ. 

Λοχι^ομαι  6>  ο^τοζ,  u  α»- 
ίξ^τος,  ό  χπνωΒ  ό  J  Toieuroi; 
r.»u.S€!ji,Z  χαι  «oifuP  awrcr, 
in  (Ty  ii^sy^  u™  4  χριμα  i 
βίοί ; 


CREBK  EXERCISES. 


at 


14.  ITippocrati^  having•  cured 
many  discuses,  fell  sick  ami  died  ; 
the  Chaldeans  foretold  the  deaths 
of  man}',  thaii  fate  took  them  off 
also  ;  Alexander,  and  Pompey,  and 
Caius  Ciesar,  having  entirely  de^ 
strayed  lohole  cities  so  often,  and 
having  cut  off  many  myriads  of  horse 
and  foot  in  battle,  at  last  departed 
from  life  themselves. 


ιαομαι,*  νοοΉω,-^ο  αϊο5νη(Γ- 
χω,*'  ό  Χαλδαιο^  *ολυ5  6α- 
νατος  νξοα,γοξενω,^  είτα  χ«ι 
αυτός  ο  «Triir^wfASvev  χατα- 
λαμβανω."  ΑΧΒζανδξαζ^χαι 
Τίομ.'ΚΥίίος,  καί  Ταίος  Κ«ί- 
ααξ,  ίΧος  «Όλΐ5  α^ην  το- 
ΰα\ινα\ΐζ  αναίξίω,^  χα»  ίν 
ιταξαταζίς  ιτοΧνς  μυξίας  Jcr- 
<!(ίυξ  και  <:ίΐζος  καταχίΜΤτω," 
χαι   αυτοί  crori   ίξε^χομ»»' 

ό   /3l0ff.  S 

15.  Jusserunt  eos,  habebunt  ciu-rus,  mitlebant  nuncios, 
dicens  hffic,  adduxisse  obsides,  socios  metuere,  reliquerat  nul- 
lum, vera  locutus,  eosdem  honoravisti,  quos  tu  vides,  bene- 
volentiam  habe,  ndens  nlium,  dimiltes  nuncios,  mutaviese 
habitus. 


The  prepositions  αντί,  α^το,  εκ  or  εξ,  and  ιτξος,  govern  the  genitive  ; 
εν,  and  rfuv,  the  dative  ;  εις  or  ες,  and  ανα,  the  accusative. --^Jn 
the- Ionic  ayid  Doric  poets,  ανα  is  joined  with  a  dative.  ,  •    * 


1.  He  shall  reign  instead  of  him. 

2.  We  ought  to  choose  glory 
before  ricjies, 

3.  The,  king  alone  is  worth  ten 
thousand  inen. 

4.  It  is  a  fine  thing  to  receive 
immortal  glory,  in  exchange /or  a 
■mortal' body. 

5.  I  say  that  they  are  equally 
du=ilant/7-om  the  centre. 

6.  To  appoint  magistrates  by 
ihe  bean. 

7.  I  did  proceed,  and  I  am  come 
from  God;  for  I  have  not  come 
from  myself  but  he  sent  me. 


ΒαβΊλευω  ανη  ixfivof. 
^  AvTi   χ^ημα   αί^ίω""^  ,5. 
(5οξα  χ^η. 

Αντί  μύριοι  ϋ<Γξατ»>^•ηζ 
5ΐμί  βαϋχΚίνς.  ^  • 

Καλο^,  αντί  όνητοί  ίΤώμβ, 
αόανα,τος  ^οξα  αντιχαταλ- 
λασ'ίϊ'ω.'»^'' 

β  χεντ^ον.  ^ 

Α^χω*  awo  ό  χναμο^  χα- 
ίισ'τημιίψ 

Ε/ω  εχ  ί  Θγο5  εξε^ομαι 
χαι  f/xcj•  ου  ya^  α-πΌ  εμαντον 
εύχομαι,  άλλα  εκείνος  εχ« 
ccjrotfTEXXw, 


2S 


cnKKK  KXKRcisKS. 


8.  Nij^ht  uUervemd,  and  on  the 
next  day  we  came  to  the  assembly. 

9.  I  (lid  cntch  in  the  cave,  ha\  intj 
returned  from  the  feeding  of  my 
cattlo,  rnany  fellow.-t. 

10.  For  the  isaiie  of  thU  was  in 
the  Dciltj,  not  in  me. 

11.  Pleasure  is  rather  in  rest, 
than  in  motion. 

12.  lie  was  a  manolaycx  /rovt 
tht  beginning,  and  lie  ha.s  not  stood 
in  the  truth;  becaude  the  truih  i.s 
Jiot  in  him. 

13.  ^\'hon  he  went  to  the  Ver- 
sions. 

14.  The  just  n;an  tshall  li\'«  by 
faifh. 

15.  And  some  were  Grecian.^, 
of  those  who  went  up,  that  they 
n.igiil  wur-iliij)  in  tkcfcstiuul. 

16.  1Γ  It  contribufea^mufR 


1  .  .      ' 

0  \.i'7i-^fH)^  ίΐ;  0  ίχχκγ,'-ίια. 

KaTaXe:p.?avij  5v  ό  αν- 
^Γξo'J,  airo  ό  vo/ivj  αναίτξί- 
φ:,},^  -rroKug  ης. 

1>  ya^  0  ^io^  ό  οίτο; 
τίλος  £ιμι,  cjjc  εν  ίγω, 

'lli'jovr,  μάλλον  ίν  γ,';μ.ιι 
Γίμι,  τ,  cv  χ(ντ,(ΐΊί.   ^     . 

Exsivos  αν^ρ^τοχ-ονί);  ίίμι 

α-το  αξ-χΎ\,  χαι  ev  ό  αλν;^;ΐα 

ο^-χ^  Ιστημι•  όί-ί  αλr,c3£ια  o'jx 

Erti  εν  a-jrc?. 

Ore  ί\ζ  ΓΙ;|(3Ίτ;ί  αΓϊΐμ.•.'"" 

*0  Jixaicg  ίκ  ciiric  ^aw."* 

Κιμι  (5ί  7ΐί  'Κλλην,  εχ  ό 
ctvalftivijj's  Ίνα  Cr'jO'Atjviij' 
εν  ό  ΐο^Γί). 

Μ:/α  5s  (Τυμβαλλίο" 


/ο 

/^«>  learning  to  be  tempeeifo,#lj.it  ό'"^  μανίανού•"  ffoj^fovjuj  αν- 

they  sec  the  older  men  al.-o  living  «rof,  ότι  χαι  ό  τρεσ^υντ  ό;αο), 

temperately,  through  every  day.  avrx.   -πας   ήμε^α    Cij-^ovvj^ 

Jiaycj. 

17.  I  think  it  the  duty  of  a  rrood  Λιχαιοί:  τολι-η;?  x;ivi.', 

citizen,  to  choo.-c  the  safety  of  af-  ό  ό  τ^α^μα  ί^τη^ια,  ανη 


fairs,  ie/bri"  ^race  in  speaking. 


ό    y-.iyiJ   χα^'ί»    Κ'- 


^"=''• 


•  18.  They  foun<l  flic  loud  ihim- 
dering•  son  of  Saturn  iittiny  upon 
the  summit  oi  Garirarus. 

1 9.  Having  in  hi<i  hands  the  fillet 
of  the  far-daning  Apollo,  upon  a 
golden  scptre.* 

20.  Alii  vero,  constructo  rogo  ante  tumulos,  el  eflOs.'=a  fovea 
quadam,  adolentquc  sumjituosas  illas  caMia>!,  el  infiindunt 
vinuiit^nulsnmqiic  in  foceas. 

21.  Ego'^ineilfcpusieris  generis  princeps  cro,  rneumque  a  me 
genus  incipiet,  iQum  vero  in  le  dosinet. 


Γ,ό^ΐΛ'χω"  (V  ευ^υοψ  Kco- 
\ii''>r,S  ανα  Ι'αξγαξος  α.Λ'οζ 
ήμενο^.  • 

Στέμμα  τε  ν/ω  εν  ^ε;» 

ανα  tfxrjTT^ov. 


CREEK  EXERCISES. 


di 


CHAP.  V. 

A»a  and  ί*5ξ  govern  ike  genitive,  or  accusative  ;  αμφι,  etf,  ififi, 
cmd  ino,  ike  ge7iilive,  dative,  or  accusative. 


GENITIVE. 


1.  To  deliberate  by  night  and         Σχοίίω  Sia  νυζ  x«i  ■%«. 


day. 

2.  For  us  the  Deity  assumed 
human  nature. 

3.  On  the  third  day  sitting•  upon 
his  chariot,  he  was  prosecutin<j  his 
march. 

4.  Begin  therefore  from  small 
things ;  never  say  of  any  thing, 
that  I  lost  it,  but  that  I  restored  it. 

5.  For  a  good  work  we  stone 
thee  not. 

6.  Your  for^retfulnogs,  about  all 
things,  is  near ;  and  the  forgetful 
ncis  of  all,  aboiU  you,  is  near  also. 

7.  He  was  always  discoursing 
uhout  the  affairs  of  men  ;  consider- 
mg  what  was  pious,  what  impious  ; 
Avhat  honourable,  what  shameful  ; 
what  just,  what  unjust. 

8.  Concerning  the  power  of  let- 
lers  and  syllables,  and  harmony  and 
rhythm. 

9.  Not  to  be  corrupted  by  riches, 
by  fka&ures.  or  by  fear. 


Δια  iyu  ανί^ω!Τ0Γ•»}5  • 
©ios  ίφκίτημι,* 

Ό  is  r^iTog^  iiri  τε  • 
ά^(χα  χαότ,μα»  ο  νοζαα.  «"»(- 

Αζ•/ΐ3μ.(^^  τοιχα^ουν  α•?» 
ό  μιχ^ο;*  μη(5ί•7Γοτε  ετι  (*η- 
Jitj  ειτω,^  or»  ατβλλυμι  αν- 
TOS,  αλλΛ  OTJ  ατίίίίωμι. 

ITs^i  χαλο5  ΐζγ<ιν  ον  >J- 

E/ywff  μεν   J   οΌς,   «Ί^ 

AuToj:  (5ε  ίτε^ι  ο  «v5p«- 
iTcioj  a5J  (ίιαλε^ομαι•  Cxo- 
ιεω,  T(g°«  «νίΤεβη?,  rij  αίε. 
βη£•  <Γ)£  χαλοίτ,  rtf  airf^gog• 
TiS  itxaocr,  τ(5  άδικος. 

Πε^»  τε  ^^'αμμα  ίυναμις 
χαι  (ίνλλαβη,  χαι  αρμονία, 
xoj  ^υήμο?. 

Αναλωτο?  iifo  χ^ίΐμ«, 
χαι  ί'Το  ijJovTj,  χαι  iir«  φο. 

So;, 


DATIVE, 

1 .  Until  they  reduced  Thessaly 
under  Philip. 

2^  Dancing  to  flutes  and  pipes, 
and  to  the  so?wi?  of '  aH  kinds  of 
instruments, 

C2 


λίΤΤνοί  ίΤΟΙίί». 

Xofiuw  uiro  τε  αυλβί,  χαι 


30 


CREEK  EXERCISES. 


3.  Strip  ihie  man  also ;  for  thou 
sbult  see  many,  and  ridiculous 
things,  Ijing  hid  under  his  garment. 

4.  In  epic  poetry  then,  I,  for  my 
part,  admire  Homer  most ;  in  di- 
thyramhic  verse,  Melanippides ;  in 
tragedy^  Sophocles ;  in  statuary, 
i^olyclitus  ;  in  painting,  Zeuxis. 


5.  And  the  general  of  the  Lord 
Fay.s  to  Joshua,  loose  the  shoe  olf 
thy  feet,  for  the  place  upo7i  which 
thou  hast  now  stood,  on  it,  is  holy. 

6.  And  they  were  astonished  at 
his  doctrine,  for  he  was  teaching 
ihein,  as  one  having  power,  not  as 
ihc  scribes. 

7.  They  have  the  horses  tied  by 
the  feet  to  the  stalls ;  and  if  any 
one  would  go  against  them,  it  is  a 
labour  to  loose  tiie  hor.'ses  at  night, 
Λ  labour  to  put  on  the  bit,  a  labour 
k)  put  on  the  saddle,  a  labour  to 
put  on  the  coat  of  mail ;  and  it  is 
«ntirely  impossible,  that  they  hav- 
ing moiiited  on  the  horses,  could 
Jrivc  through  (he  camp 


AfoSvu^  xou  oirof  off- 
τομαί  γαξ  ToXyj,  xai  ye• 
Xoic?,    ύτο  ό   ϊ,αατιον  x^jir- 

E-ri  μεν  τοινυ»  ETOfP'-ff 
ιτοιηίΐί  ΌμηΡο$  syuyt  μα- 
λιοΓτα  ίαυμα(?α.',^  ίτι  0ί 
Λιύυοαμζος  Μελανιττιόηί 
ΣΤ»  ΰ;  'IVayctOia  Σοί;οχ>.ηί, 
ετι  δί  Ανΰκιαντοτοι.α  ΙΙο- 
Χοχλει-ος,  ετί  όε  Σο^^αφιο 

Και  y.syu  ό  αξ'χ^ίύτζα. 
ττ,γος  Κχιξιας  ιτξος  ir,!rcvc,» 
A'jtj  ό  ύίΓοϋημα  ό  roygS  a\i,S 
ό  γα-»  Toircg  tiri  Ός  νυν  ΐα^η. 
μι,  εη  αυτορ,ί  ίγιοζ  ειμί. 

Και  εχτληίο'ω^  iri  β 
ΰι5αχη  auTocr,  ειμί  γαξ  οι- 

ε^^ω,  ονχ  wj  ό  ^^αμμα- 
νίυς. 

Πούΐι^ωΡ''ε  }^•αρ  εχω  » 
ΙτίΓοί  εαι  ό  φάτνη•  χαι  έι 
τις  fffi  aorog'  ειμί,*  ε^ον 
μεν  νΐ'^?  λυοϋ'*^  Icrffoc,  cA. 
^,ν   (5s   -ζαλινοω,   ε^ον  os 

fTlCarliJ,     e^OV    t>:     fTliw- 

paxi^ij'"  avttoaivcj'P  ίί  ίτ» 
iffTog?  ίλαυνω^'  οια  C  (τΊ^σ- 
Toir£(5ov,C  Tavra^raffi»  αο.»- 
vaTCC. 


ACCUS.tTIVE, 

1 .  For  thoy  now  sui!;i)ccled  that 
lliey  were  going  ai^uinst  the  king. 


j'tottcwW'  yctf  r,ur,  (^i 
,CM(fiXfui  ειμί. 


And  imuMvliaitily  hn  was  un-  Και  cui'-jc  ov^t  αννχ^..'^^ 

^ble  to  contain  him^-elf,  but  having     κλλ'  ureu,  Όξω  I  α\τ>)ξ,  io- 


Kiid,  I  sec  the  man,  he  i  ashed  upon 
htri. 

'Λ.  Cyrus  sometimes  invited  a 
w  Luli;  conipj.ny  to  supper,  wiili  the 
w»ptnin. 


μι"'•  ίτι  at«-05. 

Καλεω  δΐ  sti  ositvov  « 
β  ταζία^χοί. 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


SI 


4.  For  he  knew  that  the  chief 
priests  had  dehvered  him  through 
envy. 

δ.  They  came,  not  on  account  of 
Jesus  alone,  but  that  they  might 
also  see  Lazarus. 

6.  But,  as  I  think,  you  did  not 
come  the  most  bcauliful  person, 
under  the  earth. 

7.  Priam  and  Panthous  and  Thy- 
moctes. 

8.  Many  of  the  Jews  had  come 
to  ΛIartha  and  Maria. 

9.  He  al?o  goes  out  to  assist, 
with  those  thai  are  about  him. 

10.  The  hunters,  those  who  stu- 
dy philosophu,  the  things  which 
belong  to  war,  the  occurrences  'at 
Lampsacus. 

11.  The  greater  number  at  \ά?•\. 
'-vere  spent  by  weakness ;  for  the 
disorrler  first  seated  in   the  head, 


Γινω^χω*  γαζ  ότι  δία 
φθονοί   ό    Αζχιίζόυς   ανηζ 

Ερχομαι,'  ου  Sict  ό  Ιη- 
οΌυί  fAovo.c,  άλλα  ίνα  χα»  β 

Αλλα  ουχί  και  Wo  ysa, 
ως  οιμαι,  χαλο5  $ξ-χ_ομσΑ. 

Όρ',  δί  αμφ»  Π^ιαμ,οί  χλι 

Πανίοο^  Υΐδΐ  Θυμοί rr/C. 

Πολυ^  SX  ο  Ιουδαης  α^/}- 
\ι.αλ  ττζο;  όΡ"'»  τεξί   Μαξία^ 
και  Μαξία. 

Εκ§ο•/)(3?ω  χα»  avTcf,  ί'Λ 
ό  ΤίΡΐ  auro^. 

'Ο  νίξΐ  ο  όΥΙξΛ,  ό  <ί*ί 
φιλο3Ό>ρ<α,  ό  αμφι  ό  ίΓ9>^- 
[χος,  ύ  'Τί'ίί'ΐ  Λαμψαχο^. 

Ό  ιτο\υς  ύίίΐείον  ώ;α  β 
αίόενίΐα  διaφόί^»'Ji''^  (3if|- 
ειμι'"*^  ^  α»  ΰια  νας  ό  (ίωμα,δ 


iaavine   begun   from  above,   went     avojJev   ««'χομαι,*  ό"^  ίν 
Lhroughout  the  whole  body. 


12.  *!  Tirnon  shp.ll  do  no  such 
ihui'^^aboHt  you  any  more,  for  the 
f^pade  has  compleiely  taught  him, 
t.^at  he  ought  to  choose  you  to 
};itnself,  before  poverty. 

13.  But  toll  thou  me,  how  the 
tilings  upon  earth  are,  and  what 
tii'^v  do  in  the  city. 

14.  And  the  others  who  fought 
'«viih  Darius  against  the  Scythians  ; 
because  the  whole  Persian  army 
was  in  their  poxoer,  to  destroy,  or  to 
tave  it. 


χίφαλη  -Γ^ωτον  ιϋίυωΡ'?  x*- 
χοί. 

0\ίδΐΐζ  STt  τοιούτος  i  Τι- 
μών ε^^α^ομαι  τίξι  <Τυ,• 
■τανυ  γαξ  υντος  a  όιχίλ/.α 
irai'>a^W/Sw,  ug  χ^η^  σ», 
αντί  ό  'Τ'ίνια,  ■η'^οαι^εω. 

Ατα.ρ  ίτω  iyu,  νως  ό 
its?  ysuS  εγω,  χαι  rtg 
TTOI.-W  iv  ό  "Τολι^. 

Και  ό  •  <ίύ(ίτί>ατενω"^^ 
ΛαξΒίος^  άλλο?  ετι  lruir,<;  =» 
ί<ΓΊ  οϋτοζ^  ό  πας  Πε^- 


ΟΊκο?  ΰτΡατια.  γίνομαι,''  όιαφ- 
Λίιρω,•'  και  τε^ιιτοιεΜ,* 

Ιδ.  Si  vero  nonnunquarn  invitatus  ad  cwnam  vellet  Acce- 
dere,  quod  operosissimum  est  plurimis,  cavere  scilicet,  ne  8Θ 
repleant  ultra  satietatem,  hoc  perquam  facile  cavebat.  ^ 


32 


GREEK  KXERCIS£>. 


16.  Sic  enim  vivis,   quo  pacto  quivis  sernis  sui  dentin* 
\ictitans,  non  manerei. 


CHAP.  VI. 


Κατά,  from  or  against,  commonly  governs  the  genitive;  at,  or 
according  to,  the  accusative.  Μετά,  with,  the  genitive  ur 
dative;  to,  or  nfler,  the  accusative.  Yloea  and  ιτξΐ•ς^  fiora,  ikt 
genitive;  ttt,  or  with,  the  dative ;  to,  be.-5ide,  or  against,  iiit 
accusative. 


1.  AsT)  in  no  long  time  the 
malady  »lo.scended  to  the  breast, 
inV/i  a  severe  cough. 

2.  For  I  was  reluming  homo 
possessing  great  praise  /rum  you^ 
ftiid  possessing,  through  you  also, 
glory  from  the  other  Greeks. 

3.  His  venerable  mother  heard 
liun  as  she  was  silling  with  her 
A^iiA  father. 

4.  He  went  to  Egypt  to  Amasis, 
and  also  to  Sardis  to  Cra:sus. 

5.  As  two  are  to  four^  50  arc 
four  to  eight. 

6.  Of  not  fewer  than  five  hun- 
dred, who  sailed  in  the  ship,  three 
Kith  (and)  thirty  only  were  saved. 

7.  It  was  terrible,  nof  according 
iu  wie  only  of  the  circMiiiilance.-'. 

8.  The  article  stands  with  a 
noun^  and  the  pronoun,  for  a  noun. 

9.  The  way  to  be  filled  is  much 
roore  simple  and  straight  wiih  w»', 
than  with  you. 

10.  H  ^'l/ta•  the  review^  desert- 
em  havin;^  come  frum  the  gpreai 


χατα?αινω'  ις  ό  tfri^si  « 
Tovoc,  μετά  βηξ  iCp^u-'is. 

K5  u  ixjv  yap  e^u  f<rai. 
voff  roX-uf  ir^og  ffu  acc»»- 
«Lij'"  (cixoJi,)  e^oj  Jj  ίια 
ffu,  xai  JTo  ό  άλλο;  Έλ>.ν 
ί^χ>.ίια. 

'0(3;  χλιο)  "Torvioj  μ^τι:^ 
/■^αα»?  τα;α  ταττ;?  ^fjcj». 

Es  AiyvTTOs  a-rixvic.uua 
τα'α  ΛμαυΊ;,  χαι  5i;  )«(  ίς 

Cwsg,  oi-TU  χαι  ό  τίίΓία»?ί 
νξος  OXTCJ. 

Ό  νλίω'ε  ίν  β  »α•.;, 
OUX  £).a}(ui;  η  Tcvraxotfiu, 
Tfiij  Tfoj  ό  Tfiaxovra  ιλ%. 
νον  (;ιαο'!/;,^ω.^ 

Λ5ΐνοί  ίίμι,  ct  λΛΓα  .'ν 
μονοί  ό  τ^α^μα.» 

Ό  αρί^ον  μί^α  ςνομα, 
χαι  ύ  αντωνιμια,  ανη  eic 
μα. 

Πολύ  άτλοοί  χαι  c.ii; 
nrafa  tju  ό  oJo;  ίίμι  ίτ» 
ίί  ίμτληίυ,^'^  τ;  να^α  (fu. 

Μίτα  <Je  ό  t^srotfij:,  ay- 
τομβλ»ί  ήχΜ    ιτα'ο  μί^"* 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


fiiii^,  gave»  iiifonnatioa  respecting 
tht'  kin<i-'s  army. 

11.  He  thoiiiiht  that  tho.se  wlv) 
inquired  sucli  tiling•?  from  the  gods, 
did  iuipiuus  thiuiT-. 

12.  And  flfttr  ihcm,  all  the  other 
arts  arc  the  third  rank,  ihu.-i  ar- 
ranged, according  In  (heir  parts,  hul 
they  all  look  to  thr,  God,  obeying 
the  couiiuou  cjiiiuiundy/'W/i  hua. 


Ό    ό    ToiouTos    '!<α.ζ(χ.     9 

Και  με-α  α-^τος^  6c,  ο 
TPjroj  -ragij  ό  λοι,το^  τεχν/] 
•rc.t:,  xrxru  μ.-^ο^  μεν,  ojroi 
ζοίΤμε^,ι^'^•  τα.ς'-ε  ίε  wpos 
ό  Θεοί  a-Tto^Xsvu,  κοινό?  ό 
■rrija  euro  J  ■r-OO'Ta^  μα  τϋ- 

Karc.  6  «jfciPa  αυτός  ίύος, 
ί/υνψοφεω  ό  οιτλον•  και  ύν• 
ναλαλα.ί^ω,"'  ό^μα:<;  εττι  ό 
'π-ολεμιο^.'' 


13.  AccorrJing  to  the  customs  icilh 
thfrnsrlres,  they  made  a  noi.sc  all 
together,  %vith  their  arms ;  and, 
having  shouted  together,  they 
rushed  against  the  enemies. 

14.  And  perhaps  Cyrus  was  too 
talkative,  because  he  was  obliged 
by  his  master  to  give  an  account 
of  the  things  which  he  did,  and  to 
receive  it  from  others,  when  he 
judged. 

15.  Cum  his  et  Cyrurn  contempiabere,  et  Priamum  et 
Dionysium.  ; 

16.  Ex  his  igitur  cupiebat  alirpiid  jam  neg'otiorum  adversus 
hostes  gerere. 

17.  Ego  vero  fretus  venio,  prirnnm  equidem  deis,  deinde 
legibus  ac  vobis,  existmians  nullum  apparatum  valere  apud 
vos,  plus  quam  leges  atque  jura. 


Και  ειμί  μεν  ι(>ως  Ό  Κυ- 
ξος  coXuXo^cc,<=  ότι  αΊΐαγ. 
>.u?u  uffo  ό  διδάσκαλος  και 
ίι<5ωμι  λο^Ό?  όί»  ντοιεω,^  και 
λαμβάνω  ττα^α  άλλο?  hifors 
διχαΡωΑ  -i 


CHAP.  VII. 

One  substantive  agrees  with  another,  signifying  the  same  thin^ 
in  case. 


1.  We  the  unworthy  servants.  E/w  ό  ίουλο?  ανα|ιοί. 

2.  Ο  friends,  Grecian  heroes,  ser-  ■    Ω  φιλοίτ,   τ,ξ'^ις  Aavaoc:, 
Vants  of  Ma-rs.  ίε^αττων  Α.-'η?. 

3.  Hath  one  Calchas  a  mophet  «^αλχα^    rii    ειχομαι" 
come  ?  μαντίί ; 


S4 


GREEK  EXERCieP-3. 


4.  I  am  a  relation  to  3-011,  being 
alio  myself  a  cur. 

5.  Of  God  the  Father  and  the 
Lord  Jesus  Chrint. 

6.  IT  And  a  certain  Phari?!fc  of 
the  council  rising  up,  named  Ga- 
fHaliel,  a  doctor  of  law,  ordered  them 
to  put  out  the  men  a  little  •A'hilc. 

7.  And  all  tho  other  men  pro- 
cUiming  him  their  benefactor,  a  man 
of  worth. 

8.  You  may  teach  the  son  of 
Croesus ;  for  I  wish  to  be  a  talker, 
and  not  α  statue. 

9.  For  Uumer,  relating  the 
wounds,     dissension.",      revenge?, 


χαι  αυτό;  ειμί. 

θ:05  τατηβ  χαι  Xj'ISC 
1η'ΙΌι•5  XPiff-ic:. 

Ανι-^τϊ-,/Λΐ'  ΰβ  <ης  ίχ  β 
rfuvi'Jpriu  Φ«<ΊθΌ(ΐθί:,  ονο,αα 
1  '«(χαλιηΧ,  vo;xjo/  oaffxc.  - 
Xcc,   x£>j:-'jcj  εξω  βζu'/^J   β 

Και  ό  aXkoi  irag  ονί^'^•. 
ffoff  avaxa>.fw  ό  fus^  sr/Tf, 
c  avv;p  ό  αγαόος. 

Ώ>α  ο'υ,''  ό  Ivfciii^  ^αις 
taiis'ju•^  ίγω  γαξ  ΧαΧΐί, 
ουχ  αΜδξιας  ι•.μ.ι  βουλομαι. 
Όαη^ος  γίχξ,  εγι^  ίοχεί.;, 
ίτα^αϋίίωμι  τ^αυ,αα  6;of, 
tears,  chains,  and  sufferings  of  (frutft;,  τι,αο>.'?ιον,  Jaxfj, 
every  kind,  of  the  gods,  seems  to  ί^ίμο?,  caiog  cαμφ•Jf^•of, 
me,  as  much  as  in  his  po\A-er,  to  ό  μεν  firi  ό  IXjcxogi''»  αν. 
have  made  the  men  who  fo\ight  at     ί?ωτο<Γ,  otfog""  ετ»  ό  ίυνα. 


Troy,  ^'J(ls,  and  the  ^oi/s,  men. 

10.  Thi-s  was  the  end,  Ο  Eche- 
crates,  of  our  friend,  a  man,  the 
beat  and  wisest  and  most  just. 


μίΓ,Ί  diog  irsiEio,   ό  6ΐος  5f, 
avijiJTor. 

'OJs  ό  TeXfjrr),  ω  Εχί- 
χξα,ιΤΎ,ς,   i  e.ra'|oj  ε^ω'*  γί- 
νομαι,*   αν»;»    aya6ci,     χα» 
φρονιμΟϊ,  χα*  iixaiof. 
11.  Venia,   Ο  Ajax,  ei  debetur,  si,  cum  cssct  homo,  rp- 
petivii   gloriam,  rem  (lulcissimam,  proj)ter  quam   ct  nostrum 
unn.squisquo   poriclilaii   sustiuct  ;   quandoquidem  wtiaui   vicU 
te,  el  hiu'C  apud  judices  Trojanos. 


CHAP    ΛΊΙΙ 

The  conjunctions,  και,  rs,  H?,  άλλα,  με\,  ou<ri,  and  the  Hie,  iriB 
have  the  siune  case ;  and,  co^nmonly,  the  same  mood  and  taiM 
after  them,  thai  ffoes  before  them. 


1.  Vk  have  loved  mo,  and  have  Εχω  ς;ίλεω,  χαι  ηί^ί^:.; 
heliwed  that  I  camoi  forth  from  iri  tju  «•α^α  ό  θί•»•  '^"• 
God,  χο."^^αί 


CnEKK  BXERCISES* 


35 


2.  Having  heard  these  things, 
and  havirig  given  and  received  fledg- 
es, they  departed. 

3.  I  both  see  and  know  that 
thou  raakest,  boik  racers,  and  wrest- 
le-rs,  and  boxers,  and  pancratiasts. 

4.  Deliberate  slowly,  but  execute 
promptly,  the  things  which  have 
appeared  unto  thee  proper  to  be 
done. 

5.  Love,  not  thf  immoderate  acqui- 
sUion.  hut  the  moderate  cnjoynient^  of 
present  good. 

6.  Ti  Cyrus  then  first  reviewed 
the  Barbarians,  (but  they  marched 
I'Y,  marshalled  by  troops  and  by 
€0!ripanies,)  and  next  the  Greeks. 

7.  For  I  am  persuaded,  that 
iifiihcr  death  nor  life,  nor  angels  nor 
l>rincipalities,  nor  things  present  nor 
(/n»gs  to  come,  nor  pujcers,  nor  he'ghth, 
nvr  depth,  nor  S^ny  thing  created,  can 
separate  us  from  the  love  of  God, 
which  Li  in  Chri.-it  Jesus. 


Axouij''  tlTu;^  και  ίίζία 
6ώ^μ.ι^  Mjii  λαμβάνω,'  ol^\  ^ 
λαυνω.  '  ^^.,.^ 

Ότι  μεν  τοιίω  (ϊ^ομίυρ  ίε 
και  ιταλαιίτη?,  χαι  ιτυχτηρ, 
χαι  Ίταγχξατια,ίίτγις,  ό^ω  τί 
και  siiiw.™'^ 

BouXedw™  μεν  βξα.δ>ι^ς, 
ετίτίλεω   δί  ταχέως  β  Οο- 

Α^^αίΤαω,  ο  ί'π'αξγ^ν 
ayaoOsjP'  μη  ό  ύίτε^βκλλων 
χτΎ}ΐίις,  άλλα  β  μετριβ^ 
ατολαυδΊ^. 

ΘεωΡίω^  OUV  ό  Κνξας 
T^wrov  μ£ν  Ι  ΒαξζαΡος,  (ί 
δε  '!rap2\uyvi,r  τετσ.γμίνας 
xar'  ιλγ]"  και  χατα  ra^ig^) 
είτα  δϊ  ό  Έλλην. 

ΐΐΐίόω  γαρ,  ότι  ούτε  /^κ- 
νατο5,  otTS  ι^ωη,  ουτί  α^- 
γεΧος,  ours  «^χ*1>  «"J'^ 
ενείίτς-ί^,  ούτε  μέλλων,  cure 
δυνο.μις,  ούτε  ύψωμα,  cuTs 
βα,&ας,  ο«τί  Tig  xriJig  έτε- 
^0?,  ίυναμαι  εχω  χυ?'^ω 
α-^Ό  ό  a.ya.c.r,  ό  Θεοί,  ό  ε» 
X^iifrog  I'lJo-jj. 

Oixia  yaP,  χαι  ovfoc:, 
χαι  avo^'arooov,  και  /iJoff- 
κημα,  χα»  CxiJCj,  χταομαί^ 
τε  ειτιμελο^ς  ό|αω  φημι,  χα* 
ό  ων  (ju^u  τεΐί'κω.°'ε 


12.  For  he  .^aid  that  he  saw 
them  both  carefully  acquiring  houses 
Λ/id  lands,  and  slaves  and  herds,  end 
eriicies  of  farniture,  and  striving 
to  preserve  their  present  posse.5- 
sioiis. 

13.  But  now,  the  finest  trage- 
dies are  composed  respecting  a  few 
ikn'.ilies,  as,  for  example,  respecting 
Ahmieon,  and  Ocdipts,  and  Orestes, 
■and  ^lelcager,  and  Thyestes,  and 
Telephus. 

14.  In  t^iis  enim  solis  silcntio  melior  est  oratio  ;  in  aiiis  voro 
taecrs  >«,uu.s  est  quwn  bqui. 


X-wV   it   "TTc^l    oXiyOJ  OiXKX 

b  καλο^  τ^α^ωΰια  (ΐΊιντιθτ;- 
μι,  οίον  ιτε^ι  Αλκμαιων," 
κκι  0^δi■!tQ\)ς,  χαι  Οζί(ίΤ7\ς^ 
χαι  Με\:αγξοζ,  χαι  Θνε<ί- 
τηί,  χαι  Τηλεφοί. 


36 


CRi:i;K  F.XtRCISE?. 


15    Q,ui  proximi  sunt  Deo,  ct  circa  eum  online  inelrucn, 
getmcira:,  arUkmUici^  philosophic  mcdici^  asiruuomi,  e{  gramniaiici. 


CHAP.  IX. 

Av,  εαν,  ε-τειϋαν,  ίνα,  ο?^α,   όιτω?,   όταν,   ororav,  χοίν,  χεν,  uf,  are, 

/or  the  ηίοϋΐ  part,  joined  tcitk  the-  subjunctive  mood. 
— Av,  xoiv,  ujid  χεν,  are  often  used  to  give  a  subjunctive  or  optative 

mcuninsr  to  the  other  moods. 


1.  IVhom  Wii  announce,  tcacR- 
insc  ΟΛχτν  man  in  all  wi.sdoni,  that 
toe  may  render  cverj•  man  perfect  ia 
Christ  Jcous. 

2.  I  ufUite  thco  to  V.iiv  of  me 
pold.triffl  bv  fire,  in  order  that  thou 
ma\jest  be  rich,  and  Avhite  srarmcntF, 
in  order  that  thou  maijcsi  clothe  th'j- 
self.  and  that  the  shame  of  thy 
nakedness  may  not  he  made  apparent. 

3.  For  if  oiilK-r  we  live,  v.-c  live 
\)nto  the  Lord,  or  if  we  die,  we  die 
υηΐο  the  Loiil. 

4.  When  then,  Ο  Atlv  nirin.=, 
when  will  ye  do  the  thin^^i  which 
it  behoves  you  to  do  ?  irhcncvtr 
any  thin_^  nun/  have  happfmd  ?  tcht/i- 
evcr  any  ncccisity  may  exist  ? 

5.  Hear,  ye  Trojant?,  Dardans, 
and  alliet,  that  1  may  utter  what 
(hing-s  my  eoul  in  my  bosoni 
jtrompts  me  (to  eay.) 

6.  Whenever.  Ο  Critobuhis,  thou 
tnayest  irish  lo  become  u  friend  to 
nny  one.  ν  ilt  thou  permit  mc  to 
•peak  aL'aiii.-.l  thee  unto  him  ? 

7.  Do  ilsou  tell  me,  in  ordu 
that  /,  haviiic^  roturn».d  home,  may 
^Idddin  the  old  blmd  monarcli. 

8.  Rut  if  uicy  ihould  not  give 


Ός  εγω  χαί-α^γε/.λω, 
OtSuffxu  "ΤΌ,ς  avd^ijyof  fv 
νας  ΰΌφι.7,  ίνα  'ταξκίττ,μΛ" 
ΓΤας    avi^ijio;    ΐΐΧ;ιζς    εν 

Συα'?οιλΓ•ν'ω  (f\,^  α^•ο- 
ra^y*  ittt?'  εγω  p^ufftov 
ίΓε'Γυ^αιμενο?  εχ  ιτυξ,  ίνα 
Ατλοϋτεω,*  χαι  ίμαη'.ν  λ5ν- 
xor,  ίνα  τε^^ι?«λλο),'°^  χω 
μη  φανε-•';:^*  ό  iu(iy{jvr,  6 
γνΐίνύττ,ς  tfj. 

F.av  r;  -,-κί»  ζ«<>),  £  Kt- 
ρ/οί"'  ^«iJ,  εαν  τί  ατοίνν,ί. 
XV,  ο  Kujfts**  α-τοίνηίχω. 

Ilcr'  ui)v,  ω  avr,^  A6r,- 
vojoj,  τότε  OS  χξη  ιτξα<ί- 
(Γω  ;  ετεΐίίαν  η;  γίνομαι  ;• 
exciJav  ανα^  λ/;  7ΐζ  ειμί  ; 

Κλι,μι,  T^iJ?,  XKi  Acfoa- 
νοί,  >]<5'  iTixov^o.f,  ος)^'  είτω, 
β  εχω"  ιΚ'μοί  ε-.(  σ-Γ,06;Ρ' 
χελει,ω. 

Όταν  ω  K^iTOcouXof  φι- 
?,cs  cig  ^ίνομοί*  ,βουλομαι, 
ίκω  f^u  ΧΛΤίιτΜ  C;-P  νξος 
α\ιτας  ; 

Λε^  W,*  ^εξί^ν  τυφλό?  Lg 
χατα  (iTej~r)i>^  ε^ομβι'  τίξ- 

Li    <5f    χί    μ-η    ϋιόνμι,*• 


>1 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


3T 


ese,  I  in  person  will  take  one  away 
fyt  myself. 

.  9.  ?r  Why  then  do  I  say  these 
ihings  ?  In  order  that  you  may 
perceive,  Ο  Athenians,  that  nothing 
»e  to  be  dreaded  b}'  you,  if  you  re- 
main upon  your  guard,  nor,  if  you 
ie  7iegligent,  proves  such  as  3'ou 
may  xcish  it  to  be. 

10.  These  are  the  things  which 
wc,  Ο  Athenians,  hare  been  able 
io  devise.  When  then  you  may 
have  decided  upon  the  opinions 
wliich  have  been  oflforcd,  decree 
whatsoever  things  may  please  you, 
in  order  thai  you  may  wage  war 
Vriih  Philip,  not  only  in  your  de- 
crees and  your  letters,  but  also  in 
your  actions. 

1 1 .  For  if  we  had  then  promptly 
eent  our  assistance  thither,  as  we 
decreed,  Philip  xcould  not  now  le 
disturbing  us. 

12.  If  Phcebus  Apollo  had  not 
.«ent  forth  the  noble  Agenor,  the 
Bons  of  the  Greeks  would  then  have 
taken  lofty-walied  Troy, 

13.  As  the  statuaries  now-a- 
days  gay  that  Deedalus  would  be 
iaughed  at. 

14.  But,  said  he,  if  thou  per- 
2civest  any  mode  of  obtaining  sup- 
plies that  could  even  originate  with 

15.  Lord,  hadst  thou  been  here. 


ζγω    δε 


x£v    «woj    αι^ο 


Tiff°  ουν  Ινεχα  ούτος  \εγω ; 
Ίνα  fiicj  Ο)  ανηρ  ASr^vaiog, 
ότιουδεις,  ούτε φυΧαττοΐί-ενος 
tfii<i  sCri  φοζε^ος,  ούτε  αν  ολί- 
γωξεω,  τοιουτοζ  ίι,α»  oiof  αν 
ffu  /δουλομοίί. 

Ό?  μ;ν  εγω  ω  αντ,ξ  Α4η- 
ναιος  δυναμαι  είξΐίϊχω,^  οΰτος 
ειμ»•  ειτειδαν  δε  ετιχείροτβ- 
ν*ω  ό  γνωμ-Ί],^  Ός  αν  <f\fi 
α^εβ'κο  χει^οτονεω/  Ινα  μ^ 
μόνον  εν  ό  ψήφισμα  χα»  h 
εΐΓκΤτολη  τΓολεμεω  ΦιλίίΤ. 
ητος,  άλλα  χαι  ό  εξγον. 


■  Ει  γα  ξ  τότε  εκεκίε  βοψ 
ίεω/  ώσιτε^  •ψηφιξω,'^^τ^ο- 
6υμως,  ουκ  αν  ενοχλ,εω-'»  νυν 
Syu^  Ό  ΦιλίΤβΌί. 

Ενθα  χεν  ΰψΐ'π'υλο^  T^ojij 
αΐ^εω^^  υίευ?  Λχαιο^,  ει  μη 
ΑίΓολλων  Φοιββ^  Αγψωζ 
iios  ανιτ)μι.* 

Ώ,ΰιτεξ  και  ό  Δαιίαλο^ 
φημι  ό  αν5?ιαντο•πΌΐθ5  vu« 
χαταγε^Μΐίτος  αν  ειμι.'^ 

Αταξ,  φημι,  tfu  ει  ενο^αω 
ης  "ϊτο^οί  και  αιτ'  εγω  αν 
τΐοίί^ινομαι/κ 

Kuficg  ει  ειμ»^  ΰδε,  ονκ 
αν  όνηο'κω''^  ό  αδελφός. 


my  brother  would  not  have  died. 

16.  Idcirco  et  legislator  primum  hoc  posuit  in  judicum 
iurejurando,  "  Sententiam  feram  secundum  leges  ;"  illud  nimi- 
Tum  bene  sciens,  quod,  cum  conservarentur  civitati  legeg, 
•ervatur  etiani  democraiia. 


D 


38 


GREEK  BXERCISBS. 


CHAP.    X. 

Subslantive  verbs,  verbs  passive  of  naming,  and  verbs  of  gesture, 
have  a  nomiimtivc  both  before  and  after  them,  belonging  to  tht 
tame  thins;. 


\ .  Wealth  is  the  minister  of  \-ice 
rather  than  of  virtue. 

2.  Leave  thou  public  employ- 
ments, not  richer,  but  more  honoured. 

3.  Small  changes  have  been  of- 
leniimes  the  causes  of  great  evil. 

4.  The  form  nf  government  i.s 
the  yiurse  of  men;  a  gooA  form, 
»f  virtuon.s  men  ;  but  the  contrary 
forni,  of  wicked  men. 

■5.  What  then  can  one  say,  Avhcn 
such  old  persons  are  lovers  of  life  ? 

6.  Be  such  to  thy  parents,  as 
tliou  wouldst  wisli  thine  own  chil- 
dren to  be  to  thee. 

7.  I  wish  it  would  come  to  pass, 
said  Araspas,  that  I  could  be  useful. 

8.  Gordian  was  proclaimed  em- 
peror, being  about  thkteea  years 
old. 

9.  1Γ  Virtue  as  it  seems,  must  be 
both  a  certain  sanitji,  and  beauty, 
and  good  habit  of  the  soul ;  but 
vice,  both  a  disease,  and  turpitude, 
and  infinnity. 

10.  And  then  to  leave  al!  tho.^e 
tliingr»,  lliat  thou  maj'cst  not  be 
east  in  bound,  like  sheep. 

1 1 .  Jim  I  not  free  ?  am  I  not 
an  apostle  ?  have  I  not  seen  Jesu.s 
•ur  Lord?  If  /  am  not  an  apostle 
to  others,  yet  doubtless  I  nui  to 
you ;  for  yo  are  the  seal  of  mino 


Πλουτοί  χαχια  μάλλον  ij 

χαλοκαχαί»α  ίΐτ/ΐΡΐττις  ειμί. 
Ex  xoivoj  sirttj-Ojia  αιταλ- 
λΛττω,™  μη  τλοοΟΊο?,  αλλ' 
ε^ΰοξος, 

ΤίοΧΧαχις  μίν^ορ  μΐταί- 
ταοΊ?  με^α^  χο,χος  Oi-ja 
γίνομαι. ^ 

Πολΐ75ια  «Γ^οφη  ovi^wcro; 
Είμι•  χαλοί  μ£ν,  αγα6ας'  ό 
6'  fyavrio.c,  xaxog.  * 

Ύις  ουν  αν  ης  "kij  u,^  Oft- 
ν  ε  ο  ~r,yjxi-j7og  φιλόζωο; 
£ΐμι  ; 

Ύοιουτος  γίνομαι  <ί'ι  « 
γονίυς,^  oioj  αν  εύχομαι* 
ν^ξι  δεαυτου  γίνομαι  'α  ύία^- 
TOU  iraij. 

Ει  γαρ  γίνομαι,*  φημι  ό 
AjaffTaf,  όη  eyu  αν  γίνο- 
μαι" χζ'τι'ϊιμ.ος. 

Τοξδιανος  irffi  ε^-οί"  "Το* 
J  ινομαΓ^  TfitfxaiJfxa  αχιτο• 
xparwf  αναίίίχνυμι.* 

ΑΡίτη  μεν  u;  ειχω."' 
ΰ^εια  «τε  τις  αν  ειμι,^^αι 
χαλλο?,  χαι  ευίξια  •^'''Χ'ϊ' 
χαχιο  ίε,  votfci:  τε,  χαι  aitf- 
χο(Γ,  χαι  αίίενεια. 

Και  «"{We  Tofc:  εχ-ινο;  αφιγ,- 
μι,  ίνα  μη  5iij"8  εμβάλλω,* 
ΰς  4  ίΓ^ο§α•τον. 

Οοχ  ειμί  ελενΰερβρ;  οι* 
ειμί  αΊτοίτολο?  ;  ονχι  Irjcfoii 
ο  Κυ^ιοί  ε}  0J  ό«αω  ;  Ει  αλ- 
λθ5  οΐίΧ  ειμί  ατο^Γολο^,  αλ- 
λά γ»  tfu  ειμΓ  ο  γα»  9φζα•^%ς 


CREEK  EXERCISES. 


39 


apostlcabip  ;  are  not  ye  my  loork  in     ο  εμ,ος  α-πΌ^τολη  Cw  ίίμι-  w 
the  Lord '?  .  t  εξγον  syuS  <!\i  si/jh  ev  K»^• 

12.  Ylic  familiaris  mens  crat  ab  juventute. 


CHAP.  XI. 

The  infinitives  of  suhsiantive  verbs,  such  as  είναι,  γηείόαι,  ^e. 
hare  the  same  case  after  ihe?n  that  goes  before  them-. 


1.  Dost  thou  think  that  Phi- 
dias is  a  bad  artist  % 

2.  Do  not  sucli  persons  as  these, 
seem  to  thee  to  be  troublesome 
friends  ? 

3.  You  see  how  nothing  hinders 
the  Scythian  Atiacharsis  to  be  ad- 
mired, and  called  a  wise  man. 

4.  The  name  "  boaster"  appears 
^tome,  to  He  upon  those  luho  pre- 
*  tend  to  be  richer  tlian  they  are,  and 
^^nm-e  valiant,  and  who  promise  to  do 

those  things  which  they  are  not  fit 
to  do. 

5.  IT  They  entreated  Cyrus  to 
be  as  eager  as  possible  for  the  war. 

6.  The  shortest,  and  safest,  and 
most  honourable  wa}',  is,  in  what- 
ever thing  thoii  wishest  to  seem  to 
be  good,  to  endeavour  lo  be  good 


φ£ΐ5ια?  οιομαι  χιχ^κος  ίι<Αΐ 

Oj  δοχεω  <Su  τοιβι» Toj  "/sir• 
"Κείίας  ψ\ος  ειμ» ; 

Σκυόηί  Α\α.•χαξ€ις  χαι  dau- 
μαι^ω,τε  xat  rfoipog  ονομαι^ω. 
Ό  μεν  άλαλων  zyu"-^  yt 
δοκεω  όνομα,  κειμαι*^  ΐ'ϋ  Ι'^ 
tf^otftfoiEw^^S  και  ■rXouo'tof 
ειμί  η  £/μι,  και  avigeio^,  και 
"ίοιίω'  Ις  μη  ικανοί  ίίμιι 
ΐι•η'ί(3'χνεομαι.& 

Ku^cj?  οεομαι,"  ώ?  ir^cdy• 
μο^  ciPoj ό  'ίολεμο? γίνομαι.* 
Σύντομος  τε,  και  αίφαλη?• , 
και  καλοί  όδο^  ό,  τι  (tfv)  αν 
/3ουλομαι  ίοκεω  aya^o^  ίιμί, 
COUTO  και  (ίε)  ^Ίνομαι^α^Λ- 
00J  *εΐ|αω."' 


ιη  It. 

7.  Mihi  videtur  injusius  esse,  a  quocunque  quispiam  bene» 
ficiis  affectus,  sive  amico  sive  hoste,  referre  gratiam  non  eni- 
titur. 


CHAP.  XII. 

Λ  preposition  often  governs  the  same  case  in  composition,  that 
it  does  loithotit  it. 

I.  I  W'lW  substitute  hl&ck  instead        Πετλο?    λευκός   μελαί 
f>f  white  robes.  ανταλλαττω.•" 


40 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


2.  Or  I  will  dismiss  you  both 
/rom  the  feast. 

3.  Now  I,  the  same  pcrioi),  am 
driven  from  mxj  cow}t)~y,  iik;lioiioured, 
and  miserable. 

4.  Tlien  thinking  hers•' If  wor- 
thy  to  command    the   rest,    (etiuid 

btfu>€.) 

5.  But  I  associate  loith  goda^  I 
eesociatc  ifith  men  thai  are  good. 

6.  I lavin;^ /•!-?«  through  pUasur'ia 
in  their  youth,  and  having  hi);ird- 
cd  up  iiiiacrica  for  their  old  age. 

7.  Ilcniernber,  that  if  you  abide 
in  the  same  things,  those  who  laugh 
against  you  at  first,  shall  adnjire 
3  ou  at  last ;  but  if  you  be  over- 
come by  them,  you  shall  receive 
double  ridicule. 

8.  There  is  also  another  virtue 
nearly  related  to  the  former  ones, 
which  they  call  Amplification. 

9.  His  venerable  nioiher  stood  by* 
him  as  ho  groaned  heavily. 

10.  Ti  He  himself,  among  the 
rest,  put  on  his  shining  armour, 
••xulting  that  he  excelled  among  all 
the  heroes. 

11.  The  island  extending  itsdf 
just  over  against  the  harbour,  and 
lying  near  it  makes  it  safe. 

12.  Those  who  are  ignorant  of 
wir^dom  and  virtue,  but  ,y>end  their 
wholi;  time  in  revels  and  the  like, 
«ink  downwards,  and  err  through 
life. 

13.  If  two  consonants  chaiico  to 
le  added  to  a  short  votuel,  they  will 
»i2ake  the  syllable  long. 

14.  Folly,  and  with  it  inconti- 
nence, are  joined  to  ric/us  and  j.>ow- 
trs,  ViXia  follow  toith  them. 


PI  ομφοί-ί^βί  α-»•«£μ- 
iru"'  ό  ί^μίΓοΤι,ν. 

Nov  άτιμος  α\,ΐ'^ς,  αχτξ^ 
ίξίλαυνω  "χβων. 

Τότε  οε  a^icw"'  r^'-itfr»!- 
μ*"  ό  αΚ}.ος. 

o'ijvs:jju  δε  uv  ^ujcsi  ό  α-,  α- 
6'.ς. 

Ό  μεν   r^oj;  ίν  ό  ν£οτ>;ς 

ύ  5ι^ζ'α;  ατοπίτ,μι."''' 

Μνκομσι,Ρ'  όη  £αν  μϊν 
εμμένω'  ο  αυτοί,  ό  yrtrw)  ;- 
λα^ι-'δ  ύυ  n'^oTfiov,  οίτος  <jj 
Ιιίτίζ'Λ  ίαυμ«^ω"  sum  6ί  ίίτ• 
7aui'  ο.υΐος,  ίιΐ'Χι.οζ  vr'.-l• 
λαμοανα)"•  χατα^ίλ^ί, 

2;.v£'J|og  ίιμ»  i  rr^oixxSi- 
μαιΒ  α^3τη,  χαι   ί;   xa?,£w| 

Ό  hi  βαξν<ίτ:•»&•χ^ι,)•ψ^α 
ΡίΟΊ'τ,μι"'-  coTMi'jg  μητΥιΡ. 

Εν  ό'  auTo?  owiu'"•"'  νωίοψ 
χα>θ(ο?,  xyiiocj  όη  τα;  μ:- 

Ό  •νησΌ5  ί   λιμην   -τηξα» 

acsijoj,  tiw^ia  OS  χαι  ο 
τοιουτοί:  α:Ί  Cu'.fi,ui,i?  χατν 
ς.;»!*',"'   χαι    c/x-vaij'"   ύ.α 

Ε(  (ίνμ^Ρ'.ιν:.;'^''  βζ^Χ-'ί 
φωνγ,ίις  ίυο  3υμγ*νο$:"*  £τι- 
φ£?ω,*  μαχ|ΐ5  τοι£ω  ό  Ο'νλ.- 
λα^η. 

Συντηβ'ίω,''  χαι  (5'ι;ναχο- 
)<juJe(j  ό  μ£ν  ΐΓλοοτο;:  χαι  i 
όυναίτΣία  ηνοια,  χαι  yira 
οίτοίτ,  αχ(/>.αθΊα. 


•^ 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


41 


15.  First  then,  I  am  right  to 
answer  to  the  first  falsehoods,  which 
have  been  spoken  against  me,  and  to 
the  first  accusers  ;  and  then,  to 
liie  latter  falsehoods,  and  the  latter 
accusers. 

16.  When  thou  art  about  to  con- 
sult toith  amj  one  about  thine  own 
affairs,  consider  first,  how  he  ma- 
itaged  for  his  own.  For  he  who 
plans  his  own  business  ill,  will  ne- 
ver advi-e  well  about  another's. 

17.  You  need  not  Avondcr,  my 
friend,  for  having  been  lately  icith 
Humer  and  Euripides,  I  know  not 
how  I  was  filled  with  their  words, 
and  the  λ-erses  come  of  their  own 
accord  into  my  mouth. 

18.  Socrates  taught  his  associ- 
ates to  refrain  from  thi>igs  impious, 
unjust,  and  shamrful,  not  only  when 
they  might  be  seen  by  men,  but 
also  when  they  might  be  in  soli- 
tude. 

19.  Ajax,  if  you,  being  mad, 
killed  yourself,  \w\\y  do  you  blame 
Ulysses  ?  And  lately  you  did  not 
even  look  towards  him,  when  he 
came  to  consult  the  prophet,  nor 
did  you  deign  to  speak  to  a  man 
that   was    your  fellow-soldier  and 


ΙΤρωτον  μεν  ουν,  Jixatsf 
ειμί  α'ίολο^ίομαι*  «ζος  & 
fffcdTog  ίγω  ψευίο?  χατηχο- 
ξΐω,ζ  χα»  'Κζος  ό  ιτξοτος 
χατήγοξος•  ειτειτα  δε,  ι^ξος 
ό  ijcTts^ov,  χαι  ό  ΰ'ί'ηξος. 

Όταν  ίιαξ  Is  (ίεαυτονβ 
μίλλω*^  τΐζ  Συμβουλεύω," 
tfxoir;w  ιτξωτον  ιτως  υιίεξ  ό 
εαυτού  διοιχεω.^  Ό  yar 
xaxug  5ιανοεομαιΡ^ε  ΰιτεξ  « 
ΐΟΐοίΤ,Ρ  ου(5ε-7Τοτε  χα,Χως  /So»'- 
λευω"'^  ιτε^ι  ό  αλλοτ^ιο^,Ρ 

Μη  όαυμα(^ω,^<=  ω  έται- 
ξος,  νεωσ'τί  γαξ  Ευ^ίίτιίηε 
χαι  ΌμηξΌί  ο'υ^^ινομαι,*' 
ουκ  ειίεϋο"^"*  όίΤωί  avairX^ilw* 
ό  ε•πΌ^,ε  κ«ι  αυτόματος  ε/ω^ 
ο  μ;τ|ον  eiti  Ό  ίτομα  ε^^α. 
μαι. 

AiSacfKU  ό  ΣωχξατΎίζ  ό 
rfuvijv,  ου  μόνον  οιτοτε  ύ'ττ'ο  ο 
ανδξωνος  ό|αω,  α^ττίχω'"  « 
ανο'ίιος,  τε  και  ιχδιχος,  χαι 
αΐ'ίχ^οί,  άλλα  και  ό-πΌτε  εν 
s^Yifxict  ειμί.  ' 

Ει  tfu  μαινω,Ρ^  ω  Αιαί, 
ίεαυτου  φονεύω,  τΐζ  αιηαω  6 
ΟίυΟ'Α'ευ? ;  Και  τ^ωην  οντί 
'ΤΤ^οίβλΞ'ττω*  αυτό.',  ότΌτι 
ηκω^  μκντευομαι,•''ϊ  curs 
^^ο^ειτω"  αξιοω^  ανηξ  tfutf• 
τ^ατιωττ,ς  και  έται^ο^. 


20.  Sibimet  ipsi  multa  deesse ;  proipositum  vero  civitati,  si 
Bon  omnia  perficiat,  qu£e  civitatis  veht,  ob  id^pccnie  subjcctum 
e.see,  nonne  hoc  ingens  est  amentia  1  * 


CHAP.  XIII. 

fieuters  in  the  plural^  have  commonly  verbsjingtilar, 

silent.      The         "0  μελ•7.ί^ον  σΊχαω,    Ό 
αίτιον  κινεομ.ία. 

Di2 


1.    TfiC   courts 
Siars  arc  moved. 


43 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


2.  The  chariots  were  borne  along, 
•oiae  through  the  midst  of  the 
enemy  themeelves. 

3.  After  he  had  bathed,  his  child• 
rtti  were  brought  unlo  him. 

4.  In  the  level  and  low  places 
there  are  groves^  and  streams  fiow  in. 

5.  Bodies  appear  largtir  in  a  mist. 

6.  The  good  things  which  you 
promise»  I  to  do  to  us,  when  ^-ou 
received  the  money,  have  been  ac- 
complished by  3OU  already. 

7.  The  she^p follow  liim,  because 
they  know  his  voice. 

8.  How  are  the  things  not  good, 
which  men  receive  from  fortune  ? 
or  again,  how  are  the  contrary  things 
not  bad  ? 

9.  IT  Objects  themselves  do  not 
distract  men,  but  opinions  about 
lliem. 

1 0.  And  these  present  things  show 
that  the  multitude  are  able  to  in- 
flict not  the  least  of  evils,  but  al- 
most tJie  greatest,  should  one  have 
been  accused  among  them. 

11.  Riches,  honours,  titles, 
crowns,  und  whatever  other  things 
have  much  extenial  splendour, 
ciinnot  to  a  wise  miin  seem  ex- 
ceeding good  things,  the  very  de- 
epising  of  which  i.s  no  moiRMatc 
e.xci-lloiici- 

12.  Let  silence  gi'iioraliy  pre- 
vail, or  let  necessary  t'^ings  be  spoken, 
and  iu  few  words. 

13.  Ye  reckon  us  your  cover- 
ing.^, not  all  I  ho  wool  that  sheep 
produce,  but  all  the  bu.'hes  that 
the  nounlaxns  and  the  plains  send 


ίΓ  αυτός  ό  «Όλίμίο^.ί 

ΕίΓ£ΐ5η  6i  λούω,"»*  φΐ^Μ 
ca|'  a„ros  ό  ffouoiov. 

Εν  <5;  ό  λίιοί  χαι  χα^η. 
μενοί,  οϊΚύος  ει,αι,  χαι  ίιτιί- 
^iui  νάμα. 

ΛΓ  όμιχληΚ  ό  (ίνμα  μί- 
γας  oaivu. 

Ός  ύΐΓίδ'χνεομίυ^  «το»ί^)* 
αγα3:ς  εγω,  ire  λαμ?ον*•* 
ό  χ^ημΛ,Ρ  οτοτίλεω  ffv  ηύτ;. 

Ό  <r|o?arov  αυτός  ακο- 

Πω5  OJX  --ιμι  ayaioj:,  όιί(>ς 
λαμοανω  ό  ανβξΐ,ττοζ  τα>α 
ό  tj^>;  ;  η  ταλίν,  ο  ΐνανηοί 
c^'i  OJX  ίιμι  xaxcg  ; 

Ύαξαδΰΐβ}  Ό  ovi^^jircf  c» 
ό  'χΐ'αγμα  άλλα  i  «ί-ι  ί 
«■Ραχμα  ΰο^μα. 

Aj'o?  ίί  όηλοω  ό  cojij» 
vjvi,  on  clsg  ri  £i;jn  ό  τολ;^ 
ου  υ  (ίμίχζος  ό  χαχο;  •b^i7'** 
^ομαι,  άλλα  ίχίύον  ό  μ»- 
^αί,  ίαν  cif  εν  aurof  Οί». 
^αλλω.Ρ-' 

Ιΐλοντο^,  Τίμ*;,  ίοξα,  «•.. 
ξα\\ΐζ,\αι  Ό'οςδ^αΧΚας  r/jjt 

Οεω,ΡΡ  ΟϋΧ  αν   όνί  9ί<'•'.*οί 
όοχ8ω^    «}  α()οί     ''«•ejoa/.. 

φ^ονί  jj'  tty  ados"•  oj  μίτξι.^. 

Zit^tr,  ό  τολυ  ίίμ»,  r,  λα. 
λίν  ό  ava^xatc;,  χαι  όια 
ολι^οίτ.ϊ 

irfuju-a  Js  νομίζω  osy 
ό~οίος  τίοοαΓον  φ;/ω  ε/ιο», 
σλλα  ότοΐΌ;  φ^^χανον  c^of 
f  ί  χαι  τίόιον  ανιτ^. 


CREEK  EXERCISES. 


49 


14.  My  children  falling  about  Τεκνον,  6'  οίμφι  χον„«* 
my  knee•;,  lament  their  rnoiher.  irierw,  χλαιω  μηττ,^. 

15.  And  it  shall  be,  when  ye         Και  ίιμ-ι,  wg  αν  σαλτίξ** 
shall  have  sounded  with  the  trum-     ό  ίαλτινξ,  αναχραξω*ταε4 
pet,  let  all  the  people  shout  toge-     Xaog  άμα,  χα*  tittc^•™  αυ. 
tlier,  and  the  walls  of  the  city  shall    τοματο^  ό  rsr/os  l  ιτοϊ^ς. 
fall  of  tl^f  ir  own  accord. 

16.  Domus  quidem  tibi  bene  habet,  et  mancipia  omnia,  et 
equi  sane,  et  canes,  el  pr<edia,  el  queecunque  posaides  pulchr• 
disposita  sunt. 

17.  Ο  Stulti,  nescientes  quantis  terminis  negoiia  mortuorum 
el  virorum  discreta  sunt,  et  ^ualia  sunt  apud  nos. 


CHAP.  XIV. 

One  substantive  governs  another,  signifying  a  different  thing, 
in  the  genitive. 


1.  Take  ye  the  helmet  of  salva- 
ύοη  and  the  sword  of  the  Spirit. 

2.  His  countenance  presents  it- 
eelf  unto  me,  and  the  sound  of  his 
wice  remain.^  in  rny  ears. 

3.  The  convnencement  of  his  re- 
marks was  praise  of  Greece,  and  of 
ihc  ineti  at  Athens. 

4.  ()f  how  many  «^2/5  is  igno- 
rance the  cause  unto  men. 

δ.  But  indeed  the  rnoon  makes 
rnamfesl  unto  us,  not  only  the  di- 
visions of  the  moTith,  but  also  those 
of  the  day. 

6.  There  is,  as  it  seems,  no  re- 
"i-edy  for  anger  but  the  serious  con- 
fcrsation  of  α  man  our  friend. 

7.  A  little  time  breaks  the  con- 
nexions of  the  ivicked ;  but  no  length 
of  time  can  destroy  ihe  friendships 
of  the  good. 

8.  Nightly  visions  are  not  only 
ihe  echoes  ef  daily  accidents  and 
cotiversations,  but  also  the  produc- 
tiotis  of  a  remiss  habit. 


Ό  τί^ιχίφαλαια  ό  CwTij- 
ficiv  δέχομαι,'  χαι  ό  μαχα<. 
^α  ό  Πνίυμα. 

Ό  "T^oiowov  aiiTog  φαί- 
νω,•" χαι  ό  φωνή  ο  ψχ}ζ  sv  β 
αχοη  ίταίαμενω. 

Ό  μεν  α,ξγτ,  Ι  Χογ'^ς 
ΐτία\\ος  ειμί  Έλλαβ,  χαι  β 
Ai'';vrjiiv  οΛΰξνιτος. 

Οΰος  κακοί,  αίτια  c  αχ- 
νοια  ό  ανί^ωτοί. 

Αλλα  μην,  ό  γε  β'εληνη 
CJ  μόνον  ό  νι^ξ,  άλλα  χαι  ό 
μην  ό  με^ο^  φανε?ο?  s^w 
ίτοιεω. 

O'jx  ειμί  ίξγ-τι  ΰς  ειχω™' 
φαρμακον  αλλ'  η  λο^οί 
θΊΓθί.οαιο5  avOPUflTog  φιλο^. 

Ό  μεν  ό  φα^λο^  duvri&sia 
ολι^55  χίΌνοί  (5ιαλυω•*  ό  6S 
ό  tfiro-joc/io?  φίλια  ουβε  αν  β 
<πας  οίων  εξαλείφω.^ 

Ό  νυχτερινοί  φανταίίια  ou 
μόνον  ο  μείημεζίνοί  ειμί  Λν. 
TJj(ia  χαι  όμΐ/ ja  αιττ,-χ^τ,μα, 
άλλα  και  ό  ^αόομο?  ίυνη. 
itia  2  εννημα. 


44 


GREF.K  EXERCISES. 


9.  I  nm  a  deliverer  oi  m^n,  and  ΕΧΐυίίξωτν,;  Βιμ.ιίανίζ-^. 
an  healer  of  passivnit,  but,  upon  the  «oc,  χαι  larpoj  ό  iraicc,  ό  Ci 
whole,  I  (lo.'ire   lo  h*i  ihe  prophci  oC     oXog"<'aXr,i;ia  xaicw^^/.ir.n 


*ruM  ΐ\Γ.(\  freedom 

10.  He  \\ί11  easily  find  his  lea- 
thern coiit  a<jain,  and  his  spade,  in 
ihe  lees  of  his  cask. 

11.  For  as  when  a  light  is  pre- 
sent at  niirht,  it  draws  the  eyes  of 
all  to  itself,  so  the  beauty  of  Au- 
tolycus  attracts  U\a  regards  of  all  to 
itself 

12.  The  flowin!;  of  rivers,  the 
gtcellins^  tidrs  of  the  sea,  the  bud- 
ding of  /rciT.?,  the  ripene^/s  of  fruits. 

13.  1Γ  And  sailing  by,  they  bc- 
lielil  the  moul/is  of  the  risers,  first 
uf  the  Thtnn.jduti,  next  of  the 
Habjs,  and  af:er  this  of  tlie  Par- 
ihenius ;  liaviiig  sailed  by,  they 
came  to  I  ί.ται  lea,  a  'Jrecian  city, 
a  eolomj  of  ^legairaiis,  being  in 
the  country  of  llie  JMariafulijni. 

14.  Tne  (H'l  of  tragedy  and  of 
hist'jry  is  not  the  same,  hut  oppo 
fite  ;  in  the  former  yon  must  strike 
and  captivate  the  liearers,  at  pre- 
sent, by  the  most  ))ersna'^ivo  words  ; 
in  the  lai«T,  by  real  facts  anil  nar- 
rations, you  must,  ahveys,  instruct 
and  persuade  thu.ie  wlio  wish  to 
ifcarn. 

15.  Λ  resemblance  difTcrs  from 
a  symbol  ;  inasnnich  as  the  resem- 
Hancc  aim.c,  as  much  as  possible, 
lo  represent  the  very  nature  of  the 
thing,  and  it  is  not  in  our  power  to 
vury  ii ;  but  the  syndiol  is  wholly 
in  our  power,  as  existmg  by  our 
iuiaginution  alooe. 


■^o;»i"»;5  iVJ••»  /οουλομαι. 

ou^is,  xai  ό   (5»Χί>.λα,   «ν   i 
<ΓΡ•Λ  ό  -rridog.  . 

Πίΐίίξ  γαξ  όταν  ^yj  sg  t^ 
νοξ  τα^ειμι,  iraj  c^odayij  4 
οαμα,  (;;Irw  χαι  ό  AuToXvxej 
xaXXcj   τα?    i^iXxw    t.^*^ 

ΙΛταμορ  Εχ^οη,  ία>Λ<ίίΓα 
ανοιόη,ίΊ;,  Οίνίρον  ex^uCtf,' 
xa^irnj  cfrravtfij.P 

Και  ΐΓ«ία?Γλ:^^,  d(ufS(^ 
ο  ίτΌταμο;  ό  ίτομα•  irfwret 
μ5ν  ό  Θί^μωίυν,  ;•τίΐτα  6ί  i 
Ά\υς,  μετά  δί  ojroc,"*  • 
Ila^divioj•  Ta^acXsi.•,-^  ayi- 
κν5ομαι''  ει?  Ί1^αχλ£ΐ«,  τ»- 
λ(^  Έλλην)?,  Ms^a^itff 
α•7Γοιχο?,  ειμί  ίν  ο  Μα»ιαν• 
ί^νο?  χ^,.Ρα. 

Ό  7£λο5  T^aycjJia  χαι  Itf- 
το^ια  ου  ό  αυτό?,  άλλα  • 
Λαντιο?"  εχ:ΐ  μεν  jao  6fi  'Jia 
ό  ΐτΐίΐανο?  λο^ο?,ε  ίχιτλ^ί". 
(Γω,^  χαι  ψυχα^  ω^εω,*  χατα 
ό  cαi'^ιμι,P  ό  oxoyuj'o  ivdaJ» 
ir,  (5ια  ό  αληίινοί:  ε ^jov  χηι 
Xo/OC,  ιις  •τας  ο  Xfcvt;, 
όίδα.Ιχ-Α'  χαι  TEiiu)"*  ύ  pi).i. 
μαί'ίω.Β 

Διαφ:^:^  Je  ά  ίμοι^^^μα  ί 
(Γι/μ^αλιν  ί  χαι'οΟΊν  i  μίν 
ομοια'μα  i  φυΟΊ?  αυτ&ί  ό 
νξαγμα,  χατα  ό  •5ι•ν«τ5ί,"• 
ατειχονι^ω™  /^ουλομαι,  χαι 
ουχ  ειμί  ετι  ε^  i;•*  αυτό?  μίτα- 
rrXaddui'^  ό  οε  νε  Λμ^ολο» 
4  ολοέ"*  είτι  ε^  6J  ίχ<^,  «-τι 
χαι  tx  μονό?  ύ^ιίτημαι"!?  t 
ί;μετί^ο5  ειτινοια. 
16.  8.>v.ratca,  H'j:n<jru9,  Hippocnvtcs,  Pluto,  (orumqut  admi 


OREBK  EXBRCISKS. 


ift 


ratore^y  quoa  etiam  «que  ac  deoa  colimu3,  tanquam  pr&fccii 
quidam,  atque  Dei  ministri. 


CHAP.  XV. 

The  primiiive.  pronoun  is  used^  in  ike  gctiiiive,  instead  of  the  pos- 

scssii^.  pronoun. 
Bui  whenever  any  emphasis  ia  required^  tJie  possessive  alone  can  he 

used- 


1.  I  ascend  unto '/«y  Father  and 
your  Father,  and  my  God  and  your 
God. 

2.  Send  forth  my  people,  that 
they  may  serve  rnc  ;  if  thou  be  not 
inclined  to  send  them  forth,  see 
then,  I  will  slay  thy  son,  which  is 
the  lirst  born. 

3.  This  is  my  God,  and  I  will 
glorify  him  ;  my  father's  God,  and 
1  will  exalt  him. 

4.  In  thee  our  fathers  trusted, 
tliey  trusted  and  thou  didst  always 
deliver  them.  Thou  art  my  God 
from  my  mother's  womb. 

5.  And  upon  their  heads  were 
golden  crowns,  and  their  counte- 
nances were  as  countenances  of 
men,  and  their  teeth  as  teeth  of 
hons. 

6.  Never  as  yet  hast  thou  be- 
held a  virtuous  action  of  thine  οιυη. 

7.  It  is  enough  if  every  one 
perform  his  own  duty. 

8.  But  now  Philip  has  triumphed 
over  your  indolence  •  and  careless- 
ness. 

9.  And  not  to  think  that  thy 
sight  can  extend  over  many  stadia, 
but  that  it  is  impossible  for  the  e3'e 
of  the  Deity,  to  see  all  things  at  the 
same  moment. 

10.  Does  it  appear  that  ozir  na- 
val armament  Λvdl  be  inferior  to 
that  of  these  rnen  1 


fy  ω  και  ©sog  βυ. 

Ε^α'Π'οο'Τίλλω''  ό  λαοί  ε/ω 
ίνα  syw  Χητξίοω''^  Ει  μ-ίν  μ,ΐ} 
/3ουλομ-α»  ϊ^α'ΤΓοίτϊΧλω''  au- 
τβ.<,  Όξαω  OUV,  ιγω  aiiQxrsntd 
δ  υίοίΤ  <ίυ  Ό  t^oj-otoxo?.    • 

OuTog  fijijLi  syu  Θίοζ,  χαι 
δΰζΆξω  αυτοζ•  Θεός  Ό  νατ-^ζ 
syu,  χαι  όψοω  αυτός. 

Ετί  ffu  ίΧίτιζω^  ό  vaTrj^ 
εγω,  ελ•ηξ^°'  και  ^υω"*•^  αυ- 
ΐος.  Εκ  κοιλία  μητ-ηξ  εγ» 
Θίο<;  syu  εψ-ι  tfu. 

Kr/.j  £1»  ό  χ£φα•λη  α,υτος 
rfrSvpavof  χξυίίξος,  και  ό  '!γ|ο- 
ίωΓον  αυτός  ΰς  ίτροίωτον 
ανίξωιτος,  και,  ό  ο.όουί  Μί 
οδ^,υς  Xsuiv  ίιμι.   _       • 

Ouisig  -τωτοτε  (ίεα\)Ταν 
ίξγοΊ  καλο^•  όεαομαι.Ρ'' 

ΊκαΜος  (5;  sav  εκαο'τοί 
ίχττλη^οοο'"'  δ  ίαυτου  Βξγον.• 

Νυν  (is,  ό  μίν  ^αόυμια^  9 
υμετεξοζ  και  αμέλεια  κρατεί* 

Φίλΐ'Λ-'Τοί. 

Και  μη  οιομαι  ό  (fog  με» 
όμμα  οίναμαι  ε•η  ιτολυς 
CraJiov  ε|ικνεομα<,  ό  Ji  δ 
<3.-ο5  οφθαλμοί  aiuvocTog  ίιμι 
άμα  "Tag  οραω.     '^ 

Φαίνω™  ό  ναυηκοί  (β"?"^»- 
τευμα)  δ  >;μετε^02  λϊΐΤΜ"» 
ςβ  ίχεινο^  ; 


46 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


11.  IT  And  thou  shall  rejoice 
before  the  Lord  thy  (Jod,  ihou  and 
thy  pon,  and  tliy  daughter,  thy  man- 
servant and  thy  niaid-servanl. 

12.  In  order  thai  his  heart  maj' 
not  be  elevated  from  his  brethren, 
in  order  that  he  may  not  turn  away 
from  these  c^inmandnients,  so  that 
he  may  continue  long^  over  his 
kingdom,  he  himself  and  his  sons, 
ftinong  the  softs  of  Israel. 

13.  Ν um  major  es  patre  Λοδ/Γο? 

14.  Fihus  luua  vivit. 


Kv^ioje  ό  θίος  ffj,  ffv  χαι  • 
υ\ος  <J\j,  χαι  ό  ίογαττ,»  tfw, 
ό  iraif  ff\)  χαι  ό  irai5i(fx>)  <fu. 
Ίνα  μη  u4-oij-'  ό  χαξόια 
αυτο'ί  ατο  ό  αδζΧφ^ς  a-jrog, 
ίνα  μη  ι:αξα~αι•^ω^  ατο  ό 
εντο>.η,   ir-^g  αν  μίίΧ|οχ^ο- 

αατος  χαι  δ  uiog  a.rof  £v  ό 
ΐιΊος  1(Τξα•ηΚ. 


CHAP.   XVI. 


.3rt  adjective  in  the  neuter  gender,  with 
the  genitive. 

1.  He  came  to  that  degree  of 
insolence. 

2.  For  I  will  never  proceed  to 
such  a  mif<fortune. 

3.  The  Athenians  were  in  this 
degree  of  preparation. 

4.  Ύ\\α  grcatrM  part  οι  \\\G  Gre- 
cian ar?«'/  was  thus  persuaded. 

5.  And  it  was  now  the  middle  of 
tlie  daij,  aiul  the  enemy  were  not 
yel  vi.-ilije. 

6.  Dost  tliou  see  the  affi\irs  of 
the  I'lT.-ian.^,  to  what  a  pitch  of 
power  tln\v  have  advanced  ? 

7.  !T  Of  the  things  that  are  good 
and  honourable,  the  gods  give  none 
wiihout  labour  and  care. 

8.  Tliou  dcsire.-it  nothing  of  a 
di^cult  tnritfn•,  vi.shing  to  know 
what  the  law  might  be. 

9.  I  laving  come  to  thi.-?  country, 
I  became  hen^uuvn  to  a  stranger, 
and  I  have  pre.-^cived  this  family 
lo  this  day. 

10.  And  they  themselves  even 


out  a  substantive,  governs  . 

Έ'ς  TotfoiiTog  ερχομω• 
ΰτερηφανεια. 

Eycj  γαζ  ουνοτ'  tig  oJs 
ειμί'  (f-s.ij.^'iPa. 

Ό  μεν  Λίηναΐίίτ  ςν  το- 
(foiTog  iragaixejr)  ειμί. 

Ό  μεν  ΐΓολυί  ό  Έλ/.ηνιχί.^ 
(ί-^ατευμα)  oi~!^g  τειίω. 

Και  ειμί  ηίτ)  μεσορ  ημε^α 
ΧΓίΐ  "ΐτω  xacacrtvris  ειμί  a 
ίΤολεμίΟίΤ. 

Ό^ηω  ό  Πε^'Ο'τ,ί  ΊΓ^η^μα 
£ig  Of  ϋυναμι^  τ^οχω^ε y  ; 

Ό  μεν  Είμι^Γ  α^-αίο?  χαι 
χπλοίΓ  ou'5iic:  ftvsu  covcji  χαι 
εcιμελεια  όιΟνμι  ό  όεο^. 

Oi-(5ri5  Τ15  ^c'.XsTog  c^ay- 
μα  fcιt^υμεo],  ^ίουλομαι  yi- 
νω(Τχω  CIS  ειμί''  ό  νομο^. 

Γ-ζ'^ι^ομαι"  ό'  siff  ^οια 
όίί,  βovφoξζe:J'  ζ^^οζ,  χ«• 
όίε  (Γω^ω'•'  01X05  εις  Ό6ί 
ημί^α. 

Και    αυτό;  ες  ό    (ircira 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


47 


^^,. 


•χξονοξ' εΧ'π^ις  τις  ίχω'  χου. 


had  something  of  a  ddusive  hope, 
that  for  the  time  to  come  they 
would  not  be  afflicted  by  any  other 
disorder. 

11.  The  unseasonable  advice. 
The  unseasonahlcness  of  the  ad- 
vice. EQs  celebrated  wife.  The 
celehrihj  of  his  loife.  The  fluctu- 
ating sea.  Thafluctuaiion  of  the 
$ea.  His  most  honoured  freemen. 
The  most  honoured  part  of  his 
freemen.  A  chosen  army.  The 
choice  part  of  his  army. 

12.  Ova  parit  in  terra  excluditque:  et  plerumque 
sicco  affit. 


αλλο^ 


φ  Off    μηο     αν 

Ό  αχαίξΰς  /3ουλη.  ~'tT 

αχαιξος  ό  βουΧί).      Ό  ^ε^»- 

Toff  6  yiivv).  Ό  Χϋματωίτ]^ 
oaXatfCa.  Ό  χυματωίηδ  β 
6aka(f(fu.  Ό  έντιμος  ελευ- 
όε^ο^.  Ό  έντιμος  ό  ελευίε. 
foff.  Ετιλεκτο?  ατξαηα, 
Ό  ετίλεκτοί  ο  (ίτξατια. 

in 


<5»αφόε»ττΟ»^ 


CHAP.  XVII. 


1%?  relative  agrees  with  its  antecedent  in  gender  and  number.  If 
there  come  no  nominative  between  the  relative  and  the  verb,  the 
relative  is  the  nominative  to  the  verb ;  but  if  there  do,  the  relative 
is  governed  by  some  word  expressed  or  understood. 


1.  There  was  one  Xenophon, 
who  followed. 

2.  liZOer/'i/,  iu^i'cA  above  all  things 
leads  to  happiness. 

3.  They  cause  (he  stars  to  ap- 
pear above  our  heads  in  The  night, 
which  indicate  unto  us  the  hours  of 
the  night. 

4.  The  great  Jiipit,:r  is  in  heaven, 
who  inspects  all  things. 

5.  Do  those  things  tvhich  will 
not  hurt  thee,  and  reflect  before 
action. 

6.  Thence  he  advances  to  the 
river  Sarus,  lohose  breadth  was 
three  pleihra. 

7.  Having  seen  the  chariots  which 
.Toseph  sent,  the  spirit  of  our  father 
Jacob  relived. 


Ei/j-i  τις  Ξενοφών  Ις  (ΐΌν- 

τα  'Κζος  ευδαιμονία  aycj. 

Ό  atfr^ov  εν  ό  vu|  ανα- 
φ«ινω,^  ος  εγω  Ό  ώ»«  ό  vu^ 
εμφαν/ξω. 

Ειμί  μΐγας  εν  ον|ανο5 
'Ζΐυς,  Ός  εφοξαω  ιτας. 

Πί'κο'ο'ω  δε  οίτο?  ό^  tf•» 
μη  βΧχ'!(τω,  "Κογιζω^  δι 
•τξο  ?ξγον. 

Εντευύεν  εξελαυνω  ε-χι  b 
Σαρος  ιταταμος  ος  ειμί  • 
ευξος  τξϊις  τλεί^ον. 

Έιδω  ό  άμα^α  ίς  αττοσ'- 
τελλω  ΙωίΤ'ηφ,  ανα^ωττυ^εω* 
»  οτνευμα  Ιακω§  ο  τατη^. 


4β 


CRELK  ExmClSES. 


8.  IT  TTiis  is  bettrr,  to  respect 
9^ualily,  w/iirh  alwu^'s  binds  fri'-nds 
with  fncmlfi,  and  ci'ios  v:i:h  cities, 
and  allies  with  allies. 

9.  8uch  also  are  hvperboles  and 
plurals  ;  but  we  shall  sliow  in  the 
eequel,  the  danger  which  ihcy  sccrw 
10  have. 


Exfivci:  xaXof,  ιΰοτκζ  ri• 
μαω,   ίς  (ρι>Λζ    αίι    (ptXftjr, 

ΐ'Τ5;§ολη,  χα»  ό  cXr.iivri- 
xr,-"f  ί^ικνυμι  5e  εν  cP  sirii- 
cn  ό  xiv(5uJ0f,  ίς  βχο,•  «- 
xw.'"'' 

flTePi  έαυί-ουΡ  φίαξω  ό   Xj- 


CfP»    i 


10.  The  first  person,  is  that  m 
%ckich  the  speaker  speaks  of  hiin- 
pelf;   the   second,  in   tv/iich  of  him 

lo  u-Ai^m  he  speaks ;  the  third,  in     πξος  ίς  Ό  λο/'ο^•  νξΐη:,  ίς 
%ohich  of  another.  c.-fi  ϊτΐζΐίξ. 

11.  Why  then,  said  Critobiilus,  Tig  ουν,  φημι  ό  Kjir»- 
dost  thou  say  this  to  me,  as  if  it  fsuXcc,  tyw  oCto^  Xsvw, 
did  not  depend  upon  thee  to  say  of  ΰα-ζίζ  oix  eiri  tfy•  ολ,«»*  »«•- 
me  whatever  thou  mayest  wish  ?          Ti?  ov  ,βουλο/χαι,  <rf  j.   ϊ-,  μ 

λί/ω  ; 

12.  Socrates  acts  unjustly,  whom  A^txtu  Icox^arr^j,  Ις  ^tn 
the  elate  considers  gods,  not  con-  ο  ro>jg  νομι,^ω  flio?,  tv  w- 
sidering;.  M-'^'^• 

13.  Circumque  ipeum  omnes  ordine  instructi  sunt,  kewn 
unusquisque,  quern  ille  deilit,  non  relinquentes. 

14.  Dirain  quandam  narras  hominum  stuUilian».  ^ui  (uuM 
anK>re  aniant  rem  pallidaiu  graveujque. 


CHAP.  XVIII. 

Tht  Attic  and  Ionic  writers  often  put  the  relative,  by  attraction,  w 
tht  same  case  tcith  the  antecedent,  and  sometimes  the  antecedfU 
in  the  same  case  icith  the  relative. 
Participles  and  adjectives  are  often  put,  by  attraction,  in  thi  *e»X 
^    taf0  jj,,//,  ifit  nfftifi  Qf  pronoun  to  which  they  refer. 


JI£X.47JrC  ATTUAkTUU  ϋϊ  TBB  ANrkViUtHX. 


1.  Dlinu  reproved  by  huu  fi^ 
ali  tht  till  di«*is  icMch  he  coiuuuI- 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


49 


2.  But  examine  separately  each 
of  the  things  which  the  Deity  men- 
tioned. 

3.  With  the  treasures  which  my 
father  left. 

4.  This  then  he  sent  imto  thee, 
and  requests  of  thee  to  drink  it 
up  this  day  ivith  those  whom  thou 
hvest  best.  *" 

5.  The  first  of  men  whom  we 
know. 

6.  That  he  might  not  then  be 
compelled  to  break  any  of  the  laws 
which  he  established. 


Αλλα   κ«ό'   Iv    lxft(j'ros 

2υν  ο  β-ηίίαυξος  Ός  ο  τα- 
ψν]ξ  καταλειττω.^ 

OUTog"^  ουν  tfu  irs^'Tru,^ 
χαι  δεο'χαι  tfu^  εκπινω®  τη- 
μ^εξον  rfuv  ος  μαΧα  φ  ίλεω. 

n^cjTog^  ανόξω-τίος  ο  Syu 
ισ'ημι. 

Ίνα  5η  μη  τι^  δ  vo/xog 
ανα^και^ω"=   λυω®    ό    τιόη- 


ANTECEDENT  ATTRACTED  BY  THE  RELATIVE. 


7.  There  is  no  public  office  lohich 
he  did  not  sustain. 

8.  And  some  of  the  disciples 
from  Cffisarea  came  with  us,  bring- 
ing one  JMnaso^  a  Cyprian,  an  old 
disciple,  with  lohom  we  should  be 
lodged. 


Ουκ    ειμί   otfriff   ίΤωίτοτβ 

Συνε^ομαι•^  ίε  και  (τις) 
ό  μαόητη^  atfo  Κακία^εια 
rfuv  εχω,  α^ω,  ιτα^α  og  ξε- 
νι<^6ϋ,^•=   Μναίων    τις,    Κυ- 


PARTICIPLE  AND  ADJECTIVE  ATTRACTED  BY  THE  SUBSTANTIVE  OR  PiiO• 
Λ'υ  Ι'Λ'  TO  WHICH  THEY  REFER. 


9.  In  this,  I  will  shoΛv,  in  the 
first  place,  that  I  have  been  tcise,  in 
the  next  place,  prudent,  and  then 
your  best  friend. 

10.  The  gift  of  thee  alone. 

1 1 .  The  fortune  of  vjreiched  me. 

12.  It  has  been  ordained  by  fate 
for  most  men,  xohen  successful,  never 
to  be  wise. 


Ev  οδε  δεικνυμι  <τ^ωτα 
μεν  tfoipos  γεγωζ,  είτειτα 
(ίωφξων,  ίιτα.  ΰυ'^  με/αί 
φιλοί. 

Ό  dog  μονο£^  δώρημα. 

Τύχη  εμοί  τλημων. 

Ό  ιΤοΚυς  μεΐ|ω  μηδε-Το- 
TS,  ευ  it^adifUjS  φ^ονεω.* 


PROMISCUOUS. 

13.  ΤΓ  This  is  the  man  whom  you         Outoj  ίιμι  og  ίΐίω  ανη|. 
saw. 

14.  ile  sent  for  another  army  in  Μετα^εμιτω™  αλλο^οΊ•^- 
addition  to  the  one  xohich  he  had  τευμα  «r^og  Ις  ^^βί^εν  s^u. 
before. 

Ε 


όϋ 


CHEHK  L.\F.R(IseS. 


Ό  μΓ»  r^ioj-χος  χα»  ό  it- 
fa-ru»  αΐί^οξ»  tf\,<liu  έηχι; 


<-iXi;,ca-A)-'i 


^i-M 


15.  He  wa»  a  brothcr-in-laic  of 
wr,  α  thamdcss  iroman  ;  would  that 
h''  still  were  so  ! — once  indeed  he 

16.  His  euiiviclis  and  servants 
'i'lz  n,  grave  fur  hi  in,  when  he 
ώοΊ  ;  anil  his  wife  siie  on  the 
^Youml,  ha\ing  adorned  her  hus- 
band U'itfi  whatercr  things  she  ha^l, 
and  havuig  his  head  upon  her 
knees. 

17.  lie  desired  him  to  come  to 
tiio  arm}',  that  they  miyht  consult 
aboTit  Me  castUs  which  ύ\>•γ  had 
mk'.'n. 

IS.  At  every  disagreeable  ap- 
pearance accustom  yourself  to 
:«ay,  that  it  is  an  appearance,  and 
1301  at  all  what  it  seems  ;  then 
exauiine  it,  by  these  rules,  it'hich  you 
ha\e. 

19.  That  yon  should  be  mur- 
derers, and  pollute  your  liamls 
\%iih  royal  blood — 3ee  that  it  be 
η•ΐ  viUanous  at  present,  and  dan- 
gerous to  you  aflerwards  ;  for  I 
ain  not  conscious  ίο  myself,  that 
1  have  given  you  any  cai^se  of 
ufieasiness. 

20.  What  then  does  tlie  God 
e^y  Ί  For  nideed  I  am  not  con- 
.^ious  to  myself  thai  J  am  wise, 
much  or  little. 

21.  Philosophis  ediccre,  non  fingt:re  nova  vocabula,  net]ue 
ii'iirari  de  ^uibiis  non  nontnt. 

22.  Persarum  quidem  lonc^e  pulcherrimus  est  pater  meu5, 
Medorum  vero  quotquot  ego  vxdi,  longe  liic  meus  avus  pulchef- 
riiTius  est. 


xair,uat  ^«μαι,   xoJfAeu'  ti 
tyj^  ό  α»η^,  i  -.«γαλή  o„ro; 

EriiriXXw*    i;XiJ    a;,-ro> 

ΙΙαί  φανΓΜίίία"*  -unyyi 
μί>^ταω  enXi^cj,  ότι  ^α•.- 
raJia  tVfU,  χαι  ου  Tavrioi 
ό"*  φαίνω•™?  είΤ.ΊΓα  ίςίτα- 
^w,  ό  xavujv  ο;^Γο;,  ί»  ij(w. 


A'jfoi  ^ινο,αα/  φονί;^, 
χ"ίΐ  βαύι'Κϋοζ  μπαίνω"*  ό 
Οΐςια  αίμα,  ό^αω  μη  τ^ος 
ό"*  VJV  avoifOf,  xoj  ύσ'ί'ο* 
tfu  Sirixivujvof  ϊΐμΓ  ou  ^α^ 
ς-ij  Εμαντου  CiMiOiJ^'  λ\,- 
CcW^  tfu. 

Τι?  «rori  Xfyu   ά  θ5ο<:  ; 

S-jU  jaf  6r„  ύυτί  μί^α 
cjtS  ίμιχ^ον,  tfuvci^iu"*' 
ίμαυτου  (}Ός;ο»  ειμί.? 


greek;  exercises. 


51 


CiUr.  XIX. 


«d  noun  nf  the  dual  vuinber  may  have  a  verb,  adjeclipe,  or  reL•^^ 
plural ;  hnt  a  plural  noun  can  unly  have  a  verb,  adjective^  er  r$• 
laiivc  dual,  when  it  signifies  tico. 


But  then  two  quickly  drew  near, 
urging  on  ihoir  swift  steeds. 

2.  If  the  two  hands  should  turn 
themselves,  or  the  two  feet  impede 
each  othei". 

3.  We  two  sat  thus,  answering• 
each  other. 

4.  We  two  examining  together, 
thall  perhaps  discover  it. 

5.  Why  then  are  you  offended 
against  them  ?  for  they  both  suffer 
just  punishment. 

6.  And  ye  rivers,  and  earth,  and 
ye  who  punish  the  dead  men,  b^ 
low. 

7.  But  one  thing  vexed  me  not 
a  Uttle ;  ThesmopoHs  disturbing 
me,  and  teaching  me,  that  two  ne- 
gatives make  one  affirmative. 

8.  If  As  when  two  torrents  rush- 
ing from  the  mountains,  discharge 
their  impetuous  streams  together 
into  one  gulf 

9.  Can  you  tell  unto  us  two 
where  Pluto  lives  here  ?  For  ive 
are  both  strangers  lately  arrived. 

10.  And  let  these  two  themselves 
be  witnesses  to  this,  before  the  eter- 
nal gods,  and  mortal  men. 

11.  They  tico  went  reluctant 
along  the  shore  of  the  barren  sea, 
and  canie  to  the  tents  and  .«hips 
of  the  Myrmidons  :  and  Uicy  found 


Ό  Ss  ταχ'  ΐγγ\ι6ίν  ί|. 
χομαι,*  ίλαυνυ  wxi/j  ΐττ- 
■κος. 

Ει  ό  χ?ι?  TPS-ru;"•'^^  ν-,  ύ 
•χοΌζ  ΐμ,ιτοδιζω  βλ/./,λ:,;». 

Συν  rs  δυο  (fxfrro'j.(M 
σ'χίίον  Eu^itfxw. 

Tig  ouv  ayavaxrsu  xara 
αυτός  •  StSc^'u  γαξ  ααφ,« 
XctXog  ό  οικη. 

Και  ιΤοΓαμο?,  xfl»  γαία, 
και  ΌςΡ  ϋιτίνεξδε  χαίλνω•* 
ανί^ωίΓο^  «τιννυμαι. 

Πλην  άλλα  ε'ίς  tyu  λν- 
*εω*  ου  μετξίως•  ο  Θ^βΊ^β. 
*ολι?  ενοχλεω,  χαι  6i5aff- 
χω,  ώί  ό  δυο  αΐτοφαοΊ?,  ilg 
χαταφαίίις  avoTiXsu. 

Ώ?  ί'  ore  χειμα^ξος  ^β- 
τα,μ,ος,Ρ  χατ^  οΡίΐίφι  |fw, 
ες  μιιίγαγκεια  (ίυμβαλλΜ 
οζξιμος  υδωξ.^ 

Εχω**  αν  φ^α^ω'  iyw 
Πλούτων  ότου  ενόαδε  »ι- 
χεω  ;  ξξνος  γαξ  ειμ»,  αξ. 
Tiwc:  αφικνεομα•.'' 

Το  δε  αυτός  μοξτυξοςΡ 
ειμί,  νξος  τε  6eogS  μαχα^, 
«ξος  τε  θνητός  ανί^ωιτοίΓ. 

Ό  5ε  αεχων  βαίνω  ε^ι 
6ις  αλς  (κτξυγετος,  Muf- 
μιδ'^ν  δε  ετι  ce  χλιίία 
χαι  \ιψ$  ίχνεομαι.®     Ό  5e 


62 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


him  at  his   tent    and    his    black     είξκίχω  ηταξα  re  χλιίια  χω 
ship.  vr,\is  μίΧας. 

12.  Quare  vero  et  nos  duo  extruimus  rnontes  alios  super 
alios,  ut  habeamus  accuratiorem  prospectum. 

13.  Equi  niuufatigati  svnt  excilanti  populura. 


CHAP.  XX. 


Λη  adjective  is  often  put  in  the  neuter  gender,  χξτ,μα,  commonly, 
χττ,μα,  τ^α^/μα,  and  εξ'/ον,  somdi/nea,  being  understood. 

When  an  infinitive  or  a  sentence  is  in  place  of  the  nominative  to  a 
verb,  or  substantive  to  an  adjective,  the  verb  is  in  the  third  person 
singular^  and  (he  adjective  in  the  neuter  gender. 


1.  The  g-ovcrnmcnt  of  the  many 
is  not  a  good  thing. 

2.  ]Vh\n  is  something  so  hard  to 
bt.  pleased,  and  querulous,  and  mo- 
ruse. 

3.  "Wealth  is  a  coicardhj  and 
pitiful  thing,  fond  of  life. 

4.  Wisdom  alone  of  possessions 
is  immortal. 

5.  First  then,  do  thou  answer 
this  unto  us,  if  we  assert  true  things, 
or  things  that  arc  not  true  ? 

6.  Yes ;  for  ihc  light  was  a 
pleasant  things  and  to  die,  dreadful, 
and  to  be  avoided. 

7.  It  is  iiot  good  that  man  be 
alone. 

8.  To  karn,  is  venj  pleasing,  not 
only  to  the  lovers  of  wisdom,  but 
also  to  the  rest  of  men. 

9.  IT  Or  art  thou  so  wise  a  man 
that  it  has  escaped  thy  observation, 
that  one's  country  is  a  thing  more 
deserving  of  honour,  and  more  to 
be  revered,  anrl  holier  in  its  nature, 
than  both  mother  and  father,  and 
ciic  rest  of  one's  progenitors  ? 


Oox    αγαίο;  <7cXi/Xoii'a- 

Vl*i. 

Οότω  δυίίαξίίτος  τ;ς  ειμί 

χαι  ό-ιΙχοΧοζ. 

Δί(λο5  ό  ίτλοι-τοί:,  χα» 
φιλοψυρ^οό  xaxoj. 

Σο^ια  μονοί  ό  χτήμα 
αίανατο^. 

ΪΙξωτον  0-JV  ί^ω  οί^ος 
aroxenw,"'^  fi  αληίη;  λ£- 
J  ui,  η  ουχ  αληρη^. 

Λ'αι•  τ,δ\;ς  γαξ  5ΐμι  ο 
φως,  χαι  ό"«'  ς•ί.•'νημι,  JiiV'.j 
χαι  φίυ'κτΒος. 

Ου  χαλο?,  ειμι•^  ό  πν- 
i^wffo?  μονο^. 

Alavdavu;,  ου  μηνον  ό  φι- 
λοοΌφο?  τ,δνζ,  άλλα  χαι  ό 
άλλο?. 

II  ούτω;  ειμί  οΌφο<;  ύο*• 
τε  λαν^ανω"'^  ίυ,"  ότι  μη. 
Tr;jC  τε  χαι  ηταττ,ξ  χαι  ό 
αλλο5  τ-^ο^ονο;  άσαίΤ,  τι. 
μιοί  ίιμι  flraf^if,  χαι  ίεμ- 
\ύς,  χαι  n^iog ; 


GREEK  EXERCISKS. 


53 


10.  All  the  poets  with  one  voice 
sing,  that  both  temperance  i.s  a 
good  (kins',  n.nd  justice,  but  a  ihiag 
difficulty  and  requiring  labour. 

11.  To  imilaie,  is  naiural  unto 
men  from  boyhood  ;  and  in  this 
respect  they  differ  from  the  rest 
of  animals,  in  that  man  is  a  most 

.  i'/iitative  (animal),  and  acquires  the 
first  rudimpnt^  of  his  knowledge 
through  imitation. 

12.  We  received  Oedipus,  and 
those  with  him,  when  unfortunate, 
and   Λνβ  have    done    mani/    other 

friendly  r.nd  honourable  things  to  the 
Thebans. 

13.  I  speak  those  things  which 
I  have  seen  Avith  my  father,  and 
ye  do  the  things  ichich  yc  have  seen 
with  your  father. 

14.  That  thing  which  a  pilot  is 
in  a  ship,  a  charioteer  in  a  chariot, 
a  leader  in  a  chorus,  law  in  a  city, 
a  general  in  an  army,  the  same 
thing  is  God  in  tlie  world. 

15.  To  dιψarί  from  men  is  no- 
thing dreadful,  if  there  are  gods  ; 
for  they  Avou'd  not  encompass  you 
with  evil;  but  if  either  there  are 
none,  or  they  do  not  care  for  hu- 
man affairs,  ichat  is  it  to  me  to  live 


ΤΙας  0  ΐΓοιητη?  εξ  ί'^ς 
(ίτομα  ίμ,νίυ,  ως  χαΧος  μίν 
ό  (ίωφξοίίυνί)  τε  χαι  ο  m- 
χακ)>ϊυνν„  χαλίτο5  μεντ»;, 
χαι  i-mvovog, 

'0"«  μιμεω,"*  (Τυμ^υτο^ 
ο  αν&ξω'!Τος  SX  Ta»gP  ειμί• 
χαι  ούτος  διαφίξω  ό  σ.ΚΚοζ 
ζωον,ε  ότι  μιμη-ixog  ε^τ», 
χαι  Ό  μ.α6ή(ίις  coijoo"*  6ιλ  θ 
μιμηίΊί  ο  'ΐτξ-^ιτος. 

'Ο  Οι^ιτοι/ίΓ,  και  ό  μετΛ 
εχίΐ'-ος,ε  εχτιιτίω^κ  ννοδί- 
χομαι,*    Jtai    'ετίξος   «οΧυς 

χαι  ενϋοξοί  TPcs  Θ-ηζαιος, 

Ε^'ω  05  Όξαν  r'u^a.  ο 
τατηρ  ε^'ω,  οϋτος  XaXfw, 
χαι  ΰυ  ουν  ός  ό^αω  ναξιχ  » 
τατηρ  (f-j,  οίτος  -ττοιεω. 

'Οίτε»  εν  ντ,υζ  κι/βερν»;. 
ττ,ς,  εν  α^μα  ο=  ηνίοχος,  εν 
χοξος  δε  χο^υφαιο^,  εν  iro- 
>.ΐ5  οε  νομο.ί,  εν  (ίτξατο<τ(. 
δον  δε  τ,γεμων,  ο\ιτος  Θϊος 
εν  χούμ,ος. 

Ό  Je  εξ  avS^u-jfog  a«f- 
^ομαι,®  ειμίν  ofog  ειμί, 
ojJiis  icivoj-  xaxoj  j-α^  Cu 
oyx  av  τ'ερι§αλλω•^  η  5;  ει 

ftynj•'   ό    a,y&^unrSiog,-S    «rig 


in  a  world  void  of  gods,  or  void  of    f^'W   ζαω   εν   χοίμο?  xsvof 
prondence  1  ύεος,ε  η  *^ονοια-  χενο^  ; 

"Ω5  -χαΧειτος  μεν  χα/  εί^ 
ανό^ωττος  αξγος  τ^εφω,"» 
•τΓολυ  5'  ετι  -χαΚενος  οιχος 
οΧος-  ηταςΡ  δε  •)(αΚειίύζ 
(ίτρατια  ^ξγος  τρεφω. 


16.  Since  it  is  a  difficult  thing 
to  rnaintaia  even  one  man  in  idle- 
ness, and  still  far  more  difficult,  a 
Avhole  family ;  but  most  difficult 
of  all,  to  maintain  an  {irmy  in  idle- 
ness. 


17.  Hi  WMfta  quidem  dicunt  atque /?r(?cfora,  sed  nihil  vaX^V 


Kgunt. 


EiJ 


54 


CREEK  EXERCISE?. 


18.  Perniciocissimum  est,  non  modo  domum  suam  destruere. 
Bed  etiam  corpus  et  animam. 


CHAP.  XXI. 


An  adjective  or  participle  is  sometimes  put  in  a  different  gendeir 
from  the  substantive  with  which  it  stands,  as  agreeing  with 
some  other  gubstantive  understood. 


1.  The  remaining-  tribes  con- 
tinue practising  these  exercises 
among•  one  another. 

2.  Their  seven  brave  children 
liaving  died,  whom  Adrastus,  king 
of  the  Argives,  led. 

3.  I  opened,  and  I  behold  a 
child  bearing  a  bow,  also  wings 
and  a  quiver. 

4.  Ο  children,  ovcrshaJuwed  wiih 
.^upplianl  boughs. 

5.  Receive  the  two  children  of 
my  brother,  the  jnost  beautiful  of 
ilie  gods. 

6.  Ο  my  child,  unhappy  above  all 
men. 

7.  flow  deep  you  slept,  0  son, 
who  (hd  not  leap  up  ?  But  how 
then  did  I'lysscs  escape  ? 

S.  I  say  that  expression  is  the 
iIιI^>Γprctation  (of  thought)  by  a 
ill  a]ij)ellation,  irhich  has  the  same 
]ΐον,(Γ  in  poetry  as  in  prose. 

?)  Teach  ye  all  nations,  bap- 
ti/iniT  than  in  the  name  of  the 
Kaiher,  and  of  the  Son,  and  of  the 
Holy  Gliosi. 

10.  IT  Kemembpr  the.<e  things, 
ijiy  d'or  son,  and  having  gone  wiih- 
in  the  \y\x\U,  repel  the  fierce  hero, 


Ό  μίνω  φυΚτ,,  Siujui. 
νι^οααι?  ούτοί"*   τ^οί   αλ. 

Θνγ,ιίχω^  έττα  ^fwaioi 
τεχνον,&  ό?  Αξγΐιος  ανοζ 
Αδξαίτος  αγω.^ 

Avotyu,"  χαι  βξίφος  μΐν 
ειίοξω,  φέξω  τοξον,  cr-irv^ 
τε  χαι  φα^ΞτΡη. 

Ω  τεκνον  Ίχτ-ηριος  χ}χί6',ς 
εχ(ίτε:^ω.' 

'Ττοΰίχομαι'"^  ό  αδεΧ. 
φος  ο  Τϊλνον  6jo,  ό  χαΧος  ό 
β'.ος. 

Ω  Tfxvov,  cs.^i  'ζας  χαμ.. 
μο^ο?  φως. 

Ώς  'Saduc*  xr.rxaij,l•^•'  ω 
τεχνον,  Ις  ουχ  ε•ι.όο^-ω  : 
Ό  δε  ονν  Οδ^ΰδε^ς  -ζω; 
διuφε■J•\  ω  ; 

Αεγω  Χεξις  ειμί  ί  δία 
ό  όνομα»?!»?  ίί'μηνίΐα,  i.c'•" 
χαι  fri  ό  εμμεΓ^οΓ,!'!?  χαι 
ετί  ό  λο^ο^Ρϊ  εχω  ό  a-jrug 
ύ^ναμίί:, 

ΙΜαόί-.τΕ^ω^  cnj  ο  εί'νο?, 
,οαττίςω  αυτοί  ει;  ό  όνομα 
ίι  ταττ,ξ,  χαι  ό  ΐιίοί,  χαι  ^> 
ayio.c  τνευμα. 

Ό^'  μναω,™*  φιΧο?  τίπ- 
νον,  αμονω  δε  δτ,ιος  a\r,f, 
τειχοί^'    εντός  ειμί,''    μηύί 


GR 


Ακ 


EXERCISES. 


55 


nor  stand  as  an  antagonist  to  this 
man  ;  for  if  he  shall  have  slain 
thee,  my  beloved  offspring,  ivhom 
I  myself  broiight  forth,  swift  dogs 
■will  devour  thee,  far  a\vay  from 
both  of  us,  at  the  ships  of  the 
Greeks. 

1 1 .  WHien  he  saw  the  Λvoman 
pitting  on  the  ground,  and  the 
dead  man  lying,  he  wept  for  the 
misfortune,  and  said,  Alas !  Ο 
good  and  faithful  soul,  thou  art 
gone  then,  having  left  us  ! 

12.  Steites  have  made  death  the 
punishment  for  the  greatest  crimes, 
as  not  being  eible  to  restredn  injustice 
by  ihe  fear  of  a  greater  evil. 

13.  The  barbarians  are,  by  na- 
ture, fond  of  money,  and  despising 
dangers,  they  either  provide  Avhat 
is  necessary  for  their  sustenance, 
by  incursion  and  invasion,  or  pur- 
chase peace  for  great  rewards. 

14.  Gentes  ambulant  in  vanitate 
Dei. 


•πεξ  γαξ  tfu  καί•αχ-7ίινω,^* 
φιλο^  <)αλο{Γ,  ίς  τΐ'λτω^  αυ- 
τό?, avej(?;  Cu  μ.εγα  εγω,^ 
Α^^ειοί  Ίταξα  νηυί,  χυων 
ταχί.'^  χατεδω."*'^ 

E'ffsi  δ;  ειδω'  Ό  γυνή 
χαμαι  καίημαι,  και  δ  νε- 
χξος  κίΐμαι,  δαχξυω  τε  ε<χι 
h  'κα^ος,'^  xci  scw,^  φευ, 
ω  αγαύης  και  "Κΐΰίος  ψυχτ;, 
οιχομ.αί  δη  «■ττολίίτω^  εγω. 

Ό  croXis  £*(  ό  μ-ΐγαζ 
οίδικημα'•  (^ημια  ύανα-ος 
τοιεω,  ύς  ουκ  αν,  μεγο^ 
κακο5  φόβο?,  ό  α(5ΐλΐα 
'•καυω.^α 

Φυ(ίίς,  το  βαξζαξον  φι. 
λοχ^ηματον,  και  κίνδυνος? 
καταφρονΐω,"  η  Jia  εττι- 
δ^ομηίί  και  έφοδος  ο  "χξει- 
ωδ-ής""^  <Χξοζ  ό  /3ioc;  "ττοΡί^ω,™ 
η  μ^εγας  μκίύοςε  ό  ειρήνη 
αντικαταλλαττω.™ 
sensus  sui,  alienati  a  \ita 


CHAP.  XXII. 

Tjyo  u;•  7nore  substantives  lingular  have  a  verb,  adjective,  or  rela- 
tive plural ;  if  they  be  of  different  persons  or  genders,  the  verb 
or  adjective  will  agree  with  the  most  icorthj  ;  if  they  signify 
things  tvithout  life,  the  adjective  is  commonly  in  the  neuter. 


1.  A  fox  and  a  goat,  being  thirsty, 
descended  into  a  well. 

2.  A  bat,  a  bramble,  and  a  cor- 
morant, having  formed  ΐ\  partnership, 
resolved  to  lead  a  trading  life. 


Αλωττηξ  και  τξαγος,  δι• 
ψαω,  είζ  φξεαξ  καταβαίνω.® 

Νυκτε^ι^,  και  βάτος,  κα< 
ο.ώυ\α,     εταιξεια.    -ϊτοίεω,•"^ 


56 


<;rf.ek  kxkrcibes. 


3.  Auhis  ΛΙαηΙίαε  iind  Curnelius 
Sylla  were  sent,  unto  whom  I3t)c- 
chus  sail!,  that  he  made  war  upon 
ihe  Romans  on  account  of  Marius. 

4.  I  go  away  to  Crasus  ami 
SarJanapalus,  being  about  to  dwell 
near  t/i^m. 

5.  i^iinon  Peter,  and  Tht/tnas, 
and  JS'alhanacl,  were  together. 

6.  Peter  and  John  answering 
to  them,  said,  It"  it  be  just  before 
(rod,  to  hear  you  rather  thaii  God, 
jii.lgc  ye. 

7.  And  aU  the  me.i  and  w^men 
wcrtfair. 

8.  Dost  thou  nor  see  tliat  shame 
ζχΛ  fear  are  innate  in  men  ? 

9.  A-s  stones,  and  bricks,  anrl 
y'iece.^  of  timber,  and  tile,  when 
scattered  about  in  confueion,  are 
ufif/ul  in  no  respect. 

10.  H  We  are  present  for  the 
•purpose  of  -delibtTatinir  respect- 
ing war  and  peace,  xchich  posse.^s 
the  greatccl  influence  in  the  life  of 
iiion. 

11.  For  indeed  tliis  very  earth, 
and  the  stont^,  and  the  wholo./'/acc 
hcri',  an  injured  and  waited. 

!2  And  hi«  mother  said  to  him, 
I^)n,  wliy  didst  thou  tlins  to  \is  ? 
behold  tliy  y'uther  and  1  grieving 
and  Surrificing  w^iif^^ce/cTiig  thee. 

13  <AaiJ-ihe  Lord  paid  to  Jo- 
shua, Lo  I  uive  into  thy  hand  Jc- 
ncho,  and  her  Xi;;"•,  being  powerful 
in  strenirth.  Now  do  thou  set  thy 
soKlitrri  in  α  circle  round  her. 


ric-arij^  Au>.cj  MaX>Jo; 
Jcai    Kofj^Xing  Συλλα?,   ίς 

Ετι  ό  Kf'it'Jcg  χαι  Σα^- 
JavaraXf.j  aciiy-i,  ΐ7Χη<Γ»ον 
oixjw  ajToiT. 

Ειμ»  όμου  Σιαοο*  Πί- 
τί&ί,  χαι  Θωαα;,  και  ,Να- 
ίαναηλ. 

Ό  δε  Τί;τξ-^  xat  lujavvr^ 
«•jTsx^iVo^ttil'^  «r^oj  ajTo; 
fiTij''  El  J.Kaio;  eiai  ϊνω- 
ΠΛ  ό  Θεΐί:,  *j  axoju)  ααλ. 
λοι/  t;  ό  Θζος,  xiivw.' 

ό  ^υν»)  f/u,i. 

Αΐ(5ω5  ic  χαι  ^ο?οί   cv}^ 

"Ωίίτί^  λκ^οί:  τί,  χαι 
cXjviof,  χαι  ^jXov,  χαι  χ£- 
ραμορ,  CTOXTuj  μ£ν  Jittw," 
cj5iv  γΐΎιίιμο;  ίιαι. 

ΊΙνω  i^txXrjiia^ij^  cifi 
co/^μοί:  και  5ΐ*>;ν>;,  Ις  μ;, 
γας  δυΐιαμις  5χω,   ίν  ό  βκς 

Όοε  μ£ν  ^αβ  ο  ^r,  και 
ό  λϋ5ο>,  χαι  άίταρ  ό  totoj 
ό  ενίαίί,  oiai(>:iP'.ji  ειμί 
ΧΜ1  xara^^uix-jj. 

Και  ECij'  crPo.c  ajrof  5 
yLr)~r,ξ  ouros"  Τίχνον,  τι 
Toifuj  f^'ij  oiItw.c  ;  1 5ου  ό 
Tn-r,^  ffj  xfti  i^'tJ  ϋίϋναομπι 
χαι  >.uc£w"'  i^r.Tfij  tfy. 

Και  ίτω'  K-iiof  «"foj 
Ιη^ου?,  liou  Syu  τα^αίι- 
5^^μι  CiTG^^rifiov  rfu  ό  Iivi- 
χω,  και  ό  βαδιλΣ'^ς  αυτός, 
ίυνατορ  Γιμι  ίν  ΐ(ί)(υς.  Ej 
έ«  ΐΓ£;Ίβ'τημ4*  a\)TQ(^  ί  μά- 
χιμος χυχλοί. 


GR££K  EXERCISES. 


57 


14.  No,  but  vain  glory,  and/^nVf,  Ou,  άλλα  χίνοίο^ια,  χαι 
and  much  madness ;  these  .things  τύφος,  xai  -κοΧυς  κο^υ,ξα• 
bilfned  γόη  to  a  coal.  '    ^        ούτο?  Cu  αιτανδξαχοω. 

15.  JVep/Mm<s,  et  jMno,  et  JMinerva-machinabmitur  vincere 
eum.»  Ν  '        ^ 

16.  -Cyrus  et  Cyaxares  cum  instriixissent  (suos)  exsjrectabanl, 
tanquaia,  si  accederent  hostes,  pugnaturi. 


CHAP.  XXIII. 


The  genitive  case  of  a  substantive  is  often  put  absolutely,  the  for• 
0  mer  substantive  being  understood. 

The  genitive  case'is  of  ten  put  absolutely,  tvsxct,  χα.ξΐν,  or  some  case 
of  Tij  or  ε'ις,  being  understood. 


1.  Lampon  the  so7i  of  Thrasy- 
cles,  and  Athcnagoras  the  son  of 
Archestratides,  and  HegesistraLus 
the  son  of  Aristagoras. 

2.  Ο  unhappy  woman,  and 
daughter  of  an  unhappy  father. 

3.  It  was  Mary  Magdalen,  and 
Joanna,  and  Mary  the  mother  of 
James,  and  the  other  Avomen  wiih 
them,  who  told  these  things  unto 
the  apostles. 

4.  He  thereupon  took  up  his 
abode  in  the  palace  of  Croesus. 

5..  Let  him  bid  his  mother  re- 
turn to  her  father'' s  house. 

6.  For  since  those  who  li\-ed 
before  us  had  descended  to  the 
abade  of  Hades. 

7.  When  Agesilaus  crossed  over 
into  Asia,  and  was  laying  waste  tl-?e 
country  of  the  king,  Tissaphernes 
made  a  truce  with  him. 

8.  I  commend  you  for  your 
prudence,  but  hate  you  for  your 
timi4ii%' 

9:  T-hej-  call  you  happy  because 
of  the  power  of  your  Avords. 


Ααμ,ττων  ί  Θ^α^υκλη?, 
και  Αύψίχγοξας  ο  Αξγ^ίΰ- 
ΐξατιδ-ης,  χαι  ΊΊ-.ησιίτ^α- 
rog  ο  Α^ί(ίταγοξθίς. 

Ω  ίυίίτηνοί,  και  ίϋίτη- 
\οζ  ^ατνιξ. 

Ειμ-ί  δ:  ό  Μα^^αληνη 
ΜαΡία,  και  Ιωάννα,  χα» 
Μα^ια  laxuQoc,  και  ό  λβι- 
«rof  tfuv  auToff,  ό  Χίγω^ 
cr^c;  ό  ατοίτολοί  ou-roj. 

"Ο  μεν  ξγ]  δίαιτα  εχω^ 
εν  K^oitfoj. 

Μητ-ήξ  ες  'π'ατηξ  avwyw 
α-ττονίομαι.^ 

Ετει  γαξ  ούτοί  w^o  εγω 
^αω=  ες  Άίηί  χατεξ-χρμαι. 

Αγ-ηιϊι\αος  εις  ΑοΊα  ότ3 
διαβαίνω,^  και  ό'^-ΒαιτΊλευ^ 
λυμαινω,™  Τισ'ο'αφε^νη^  α- 
νοχή συντιόημι."'^ 

Ζηλω  rfu  ό  vouf,  ό  5s 
δειΧια  (ίτΜγω. 

Ευίαιαονι^ω  Λ  ό  λοτοΕ 
ο  ouvay-fj• 


58 


CRSKK  EXERCISES. 


10.  C^Tiis  liaviiViT  lioanl  llii.-, 
j>iiii"'l  him  on  a<:count   of  the   niis- 

fortvne.  ' 

11.  It  \?•  not  rigiiL  to  Manie  this 
man  fuT  the  thins^s  that  have  been 
omitUd^  so  in\ich  as  to  commend 
him  for  his  ingenuity  and  diligence 
i/sc/f 

12.  I  know  snrnr  of  those  of  the 
snin»•!  aije  ae,  or  a  little  oUlt-r  tlian 
nn.-ilf. 

13.  Anii  that  he  havini?  taken 
•svn^  of  tkft  fUelSt  l^ound  Socrates 
••ith  them. 

14.  I.oailin.e  him  out  of  the 
vay,  nmlcr  some  palm  trees,  he 
ordororl  them  to  spread  8i>me  of  the 
^Median  caiyds  iiiidor  him. 

15.  He  married  o««  o/'/^i  </ciU^A- 
tf'rs  of  Ailrustus. 

IG.  The  fieh  called  Cephalus  is 
onr  of  those  that  live  in  the  fen». 

17.  The  king  of  the  Romans, 
being  now  old,  goes  io  the  house  of 
a  teacher. 

18.  !Γ  And  often  indeed  before 
thi.",  through  thy  whole  life,  I 
have  been  wont  to  esteem  lliec 
happy  on  account  of  this  disposition. 

19.  And  learn  i\Uo from  me,  my 
son,  said  he,  these  most  important 
tiling.-! ;  you  .=hould  never  run  iiuo 
dangi-r,  eiUier  in  your  own  pi-rson 
or  with  your  army,  contrary  to  the 
pacrifin•.-*  and  augurit-s. 

20.  And  these  elder  men  serve 
ill  war  .no  more  out  of  thnr  own 
country^  but  ri'mainiiig  at  home, 
ihey  judge  all  j)ulilic  and  private 
things. 

21.  In  the  ti-nt  then•  was  one  of 
liie  capiaih.•',  railed  Aglaitiiias;  a 
pi'rson  who,  as  to  his  manner,  xras 
one  of  the  harsher  class  of  men. 


6ος  oncretfu}  αυτός. 

OUtoj  ό  αντ,ξ  οοχ  oC-tJi   w 
αιτιηομαι* ό    exkeirru,'^    («Sw 

αξιοί'*  tcaivEw. 

Έγω  EnJeu™*  »  ίμος  r>.i- 

Και  auTof  λοτμ?αν^/'  β 
«•αινια  avaJcij  ό  Σ'^χξαττ,ς. 

Araycj  αυΓος  ό  ίοος  εξα, 
iro  φοίνιξ»  τις^  ό   ^Ιτ,διχος     • 
νίΚος     itroQaWu     χίΧϊυυ 

Αδ^γ,/ίΐος  δ;  "^αμ^Βω^-ίυ- 
γατ^)ξ. 

Ό  ιχ^ος  Ό  Κέφαλος  J  t* 
6  ίλοί  /?tcije  ειμί. 

Ό  'Γωμοιορ  /3αβΊλΗυ5, 
γ•ι\ξκίχω  r,6r„  iff  δίδαΰχα- 
λ.ο;  φοιταω. 

Κα'  vjWaxif  μεν  δτ,  (fu 
χαι  cpcrifov  εν  ίπ?  ό  β>ος 
Ιυίαιμονις^;^  ό  r^OToj. 

Mffviav'jj*  όε  ε^ω,  ω 
Toi.c,  χαι  Όδΐ,  φημ»,  ό  με• 
jat:'  ταξα  γα.ξ  Ίίξον  χαι 
oiwvii:  μ>;Γε  ίν  CSuuroi  μr,- 
6.•τοτε,  μϊ;ίε  εν  ό  σ7^«ιια, 

Xr.JjVs'j'J.   '■ 

Ο1ι7ος  δι  γΐζαιης  σΤξα' 
v^s\j(J"  ufv  ουχετι  εξω  ό' 
iajroy,  01X01  is  μένω,  ίι. 
xa^ij  ι  73   xoivof  cnj  χηι  β 

I'^IC.C. 

F.v  ι  ίχηνη  ς-υ^5(ανα.''  T»f 
ειμ!^  ό  Tfl^iapj^oc^  Α^λαϊ- 
νιδας  ο-'ομα,"  a»7;f,.  τρο- 
irof,"  ό  (Τ^^υφ'οί  avJj^oj-aOj, 


GREEK  KXEIiCISES* 


99 


Μη  γαξ  ίίμί  εχ  Δαξίης 

ο  'Τ(?ταβ'')ΓηίΓ,   Ό  Α^ίαμ^ίΤ, 
ο  Αξμ.νης,  Ό  TsTfTTncr,  Ό  Κν- 

*■/]<:,  ό  Αγ^α.ψ.ενϊ]ς  ^ινβμαι,"•ί 


.  2δ,  r^or  Ι  should  not  be  descend- 
ed froin  Darius,  the  sun  of  Hys- 
(aspes,  the  son  of  Arsa>nes,  the  son 
of  Armnee,  the  eon  of  Te'ispes,  the 

^  sou  of -Cyrus,  the  so»  o/"  Camby- 

*  ses,  the  so«  of  Teispes,  the  5i^«  o/* 
Achtsmenes,  if  I  did  not  take  in- 
•stant  vengeance  upon  the  Athe- 
nians. 

23.  Si  \-elIes  hospitem  impellere,   te,  cum  in  urlcm  ipskts 
venisses,  accipere,  quid  faceres  1 

24.  Et  illic  germana;  nostra;,  •  leges  qua;  apud  irferos  sunt, 
*haudquaquam  benigne  te  excipieut. 


CHAP.  XXIV. 

Adjectives  signifying  plenty,  Λvorth,  condemnation,  power, 
difference,  desire,  memory,  knowledge,  and  their  opposites, 
.  f'' quire  the  genitive. 

Verbals  compounded  with  the  privative  a,  and  those  ending  in  ixofj 
govern  tL•  sreiiitive. 


1.  Life  is  fidl  of  many  cares. 

2.  The,  Λvhole  world  is  full  of 
traitors. 

3.  Our  houses  are  destitute  of 
friends,  hut  ftdl  of  assassins. 

4.  To  me  then,  Socrates,  being 
yuch  a  man,  seemed  to  be  deserv- 
ing of  honour  rather  than  of  death. 

5.  Think  that  they  who  conceal 
fire  worthy  of  the  same  punishment 
Avith  those  who  openly  couimit 
offenou. 

C.  To  be  master  over  sleep,  so 
as  to'be  able  both  to  lie  doAvn  late 
and  to  rise  up  early,  and  to  take 
no.repose,  if  there  should  be  any 
n»ed.  ||^ 


Πολύ?    μ^<ίτος    ίίμι    ϋ"« 
ΙΙας   ό   οικουμ.Ηνο^''   μεί- 

Στε^η  φίλος  εξ-ημος,  οΐ 
(5'  ατολλ-οντί^  νΧεος. 

Ε^ω  μ,ίν  5η,  ΣωχξαΐΎ^, 
TciouTog  ε»μι,  Οοχεω"  τιμή 
αξιο^  ίίμι  μάλλον,  τ^  6α- 
να,τος. 

Νομίι^ο  ό  αντοί  ειμί  ζγ,- 
μια  άξιος  ό  ffuyx^uvrt^  « 
εξαμα^τανω.  β^  . 

Ό"*  OS•  ύ*νο5  ίγκξαττι^ 
Είμ»/  ωίτε  ίυναμοΜ  xcu 
οψ»  χοιμαω,?•*  χαΤ  ίτ^ωι 
«νκίτημι,•  χα»  o^^urvsw,* 
ει  η  J?i. 


60 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


7.  Yon  are  guUiy  of  the  same 
ignorance  with  others. 

8.  Doing  nothing  at  variance 
either  it'iVA  nis  country  or  his  own 
disposition. 

9.  And  thoTi  shall  not  be  wiih- 
oiii  tasting  of  all  dtlightful  things, 
anfl  sluilt  hve  laithout  experiencing 
troublesome  things. 

10.  Melanipus,  the  son  of  Amy- 
theoft,  appears  to  roe  not  to  have 
been  ignorant  of,  but  icdl  acquaint- 
ed with,  this  sacred  rite. 

11.  1ΓΙ  say  that  those  chiefly 
are  worthy  of  praise,  who  being 
nothuig  at  first,  nevertheless  have 
advanced  themselves  to  a  high 
station,  having  appeared  worthy  of  χη. 
command. 

12.  It  is  incumbent  on  a  gene- 
ral to  be  capable  of  providing  those 
tilings  which  appertain  unto  war, 
and  capable  of  j/rocurrng  necessaries 
for  his  .ί^οΚϋίτε. 

13.  It  is  peculiar  to  man  to  love 
even  those  that  oifend  ;  and  this 
comes  to  pa.ss,  if  yon  consider 
that  they  are  3'our  relations,  and 
err  through  ignorance,  and  un- 
willingly ;  and  that  after  a  little 
you  shall  both  die;    and,   above 


ει,αι  ό  aXXoc.  ^ 

OUTS  0  ίαυτοϋ  *a-*ijj  ours  •' 

TPOflTOJ. 

Και  ό  μεν  Tfcrvoj  ουίε,'ί; 
αγζ•^(ί~οζ  ε/μι,  ό  Jg  χαλε^τοδ 


Δοχευ  εγω  Μελααιτου^  ί 
Α,αυίεων,  ό  dj/Jia.  oiroff  ο«χ 
ει,αι  αοαηί,  αλλ'  εμιτειρο^. 

Φημ,ι  ούτοί  μαλιίτα  ειται- 
νος  άξιος  ειμί,  Idog  ί  μη(5εΐ5°^ 
εξ  οίξχτ)  ειμι,  όμω^  ε-τι  με^α 
ττξο-χ^ξΒω,^  a^ioff«ooxiw*  α^- 


Πα^αιίχΓνίαο'τιχοί  ό  tij  ό 
ΑΤολεμοί,  ό  ίτρατηχος*  ειμι 
χίη,  και  «όρι(Ττιχο$  ό  ειτιτη- 
όειο5  ό  ίτ^ατιως-ηί.  * 


all,  that  it  did  not  hurt  you ;  for 
it  did  not  make  your  mmd  worse 
than  it  was  before. 

14.  Et  quum  intueretur  omncm  Hellespontum.  navibije 
roopcrtiun,  omnia  vero  littora  atcjue  Abydenorum  catnpo* 
huTninibus  rcfcrtos,  ibi  so  beatum  proidicavil. 


I  Jio;  av^putc;  φιΧΐ:^  xm 
ό  vlaiu'S  οότος  δί  δίνομαι, 
εαν  (ΤυμίΤΡοίΤτιτΤη  ffoi,  οτι 
χαι  (ί•ογγ£νΊ]ς,  χα  ι  δια  αγ- 
νοια,•  χαι  asxuv  ύμαξτανω' 
και  ύς  μετά  ολι^ο^  αμφο- 
Ti^og  ίνηίχω,  χαι,  τ^ο  ι:ας', 
ότί  ου  βΧαΊτΙω"  (fu•  oj  γαξ  ο 
ίί^εμονιχον  tfu  xoxof  iroisu  η 
ΊΤξοίάεν  ειμι. 


CREEK  EXERCISES. 


«1 


CHAP.  XXV. 

The  comparative  degree  requires  the  genitive,  when  it  is  translated 
by  than. 


1.  The  possession  of  virtue  is 
jnorc  excellent  than  wealth,  and  more 
v,seful  than  noble  birth. 

2.  An  honourable  death  is  more 
tligible  than  a  base  life. 

3.  We  suffer  throughout  life, 
other  things  more  lamentable  than 
this. 

4.  There  is  a  time  \vhen  silence 
will  be  better  than  speech^  and  there 
is  a  time  when  speech  is  better  than 
silence. 

5.  If  these  things  be  just,  they 
are  better  than  wise  things. 

6.  But  I  think  no  acquisition 
more  noble  or  more  splendid  for  a 
rnan,  especially  a  ruler,  than  virtue, 
and  Justice,  and  generosity. 

7.  The  servant  is  not  greater 
than  his  master,  nor  the  apostle 
greater  than  he  who  sent  him. 

8.  In  order  to  have  men  obedi- 
ent, notliing  is  more  useful  than  to 
seem  to  be  wiser  than  those  who  are 
governed. 

9.  \\Ti6ther  are  these  mathe- 
maticians superior  as  to  bocorning 
better  than  other  men  1 

10.  IT  Do  you  ν,Λύν,  tell  me, 
having  gone  about  to  inquire  of 
one  another,  Is  there  any  nevrs  1 
ΥοίΛίά\ΐ\.\  can  be  more  novel  than 
>h^^an  a  Mg-^donian  namely  re- 
•I'umg  Greece ireneath  his  sway? 

11.  But  if  the  enterprise  appear 
greater  than  the  former  one,  and 
iRore  iabaricus  and  more  danger- 


O  α^ετη  χτηΰΊί  "ίτλουτί^ 
■Λ2ζ\ττ{^ΐί,  Χξ'^'ί'Ιί'Οζ  ίε  εύγε• 
ν£<α  ειμί. 

Αιρετοί;  xaXog  όανατο^  ο 

Έτε^οί  αΙτος,  ι(αξβ.  β 
^ωη,*  ίταΰ'χω'"''  οιχτξος. 

Ειμί  5'  oil  Λ}/η  Xoyo? 
χρειττων  ^ινομαι^  αν  £<μι 

δ'  ού  tft^rj  "Κογος, 

Ει  SixoLwg,  ι  (ίοφος  Χζειτ, 

των  ό5ε. 

Έγω  δί,  ουδείς  νομίζω  ji 
αντ^ξ,  αΧΚως  τε  χα»  α^ων, 
καΚος  ειμί  χτήμα,  ουδέ  λαμ- 
προί:, αξετΎ],  χαι  iixaiotfuvij, 
χα»  ^ενναιοτϊ]^. 

Ουκ  ίιμι  δο\ι\ος  μέγας  h 
χυξιος  αυτο£,  ούτε  ατοίτολος 
μέγας  ό  πεμνω^^  αυτός. 

ίχο,  ου(5εΐί;  ειμί  ανυύιμος,  νι 
φξονιμος^  δαχεω^  είμι  δ  αξ. 
χω.ε 

Τίοτερην  *^οεχω  oCrog  ό 
μηθτ,μαηχος,'η ξος  ο  /οελτιων 
γίνομαι"  «  αΧΚος  ανβξωιτος  ; 
Η  βουΧομαι,  εΐίτε  εχω,  *ε- 
^ιειμι*  αλλήλων  νυνόανομαι, 
λε^ωΡ  τις  xaivog  ;  Τι?  ya* 
«ν  ^ινομαι^'*  ούτο£Γ  χαινο?,  η 
Μαχεδων  avr,^  ΛβίταίΓολί» 
μεω  ό  Έλλα? ; 

Εαν  δί  μέγας  ό  ^^αξι^  ο 
ιι'^οσ'όεν  φαίνω,™  χαι  ειηττϋ- 
νος,  χα»  ί'ϊιχινδυνςί,  αξιοω  ΐ| 


6! 


CAEEC   EXERCISES. 


e\u~,  to  request  either  that  he  h?.v- 
m/T  persuaded  lead  us,  or  having 
l»con  persuaded,  send  us  away  to  α 
iiriiilly  country. 

12.  Besides  thi.s  i.i  much  more 
nhsi/rd  (han  those  things.  For,  ob- 
serving closely,  I  foiind  those  same 
persona  i)racli.sintr  the  lhin?s  most 
contrary  to  their  own  words. 

13:^  .short  syllable  is  that  v/hich 
liAs  a wiovt  or  shortened  vowel,  not 
at  the  end  of  a  word  ;  so  that  be- 
tween it  and  the  vowel  in  the  next 
syllable,  there  be  not  more  conso- 
itants  than  one  simple  one,  but  either 
»ne,  or  none. 

11.  If  thou  fmdest  anv  thing 
tciier,  in  Inunan  life,  than  justice^ 
irtifh,  tempcranni•,  ixud /ortiluric,  be- 
it><?  turned  wiih  thy  whole  mind 
to  It,  enjoy  that  which  is  found  the 
l»cbt, 

15.  My  Father,  who  has  given 
Uicm  to  in:',  is  greater  than  all; 
an«l  no  one  can  wrest  them  out  of 
the  hand  of  my  Father. 

IG.  Vidcs  homines  dis.«idente3 
*actantes  hominibus  nihih  disrnis. 


9ξος  φιλιοί  (χω^α)  άφι^ι. 


En  δί  TiXuf  »ir»g  ίχβιν»^ 

είξκίλ.ω,'^  εΐΓίΓίΐί=ω,  ενάντιο; 
ό  αυτό;  λβ^οό**  £Τ(»•τ)όίι*ω. 

BPajfus  ίιμί  ίυλλα^τ,  • 
ίχ:>^  βξαχ-^-;  .pyvriSv  r,  βξα• 
χυνω,Ρ3  μη  5-τι  i-iXcjS  Xsjt;" 
fjT'jjs  Cjf,  μ»ταξυ  αυτοί  χαι 
β  SV  ό  (ξr,ς  ίυλλαεν)  ^ων/;βν, 

sig  ά«λοο;  άλλα  ήτοι  sl^  vj 
μ>;δ•  «ΐίΤ. 

Ει  μΓ;  ζΡίΐΓτων  ίϋ»ιο'χω, 
£ν  ί  ανί?ω«•ινορ  ,orf,  Jixcuc- 
(Τυντ),  «λ-/)(?«ΐ'ϊ,  ΰι^φ;ύί;^\ν,, 
χαι  ανό^ϋα,  sci  εχΕινο?,"  $ζ 
όλο?  β  ψ"ι^χ»ΐ  r^ercjj'"*  • 
χξατκίτος  sifi(fx.-j.s  ατο- 
λαοω. 

Ό  's'tt-rr?  £-,  ω,  ό  iii5cjvHf 
Syw,  ti-syos  cai  £(αι•  χαι  ςι.- 

χ£ΐ^  ό  'Χατν,ζ  tytti. 
inter  ee,   et  gravius  8»j« 


CHAP.  XXVI. 


Partitives,  and  word.'i  used  jmrtitivehj,  comparatives,  Sujerlalives, 
indefinites,  intrrrogativcs,  ami  some  numerals,  take  ofiu  then 
the  genitive  plural. 

1.  JVowje  of  mortatS  is  a  happy         Θντ,το^^'^ίις  siiu  iKcu- 
mnn.  μων  αν>;?. 

2.  And  Sffwc  o/"  them  also  fell.  Ό  (5s  xai  αντος  αβΌίνηί•- 

8.   The  younger  of  the  men..  Ό  vfof  η\ίξωτος. 


GREEK  EXOeCISBZ. 


06 


9      4.   Wilt   thou  avoid,   then,  both    S  ΤΙατίξον  ouv  spevyz."»  L  rs 
the  cities,  Λvhich  are  governed  by     euvo^swe  ceXig•^  xaj  ό  «νηί  έ 
good  laws,  an(i  the  most  orderly  of    χοίμω? ; 
mm  ? 

δ.  For  ichn  of  the  Greeks,  and 
W/ho  of  the  barbarians,  does  not 
know  ? 

6.  The\'  killed  near  thirty  of  the 
kght-armed  men. 

7.  Not  many  of  the  Inhahitnyits 
of  the  countrA'  know,  what  thing• 
this  fable  might  import. 

8.  And,  what  is  the  greatest  and 
most  glorious  of  all,  thou  seest 
thine  own  tenitory  increased,  and 
that  of  the  enemy  lessened. 

9.  But  that  I  may  know  ererj 
thinir,  in  what  meata  does  he  de- 
light^? 

10.  But  some  of  the  enemy  hav- 
ing perceived  this,  again  ran  to 
the  river,  and  discharging  their 
arrows,  wounded  a  few  of  the 
iireeks. 

1 1 .  But  Alcibiades  pursued, 
having  both  the  cavalry  and.  one 
hundred  and  twenty  of  the  heavy-arm- 
ed soldiers. 

12.  The  rest  of  his  ships,  being 
forty,  he  drew  up,  beneath  the 
wail. 

13.  Μ  It  is  the  easiest  thing  of 
all  to  deceive  one's  self,  for  what 
he  wishes,  that  each  one  also  be- 
lieves. 

14.  Upon  this,  it  appeared  to 
Xenophon  that  they  ought  to  pur- 
sue, and  those  of  the  heavy-armed 
soldiers  and  targeteers  who  hap- 
pened to  be  with  him  guarding 
the  rear,  pursued. :  but  pursuing, 
ihey  took  no  one  of  the  enemy. 

15.  In  this  pursuit  there  fell 
wumy  of  the  foot  soldiers,  and  about 


Έλλην,  7\ζ  oi  a  /3K^§t>.e»c  ; 

A'rimrHM'jr'  εγγύς  ί"|ί«- 
κοντα  ό  ψιλό?. 

Ου  ό  e-ffi^w|»i  ίΤο>.ι•ί 
itfyjat,  tic;  ίτοτϊ  οέτοί  t  y/t. 
βολο^ια  δϋνοίΐλα,ι. 

Ό  δί  -τ ας  [ΐίγας  »«ι  πα- 

Ό  ieiviv  hi   h':(t^  iiSsu,^ 

Ό  δ$  νο^-.ΐί.'Λος  β  ,«.ϊν  τ^ς 
αΐίΤίανομα),'  ίταλιν  •τξίγ^^'' 
sirt  ό  νϋ~αιιοζ,  χα»  τοξί;.-*! 
oXiycj  ri-s-^uixui^  e  Έλλην. 

Α>Λίζιαδ•ης  δ$  (Jiwxw,^  sp^w 

Ejxotf»  χαι  έχατον. 

Ό  (5s  λοι*05  ό  νανί,  TS^r- 
τα ξαχο'η  α  $ιμι,  ίίΤο  ό  TSij^tj 
ανΐλκυω.* 

'Γαίιοί  άίτα^  ειμί  α.έτ•••» 
εξαναταω,^  ός  γαξ  /3βυλβ- 
μαι,  οΰτος  ίχαιίτος  χαι  οομκι. 

Εχ  ούτο^,  Ξενοφών  Soxtw* 
διωκτϊο^  ειμί/  και  ίιωχω'  4 
oirXiTyji  και  ό  ιτελταίτη^  β 
τυγ-χ^ίίνω^  (fuv  αυτό?  οτΤίίιίβ. 
φυλακεω•?  ίιωχω  ίε  ϋνύας 
χα<Γαλαμ§ανω-  ό  τολεμιοί. 

Εν  ojrog  ό  διω^ίς  δ  ^ϊ^»ί 
α'ττοόνησ'χω*  croXwf,  xosi  9  iff. 


64 


OREE^  EXEKCISES. 


eighteen  of  the  cavalry  ^erc  taken 
alive  in  the  valley. 

16.  As  are  the  eyes  of  bats  to 
the  light  which  is  by  day,  so  is  tlie 
intelligence  of  our  soul  to  thorfe 
things  wliich  are  by  nature  ihe 
most  manifest  of  all  things. 

17.  In  Lybia,  the  Carthaginians 
govern  and  the  Lybians  are  go- 
verned ;  which  then  of  these  dost 
tliou  think  to  live  most  plea.santly  ? 
Or,  ff  the  Grecians,  in  whom  thou 
art  th^'-self,  which  seem  to  thee  to 
ride  mo.st  pleasantly,  those  who 
rule,  or  these  who  are  ruled  ? 

18.  lie  believed,  that  thvse  of 
the  persons  who  associated  with  hiin 
thai  embraced  the  things  which  he 
approved,  wfcdd  be  good  friends 
Luth  10  liimsclf  and  to  others. 

19.  Cum  et  bruta  aninuilia  doceant,  et  faniulum  ignnvum 
ac  incrtein  nulla  re  dignum  esse  ducant,  solos  vero  se  ipso• 
iicgligiuit,  planum  est  ahjcctis  eos  scrvurum  esse  siHiilos. 

20.  Crilias  quidem  omnium  in  oligarchia  avarissimus  et 
violentissimus  fuit :  Alcibiades  autem  omniurii  in  statu  populari 
ifUcmperantissimus  el  peiulantissimus  et  viulentissimus. 


λα7.μ?ανω  ΰι;  Q>i7j.xai6ix.a. 

'V-i-ni'  ό  ό  '.unrecf::  ομ/ια 
ir<"jg  ό  (fsyyos  ?χω,   ό  με-α 

ψυχή  ό  »οϋί  ir^os  ό,  ό  i'ji»;, 
φανεροί  •τας. 

Εν  ό  Λι^Ι,η   Ko(f)(r,iovi5i 

ouTOg  ojv  irori'iiS  ^,Ο'^ς  οιμα» 
^αω  J   η  ό  Έλλην  £ν  Ις  χαι 

ό  ατοίί^ομαι  ό(Γ«•ε?  auroj 
ίοκιμα^ω,*  ίακτου  τ£  χβι 
αλλοζ  yi^.og  αγο,ίος  ίιμ*. 


Oil  ΑΓ.  XXVII. 

FTAfrt  Είμι  and  γηαμαι  signifij  pos.^estion,  property,  i>r  duty, 
thcij  govern  the  genitive. 

Verbs  of  beginning,  admiring,  wanting,  remembering,  blam- 
ing, valuing,  sparing,  and  the  like,  with  their  contraries,  govern 
the  genitive. 

Verbs  derived  from  comparatives,  or  in  which  the  idea  of  com- 
parison is  involved,  together  with  many  verbs  coining  from 
nouns,  and  equivalent  in  meaning  to  the  primitive  with  the  •«*- 
Stantive  verb,  reijuirc  the  genitive. 

1.   It  belongs  to   those   %cho  con-         Ό  «-«χτ,  vixaw»^  χαι  ••• 
fucr  in   the   battle,    to   conunand     «j^^oj  ίιμι. 
also. 


GKEEK  EXERCISES. 


•s 


2.  To  use  Λ-iolence  then  is  not 
/λ;  part  of  those  who  practise  wis- 
dom, but  to  do  such  things  as  these 
is  the  part  of  those  who  possess 
strength  without  reason. 

3.  It  is  the  part  of  a  villain,  that 
he  die,  having  been  condemned  ; 
but  of  a  general,  while  fighting 
νάύι  the  enemy. 

4.  It  i.s  the  pari  of  those  who 
are  involved  in  the  greatest  difficul- 
ties, and  destitute  of  resources,  and 
held  hy  neccs.?ity,  and  worthless  too. 

5.  But  when  the  victory  belong- 
(J  to  .dgesilnus. 

6.  I  will  go  to  that  quarter, 
tvhcnce  it  appears  to  me  there  is 
an  opportunity  to  begin  the  fight. 

7.  Unsocial,  lawless,  homeless 
is  he  who  delights  in  civil,  cniel 
icar. 

8.  He  taught  that  the  tempers 
which  scen^to  be  best,  stand  most 
in  need  of  iMtruction. 

9.  And  they  remember  Aviih 
pleasure  their  former  actions. 

1 0.  For  no  one  of  the  fugitives 
m  the  dangers  of  hRlt^^lamcs 
himself  but  hig-  genera^^nd  his 
tomrades,  and  all  rathe^  J 

11.  And  all  ihe  citizens  ^nd 
neighbours,  both  men  and  women, 
ihar&d  in  the  feast. 

12.  And  entertaining  great  hopes 
that  he  will  surpass  all  in  the  ροΛί^Γ 
both  of  speaking  and  acting. 

13.  I  saw  even  the  best  over- 
CMne  by  the  afections  which  tne^  .^ 
cherished   towards    iheir  children 
and  their  wives. 

•l-i'^In  oifeiing  up  small  sacri- 
ficeefrom  small  means,  he  thought* 


•  Ojx  ouv  I  φ^ονηοΊί  a.(i\iuS 
0"^  βιάζομαι,  άλλα  ό  ΐ(ίχνζ 

άνευ  y\up.rj  εχω^  ό  roioyT•? 

Καχου^χοί  μεν  ειμί,  xetvu* 
Κίτοίνη'ίχω•''  (ίτξίχττ,γοζ  Of, 
μσ.-χριχαι  ο  «τολεμίο^. 

ΑτοΡο?  ειμ»  χαι  α,αηχβνβ^ 
χαι  avuyxri  εχω,  χαι  oCt»5 

Ετει  5ί  ό  v(xr)  Aj'T;5'i>^»g 
^'ίνομαι.Ρ" 

Ej  W  δι  ατειαι'  εχειίε, 
ό/?:ν  ε^ω  ioxsw  χαι^ο^  ίιμι 
«ρχω•"  δ  μάχη. 

Αφξγιτ^)ξ,  αίεμιο'τοί,  ανίβ*- 
Tfof  ειμί  εκείνος,  Ις  ιτο>^μος 
ε^αμαι  ε•τι5•/]μιο?,  οχ^οει^. 

Διόαίχ^  ότι  ό  ,β^λτιΤτο^ 
ioxiw?  ειμί  φυ^τΊ^  μαλκΓτα 
crai^sia  ίεομαι. 

Καί  ϊ;0;ωί  με^^αλαιβς 
ίτ^'ηξίί  μναω."* 

OuJc  γαρ  εν  ο  ό  *ολεμο5 
xiviuvif  ό  φενγω^  οηδιις  έαυ- 
τ(3υ•^|(ί•ηχορεω,  άλλα  χαι  ό 
<!τξαττ]γος  χαι  ό  (cov)  νλη- 
tfiov,  χαι  'χας  μάλλον. 

Και  #αί  τολιτηδ,  χαι  ό 
•κζοϋ-χωζος  ανη^  χαι  νυνη 
μετέχω^  ό  εο|•τη. 

Και  με^α^  ελ«Ίί  εχω  iraj 
ίιαφε^ω  ό"^  ίυναμαι*^  Xsyw 
τε  χαΓ  'ίΤξατ'Γω. 

Ό^αω^  ό  ετιόυμια  ό  τε^ι 
ο  •ταΐ5  χαι  ό  ^ννη  q  ^6λτιcft 
ros  νταομαι.κ 

©jfl'/a  5ε  fjw?  μιχ^ off  α•?Γβ 
μικ^ο?,  ουίεν  ή^'εομαι  μείον  i 


F$J 


GRE£K  EXERCISES. 


ββ 

thai  he  was  in  no  respect  inferior 
Ιυ  ih'jse  who  sacrificed  much  and 
kirgely  from  many  an<l  extensive 
rucuns. 

15.  Who  will  find  a  flame  more 
powerful  than  lighining,  and  a 
lui^hty  crash  exceeding  the  thunder. 

1 6.  And  he  so  increased  the  city 
that  it  has  become  inferior  to  none 
of  the  Grecian  cities. 

17.  Thc3',  by  themselves,  con- 
lending•  against  those  who  were 
riding  over  both  all  Jisia  and  Eu- 
rope as  ΪΛΪ  as  Macedonia. 

IS.  Having  been  unsuccessful, 
he  is  not  t^ountable  to  the  state  ; 
tjut  having  been  saved,  will  rule 
Lhis  land  as  usual. 

19.  Some  time  after,  Inaro.=, 
Λη  African,  the  son  of  Psammiti- 
*hu.-:,  sfev,•  Acha-mencs  while  ad- 
liiinislaing  the  government  of  Egypt. 

20.  They  look  still  many  more 
afcvo,  iiJW|  others,  and  the  son  of 
'^rii\ii.^,    who   was   Icada  of  the 


l^niyii.^,     \ 
Aiassa  <:>  t.T. 


Ός  ίη  χεξαυ^ος  χξίιύίίΐΜ 

TOj. 

Krti  οίτως  αΐ/ξανω'  i  »β• 
Χι?,  ΰ<ίτε  μ.ψ^ι:  ό  'Ελ.λι,ν»^ 
ΊίαΧις  α-τολείτω.Ρ'' 

Αυτός,  χαιί'έαυτου,  ayu^ 
νιξομαι  TPog  ό  xu^iivije  Π 
ΛΛα  crag  χα»  ό  Ku'wrri  μί. 
γ^ξΐ  M-xxiiJivia. 

όμοιω;  Όδε  xojgavoj  χόο^ν. 

Αχοι<Λ=ν>;5  £Tir^'.ci„ii,t 
Ai^'jcTor,  j(Povoi:  μ£ί-£ΐΓ»•(-«ι 
φονίυω^  Ιναξ(ύ(  ό  Υαμ,υιη- 
χο?,  ανηρ  Αΐτ^. 

Πόλο;  εη  ΛΚ^»?  ^cjj  #it>,* 
χαι  aXXcf,  xato  £  «jaCiXiia 

cS}  εται. 

ΊΊί  ^  αί  ονχ||^α}'α^ομο:»* 
avi,^  ixiivoi  δΐ^ίτη,  og  >wm 


21.  IT  For  Λνΐιο  v'Oi'l•!  not  at^^ 
mire    the    can  rage   oJK  iho.^e    mc^ei 

who  i'liduTod  to  loiiTC  ih<ir  coun-  fo  ^wfcf  χαι  ό  croXig  ίχ>.ί»τ^Λ 
Iry  and  city,  having  einbarkixl  on  ΊΝβομίν^,''  £ι.ς  ό  τξίτ,ξτ,ς  t'x. 
L»oajd  their  ships,  for  the  sake»  of  βαινω,"^  ύίτε^  ό'»^  μη  ό  xeXow 
not  doinir  what  was  ordered? 

22.  For  when  any  one  niay  have 
confi's.sud  that  it  belongs  to  a  com- 
rnnnder  to  prescribe  what  mugt  be 
done,  he  ha.s  ihown  that  it  is  the 
'♦'"'V  'f  (i  subject  to  obey. 

23.  Who  not  only  thernscfte^ 
neglect  neatness  of  person,  but 
eyen  ridicule  those  who  are  car>ful 
a^out  it. 

21    Wjiinever  the  Dvi^  may 


ΌιτοΓί  γαζ  ης  ίμολο>  lu;^ 
ο  μίν  αξ'χ^^ιν  ειμί  ι"*  Τζοί- 

af^wPif  ό•»-•  cciiij'»  έτιϋίΐχ. 
ννω. 

Όί  0U  μόνον  αυτό;  ftfjia 
αμελεν,  αΧΧα  χαι  ό  ί'Τίμε' 
Χίομαιε  χαΓα>ελαω. 


Orov  ης  αγαόος  i  ©εος 


greek:  exercises 


hare  bestowed  upon  me  any  bless- 
ing,  never  tcill  I  forget  him. 

25.  I  have  indeed  been  often 
accustomed  to  luonder  at  the  boldness 
of  those  who  s}X)ke  for  them. 

26.  He  shrunk  not  from  labours, 
he  withdrew  not  from  dangers,  he 
spared  not  riches. 

27.  There  is  a  city  v:hich  a  man 
of  roj'al  race,  called  Sora?,  go- 
verned, at  the  time  that  Eucratides 
governed  the  Badrians,  and  the 
name  of  the  city  is  Perimuda. 

28.  He  thought  that  he  ought 
to  abstain  from  drtinke)incss  in  tb.e 
fame  manner  us  from  madness,  and 
from  excess   in  eating  in  the  same 


■β' 


δίδί,ιμί, 
ύανο;'"  αΐΐτο.'Γ 

ΤΙο\Χαχις  μεν  ίαυμ,Λ^ω' 
C  τολμν,  ό  λί^ W?  ί-^ίξ  αντος. 

Ου  τον&ί  ίφιτιμι,'""  tu  My. 
(5uvoi;  αφιο'τημ),'^  ου  χ^τ;μ<ι 

ΙΤολι^  ειμί  ος  αξχι,Ρ  Σί•)ξ(»ς 
όνομα,  ο.ΊΐΥιξ  γενζς  βαίίΧιχύς^ 
ίτε  ΧΟΛ  βο.χτζιος  «I'XW'  Εν- 
χξατίδη',  όνομα  ι!;  •  cc>.»j 
ΙΙϊίΐμΛίιΰα, 

M;drj  μΞν  α•7τεχο;"'^  βμ;ι«»ί 
αομο.Γ  χξ'η  χαι  μανία,   «"ir 

ΰς  χαι  c/fyia. 


manner  asfrotn  sluih. 

29.  Ergone  putas,  inquit,  ύ  q.uis  diligentcr  riiri?  etlaia» 
equcstres  capias  qute  hie  sunt,  illas  longe  prccstuturas  ali-k 
armorum  equorumque  apparatu,  ac  ordinc,  el  prompte  peri- 
cula  advcrsus  hostes  subeuudo,  si  existimarent,  hcec  faciente*, 
se  luudem  ac  gloiiam  conseeuturos  1 

30.  Hoccine  dicis  mi  Socrates,  inquit,  ejusdcm  esse  hoinirtis 
fclioro  et  exercitui  prieesse  ? 

31.  Ne  tu,  mi  iN'ichomachid<?.=:,  inquit,  homifies  adniinistxainisi 
iamiliuris  rei  penios  contcmpscris. 


CHAP.  XXVin. 


Verts  expressive  of  any  of  the  senses,  except  thai  of  sighi,  govern 
the  genitive. —  Verbs  of  sight  govern  the  accusative. 

Th4  Attics  and  other  writers  freguenthj  ?nake  verbs  of  hearing, 
end  nometimes  those  which  dtnoie  the  i'peraiioi%s  of  the  t/ifur 
smses,  govern  (he  accusative, 


1.  Wonder  not,  Ο  Cyrus,  if 
some  appear  dejected  after  having 
htard  ths  things  which  are  announced. 

2.  Since  1  indeed  hearing  some 
j^irsons  praised  because  they  iire 


Μη  έα\)μαζω,  ω  Ki^foir, 
El  7•,ς  (fxyd^wxHi^u*  ακούω* 
ό  ayyiXy.u.'^ 

*Πζ  εγωγε  axouw  ης  ειται- 
viw.«  ΐτι  νόμιμο;  ανη^  ειρ.(, 


53 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


men  observant  of  laws,  think  that 
ht;  who  knows  not  Aviiat  law  ii, 
voukl  not  justly  obtain  this  praise. 

3.  Whilst  I  was  a  boy,  hearing 
Homer  and  Hesiod  relating  the 
wars  and  dissensions,  not  only  of 
the  demigods,  but  even  of  the  gods 
themsclvc«. 

4.  For  if  the  stag  smell  the  grotnid 
lately  disturbed^  he  hesitates  to  pro- 
ceed. 

5.  They  will  be  quick-scented  if 
iho}'  scent  th-'  hare  in  places  bare  of 
vegetation,  dry,  sunny,  as  the  sun 
is  approaching  the  meridian. 

6.  Bnt  when  ihe  evil  .«pint  smelt 
the  smell,  he  flod  into  the  most  dis- 
tant pari.s  of  Egypt,  anil  the  angel 
bound  him. 

7.  Rcflocling  upon  these  tilings 
and  being  di-jected,  few  of  them 
towards  evening  lasted foud. 

8.  Cyrus  was  delighted  with 
these  things  ;  he  wi.shc•  therefore 
that  thou  also  taste  them. 

9.  Accursed  be  the  man,  who 
cateth  bread  until  evening.  And 
all  the  pcoiilc  iasttd  not  brt.aJ. 

10.  AVhereas  the  honourable  and 
the  good,  though  the}•  desire  both 
gold  and  fuie  horses,  nevcrihelese 
are  easily  able  to  absfcin  from 
these,  80  as  not  to  touch  ihcm,  in 
tippodition  to  Avhat  is  juit. 

11.  liut  in  the  woody  placoa 
there  is  a  stronger  scent  than  in 
those  bare  of  vegetation  ;  for  the 
hare  running  through,  and  fre- 
quently couching,  {ouc/ns  nitmy 
things. 

12.  If  therefore  any  one  of  you 
is  cither  incUaed  to  touch  my  nght 


οιμκι  μη   αν  Jixaru^  ^i7oζ 

i\oiu'i  rig  νομ.05  ειμί. 

Αχ£ΐι  μίν  εν  ■ταΐίΡ  ΐιμι,ί 
axojco  Όμ>;Ροί  κ«ι  'JldoJcj 
τολίμοί  χα)  ύΐο.'ίις  uir,ji(,- 
μαι  ου  μόνον  ό  ήμιό;οί,  άλλα 
χοι  ctjToi  ό  6ζος. 

Εαν  ^α*  ό  e'ka:pr,g  ίίίφξαι• 
νομαι  (yr))  vJujiTri  χινίω,' 
ίνίωτεώ.'" 

Ε.^ιν  δί  ίψ.ι  εαν  ό  λη^ν^ 
οίφ^αινομαι  εν  τοτο^  4-•λοί, 

ετέιμι.*? 

Ό•Γ5  IJC  ο(ί-'''7!νομαι•  • 
(ίκιμονιον  ό  οίΓμη  φευ^  uj'  fi; 
ό  a^uTOiTcg  (χω|ΐον)  Αιγίΐτ. 
της,  χαι  δ$ω^  auTOj  ό  £»77** 
λο?. 

Οίτοζ  εννοεοο,™  χαι  α^^ιχ^ς 
εχυ,  ολι^ο,  μεν  αυτός  Hi  ι 

Our  OS  r.Jij  i  Κυ|05•  /3β¥. 
λομαι     oyv     χαι    ffv    οί/η; 

ΕτιχαταΡατοε  (ΐ'μι)  ό  α»- 
6^^)'Τος  ός  ς;αχομοι  αξτος  :νζ 
iff-Kifa'  Και  oux  j-fwu"• 
vrag  ό  λαοί  olpto:. 

Ό  (Ji  χαλο;  xdynioc,  trt- 
όυμί^ιΙΓ  Jcai  xjvCiov  χαι  1•τ•το$ 
αγαύο;,  Ιμ.-^ς  o«to.C  ^aStug 
(5ϋνημαι  ατίχω,™  (ΙοίΤτε  μη 
άίττω™  aufof,  ταΡα  ο  ίι. 
χαιο;. 

Εν  δ(  i  ύλωίηί  μάλλον 
η  tv  ό  φίλο;  ο^ω,  ίιατ^εχΜ 
^α^  ό  Χηγί,ις,  χαι  οναχαίι. 
^υ,  aTTu;'"  τολνί. 


Βι  τ»ς  01/»  iu  η  isj^ioj  (χί»^) 
/ύβυλομαι  •  SjMf  airrw,™*  ») 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


β9 


iane/,  or  wishes  to  gaze  upon  my 
fjc,  while  I  am  yet  alive,  let  him 
approach. 

13.  We  therefore  standing  near, 
both  saiu  (he  thins;-s  which  v!erc  do- 
ing, and  heard  than  drf ending  Owm- 
selves. 

14.  And  indeed  I  saw  also  those 
much-(alked-of  sights,  Ixion,  and 
Sisyphus,  and  iht  Phrygian  Tan• 
ialus  suffering. 

15.  I  see  muck  land,  and  a  cer- 
tain large  lake  floxoing  around  it, 
and  mountains,  and  rivers  larger 
than  Cocytus  and  Pyriphlegethon, 
and  very  small  men. 

16.  I  hear  of  these  things  also  ; 
but  ΛvhctheΓ  they  be  true,  thou, 
Ο  Mercury,  and  the  poets  may 
know. 

17.  Point  out  to  me  now  the  fa- 
mous cities,  of  which  we  hear  be- 
low ;  Ninus  the  city  of  Sardana- 
palu3,  and  Babylon,  and  Mycenae, 
and  Cleona:;,  and  Ilium  itself. 

18.  A  horse  fears  a  camel,  and 
endures  not  either  to  sec  its  form  or 
smell  its  scent. 

19.  And  having  caused  him  to 
approach,  he  kissed  him  ;  and  he 
tmelt  the  smell  of  his  garments,  and 
blessed  him. 

20.  INIy  father  has  neglected  the 
land.  See,  how  m^'  eyes  are  open- 
ed because  I  tasted  a  small  portion 
of  this  honey. 

'  21.  IT  I  know  both  the  number 
of  the  sand  and  the  extent  of  the 
pea ;  I  imderstand  moreover  a 
dumb  person,  and  I  hear  hiin  who 
speaketh  not. 

22.    Having  sallied  forth,  and 


όμμα  ούμρ^,  ^aoj»  sri,  rfo- 

Έ,φιίνν,μ.Ρ  ουν  £νω,  opcf.u' 
τβ  ο  ^ι^νομαι,?  και  ακούω'  » 

Κ«ι  μην  χαχ3ΐνος  ίίδω'  * 
^-jouOvts,""  ό  Ιξιων,  χαι  ό  Σι- 
δυφοί:,  και  ό  Φξυξ  Τανταλοί 

Ό^ω  y  η  ίτολυ?,  και  λ/μν-/} 
TIC  με  J  ο  ζ  ΊΐΒξί^^ίω,  και  ο^λ(:^ 
χαι  τοταμος  ό  ΚωκυΓΟ?  χολ 
Πυ?ιφ>.ετίίων  μ-εγας,  και 
Άνβξίύΐτος  -jravy  (Τμικ^ο?. 

Ακούω  και  oirog•"  ει  Ss 
α^Ύ^ίτις  ίίμι,  tfu  αν,  ω  Έ^» 
μη^»  'ία'  ό  ιτοι/,τηί  ίι5ω.* 

*0  ίτΌ>.ΐί  ο  ε^^ιιί-ήμ.αζ  ν,διι 
ίεικνιιμΓ  s^w,  Ός'^  ανουω  κά- 
τω• ο  Nivcf  *  2af'0avaira- 
λοί,  και  Βαβυλων,  και 
Μυκ/]ναι,  και  Κλϊωναι,  και 
ό^  Ιλιον  auro?. 

Κάμηλο?  Ί-ϊΤίτο?  φο§ίω,'• 
και  ουκ  κνεχω™  ούτε  ό  ι5εα 
αυτο5  Ιξαω,  ουτί  ο  ο5μη*  eC- 
φ^αινομαι. 

Και  εγγίζω^  φίλεω'  αυτοί* 
και  οίφ^αινομαΓ'  δ  οί'μη'»  4 
ίματίον  atrrei,  και  ευλο^ίω'' 
αυτό?. 

AitaWcfidu'  ό  *ατηρ  ε j/ω 
ό  ^τ)  ιί:,  ίιοτι  ει5ω®  ο  οφόαλ- 
μοί  ε^ω  ότι  ^-ευω""^  βξ^'Χ^ί* 
tic:  (μεροί)  ό  μέλι  ούτος. 

Εκίεω"'"  5'  ε^ω  ψαμμο^ 
τ'  α^ιί^μορ,  και  μετ^ονΡ  ^α- 
\a.<S<Sa,  και  κωφοί?  ίυνιημι, 
και  ου  φωνευω?  ακονω. 

Ειτεξε^ομαι'  χαι  J  ου^ 


70 


CREEK  EXBRCI9B8. 


Imving  boMly  aitarktd  the  rear, 
thiey  slew  many,  iiml  cuuipcllfil 
Λ  parr  of  them  even  lo  fly  ;  un;U 
Cn.-<;us  having  recalled  those  in  the 
van,  cxhoried  ihuii  lo  hall  and 
engr\gc  the  enemy. 

23.  Thon  seest  Arrives,  Ο  Cha- 
ron, and  Lacedaemonians,  and  that 
hd'f-dcnd  commander  Oihryadfs,  who 
is  inscriliin^  the  trophy  \vuh  his 
own  blood. 

24.  AVhenever  thou  maycel  be 
nbont  to  apply  thtjselj  to  any  busi- 
ness, secreflj  remind  thyself  vrhat 
itort  of  business  it  is. 

25.  He  enacted  that  we  neither 
taste  Jlcsh  nor  cut  beuns,  turning 
ftom  the  table  my  pleasantest 
food  ;  and  moreover  persuading 
men  not  to  converse  for  fire  yeaii;. 

26.  This  is  in  tnith  the  very 
evil  which  I  meniioncdj  for  thou 
heareit  a  proof  of  his  madness. 


μ5ν  \νΛζας  tciSuj,*  μέ^οδ  <5» 
Γ»;  χαι  φ£ΰ^  ω'  αυτό?  avay- 
χα^ω•^  ί'^ς  ό  Fvaiog  ανα- 
xaXsw"^  ό  ex  ό  τιωτοτο^ίΐα 
<sai>o»^.au'  ίίί-ημ•"  y.ai  ίυμ- 
^αλλ.ο^"  ί  ΐΓο>.?α»οί:. 

Αξγειος  ό«αω,•ω  ΧαΡων, 
χαι  Λαχίϋαιμονίο?,  χαι  ό  ήμι- 
ovr,f  exeivof  (ί7Ρα-τ,γος  C(?^i>- 
aitjc;,  β  ETijPtt^ujf  ό  ί"^». 
ταιον  β  αυ'ο<Γ  αίμα. 

Όταν  aiTTij™  i^ev  μίλ- 
λ.ω,  i'xciJvacj^O'Eai/Tou"  ότΜ- 
es  ειμί  ό  (ξγαν. 

fso^ciiTcu,''  μητό  xfetti:* 
^cuej,""  μι^Γο  Χ'^αμοί:  ECdiu)• 

«■*^»5  α«•β~αινω  sri  is  xoi 
Tciiw  ό  avtVuiog  ίί  CEVTi 
i7og  μη  όιαλί^  βμαι. 

OCrog  ίιμι  ίητα  ό  xaxoff 
avTc;  us  syw  λί^ω,  ό  γαζ 
τα^αόίι^μα'  5  μανία»  αχ- 


Αχονω  oucoc;,^  χαι  ΰ^ 
οοχίω*^""  ανα§ιοω^  αιτοίνηί. 
χω,•  χαι  6J5  ^fjOOuf  δ  μ»). 
foi  ετι^ΐΐΑ-νυμι"  TOTe"  ου. 
το;•  fxeivog  όί  fju  f«w,• 
Ti.c     <f\t     ίϊβ^χομαι*'    νομ(^ 


27.  I  heard  of  these  things,  and 
how  thou  didst  appear  to  have  re- 
turned to  life  afler  havmjr  died, 
ΐ.ηΛ  hov.•  ihuu  once  I'idsit  .show  unto 
ihom  ihy  ihijrh  of  fTold  ;  but  tell 
me  ihi.*;  why  did  it  occur  to  ihce 
to  pa.•??  an  ordinance,  that  men  cai 
neither ^'«Λ  nor  brans ? 

28.  An  alio  quodaui  sensu  illa'attigisii  ? 

29.  Neiumquum  ;  sed  audies  cants  yxm  jam  ini?erubilitfr 
rJtdantes  mei  cautfi,  corcosque  flebilem  in  modum  alis  cnncre- 
JMntrs,  rpianilu  frequcntcs  .•-■epelient  me. 

30.  Alxdlitudinnn  aiitem,  Charon,  islam  vidcs,  navigan!^, 
icUanlcg,  in  jtidiciii  vcrsautcs,  agros  colentes,  /centis  txtrcentes^ 
Mttpem  pclcnics  ? 


χ^αμο5  ίυίιω  ; 


βΕΒΒΚ  B^Luncisae. 


η 


CHAP.  XXIX 

Τ%β  prite  or  measure  of  any  thing  is  put  in  the  genitive. 
The  matter  of  which  any  thing  is  made  is  put  in  the  gtnitht. 


1.  The  Thracians  purchase 
their  -ft-ivoa  from  their  parenlieyir  a 
ffreat  deal  of  money. 

2.  Nor,  if  Λ  peraon  younger  than 
thirty  years  sell,  am  I  to  ask  for 
L•ιv  much  he  sells  ? 

3.  For  how  much  dost  thou  offe? 
tliis  one  ?     Merc.  For  ten  mince. 

4.  Thou  mightest  in  time  be- 
come a  sailor  perhaps,  or  a  gar- 
dener ;  and  that  too,  if  this  person 
nere  were  willing  to  part  "«"ilh  thee 
for  two  oboH. 

5.  Of  which  things  some  per- 
sons having  received  small  portions 
from  hiiH. gratis,  sold  them  to  the 
re6t_/or  a  large  sum. 

6.  Far  iphat  price  is  this  man  ? 
Merc.   For  twenty  miiKe. 

7.  The  gods  sell  all  good  things 
imto  us  fj/•  our  labours. 

8.  Consider,  that  calmness  is 
sold  for  so  much,  firmness  for  so 
mtKh,  but  nothing  is  got  gratis. 

9.  The  Epidaurians,  tnerefore, 
inquired  Avhether  they  are  to  make 
the  statues  of  brass  or  of  stone ; 
the  Pythoness,  however,  permits 
neither  of  these,  but  of  the  wood 
of  the  domestic  ohve. 

10.  From  this  city,  the  barbari- 
iins  brought  over,  on  floats  77iade 
tf  skiiiSf  loaves  of  bread,  cheese, 
wine. 

11.  1Γ  Having  seen  Philip,  the 
Masedonian.  I  was  not  able  to  con- 
%ΰ,ΐίΐ  my  Keif :  he  wais  pointed  out  to 


"0  θξαξ  ojvfe^ai  I  Vi/r^ 
ναξο.   i   γονίας  χ^ημα  f>i- 

Mr,os  ψ  TojXf  i;  ftrc:  r^i&- 

τωλεω  ; 

ΠοοΌί  ύίτοζ  ftvax^fvTT'*!  ] 
ΈΡΜ.   ΔΒχα  μνα. 

Ναντη^  αν  ι'ο:ς  »)  χτ;αω- 
ξος  ίν  xat^Os  yivo^or^  xat 
ούτορ,  ην  fosXu  (fv  aircJi- 
(5ωμι°'*^  ούτοσΊ  Λυο  «foXif, 

*0ζ  ^ις  μιχζος  μίξος  <ga• 
ξα  fy.siv&f  ϊΓίΌίχα  λαμβάνω,* 
ντΰΧ-υς  L  αλλοί  σωλεω.* 

Ήαΐίος  oi<rc;  SIIJ.I ;  "ΈΡΜ. 
EixoCi  μ,να. 

Ό  ffovoj  τωλίω  syu  c«j 
c  αγαύος  βίος. 

ΕΐΓίλί^ω,     Φτ»    roflOvcoff 

αταξαξια,  ^τξοιχα  S(  avditg 
ΤΕ^ι^ινομαι. 

ETf^wTctoj^  ίκν  e  E<i- 
δυ.χιξιος  crori^ogP  "χαΧχϋζ 
τοιω"^  ό  αγα'Κμ.α,  -η  Xi^og* 
ό  δε  Πϋόια  osJcTi^of  οίτοζ 
εαω,  αλλΛ  |υλον  ί;με|Όί: 
έλαια. 

Εχ  eiroff  ίΤβλι^  β  /3α^. 
ζαξος  όια^ω*  icr*  ίχεοια•* 
διφύΐ^α,  αξτίζ,  ΐ-νζβς,Ρ  «ι- 
vof. 

ΦιλιτΊΓΌ^  β  M«xi3av  e^h) 
ίίαβμαι*  βυίε  χξαην  ίμ.«ν. 
του   ίνν«τβί   ίίμι•    βειχνι,μ/ 


Μ 


CREEK  ΕΧεΚΟΒΕβ. 


mc  in  a  certain  comer, 
rotten  shoes/or  hire. 


mending 


12.  At  the  entrance  there  is  a 
paved  Λvay  of  stone  for  almost 
three  stadia. 

13.  But  tell  mo,  said  he,  why, 
nhhough  making  thy  corselets  nei- 
ther stronger  nor  of  more  expcn- 
eive  materials  than  the  rest,  dost 
thou  sell  thcmy<yr  a  higher  price  1 

14.  And  the  rnoon  beneath  her 
feet,  and  upon  her  head  a  crown 
tif  twelve  stars. 


Kara  μίν  fcTooc.r,  (ίΐζυτ^ 
νυμι'ϊ  ειμί  16ος  Χίόοί  »c« 
ffTaiiog  TPcij  μαλι'ί•α  ct,. 

Ατο,ξ,  ς;ηαι,  Ksyu*  ty^ti 
(5ta  T15•  ovri  iff^uPof  cwrf 
<Γολυτ£λτ,<:  ό  αλλοί  ycjui  ί 
^~i«»j  'ϊΓο>ν;'5  TijXrw ; 

Και  5  σ'£>.ηνη  irtzarfc)  } 
<rov5   auro?,   Jcai    £r»    ό   χί> 

9a>.r,  «wTos  ίτίφανίί  adrrjf 
δωδεχα. 

βωμι'**  αν    ήίεω^    :ίις   i    β 
Ci>vjvcv  ffrfyavci  Ιιμι  t:vio£. 


Ιδ.  I  \voiild  willingly  sell  thee 
the  Isthmian  contests,  /ur  as  much 
as  the  crcrtc?i  of  parskxj  is  to  bo 
■bought. 

16.  Coronam   e  rosis   et  croco  coneertam   in   unguen'.Uia 
iiitingens  ei  iiiisif. 

17.  Nicias,  Nicerati  filius,  dicitur  prrofectum  foiiiniB  argen- 
teis  eiiii.«;sc  talenlo. 

13.  Enii  qtianti  dicis  ;  pecuniani  vero  deinde  solvam. 


CHAP.  XXX. 

Passive  verbs  have  a  genitive  of  the  agent  after  tkem^  iohich  ia 
governed  by  a  preposition  expressed  or  understood. 


1.  No  action  worthy  of  men- 
tion wag  performed  by  them. 

2.  ΛVhalovcr  is  fit  to  be  done  hj 
Oud,  it  is  impossible  for  man  to 
averi. 

3.  For  no  one  ever  complained 
ihat  he  u-as  deprived  of  any  thing 
by  ^igc^ilitus. 

4.  It  ip  evident  that  if  he  fhall 
icp;vrJ  fartlA-Pj  wc  $hail  b(fr^':ii,i  by 


if»<r  ε^ον  0515X0^0?. 

Ού'ίΐζ  δα  ^ινομα»*  t\  i 
Θΐύζ,  αμήχανος  airoT^frw* 
avi^cjirof. 

'  Ytc  γαξ  Α^ηΛλαβ^  ίτί- 
^ομβιι    μεν     oj(5ei?    ο.ιίεΐ5°• 

Λτ,λςί  Ιιμι  on  fi  Ti'effu 
ατίιμ,ι,'   Βτςτη^-νιμι*  int  i 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


73 


5.  -That  the  citizens  might  not 
be  infected  with  vice  by  strangers. 

6.  Say  that  thou  wilt  he  injured 
by  us  in  notliing,  my  child. 

7.  For  it  is  intolerable,  my 
friends,  to  be  laughed  at  by  enemies. 

8.  I  seek  truth,  by  tchich  no  per- 
son teas  ever  as  3'ct  injured;  he, 
however,  is  injured,  who  remains 
in  his  error  and  ignorance. 

9.  Such  things  as  these  are  done 
by  bad  poets  of  themselves,  and  by 
§ood  ones  for  the  actors. 

10.  How  is  Medea  willing  to  be 
left  alone  by  thee  1 

11.  Thou  liost,  Ο  Agamem- 
non, murdered  by  thy  wife  and  by 
JEgysthus. 

12.  For  Λvhen  Agamemnon 
breathed  forth  his  life,  having 
been  loounded  on  the  head  by  my 
daughter. 

13.  1Γ  But  there  were  some,  that 
were  even  secretly  taken  away  by  the 
Athenians  \vho  brought  succour 
fi'om  the  borders,  and  saved. 

14.  It  is  impossible,  then,  Ο 
fen"yman,  that  thou  see  all  things 
accurately  one  by  one  ;  for  it  would 
be  the  delay  of  many  years  ;  be- 
«ides,  I  should  be  proclaimed  as  a 
runaway  by  Jupiter.  •. 

15.  Thou  also  having  thrown  off 
Ibe  Macedonian  cloak,  chdst  put 
on,  as  they  say,  a  Persian  garment, 
and  thoughtest  thyself  Λvorthy  to 
be  adored  by  J\iIacedonians,  by  free- 
men. 

16.  For  do  not  all  thus  appear 
to  ihce  to    be    composed  of  two 


ιτολιτη^  ο.το  ο  ξίνος  εμ«;<- 
ίτλημι. 

Asyu,  ug  •παξα.  εγω  ου- 
(Jsig"^  αίικεω'"  τίκνον. 

Ου  γα.ξ  yikau  rX'^rog  ε| 

ZrjTcoj  ό  αληίίΐα,  υφ'  ης 
ovSiig  ifuivors  /3λα*τω•' 
βΧαντω  ί="  ό  ein[i.z\uS  είΤ»  δ 
εαυτού  α.'κα.ττ^  και  α'/νοια. 

Τοιούτο?  -ίτοιεω,  ύ'Το  με» 
ό  φαύλο?  ιτοιητη?  δια  αύ- 
το?."  ύ*ο  όε  ό  α^αόο?  δια  ύ 
CiroxfiTT]?. 

Πω?  ιΤυ  μονό?  Μήδεια  "^i• 
ίΤω  ίελω  ; 

Κειμαι,  Co.c  αλοχο?  tfipa- 
(^ω"  Aiyiffdofa  τε,  Α^'αμεμ- 

VOJV. 

Ετει  ya.^  ΐχ'κνίοϊ'  Aycn• 
μεμνων  /tjio?,  ίτληο'Ο'ω®  όυ- 
γίχττ,ζ  (1  εμο?  ίι^εξ  χαξα. 

Ειμί  δε  τι?,  ό?  και  ucro 
ό  Αί)ηνα;ο?  ό  wro  Ό  hpiov 
ε•«•ι§οηίΐ£^Γ&     χΧε^-ru^    xca 

Πα?  μεν  ουυ  tfu  ειδω^ 
χαό'  έκαίΤτο?  ακ^ι^ω?  αμή- 
χανο? ειμί,  ω  ■πο^^μευ?,  ΊΤΟ• 
λιι?  yai^  αν  ετο?  ό  διατ^ι§η 
γίνομαι•"  είτα  ε^^ο^  μεν  χη- 
fuTTOj'^  (5εΓ  xaowTTSR  α^ο- 
δξαω/?  ϋ'πο  Ό  Ζευ?. 

Συ  δε  και  ό  Μακεόονιχος 
χλαμυ?  χαταβαλλω,*  χ«ν- 
δυς,  ώ?  φημι,  μετενδυω,• 
χαι  ■κτ^οο'χυνεω  ίσο  Μακί- 
δον,  Ινο  ελευδεζος  ανηξ  αξ- 

Ου  γαξ  χαι  "ίαζ  ouru  tf^ 
δοχίΜ   tfuyxEifuu  εχ  δν^^ 


α 


74 


βκεεκ  EXERCISES. 


ptrls,  Eoul  and  body  ?  So  that, 
u'hat  13  it  Avhich  prevente  that  the 
φΊΐιΙ  which  Λν<ΐ5  from  Jupiter,  bo- 
iii  heaven,  but  that  I,  the  inorial 
part,  be  with  the  dead. 

17.  The  people  u-cro  destroyer', 
Hot  only  being  beaten  do  ten.  by  the 
s-il^li^rs,  or  trampkd  vpan  b]/  ih 
knrses,  but  also  being  oppessed  by 
Utc  crowd. 

IS.  Q,uintianni  ha\'ing•  cecret'/ 
taken  his  stand  in  the  entmnc?  of 
the  ampliitheatre,  hanng  drawn 
his  small  sword,  rushed  suddenly 
on  Commodus,  and  called  out  with 
a  loud  voice,  that  he  vas  sent  to 
him  by  the  senate. 

19.  .Pertinax  having  said  such 
thinfrs,  encouraged  the  senate  verv 
much  ;  and  being  applauded  by  all, 
and  having  received  all  honour  and 
reverence  from  them,  he  returned 
into  the  royal  court. 


ό  xcjXu:j?  εψ4,  Ό  μεν  ψϋ^4 
fv  ονξανος  ίι/Αΐ,  «ici^  fi.tu 
ex  Ζίν?,  ό  δι  6νητζς  {μίξος} 
εγω  •:αξα  ο  ι?χξος  ; 

Φί:.•»ι/  ό  5τ,μο<,  ον  f*»- 

rrf,  ονίί  τατίω  ντο  ο  W. 
cc;,  ρ.λλα  XCU  ici  g  «'λη- 
6ος  w<):<j. 

fAoocgjd    και    μί;'αί;    φωνι^ 

TPOiffiJ,''   ieo  ό  e\Jγ>XrJtς 

(,οβυλη)  aurog*^  ΣΤιτίμΐτ^. 

Toiouroff  Q  Πί^Γίνα^  i-zu* 

(-5ουλη),  χαι  c^os  'τας  ίν- 
φημ-ίξω,  ταί  τ?  τιμηΒ  χα» 
αι5ω5  ίτα^α  ajTo^  ryyya- 
tw,"  εΐ5  ό  /SarfiXiios  ίτα•.ί<'- 
Ρζο,αα»''  ανλτ). 

20.  SupcraiHS  α  mortc. 

21.  ("iportebat  quidcrn  me  forsan  prolixa  diccre,  quoad  tam 
mulla  a  ίβ  accusatum. 

22.  Isiacnodoru3  ergo  (nam  tnicidatus  erai  a  latronibus,  juxta 
Oiihacronem,)  gcmebat,  λ  ulnusque  in  nianibus  habebat. 


CHAP.  XXXI. 

Adverbs  of  time,  place,  quantity,  order,  exception,  and  the  Hkt^ 

govern  the  genitive. 
Ν  η  and  Μα  are  joined  with  the  accusative  ;  αμα  and  ίμβυ  ivith  tfk 

dative. 


1.  JS'car  the  wall.     JVear  the  wa-        ^TX}  °  '"■'Χ''^•     ^71^ 
tcr.  i  iitjf. 

2.  I   heard   behind  me  a  groat         Λχουω'  owkTw  ί^ω  φων-/) 
voice  ae  of  a  trumpet.  μί/αε  ώς  οΌλτ^  J. 


GHEEK  EXERCISES. 


7Γ, 


3.  Of  these  things  perhaps  there 
16  now  enough. 

4.  Without  thee  we  are  afraid  to 
go  home. 

5.  He  humbled  himself,  having 
become  obedient  unto  death,  even 
the  death  of  the  cross. 

6.  A  tragedy  could  not  exist 
without  action,  but  it  might  exist 
xoithout  manners. 

7.  He  sends  away  to  the  king 
those  whom  he  took,  ivithovt  the 
knowledge  of  the  rest  of  the  allies. 

S.  And'the  Assyrian  having  fol- 
lowed as  far  as  he  thought  it  to  be 
safe,  returned. 

9.  There  was  along  the  bank  of 
the  Euphrates,  a  narrow  passage, 
between  the  river  and  the  ditch. 

10.  To  perform  his  daily  func- 
tions in  that  part  of  the  heavens,  by 
being  hi  wMch,  he  may  benefit  us 
most. 

11.  As  they  rested  not  during 
the  night,  they  slept  until  late  in  the 
day. 

12.  The  Athenians  knowing 
that  they  were  not  concealed,  laid 
down  their  arms  again,  except  about 
three  hundred  men. 

13.  By  Juno  !  the  invention  is  a 
fuie  one  indeed,  Ο  Pistias. 

14.  No,  I  sioear  by  those  of  your 
ancestors  who  exposed  themselves 
to  danger  at  Marathon. 

15.  He  led  them  forth  at  day- 
break, and  ha\ing  engaged  with 
the  enemy,  sleΛV  many  of  them. 

16.  Early  in  the  morning  they 
come  to  the  sea,  and  having  gone 
into  the  way  called  Elorina,  they 
proceeded. 


AvSu   tfu,    οιχςιδδ  ατ»^)*! 
Τατεινοω'   §αυτο«,   ^ΊΛ- 

TOC,  όανατοί  5s  ΰτα\)ζΰζ. 

Ανευ  μευ  cr^alig  ουχ  ,αν 
^ινομ.αι'"'^  τξαγωΰια,  «via  δ$ 
'f\uog  τινομαι''  αν. 

Οΰτοί  Ις  λαμβάνω*  Λϋο- 

αλ}.ος  (ίυμ-μ.α-'/ος. 

Και  ι  μΐϊ  ΑιίΛίΐ&δ  Oiw- 
χω*  αγξΐζ  Ις  κίφκλϊ-,^Λΐ*. 
μαι^  £(μΐ,  αίΤΟΓ^ίΤ^.""" 

Ειμί  5b  'Καζα  avr»g  ί 
Ευφ^ατ'/)?  ιταξοδος  tf-rivoi, 
μετα|υ  ο  ιτοταμο^  Αοη  ί 
ταφξοζ. 

Ενταυόα  ό  ou^avoj  avoetf. 
τ^εφω,™  ενία  ειμί?  μ-αλΐίΤτ« 
ε^ω  ωφ«λεω.<ι 

Ώ^  ίε  ό  νυ|*  ay^uflrvsw,' 

ήμε^α. 

Γιβωβ'χω'  ο  Α^ψαιος  ίτι 
ου  λαν^ανω,'^  χατατιίτιμι"^ 
τταλ.ιν  ό-τλον  "τλην  τξίοίκβ' 
rfioj  μαλκίτα  ανη^. 

Νη  5  Ή»α,  χ«λο5  yi,  w 
nitfriaj,  ο  εύ|ημα. 

Ου,  μα  og  ίν  Ματαίων 
*|οκινδυνίυω^  ό  νξογον^ς. 

Άμα  ό  φως  ο  εζοδ^ς 
croistj,'"^  Συμβάλλω'  δί  β 
ύ*εναντιο?  "τολϋ^  μεν  auTog 
α*οχτεινω.* 

Άμα  δε  ό  Ιω<:,  αφι«νεί- 
μαι  "TPos  ό  θαλαοΊΤα,  χβΜ 
είίβαινω^  ε^  ό  όδο^  ό  EXw. 
^ινη  χαλεω?  «Ό^ευω.""* 


76 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


17.  With  his  right  hand  let  him 
seize  the  reins  near  the  withers, 
togcthn  with  the  mane. 

18.  IT  But  when  they  were  near 
ihe  fortress,  the  enemj  havijig  sul- 
Hed  forth,  put  them  to  flight,  and 
slew  a  large  number  of  the  barha- 
riajis,  and  .some  of  the  Greeks  who 
had  gone  up  with  them,  and  they 
kept  pursuing  them  UNtil  they  saw 
the  Greeks  bringing  aid. 

19.  Dost  thou  see  then,  said  he, 
h'/ure  that  grove,  a  place  which 
seems  to  be  beautiful,  and  like  a 
meadow,  and  illuminated  v.ilh 
much  light  ? 

20.  At  first  he  called  himself 
Nobody  ;  but  when  he  ran  off,  and 


Ό  όφα  ό  ηνία  τα?α  5 
axf><^ina  >va,a§avu  όμου  ό 
χαίτη. 

Ecii  us   ΐγγυς  ^-ινομαι' 

ιτω"'  ΟΜτας,  χα»  aTcxrfi- 
νω"  ίυχνοί  ό  βαξζαξος,  χαι 
Ό  (Τυναναβαινω*^?  Έλλην  τιρ, 
χαι  iicjxu)-  Ι^^χξις  Ιζ  £ι^ω* 
ό  Ελ>.τ,ν  βοτ,όεω. 

Όραω  o'jv,  φημι,  εμτροί- 
6$  ό  αλοΌ?  ϊχίΐνο?,  Toccf 
τΐί,  ίς  ί&χ5ω  xaXcg  τί  etu< 
xai  Xci/Acjvociivj.c,  και  φού^ 
ίτ&λυ?  χαταλαμίω  J 

Ό  μεν  flTj'OjTos"*  0j7I.: 
lavrou  ατοχ&,λεω,'  ε^ει  is 


Λν as  out  of  reach  of  my  dart,  he  ssiid     διαφίνγω,^    χαι     εξω    ειμί 


iliut  he  was  named  Ulysses. 

21.  No  one  having  sense,  fights 
with  his  neighbours  merely  for 
the  sake  of  conguering  his  oppo- 
nents ;  nor  sails  upon  the  seas,  only 
to  pass  over  them  ;  nor  takes  up 
the  sciences  or  arts  merely  for  the 
sake  of  the  knoitledge  itscf;   but 


βζΧος,    OJoCtfiLj   ονομάζω 
φημι. 

O-ji-e  ίτολίμεο)  ό  ττελκί 
ou5:i?,  vooj  εχω,  ivixjv  αυ- 
rcg  ci"*"  χατα^ννι^ομαΓ^  i 
ανηταιίί'ω•™?  ούτε  τλε-^  ό 
flTcXo^ocr,  ναΡιν  ό"•-'  •κΐΡαι• 
οω">  f  μόνον  χαι  μί]ν  ouJs 
ό  εμίτείΡια  χαι  «"ίχν»;  aiiroj 


all  men  do  all  things,  on  account  of    hsxa  J  ϊνιη^τ,μτ,  αναλαμ 


the  pleasures,  hunours,  or  profits  which 
arise  from  their  works. 


22.  I  think,  hj  the  gods,  that  he 
ie  intoxirated  with  the  greatne.ss  of 
the  things  which  have  been  done  ; 
but  not  indeed  that  he  choo-ses  to 
act  in  such  a  manner,  that  the 
most  foolish  of  those  with  u.^i  may 
know  what  he  is  about  to  do. 

23.  Definite  mihi,  ad  quut  usque  annos  existimare  oportof, 
homines  ct^se  juvene.s. 

24.  Vestes  quidcm  qui  commutanf./iij,'•'""'*  cas  astusgue 
causa,  comniutant. 


§ανω•  caj  (5ε  β-ίαί',Τω  cuf, 
χα»ιν  ό  ε^ι^ινομ^Γε  ό  ic 
yov  '/jiuj:,    η   xa).oc,   η  ί-,μ- 

Ε^  ω  οιμαι  μεν,  vr,  ό  Jfo.c, 
εχεινοί  μεί^'..;"  ό  μΐγί^^ς  ό 
TP'ttfCwe  ου  μενς-οι^ί,  μα 
Zijf,  ούτωτ^οηΐΡϊ'ω'"  rjatf 
Ou),  udTS  ό  «vor,T«:,  ό  νηξα 
εγω,  stoiu  ης  μέλλω  toi-w 
εχεινοί. 


CREEK  EXERCISES. 


77 


25.  Quis  enim,  absque  hac^  bonum  aliqiiod  discat? 

26.  Et,  per  canem,  Ο  viri  Athenienses,  certe  ego  patiebar 
aliquid  tale. 


CHAP.  XXXII. 

Adjectives  signifying  profit,  likeness,  obedience,  fitness,  trust, 
clearness,  decency,  facilit_y,  and  their  contraries^  and  those 
compounded  with  tfuv  and  όμου,  govern  the  dative. 

ErfTi  taken  for  εχω  to  have,  governs  the  dative. 

All  verbs  put  acquisitively^  i.  e.  verbs  o/"  serving,  i;sing,  rejoicing, 
obeying,  trusting,  discoursing,  fighting,  and  the  like,  loitk 
their  controj-ies,  govern  the  dative. 

1.  There  is  nothing  either  so 
serviceable  or  becoming  to  men,  as 
order. 

2.  To  thee  it  ΛνίΠ  be  honorable,  anci 
io  the  state  advantageous. 

3.  One  while  Me  to  a  poor  man, 
and  another  while  to  a  young  man. 


4.  Having  said  these  things,  and 
others  like  io  these,  I  descended. 

5.  Thou  λΛ  faithful  to  my  wife. 
and  io  my  family. 

6.  Every  t3'rant  is  iniyni^al  to 
hhsriy,  and  hostiL•  to  laws. 

7.  It  is  disgraceful  Io  ihoss  nobly 
born  10  live  viciously. 

8.  Behold,  I  am  really  naked  as 
thou  seest,  and  of  equal  locight  with 
ihe  other  dead  persons. 

9.  Thou  then,  0  son,  if  thou  art 
w-Ise,  As-ilt  entreat  the  gods  to  be 

fi^giving  unto  thee,  if  in  any  ihing 
;hou  hast  negleeted  thy  mother. 

10.  Ο  Hystaspes,  and  ye  others 
^'ho  are  present,  if  you  mention  it 
to  me,  whenever  any  one  of  you 
day  have  undertalvon  to  rnanry. 


Ειμί  o'j^si?  ούτως  ουδί 
ενχξ-η(ίτος  ούτε  καλο$  αν. 
όξω'ΐτος,  ύζ  ι  τα|ι?. 

Συ  xoiKos  ειμί  χαι  ό  tfo- 
"ktg  αγαθός. 

Αλλοτε  μεν  ιττωχος  ενα- 
λι^χιο?,  αλλοτδ  δ'  αυτί 
ανϊ)ξ  νίος. 

Οίΐτοί  και  5  ίΤα^αιτλη- 
tfioj  ούτος   ε*ω,*  xaraCau 

Τίκίτος  αλοχοί,  Ι  τε  ίμ-ος 
δοΐίοςΡ  ειμί. 

Τυξαννος  α.'Κας  ίχ6ξος 
ε\ευύίξΐα,  xou  ο  νομο^  svcuH' 
τιος. 

Zaw  ακίχξος  ακίχξ^ς  δ 
χαλωί  φυω.'^ε 

ίδου,  γυμνός,  ΰς  o^aw, 
αΚ'ήόως  ειμί,  χα»  κίαίτΜίκις 
k  άλλο?  νεχζος. 

Σ\)  ουν,  U  ffaii,  αν  β*». 
φ^ονίΜ,  δ  μεν  6εος  ιτα^αι- 
τεω""  «"υ^^νωμων  <fu  ειμί, 
51  τις  ιτάξαμελε»  ο  μητη^.ί 

Ω  'Ύαταίί'ΚΎ,ς,  χαι  σ  αλ- 
λο5  δε  ο  ιτα^ειμι,ε  ψ  εγια 
λέγω,  Όταν  tij  tfu  ya^fa 


78 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


you  will  know  what  kiiid  of  as• 
su!ant  I  will  even  be  to  you. 

11.  He  who  makes  most  0/  the 
sanic  opinion  trilh  us,  would  just- 
ly be  esteemed  very  able  both  in 
EpcakiniT  and  in  acting. 

12.  J  it'  fiave  no  other  good  but 
our  anas  and  our  valour. 

13.  T/ieij  to  whom  it  has  thus  ap- 
peared proper,  and  they  to  whom 
it  has  not,  have  not  the  same  com- 
mon sentiment. 

14.  His  children  were  brought 
onto  liiiii,  for  he  had  ttco  small  sons 
anfl  one  of  large  size. 

15.  Aboli.-ihing  all  those  things 
in  which  slaves  are  subservieni  (0 
their  masters,  he  enjoined  only  those 
tilings  in  which  freemen  obey  their 
magistrates. 

16.  He  did  not  use  sleep  as  a  thing 
that  had  dominion  over  liim,  but  as 
a  thing  governed  by  his  business. 

17.  He  thought  that  the  gotls 
great h'  delighted  in  the  honours  they 
received  from  the  most  pious. 

18.  But  I  perceive  some  rather 
trusting  him  than  any  of  them. 

19.  IT  And  they  entreat  you  to 
be  upon  your  guard  lest  the  bar- 
barians attack  you  in  the  night. 

20.  For  neither  was  Lycurgiis 
long  lived,  who  contended  with  the 
immortal  gods. 

21.  Consider,  said  he,  that  no- 
thing is  nearer  (in  ri'seinblance)  to 
the  death  of  man  than  sleep. 

22.  And  they  treated  Mram  well 
ou  her  account ;  and  he  had  sheep, 
and  kids,  and  asses,  and  male  ser- 
vanti,  and  female  sorvanLs,  and 
mules  and  camuU, 


Ις  τις   χαγω    ύυνε^ος   Λ 

£Ι,υΐ. 

Ό  ΐΓολ^5  όαο^-νωμ^.'ν  tyu 
foisuj/ε  διχαιωζ  αν  Xgxrt- 
χος  τε  χαι  τ^αχτίχο^  κ^ινω 
αν  ειμί. 

Eyu  c'jueis  αλΧοζ  ttyn 
αγαίος  ει  μη  ότλον  xm 
α^ίΓΤ). 

Ό  5s  οίτω  όοχε^οτ'  χον 
ό  μη,  οΰτο^  CUX  ειαι  xor.og 
βουΧη. 

Φε^ω'  ναξα  α•»το;  &  rai- 
ίιον,  UJO  γαξ  α.-ο;  ν'κ-^ς 
(Τμιχροδ  ειμί,  sig  6β  μίγας. 

Αφαι^εο/  oaOc:  JonXcj  ίίί- 
ΐΓοτη?  ό's■1^_»ί^•εiJ,*  ir?oirar- 
rur  Ό(ίος  ελευίε^ο^   α?χ^'» 

ΤίΙ(?ω.™ 

Ου  μην  ίΐίνος  γϊ  Jj^'re- 
fr,;,   άλλα   α^χωΡδ    έτο  • 

ΙΝ'ομι^ω'  ό  6εος  Ό  τα^α  » 
ενΰί'Τ,ς  ημη  jja>ax  χαι^ι•*. 

Αλλα  (ojij)  fvioi  μαλ>  »ν 
txnvoi  rKfrSiu  r,  tic  a-^T'jg. 

Kc.i  Χ:λΣί;ω  c'jXaTft,:  μη 
tfu  ετιτιόημι™''  ό  νυξ  ό  βαξ- 

Ονδ;  yap  coot  Aoxouj. 
γος  ί5ην  ΐίμι,  of  fcl  ίίος 
ετον^ανιο;  ίξιζι^.^ 

EwoiW^  ΰ£,  φ^μι?  **■» 
tyy\/S  μεν  ό  ανί^ω*ι*οί  dct- 
νατοί  οιίίΐί  ειμί  ίτνον. 

Και  ό  Α|ραμ  ίυ  χρα^ι"* 
£ια  ouTof,  και  γίνομαι"  αν- 
τοί  fffotoTov  χαι  μ.οΰ-/^^ς, 
χαι  ovof,  χω  ιται?,  χαι  ται- 
ίιίχη,  χαι  ημιβνο^,  χαι  χα. 
μηλ&ί. 


GREEK  EXEECISSe. 


7β 


23.  For  I  hear,  as  perhaps  you 
also  do,  that  those  who  spoke  (in 
public)  in  the  time  of  our  forefa- 
thers, whom  all  of  the  present  day 
praise  indeed,  but  are  far  firorn 
imiiating•,  pursued  this  mode  and 
custom  of  managing  the  govern- 
ment, that  illustrious  Aristides 
name]}',  Nicias,  him  that  was  my 
name-saki,  Pericles. 

24.  Wherefore,  seeing  these,  the 
life  of  man  appeared  to  me  to  re- 
semble a  long  procession  and  for- 
tune to  conduct  and  arrange  each 
part. 

25.  For  there  Ls  somehow  tills 
disease  in  sovereign  pa%'er,  not  to 
trustfrknds. 

26.  As  therefore  by  these  he  vrae 
elevated  to  power,  at  a  time  when 
they  each  thought  that  he  would 
do  something  advardageous  for 
tkem,  so  ought  he  by  these  same 
also  ίο  be  hurled  down  again  in- 
stantly, since  he  has  been  clearly 
com-icted  of  doing  all  things  for 
his  o-A^n  aggranaizement. 

27.  Quibu-scungue  siudionim  non  est  finis  utilie  ad  vitam,  bae« 
non  sunt  artes. 

23.  Nee  enim  constat  ei  qui  agrum  sibi  egregie  consent,  quk 

nam  fructum  sit  percepiurus.  nee  constai  «'  qui  egregie  doiaum 
i-ili  cfcdificat,  quis  earn  sit  habitaturus. 

29.  Legationes  undique  venerunt,  onmibus  graiulaniibue 
BoiEanoruia  eub  Periinace  impmo. 


Ό  ya.p  ε-ζι   L  c^cycvc^ 

\<jU^  και  Cv,  ίς  tr:'jjviu 
μεν  ό  ταρειμ»?  arof,  μ<- 
μίοααι  6ε  oy  ravy,  ί^τις  ό 
τξοας  χα»  ό   jiig   ί  το>.ι. 

ότ,ς  ezttvc.c,  ό  ^r/.ια.ς,  i  oaw. 
v„^cj  £μαyί■CfJ,  ό  Π:>ι•/././,ί. 

ϋιατατΓω  έκαίίΌ?  ό  T^yro 
Evciai  γσ.ζ  ζν,ς  oCt'^  • 

^'J"  \ΐ'-γας,  'r,.:/jj.  εκαίτος 
<!„μ.ζεξΐΜ?  α•^<:ζ  'εατ^ηυ  ο», 
μαι^    7ΐς    «■fatfCcij,     oCrug 

και  κα^αΐΡϋ;'  ca/JV',  eci». 
έη  τοντα  έν^κα  ia„"Ci  t'c»- 


80 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


CHAP.  XXXIII. 


The  cause,  manner,  or  ins'rument,  is  put  in  the  dative. 
Sometimes  passive  verbs  have  a  dative  of  the  agent  after  them.. 
Comparatives  and  superlatives  have  the  measure  of  excess  Siost 
commonly  in  the  dative,  sometimes  also  in  the  accusative. 


1.  Both  by  her  hands,  and  iy 
flthij  living;  and  bij  all  evils. 

2.  He  struck  li  panic  bij  his  con- 
''i:ance  and  art. 

3.  Sacriiice  to  God,  being  splen- 
did  not  so  much  in  thy  garments  as 
ΙΛ  thy  heart. 

4.  Men  live  arnon;:^  the  rest  of 
animals  like  gods,  excellin;^  them 
by  nature,  both  in  body  and  in  mind. 

5.  For  it  had  been  cut  off  icith 
a  scymitnr  by  the  Egyptians. 

6.  But  icith  brazen  and  adaman- 
tine walls,  as  he  says,  he  fortified 
our  country. 

7.  lias  any  thinir  new  been  de- 
creed by  those  below  concerning 
those  here  1 

8.  For  base  actions  are  taught 
by  base  j/crso)is. 

9.  ^Vere  these  things  also  agreed 
upon  both  by  us  and  by  thee  ? 

10.  Whatsoever  e\il  and  ba?e 
tfiings  have  been  done  both  by  this 
rnan,  and  by  the  brothers  of  ihii 
ujaii. 

U.  A  double  wall,  of  seven  or 
€<ighi  stadia,  had  already  been  fi- 
nuhed  by  the  .ithtnians. 

12.  The  royal  cubit  is  greater 
ihun  the  common  cubit  by  three 
Jingtra. 

13.  The  practice  ef  justice  is 


Και  χίι»,  xai  λνμα,Ρ  άμ 
ca?  taxoj. 

xni  τΐχνη. 

£ιμι  ό  χλαμυ^,  ΰς  ό  ΧΛξόια. 

Ώαξα  •'  αλλβ<:  ^ωον,»  Cjct- 
•jfs^  6ΐ')ς  ό  ανί^ωτοί  ,βιβ- 
rv^u,  ψυδίζ  χα»  ό  0^μ.α  xat 

Ατοχοττω  γα^  xoffij  im 
ο  Ai^jTTiog. 

Αλ>.α  χαλχίο?  χαι  οία- 
μαντ/νο»  τειχο?,  ως  αυτός 
φτ,μ.!,   ό  χω^α  syu   τίΐχ». 

ξ-' 

Δοχΐ-Α  η;  νε-ΑΤίζος  ο  χα- 

'πξαγμ.α  εχδιδα(Τχω. 

II  χαι  oicos  όμολβ^-ίω' 
ίγω  KS  xat  ίν 

'Οίος  χαχοί  χαι  oiifypof, 
χαι  οίτοί,  χαι  ο  οίτος  οόίλ- 

Διτλβο^  πιχος  ίττα  μί» 
Ύ\  exTw  tfTOiJio»  Ύ)δη  firiTE. 
X;w  ό  Α^ηναιο^. 

Ό  /οαοΊληιοί  "Τίχι-'ί  J 
μ5ί•^ι&ς  ίΓμι  ΐίτ,χυς  μ-ίγας 
τξίΐζ  δαχτν\οί. 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


liistor}',  exhibiting•  the  wonderful 
achievements  of  the  Greeks  and 
barbarians,  is  to  that  detailing•  the 
lamentable  and'  grievous  misfor- 
T.uncs  of  the  Greeks,  by  so  much  is 
Herodotus  more  judicious  than 
Thucjdides  in  the  choice  of  his 
subject. 

24.  Ο  amice  Crito,  studium  hoc  tuum  mogni  tcsthnandum 
est,  si  modo  cum  recta  ratione  conjunctum  sit :  sin  minus, 
quanta  vehementius,  tanlo  molestius. 

25.  Una  vero  causa  judicata  fuit  a  J\linoe  etiam  in  gratiam. 

26.  Non  enim  cici/ibus  digniiatibus,  neque  geneiis  precdka•• 
tia,  neque  dividis  Deus  opiimos  judicare  «olet. 


"Ελλην  TS  χαι  βαρξοίξος 
γξαφτ),  Ό  ο  οατξος  και  ώ;;- 
νος  'Λα&ος  ο  Έλλην  htay. 
ysWw  ToffOuTos  φ^ονιμο^ 
'H^oJoToc;  Θου)αθ((5τ^ί  χατα 


CHAP.  XXXIV. 

Λη  impersonal  verb  governs  ike  dative. 

Κξη  and  Sst,  signifying  it  behoveth,  are  followed  ly  the  accusative 

with  the  infinitive. 
Δει  signifying  necessity  or  want,  μελ5',  μετέβη,  ίτ^οο'ηχει,  οια» 

φε^^ι,  £λλΗΐτει,  μετκμελει,  frequently  govern  the  dative  of  the 

person  luith  the  genitive  of  the  thing. 


1 .  I  think  that  it  is  not  allowed 
me  when  praising,  to  say  any  thing 
of  thee  Avhich  I  cannot  truly  assert. 

2.  It  is  alloioed private  persons  to 
curtail  their  expences,  but  it  is  not 
permitted  unto  tyrants. 

3.  But  let  it  si'Jicefor  thee,  see- 
ing their  works,  to  reverence  and 
honour  the  gods. 

4.  Ooes  it  then  appear  to  thee  to 
be  possible  for  a  man  to  know  every 
thing  which  exists  1 

δ.  AVhy  does  it  become  you  to  fear 
'Jiese  men  ? 

6.  It  becomes  him  not  only  as  an 
enemy,  but  also  as  a  traitor. 

7.  Whom  it  behoves  to  seek  death 


'ΡΙ/ουμαι  oux  s^;<StS  ιγω 
ιτεξί  tf'j  Χεγω  eiraivftj  ουδείς 
ός  ης  αν  μη  cXyj^iuiJ. 

Ό  μεν  ιδίωτηίΓ  εξείτ»  ο 
oarruvY]  ffvvTSiJ.'vu,  I  as  tu• 
ξο.\ινος  o'jx  ενίί^ετα;. 

Αλλα  ε^α^κει<=  ffu  ό  ε^» 
γον  αυτοζ  Όξαω,  ίε^ομαι  χα-; 
<ηΐ).οίω  δ  όθος. 

Αξα  οίΐν  ίοκει  (ϊυ  ανό^αι- 
'τίοζ  ouvarcg  ειμί  ό  ειμι^  -πας 
ετίΟ'ταμαι ; 

Τις   du   ΊΤξοίίψ.ει    ourog 

Οϋ  μόνον  ως  ^-χβξος  α\). 
τος  τΐοο'ηχει  άλλα  και  ωζ 
νξοδοττις. 


CREEK  EXERCISES. 


81 


by  so  much  better  than  riches,  by 
kow  much  these  last  benefit  us 
only  while  living,  whereas  the  for- 
mer procures  an  lionoiuable  name 
for  us,  when  we  have  ceased  to 
eccist. 

14.  Bat  the  other  by  far  the 
^rit  of  his  equals  in  age,  in  all 
things. 

15.  A  wall,  not  weaker  than  the 
other  wall  ly  mvch. 

16.  He  thought  that  those  mer- 
cenaries were  not  so  much  supe- 
rior to  his  subjects  as  inferior  in 
number. 

17.  Speak  out ;  thou  '.vilt  be 
much  more  hateful,  being  silent. 

IS.  ίί  It  behove.?  us  to  think 
theHC  things  concerning  God,  who 
is  in  poioer  most  strong,  in  bczufy 
most  admirable,  in  life  immortal,  in 
virtue  most  excellent. 

19.  By  how  much  more  men 
there  are  in  the  citj',  by  Su  much 
sooner  I  think  that  they  will  be 
reduced  ly  famine. 

20.  Come  then,  let  us  consider 
all  the  things,  that  have  been  done 
by  mc,  one  by  one  ;  for  thus  then 
it  will  ajipi'ar  most  plainly,  Avhich 
of  them  is  bad,  and  which  good. 

21.  Whatever  virtues  are  sai<l 
to  be  among  men,  thou  wilt  find, 
ujion  consideration,  that  they  all 
are  improved  by  (lisciplinc  and  slu- 

22.  Thouirh,  if  I  must  conjec- 
ture hy  the  silence  bcitio-  yet  grial^ 
and  hy  the  cold  not  yet  jduchin^  me, 
a<  is  usual  in  the  monung,  il  is  not 
yet  midnight. 

23.  liy  ho\c  mttch  superior  the 


μεν  ζαω  μόνον  wosXeij,  ό  is 
χαι  ί-ελευταω'ίΤ  ΰοξα  ira- 
ξαίίχίοαζω. 


Ό  υε  ίτίξος,  Ό  'η>.ιξ  μα- 
χξζς,  ό  irag*  αζΐιίί  ϋς. 

Ύίιχος  ου  *ο}.ις  αΰίίντ,ς 
ι  ίτί^ος  τείχος. 

Ίΐ-ίομαι,^  ό  μεν  μκτίο- 
φοροί  o'Itos  ou  7ο(ίι>\)'θζ^ 
βεΧΐί'^ν  ο  ΰτηχοοί  ϊιμ»  otfoj* 

Ka-auSau•  croXug*  εχ. 
έξος  ειμ»  διγαω. 

ΟΙτος  χ*η  ίτε?!  059$ 
^ιανοεομΛΐ,  δυΜαμ-ις  μεν  ειμιΚ 
ΐ'ίγιξος,  xaWtg  δε  ευτ^ε. 
τη?,  ζωτ,  6ϊ  odavarof,  α^ίτη 
οΐ  αξκίτος. 

Εν  ι  IToXis  ειμί,  Tciiovros  αν 
ταχυί  λιμο^  αυτο^  τ,γίομα» 
άλϋίίχω.Ρ* 

Αγ'~)  Toivuv,  ίχοτεω  5 
eyu  vfoLddu  'κας,  xad'  εί^ 
έχα^ΓοίΤ,  Οϊ^τω  γαξ  (5η  μα- 
λιίτα  cr,Xcs  ειμί,  Ις  cif  ri 
cjroi  αγαόος.ειίίΐ  και  ό;  nj 
xavo;. 

'OCoj  ev  avifwirof  «f-'l 
λε^ω^  ίχοτειο"'?  <:«<:  μα^η- 
(ri.c  7»  χαι  μελέτη  α^ξανα;^ 

Koi  701  ει^ϊ  χ»η  rfx- 
μαίνομαι  ό  τε  ήίι,χια  iro- 
λ.ί  εη  ειμ4,  χαι  ό  xpuoj 
μηόίτω  εχω,  γο  ofi^ivo» 
ΰ(ί'π:ξ  ei)u,'"'  acoxvaiij,  οι/, 
ίετω  μείΤο?  ν,/ξΡ  ίιμι. 

'Oiof    5ί   x|iirTw»    ό    i 


GREEK  EJCERCISES, 


8S 


at 


aire. 


the  remedy  of  the  troubles  of    νος,  ύ?  •  ίν  δ  yrifr/g  χα»^  ,. 


8.  Reflecting  upon  which  things, 
it  behoves  thee  not  to  despise  those 
>vhich  are  invisible. 

9.  The  dcfinit'on  is  entl'*ely  wor- 
thy of  prais?,  as  having  all  things 
which  ii  behaves  a  good  definitiun  to 
have. 

10.  Mj' friend?,  an  excellent  man 
has  come  to  us,  for  it  behoves  all 
men  now  to  know  this  man'c  deeds. 

11.  Tell  mo  plainly  thus,  what 
is  this  dress,  or  lokat  need  hadst  thou 
of  the  journey  c'ov.'n  'i 

12.  He  sa;d  that  ke  would  care 
nothing  aboiii  yorr  confusion. 

13.  /  care  ncthingyor  thee. 

1 4.  And  in  the  laties-  the  had  share, 
but  it  IS  impcesibie  for  the  evil  to 
})articipate  in  th.e  former. 

15.  I  shall  try  to  :Bake  him  who 
gave  these  tilings  to  ns,  never  re- 
pent of  his  javmiij  to  me. 

16.  !Γ  Moreover  in  the  winter  it 
»i  not  enough  for  them  to  cover  only 
Hie  head,  and  body,  and  feet ;  but 
on  the  extremities  of  their  hands 
they  have  rough  gloves. 

17.  It  becomes  nU  persons  indi- 
vidualhj  to  make  libations,  axid  to 
sacrifice  and  offer  first-fruits,  chaste- 
ly and  not  disorderly,  nor  careleae- 
ly,  nor  meanly,  nor  beyond  their 
Ability. 

18.  You  may  use  as  wintei  quar- 
ters for  the  army,  Lemnos,  and 
Tbasos.  find  Sciathos,aiid  the  other 
islands  in  this  quarter,  in  which 
there  are  kivbours,  and  command 
all  things  ivkich  it  behoves  armies 
4o  have. 

19.  It  behaves  iliee  to  hale  titoae 


φα^μαχον. 

Ός  γ^ξγι  xorraveffiijS  μ-^ 
χαταφ^ονίω  ό  αοξαης. 

Πάνυ  ίιταηοζ  r^ios  i 
oft>?j  ω?  *α?  εχ^  ίαοζ  h 
υγίτ£  Όξος  εγω. 

αντιξ  α.γα6ος,  νυν  γα.ξ  r}8r, 
νας  ανθξω'π'οζ  δει  uSiuP  ό 
ouTog  εξγον. 

Αΐγω  οιιτωζ  αχ'Κί.ις,  Ttg  « 
ο'-Γολη  ;  η  τις"^  tfu  β  κατΜ 

ΊΤΟξΙΙΆ  δΐΙ  f 

Ετω,^  ότι  ουδέν  αυτός  (*>e- 
"ksfi  ό  όμετίξος  ύοξυζος. 

Ουδέν  εγω  μέλει  <fy. 

KaxsivogP  μεν  ό  (pauXog 
μ^τεστι,  ούτος^δϊ  Ό  μοχθη^Ό^ 
αδονατοζ  μεταλαμβάνω." 

"Ο  μ;ν  οϊιτος  διδωμίε  syti 
ίΓεΐ|Λο"'  ίΤοΐεω  μη*οτε  με- 
ταμελει^  5  -^ξος  εγω  όδοί. 

Αλλα  μην  κα;  εν  ό  χίιμων, 
ο\)  μόνον  χεφαλη,  και  (Γωμα, 
και  νους  αξχει  αυτοί  ο'κε*»- 
^ωΡ'''  άλλα  και  χεξι  αχρ»ς 
ό  χει^  X^'f'S  δαίυς  εγω. 

"Σνενδω,  και  5υω,  και  α-καρ• 
χομαι,  εκαστο^Ρ  ιτ^οίηκί;, 
χα^Άξως,  και  μη  ενκίεΰυξμε. 
νως,  μηδέ  αμ.ε\ως,  μηίί 
γΧι3γ_ξως,  μηδέ  ΰ'χεξ  όννα- 

'Ύναξγει  tfu  -χειμαδιος  μη» 
γξαω"^  ό  δυναμι?,  Αημνο^ 
και  ΘαίΌί,  και  2κια5οί,  και 
ό  άλλο?  ό  ίν  ούτο^  ο  τοΊίίς 
ν-ηίίος'  εν  ος  και  λιμη•^  και 
Οιτος,  και  og"  χ^η  ύτξατίν• 
μα  ffcs  υιίαξχω. 

Χ^  δ'υ  μΐίίίω  i  ό  <α^ανο- 


84 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


who  write  thirfgs  contrarj•  to  law, 
and  to  think  no  ono  of  such  thiiiir-! 
as  these  to  be  sinall,  but  every  one 
exceeding-ly  great. 

20.  Sending  out  the  sheep  one 
by  one  into  the  pasture,  having 
confimandod  the  ram,  what  things 
it  bchured  him  to  do  for  rne. 

21.  'J'hf^  raultitude  answered  un- 
to him,  We  have  heard  from  the 
law,  that  the  Christ  remains  for 
fver  ;  and  liow  dost  thou  say  that 
it  behoves  the  Son  of  man  to  be  lifted 
up? 

22.  But  by  your  country's  gods, 
my  sons,  honour  each  other,  if  you 
have  any  wish  to  gratify  me. 


Mcvcc:  ταξιτ,μι'  ό  ττξΐίζα. 
τον  ίς  ό  νομή,  ίντίλλω™*  4 

Ατοκ^ινωΡ''  αυτο^  ί  οχλβζ; 
S-/0}  αχοΐιυ"  εχ  ό  νομοί,  >τι  ό 
Χξκίτος  μEv:J  ες  Ό  αιών  χαι 
<Γω.<  (fo  Xfyuj,  ότι  δίι  ΰψοω* 
ό  ΐ/ΐοί  ό  αν^ρωτοί  ; 

Αλλα  T?cj  6;οςί  tra- 
τοωος,  "ΤΌ-ΐς,  τιμάω  αλλη- 
λ^)ν,  £1  η  χαι  ό"*^  lyu  γα• 
ρ,'^ομαι^  μΐλίι  tfu. 

Ό  μ.-ντοι  ίιαχονια,  Ι  εφ' 
ixaCTefP  ό  irPaiCcjP'  χμ 
εμαιιτου  με-ίΐ-ι  φτ,μ.ι. 


23.  Of  the  duty  however,  ground- 
ed upon  each  of  the  things  which 
have  been  done,  I  affirm  that  / 
likewise  have  my  share. 

24.  Sive  ffip,  sive  aunun  dicaveris,  aliis  quidom  aliquando 
possessionem  ct  prjedam  dicaveris  ;  dco  vero  parva  est  cwa 
aurificum  vcstrorum. 

25.  Si  bonuin  aniicuin  paraturi  simus,  nos  ipsos  honos  opcr^ 
itt  esse,  et  diccre  bona  cifacere. 


CHAP.  XXXV. 

Th4  accusative  is  often  put  alsoluldy,  xara  beiftg  understood. 

1.   Enpcvvour  to  br,   08  to  thy         ΠΕί^αω"•  ό  με»  ο'ωμο  φι- 
t)i/y,  fi)iid  of  labour,  and  gs  to  thy     λοτονο?,  ό  οε  γΐ-χη  φιλοίο- 


*»iiui,  fond  of  wisdom. 

2.  Armed  as  to  my  hu/id  with 
ΐΐιΐ*••  sword. 

3.  I  am  distracted  as  to  my  fear- 
ful mmd. 

4.  I  venture  to  be  wiee  as  tu  hu- 
man knowUdge. 

5.  VkM  thoa  wisli  lu  kill  me  as 


φος. 

ΌτλιξωΡ"  δε   χείξ   ids 
φοί^ανον. 

E>iT£ivwP''  φοβεροί  φ**"'• 

'Ο  avi^ij'rivoj:  (fOyta  χιν- 
(5ν'ν;•ω  ειαι  tfojoj. 

ίΔη  avai'Cu*  εγ'^  Λ  6c>m 


GEEEK  EXERCISES, 


85 


thoU  killedst  the  Egyptian  yester- 
day? 

6.  A  stone  of  an  hundred  feet  as 
to  lis  Icngih. 

7.  Or  \vho,  being•  a  slave  to  his 
pleasures,  would  not  be  shamefully 
affected  both  as  to  his.  body  and  his 
mind  ? 

6.  IT  Tliey  all  sailed  wounded, 
one  as  to  the  kg.,  another  as  to  ike 
head.,  and  another  injured  as  to  some 
other  part. 

9.  Moreover,  as  to  sacrifices,  and 
temples,  and  festivals^  and  sacfed 
enclosures,  he  devised  in  what  way 
threse  shall  be. 

10.  Crito  therefore,  as  often  as 
he  collected  either  corn,  or  oil,  or 
"Λ-ine,  or  fleeces,  of  any  thing  else 
of  the  things  useful  for  Hfe,  which 
grow  in  the  country,  having  taken 
a  portion,  was  accustomed  to  give 
it  to  this  person ;  and  as  often  as 
he  sacrificed,  he  invited  him,  and 
treated  him  Λvith  attention  as  re- 
gards such  things  as  these. 

11.  The  one  was  robust  and 
masculine,  and  squalid  as  to  her 
hair,  full  of  hardness  as  to  both 
her  hands,  girt  up  as  to  her  robe, 
full  of  whits  dust  as  my  uncle  was 
whenever  he  polished  stones  ;  the 
other  was  very  handsome,  both 
graceful  a.s  to  her  demeanour,  and 
elegant  as  to  her  attire. 

12.  Because  the  barbarians  are 
more  slaviish  as  to  their  manner  than 
the  Grecians,  and  those  in  Asia 
then  those  in  Europe,  they  remain 
iiader  the  despotic  government  in 
iwthing  murmuring. 

13.  The  keen  and  ready-witted 
are,  for  the  most  part,  both  rea- 
(Mly  excited  to  passion ;  and  are 

Η 


Αιγνίίτΐΰς ; 

Αιί)ο^,  ο  /χεν  μηκο^,  iroiise 
ίχατον. 

Η  7ΐς  ουχ  αν,  ό  ηδονή  5ου- 

χα»  ό  (ίουμα  χαι  ό  ψυχή  ; 

Τξαυμ^αηας  δε  -πας  ετα- 
ίτλίω,^  ι  μεν  5  ακεΧος,  Ό  δε  Ό 
κεφαλή,  ο  δε  άλλος  τις  (με» 
ξος)  (ίυντξΐξ^.Ρ"^ 

ΘυοΊα  δε,  χαι  ]εξον,  χαι 
ΙοξΤ'ή,χαι  τεμενο?,  εξευξκίχ^'^ 
1<!τις  τξ'-.ητος  f  ιμ»  ούτος. 

Ούτος  ουν  Ό  Κρίτων,  o'jrorf 
ίίυγχομιξω'^  η  Λτο?,  η  ελαι- 
ον,  η  οίνος,  η  ε^ιον,  »)  αΧλος 
τις  ο  εν  αγξος  γιγο^ίαι  γ_!>7\- 
ϋίμος  ΊΤξος  ο  βίος,  αφαίξεω^ 
ΰιδωμι•'  χαι  ό•πΌΤ5  ^ιιω,<ΐ  χα- 
λεω,^  χαι  ό  τοιούτος  τα^  είΤί- 
μελεω.™- 


Ειμι  ο  μεν  εξγατιχος  χαι 
α^δξιχος,  χαι  αυχμη^ο^  ό  κό- 
μη, ο  -χει  ρ  τυλο^Ρ  α.\α.<κλευς, 
δίαξωνημ-ύ^"^  ό  είθη?,  τιτανος 
χα.τεγεμ,ω,ξ  οίο^  ειμ;  ό  ^ειο?, 
ό*(«•ε  ξεω'^  Ό  λιύος•  Ό  Ιτε^ο? 
δε  μαλα  ευνξοιίωιτος,  χαι  δ 
ϋχήμα  ευτξετ-ης,χαι  χοσ'μιο^ 
ό  αναβολή. 

Δια  ό"^  δουλιχος  ε/μι*"  ό 
■ήθος  Ό  μεν  βαξξαξος  ό  Έλ- 
λην,  ό  δε  νεξί  Ό  ΑοΊα,*  ό 
τε^ι  ο  Ευ^ω^η,^  ύτομενω  S 
δεσΊτοτικοί  αξχη,  ονδεν  δυ({. 
χε^αινω. 

Ό  τε  όζος  χαι  αγγ^ινοος, 
ΰς  ο  τίΰλυς,Ρ  και  «r^oj  ό  οξγτ} 
οξ\>ζ^ο•κος  εψΑ'  και  αβτω  φβ- 


«6 


CREEK  EXEUCISCe. 


borne  aloni^  boundinir,    as  ships 
^vithoiil  ballast. 

14.  And  now,  Ο  Archias,  as  far 
as  liijo  in  my  power,  I  do  not  dis- 
grace Athens. 

15.  It  is  more  afflicting  to  have 
become  a  poor  from  η  rich  man, 
tlian  not  to  have  bi.'-eu  rich  αίβτα/. 

16.  Λί  last,  haA'ing•  made  the 
tliinl  Ubaiions,  and  luiving•  pniyoU 
to  tlie  gotis  for  good  things,  tiicy 
broke  up  the  company  in  ihc  tent, 
in  onlcr  to  go  to  reel. 

17.  Moreover,  as  some  of  the 
letters  are  vowels,  which  perfect 

,i\  sovmd  by  themselves ;  in  the 
ts\nic  way  wo  may  remark  of  ex- 
pressions   themselves ;     some    of 


cXoiov. 

Και  νυν,  A^ictj,  ό  χατα 
ί,ΐΛΐΐ'Του,  0U  .χατα4ίχ•«νω  • 
Α()/)\ίχι. 

Xa>w-Trof  Σκ  τλουίΊο^  τι- 
νί,ς   ym\ha\,^    η   α^η    μ») 

TiXc?  Or,  ό  Tf  iroj  (Γτονόη 
Tcisoj,'  -juh  ενχομεϋ'  ό  όεο5<* 
ό  ο^α^'^ς,   ό  ίχηνη  ϋζ  χβίΓη 

ό  |i«.sv  ειαι  ρώνη:ΐ5,  off  χα»  χα- 
τα  ϊαυ-τοι»  φιονη  αίΓο-τίλίω'  ό 
aj-roc:  cfciros  ειμ»  ίτινοίω' 
χαι  6η  ι  Xj^igS  ό  μίν  au-rof , 

ειαι. 


them  affr  the  ?nan>ier  of  vowels, 
are  of  tliemselvcs  expressive. 

18.  AUero  eorum,  de  qiiibus  raentibnem  fecimu.-,  plenus  est 
TimcTU.^,  vir  quoad  aiia,  porims. 

19.  liarum  ariium  ego  jamdudum  cupidus  sum ;  prajsenim 
si  sufHccrit  mihi  cadem  scientia  ad  homines  bonos  rjuoad  o/w- 
m()€,  ct  pi-dclu'Oo  quoad  corpora. 


CHAP.  XXXVI. 


Vtrbs  of  asking,  teaching,  doing  well  or  ill,  speaking  well  iv 
ill,  taking  away,  putting  on  υτ  off,  concealing,  and  the  like, 
are  juincd  with  two  accusatives,  the  one  of  the  person,  the  other 
of  the  thing  :  or  with  one  accusative  and  an  adverb. 


1.  NEVERTUP.r.F.si»,  answer  mc, 
Ο  Mino.5,  for  I  will  ask  thee  a  short 
qwstvm. 

2.  In  the  mean  time  Chry.^an- 
tas  the  IVrsiun  came,  and  .-^oini^ 
Others  of  the  alike  honoured,  briiu,'•- 
in^  desortcr.i.  And  Cyrus  asked 
the  deserters  respecting  the  vttdli^cjice 
thpy  brought  Crom  liic  enemy. 


O,'J.6^  oiroxPivcj""^  iyu  u 

RIivcjc:,  βξαγνς  γαξ  Tif  $ξη- 

Εν  olroi.  (Si  ί^^ομαΓ'  Χ|υ- 
tfavTct;:  ό  ΤΙίξΰτ,ς  χαι  αλλο^ 
ri5  ό  όμοτιμο.ς  αΐ/τομολο^ 
α^ω.  Και  ό  Kv'os:  ί^ωταω* 
ό  αυτόμολος  &1'  Ιχ  »  «■ολί- 


CnCKK  EXERCISBS. 


87 


3.  Bui  when  then  will  death 
cover  my  body  1  This  long  life 
teaches  me  many  things. 

4.  The^'  teach  thir  servants  arts^ 
froquentl}'  spending  much  monej 
upon  thcni,  but  they  neglect  tlieia- 
selves. 

δ.  Come  then,  if  I  buy  thee, 
rvhrii  irUt  tknu  teach  nie  ? 

6.  The  Thcbans  did  mumj  other 
injwles  vnto  Jis. 

7.  For  they  never  as  yet  cei\sud 
(hing  many  evils  unto  us^ 

5.  TVheit  benefits  thou  didst  jjro 
mise  that  thou  wanidst  confer  w>- 
on  us  when  thou  didst  receive  the 
money,  have  been  already  perform- 
ed by  thee. 

9.  He  conferred  many  hemfiis  on 
the  city. 

10.  Ο  man,  act  not  injunonsly  to 
the  dead. 

11.  In  order  that  tliey,  ha\ing 
become  powerful  both  in  their  bo- 
dies and  their  minds,  may  both  re- 
gulate their  families  well,  and  ad 
kindly  to  their  friends. 

12.  Themistocles  then  uttered 
many  and  injurwus  things  against 
loth  him  and  the  Corinthians. 

13.  Say  est  thou  these  things  of 
cvr  genera!  ? 

14.  To  treat  with  fair  xcords  him 
who  uses  fair  words,  and  to  act  kind- 
ly to  him  vjho  acts  kindly. 

15.  Be  thou  valiant,  in  order 
that  some  one  of  posteiity  may  also 
speak  vjel!  of  thee. 

16.  The  choruses  uttered  their 
sarcasms  against  no  male,  hu  against 
the  females  of  the  comitry. 

17.  He  deprived  ray  only  and  be- 
loved son  of  Ife. 


Ό  hi  εμΛξ  irorf  Syj  davtv 
τυς  (ί!4\Μ  καλυττω  ;  ■jroXi/g 
^ώαΊ-χ,ω  εγω  Ό  toXuc:  /3»oTof:. 

Χαχις  εΐζ  αυτός  αξγϋζίον  ανο^- 
λαίχω,  ε<χΑ!τ<ιΌ  6ε  αμελείς. 

Φ-ξω  δτι,  tyv  *^ιαμ.α»  ΰν, 
τις  $γίϋ  St5acixu ; 

Θηβαίος   coXuj  μεν   καβ 
αΧΚος  εγο}  οώιχΜ^.^ 
On  γαρ  ου5 jsrowor?•  τανυ^''- 
crcXuj  ζοΛος  εγω  Toriw. 

'Ος  ίπίίγνεΰμ/τ.Ρ  «rois•; 
αγαίης  syu,  Ό<τε  λαμβανί»;'" 


Ανίξω'Τος,  μη  δξαω  Ό&νηΰ- 
Ku's  xaxug. 

Ίνα  &JW.T05  y»voj*ar  χαι 

Ιαυτοΰ   ωχοζ  καλ6;5   oix£w, 
καί  ο  φ\7•Λζ  su  croijw. 

Tors  δη  δ  GiMifToxkrig 
εκεινοί  rs  tku  Ό  Έ-οξινέιοζ  τα- 
Χνς  τε  tun  xaxog  \εγω~ 

Out 05  λί^ω  ΰυ  ό  tfT^rt- 
'τηγος ; 

Ευ  Χεγω  ο  ευ  λεγω,ε  χαι 
ευ  τοίίω  ό  ευ  votsu.s 

ΑΧνιμος  ειμί,  Ίνα  τις  Cu 

και  οψι^ονο?  ευ  ετω.'' 

Kaxwj  α7ο|>ευω"  ό  χο«οί 
ανη^  μ;ν  ουδείς,  ό  is  stj^sj- 

'Ο  μονοδ  ε^ω*^  χαι  φιλο^ 


88 


CREIE  EXERCISES. 


18.  They  arc  emleavourLig  lo 
deprive  you  of  ii.is  couninj. 

19.  Anfl  since  wc  have  taken 
their  arms  from  thc?n^  so  it  is  intum- 
benl  thai  wc  ourselves  be  never 
destitute  of  arms. 

20.  A  large  boy,  who  had  a 
small  coat,  having  stripped  anoii^.er 
bgy  small  in  size,  who  had  a  large 
co.xl,  pui  on  him  (the  small  boy)  his 
υυη,  while  he  himself  put  on  his 
(the  small  boy's.) 

21.  Do  not  conceal  from  me  ih^sc 
things  wliich  I  am  going  to  suffer. 

22.  But  now,  since  he  is  no 
more,  I  look  to  (hoe,  that  joineil 
with  this  thy  sister,  thou  hesitate 
not  to  slay  yEgysthus,  the  perjie- 
trator  of  thy  father's  miirdor :  for 
it  behoves  mc  not  any  longer  to 
conceit  aay  thing  from  thee. 

23.  li  Mithridates  again  appears 
to  them  after  they  had  crossed 
over,  ha\Tng  one  thousand  horse- 
men, and  bowmen,  and  about  four 
thousand  slingers  ;  for  he  asked  so 
many  from  Tissophemes. 

24.  And  Ih^-ippidas,  alway?  dc- 
sirincr  to  perform  some  brilliant 
flcliievemcnt,  asks  from  .■Jgrsilaus 
about  two  thousand  hcuvy  nr/r.ed 
soldiers,  and  as  many  targetccrs 
besides,  and  horsemen,  both  those 
of  SpithridatCa,  and  the  Pajddago- 
7«i«,  and  of  the  Grecians  as  many 
as  hn  could  persuade. 

25.  But  tell  us,  from  what  did 
he  begin  to  teach  thee  the  (i^cc  of 
a  gLncrdi  And  he  said,  from 
the  very  same  point  with  which  ho 
even  cnilcd  ;  for  he  taught  mc  the 
precepts  rn/uisitefor  tnarshalling  an 
army,  and  nothing  besides. 

26.  I  praise  also  this  law,  ihat 


Και  ΰ,ΰτΐ»  γε   sxSivos  ό 
a^rcc;  6u  μγ,   ό  οτλον  rorS 

μέγας  εχω•'  χιτυν,   Exiju* 
auTcj,  ό  μΐν   ίαυΓου  εχίινας 

Ε'.ϋιμ,ι.' 

fttfTH^  μελ>.ω  ταο'χω.'' 

Njv  δι,  /jviv-a  ουχίΠ  ε•Μ, 
εις  tfu  οη  f3X=*cJ,  ότως  ό  αι;- 


το^^ει^  TaTt;ojci(pfivoj  ζ\ι\ι 


ί&< 


αδίΧφ-η  μτ,  y.c.rrxviu^^  ΧΓίκ 
δα  xPucTW  syu  ετι. 

Δΐβ4α/νω  ?  of  αιτοζ  STl•. 
(paivw'"  ό  Μιύ^α,δαττ,ς  •ra>jy, 
syu  ΊχΊτευζ  χίλιοι,  το^οτη^ 
δε,  χαι  tf^ivJovrjcir^s  £15  τϊ- 
τ^αχιΰχιλιοι,  roCoyrog  γαξ 
αι-£υ'  Ύΐ'ίΠης^^τ,ς. 

Κηι  ό  'IlPirciJ«<:,  ίτιίυ. 
μ:ω  αει  λαμτ^ο;  τι^  ΐ^'/'^^- 
^ο,οΛί,  aj-ew  ό  Λ^ίίιλαοί 
ocXi-r.c  ες  ίιΤχιλιοι,  χαι 
«■ελταίττ;?  ηλλορ  toOO'jtoj:, 
ΧΛΐ  iiTTiiij  ό  τε  ^τΤί&^ίδΆττης, 
/αι  ό  Πα.ρλ«7  WV,  xcci  ό  Έλ- 
λην  ccoo'cc  Tiidoj.* 

Αται»  λενω''  ε^ω,  eroicv 
ορχω"'^  ffj  5io«fl'x&j  '<  ίΤτΡα• 
ντ,για;  xrti  ίς,  εχ  ό  αυ7ο$, 
φημι,  Jig  fiCirff  x(ij  τελει>- 
ταο)•'  Lv"  γαζ  -αχτιχο?  syu•, 
χαι  αΧΚος  οοόει^  ίιίαίχω.* 

Αινεω  χαι  Ιδε  Ό  νομβ^,  J* 


CREEK  EXERCISES. 


89 


neiihcr  the  king  himself  put  nny 
one  to  death  for  a  ginglc  offence, 
Dor  that  any  individual  of  the  rest 
of  the  Persians  inflict^  for  a  single 
offence,  an  incmediahls  pinishmaU 
on  any  one  of  his  Ολνη  domestics. 

27.  From  these  men  then  pro- 
ceed both  they  who  do  the  grcal- 
■est  evils  to  states  and  individuals^ 
nnd  they  who  do  the  greatest  good. 
Whereas  a  mean  disposition  never 
'loes  any  great  action  towards  any 
(■ne,  whether  β?*  individual  or  a 
state. 

28.  Why  then  do  they  wish  that 
we  wage  Avar  ?  Is  it  in  onler  that 
we  may  injure  one  another^  and  may 
f  ach  of  us  stand  in  need  of  the 
assistance  of  these  1 

29.  He  deprived  them  both  of  life^ 
him  and  his  servant  Calesius. 


30.  In  misfortunes  no  good  re- 
sults from  silence ;  for  the  heart 
desiring  to  hear  all  things,  is  found, 
even  in  their  misfortunes,  desirous 
(of  listening  to  the  woca  of  others.) 
Surely  it  is  not  just  that  thou  con- 
ceal from  friends  at  Iciist,  nay  even 
more  ύ\Άΐ\  friends,  thy  calamities. 

31.  Bonvm  ali  quid  facer  e  in  patriam  conalur. 

32.  Thebaj  te  hoc  malum  docuerunt. 

33.  Ephoris  licet  hoc  regifacere. 

34.  Prfecepit,  si  quis  rogei  me  nomen,  Menippum  ne  die©• 
rem/  sed  Herculem,  aut  Ulyssem,  aut  Orpheum. 


μη  £ig  αίτια  cvixa  μητί  αυ- 
τος  ό  jSaCiXsuj  μηδει?  φο- 
νεύω, μήτε  τις  ό  αλλο5  Ιΐ£_^- 
(ϊτ,ς  μ-ηδίΐζ  ο  Ιαυτου  o:x£ttjc 
£τ»  e'i£  air»a<^  ανηχ^Πτος  τα- 
6ος  ΐξ^ω. 

Εκ  ούτος  δη  Ό  ανΐ)ξ  χαι  ό 
ό  μίγας  χαχος  ΐξγαζομαί^  ό 
ccXie;  ^ι^νομαι  και  ό  ιδιώτης, 
και  ό  όΡ"  αγαύος•  (/μικροί  δε 
φ\)((ις  ουδίις  μέγας  ouosiroTS 
ωδεις  cute  ιδιωτ^ί  οντε  co- 
>.ig  δξαω. 

Τίς  δη  *ολίμ£ω  εγω  βον. 
λομαι ;  η  ίνα  syu  μ?ν  αλλ»;, 
λων  χακω$  ίΤοιεω  ;  εχζΐΜοςϋ 
δε  αμφοτΐξος  δέομαι ; 

Αμφω  ύυμος  α*αυ^αω,' 
αυτοί,  και  όε^α^ων  Καλη^ 
αιος. 

2iutrjS  δε  ουδΐΐ?  £^ycv  εν 
χακο?,  ό  γαξ  ■τοόεω  ιτας  χα^- 
δια  χλιιω,  καν  ο  Μ/.χος  λ<χνοε 
£ΐαι2  αλιίχω.  Ον  μην  φιλθ£ 
γε  χαι  ng"*  μάλλον  η  φιλοί, 
XPvSTu  διχαιος  ΰας  δΜΰ'Βξο^ 
ξια. 


HS 


90 


CREEK  VXERCISES. 


CHAP.  XXXVil. 

Verbs  /  accusincr,  condemning,  acquitiiiig,  freeing•,  nad  tM 
tike,  take  after  them  the  accusative  of  the  person  with  the  geni- 
tive of  the  thing. 

Some  verbs  of  accusing  and  condemning  hcve,  on  account  of  the 
nature  of  their  composition.,  the  person  in  the  genitive,  ".nd  the 
crime,  or  the  punishment,  in  the  accusative. 

1.  I   ipill  accuse  thee  of  cowar-        Λυχα•""  Cj  ιίιιλια. 


2.  He  promised  that  he  wouM 
g'w'i  money,  provided  ihey  accused 
vii  of  the  deed. 

3.  But  when  he  hoard  that  the 
f-nemy  were  thrown  into  great  con- 
iiision,  by  reason  of  their  accusing 
one  annihtr  if  what  had  happened, 
ho  iirunediaiely  led  his  army  to 
Siirdis. 

■1.  Do  not  convict  the  people  of 
the  Athenians  of  folhj,  before  the 
Grecians. 

5.  If  they  two.  in  any  respect, 
cornraiited  transgression,  the  ac- 
cuser Idames  Socrates  for  this. 

6.  How  this  will  also  prove  of 
advantage,  we  will  easily  teach 
you  ;  if,  having  convicted  Cleon-  of 
L•ving  received  bribes,  or  of  theft, 
you  thereupon  enclose  lliis  fellow's 
neck  in  the  pillory. 

7.  But  Socrates,  said  the  ac- 
cuser, in  particuliu  taught  them 
to  treat  their  fathers  with  contume- 
ly, by  asserting  that  it  was  allow- 
<η1  one  by  law  even  to  bintl  liis  fa- 
ther, after  L•ving  convicted  {him)  of 
madtuss. 

8.  I  therefore  acquit  both  yuu  of 
this  blame  and  ^'igasi^s,  provided 
Agtisias  liiiniclf  say  that  I  am  the 
auUiOf  of  any  one  of  these  ihinjj;^6. 


ίωμι,    ει  Ό  Τξα^μΜ.  «ιηαο- 
μ.Λ»'  ΐ'/ω. 

Ός  δε  αχονω^ό  TcXfunoj 
ταξοι,ΰίω,  Jia  ό"*  a/-iaoy.aj 

ayu"  {ο  (ίτζατε^μα)  Si£  laf- 

Mr.  aiPSu  caPnvcint  ενΛίμ. 
71TJ  ό  'EXkr;  ,  ό  Or/uo^  β 
Ac.V,vaifif. 

E»  μΐν  cif  ^λ/;μμίλ£ω,* 

αιηαομαι. 

'Clgis  χαι  (,Ιτος  ζυμ-φ^ξί^ι, 
^a5ius  6i5u(fxu'  τ,ν  Κ>^'** 
οω*ον  ai^sw*  xni  xXotkj,  eira 
φ^μΛU^  c^rcj  ό  ξυλον  ό  αυ- 

ΑλλΛ  ΣίΜξατης  ys  φημι 
h  χαττιγο^ος,  Ι  car»;^  vpy- 
«■ηλαχι^ω  υιοαίχω,'  φαίχω, 
χη,τα  νομ-ος  ΐξί Τ Tt^  τα^ηνο/α 
(αυτοί)  "ί|:'ω*  χαι  ό  -zarr^ 

Κ^  U  CUV  ttToXiJw  χαι  (fv  I 
αίτια,  χαι  λγαΰιη,  αν  αυτο^ 
Αγαίίιας  fr;u,i'  εγω  τΐζ  οί-ης 
αίτια  ειμί. 


GREEK  EX^ERCISES. 


91 


9.  No  surely,  since  I  acgiiit  thee 
cf  this  77iurder. 

10.  Only  release  me  from  this 
(are ;  for  if  I  have  leisure  from 
these  things,  I  think  that  thou  will 
hi  useful,  in  many  respects,  both 
to  me  ami  Cja'us. 

11.  I  go,  about  to  give  to  the 
state  no  ignoble  offering  of  death, 
and  about  to  free  this  land  from  evil. 

12.  Wh}'  does  it  behove  me  to 
tharge  injustice  against  Phxhus  ? 

13.  He  charged  folly  against  th-e 
rest  of  7nen,  v/hosoever  do  any 
thing,  contrary  to  the  tilings  indi- 
Ciited  by  the  gods.  . 

14.  And  having  come  to  the 
temple  of  Juno,  they  persuaded 
about  fifty  men  of  the  suppliants 
to  submit  to  a  trial,  and  adjudged 
death  against  all — (condemned  them 
all  to  death.) 

15.  I  have  ample  justice  from 
thee,  Ο  stranger,  since  thou  de- 
nouncest  death  against  thyself — (con- 
demnest  thyself  to  death.) 

16.  IT  Hurl,  Ο  Jupiter,  if  it  has 
been  decreed  against  me  by  the 
fates  that  I  be  struck  \viih  a  thun- 
derbolt, and  I  toill  in  no  respect 
accuse  thee  of  the  bloio,  but  Clotho, 
who  wounds  through  thee. 

17.  If  then  a  peripon  having  been 
eornpelled  by  another,  should  put 
to  death  any  one,  as  for  example 
a  public  executioner,  o;  a  guard, 
the  former  having  obeyed  a  ma- 
gistrate, and  the  latter  a  tyrant, 
ivhom  wilt  thou  accuse  of  the  mw• 

18.  What  law  is  full  of  so  much 
injustice  and  inhumanity,  as  to 
deprive  of  grateful  acknoivledgmeni 


Ou  orjTa,  cCEi  tfy  ids 
εΧευίΐίξ'^  φόνο?. 

Μονοε  εγω  απολύω'  oiiTOf 
6  ετιμίλϊΐα"  ψ  γαξ  εγω  ίχο- 
λη  αγω  αττο^ούτος,  εγω  <rt 
(j-j  οιομαι  iro'Xus*  χ«ι  Ku^oj 
χ^ησ'ί,αοε  ίι,αι. 

Στεΐ'χ_ω  δε,  6α•^ατος  δωξον 
ονχ  aiiy-χξος  τολι?  Λίωμ», 
votfoj  δε  Ιδε  αίταλλαο'σ'ί/ί 
χ6ων. 

Φοι§ο?ε  δε  αδίΜα^  (asv 
«riff  δει  κατη^Ό^ίω  j 

Ό  aXKogS  μωξία'*  κατι>- 
γοξεω,'  Όύτίζ  ιταξο.  Ό^  fupa 
ό  Θεοζ^  Σημαίνω  τοιΐω  τις. 

Ες  Ό  'H^ajoff  {Ίεξον)  εξγ> 
μα.!/'  ό  \χετ-ης  ως  'κεντ-η^.οντα 

Εχω,  ω  ^£voff,  -rra^a  Jk 
fag  ό  δ\ΧΎΐ,  ειτειδη  δεα;ι7ον 

Βάλλω,  ω  Ζευς,  ει  «γ κ 
χεζοω\ος  ■ττλησ'σ'ω''  fJ^^'^Wj  "cti 
Cj  ουδείς  αιτιαομαι  ο  ■ττλη^η, 
.  άλλα  ό  Κλω^ω  ί  δια  ύυ  τ». 
τξωύχω.ε 

Ει  ουν  <Γΐ;  αναγχαζω^  itto 
αΧΚος,  φονεύω^  715,  οίον  δψ 
μιοΓ,  7J  δοξυφοξος,  β  μεν  δ^- 
χαδΐ'ής  Ίτειβω,Ρ^  Ό  is  τυ^αν. 
νος,  τις  α(τ»αο/χαι  ό  φονο^  ; 


Τις  Είμι  vcfAoc;  τοΟΌυτοί 
ctJixia  κηι  μισανό^ω^ια  μίΟ". 
τος,  ΰατε  ό  ίιοωμι^'&  τι$"*  ό 


93 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


tki  person  vho  has  given  some  of    i(5icf,P  χω  nwtuy'i  •ζ^αγιχα 
his  property  (to  the  ei-iir,)  and  /tas    ςιλΛνι'ρ^το^  xai  (piXccu'K?, 
done  a  humane  and  generous  ac-    ό  χα^ί^  ucoctspsu  ; 
lion? 

19.  For  I  .see  thee,  whenever 
thou  mayest  ha\c  cnidanncd  orte 
rf  sr.criie^c  or  (hr/i^  i,ot  inflicting 
[luniyhnicnt  acconlinir  to  the  im- 
jiorii^ncc  of  iho  ihinc-.^  which  they 
may  have  Uiken  away,  but  con- 


'Ofw   όε   (Ju,   ίταν   Tiff 

ίρΒ  αν  λαμ,?α".ω'"  ό  ημ^^ια 
coifoj,'"  άλλα  όμοιωρ  acacrK 
iavaros*  χατακ^ινω. 


"0"^  μεν  γαξ  τΟ.ε^τα^ί' 
cafi  ό  νί^ατοωΡ'ε  (μίιία) 
χαταχ^ινω,*  ό  όέ  χαλά.?  αιτο- 
flv>;fl'jtffc•,''  iSios"•^  ό  CrovJaioj 
ό  (ρυϋίζ  αιτονεμω.-' 


dtnmiiig  all   wi'Jiout    disiinciion  ίο 
death. 

20.  For  fate  udjudgis  death 
r.i^ainst  ail  Λ?/"»  — (condemns  all 
liicn  to  die;)  but  an  hocourabie 
d.aih,  nature  assies  αβ  a  peculiar 
j^rivilegc  to  the  worthy. 

21.  Τα  quidcm,  Ο  Terpsion,  ηονπ  legis  es  auctcr,  ut  is, 
qui  ampli•^.  diniiia  uii  nequeat  nd  voluptatcm,  morialur  :  hoc 
autcni  eccns  a  Fato  ei  Naiura  constiluium  est.  T(rjs.  Ο,ι.ιη 
iilam  igitur  incuso  νήςικε  constitulionis. 

22.  Quid  hoc?  ferisnc,  Ο  Timon  ?  Anteetor,  Ο  fleicuii.'; ' 
hH  !  hei !  in  jus  voco  te  dc  vulnerc  ad  Arcopagum. 

23.  Eo  (]uippe  iniquitalis  venerunt,  et  la/Uanos'  ccmdLmiia- 
riinl  iguavia,'^  ul  quos  sa-jx;  bellum  pro  suis  agris  gererc  po.-iu- 
laruni,  coedcai  nunc  dc  Mcssenfi  pugnare  vetent. 


CHAP.  XXXVllI. 


Verbs  of  companng,  gi\ing,  promismg,  declaring,  and  tkt  Uh, 
govern  tie  dative  with  ihc  accusative. 


1.  He  did  not  compare  me  to  a 
god  indeed,  but  thought  that  I  fiiT 
excelled  men. 

2.  'Demcrslhcncs  and  Diogenes 
(have  spoken)  well ;  the  oru)  call- 
ing rich  and  ignorant  men  golden 
f  heep,  the  oilier  comparing  them  to 
figs  upon  precipices. 


Εχω  ie"  6ί(,ς  μ(ν  cux  inu.- 
^u,*  avdfcJflOS  06  βολι•<:  cf»- 

ό  όίίογΐττ,ς•  Ό  μεν  χ^ιίΤΊο? 
e^^arov  χαλί  (J  ό  «τλο^βΊορ 
xoj  a<ra»5suroi,  ό  δε  ί  ετι 
ό  χ^ημνο^β  (S'jKr)  ατειχα^ω 


GREEK  EXEBCISES. 


93 


3.  I  will  do  this,  but  do  thou  give 
my  seat  ίο  Sophocles  to  keep. 

4.  Whaisoeve)•  things  }ou  give 
vriio  mc  I  willingl}'  receive  ;  but  he 
of  you  who  is  most  in  want  shall 
make  use  of  them. 

5.  The  Macroncs  thereupon  give 
ttnio  the  Greeks  a  barbarian  spear, 
a!id  the  Greeks  a  Grecian  one  to 
ihcm. 

6.  Give  then,  said  Agi'silaus, 
provisions  unto  my  army,  until  I  may 
come  to  that  place.  Tithraustes 
then  gives  unto  him  thirty  talents. 


7.  Unto  you  he  announced  ptacc, 
vnto  them  assistance. 

8.  From  all  these  things  they 
knew  that  the  army  of  the  enemy 
was  somewhere  in  the  neighbour- 
hood. Immediately  thereupon  the 
leader  of  the  scouts  sends  a  person 
to  announce  these  things  unto  Cyrifs. 

9.  Thou  tellcsi  me,  Ο  Croesus, 
of  great  poverty  in  heaven,  if  it 
shall  behove  them  to  send  for  theii• 
gold  from  Lydia. 

10.  ΤΓ  Whence,  in  the  Odj'ssey, 
one  might  compare  Homer  to  the 
setting  sun,  Avhose  grandeur  re- 
mains v>'iihout  its  vehemence. 

1 1 .  And  our  orator,  by  his  both 
burning  as  it  wexe,  and  at  the  same 
instant  rending  every  thing  with 
\'iolence,  and  moreover  with  rapi- 
ditj',  power,  vehemence,  viight  be 
compared  to  a  tempest  or  a  thunder- 
bolt. 

12.  Upon  Artabazus  he  bestowed 
a  golden  cup,  upon  Hyrcanius  a 
horse,  and  v\any  other  and  beauti- 
ful things ;  but  unto  thee,  0  Go• 


Μς  ο  .ΐμ.ος  'Καξαδώωμι''  Σο. 

δίχοααι,   "χξαω"^   δε    aurog 
ΰυ  Ό  μαΧκίτα  ίίομαι.ίΐ 

Έντίυύεν  διίωμι  ό  Μαχ^ων 
/3α?§α^ικο5  λί^χη  ό  'Ελ- 
Xt;v,  ο  δί  Έλλην  tKSivog 
Ελληνικός. 

'Έωζ  αν  τοινυν,  ^'ΐμι  ό 
Aj'Sf^iXaog,  sxcicrs  iro^S'jw,™ 
δι^ωμι  6  (ίτξατια  ό  STirji. 
ί;ιο£•  εχΐΐνος  μίν  δ-η  Ό  Ti- 
^|αυΐ'τη5  ίιΊωμι  τριαχοντα 
7αλαντ5ν. 

Συ  μεν  ειρν^ντ],  εκί/νο^  (3s 
/3οη5εια  ειταγγίΚλω."^^ 

Εκ  οϋτος  α.'κας  jnudxu^ 
ότι  ειμι•^  ττΌν  crX-.-j'tfts»  ό  <ίτξα- 
ς-ευμα  ό  "ΤίλΓμιο^.  Ευίυ$ 
ουν  ϊτερ,'ττω  ό  ΰ'Λοναζχτις  Ttg 
o.'^'yuC\ijpS  oOrog  ό  Ku^og. 

Πολν?  t/ω  λε^ω,  ω  Κ^οι- 
δοζ,  TTSvia  εν  ό  ουξανι,ς,  ει  εκ 
ο  Λυίια  μεταίτελλω™  ό 
^f'ucj'iov  δε^  αυτό?. 

Όί)εν,  εν  ό  OJuCrfcia  Tit» 
f  ειχκ^ω^  Tis  αν  Όμ-ο^'; j  x(x- 
caJ-jy"'  r.Xiog,  05  διχα  ό  ίφο- 
(5?οτηί  «ιταραμενω  ό  μερ/ε(3ο<Γ . 

Και  ό  μεν  ήμετε^ο^  δια 
ό"«  μετά.  /3ια  εκαίτορ,Ρ  ετι 
δα  ταχοί,  ^ωμ•»!,  ίδ/νοτη^, 
riov  καίω•"  τε  αμα  και  διαξ. 
ίτα^ω,*"  ίκηττορ  Tig  «-α^ει. 
και^ο;  η  κε^αυνο^. 

Αξτα^αξος  δε  yjvffsr^  s*. 
*ωμα,  ό  δε  "Ύξκαν.ος  1τ•5Τ&(:, 
και  aXXoc  ιτολυρ  και  καλο^ 
δι^ΡΒο^-α,ι•'  (Γυ  ίε,   φημι,  « 


94 


cnnEH  EXEncisEg. 


bn'a.',  siiiil  he,  I  trkV  gioe  a  hu^bvid     Τ^ι^^υας,  ίιίωμι  ανήξ  ό  A». 


ίοΓ  thy  daug-hter. 

13.  To  give  gTiat  and  pompous 
qtithtts  to  (yijli)isf  liltk  circumstaii' 
ces  would  appear  the  same  thing, 
as  if  a  pt-TPon  should  pui  a  great 
tragic  mask  υροη  an  infant  cAUd. 

14.  I  manifested  thy  name  to  the 
men  idiom  thou  imsi  given  wiio  me 
om  of  the  world  ;  thine  tbot  were, 
and  thou  /i-ist  girex  them  unto  me, 
and  thpy  have  koj)t  thy  word. 

15.  And  Iiad  not  a  Cretan  an- 
rMunccd  urUo  ^gcsihus  the  cpprocck- 
ing  army,  he  (Ejiaiuinondas)  would 
have  taken  the  ciiy  like  a  nc-sl,  al- 


ξΐτί^γ,μι  μ.εγαζ  χαι  (Τίμνο^ 
0Λ|χα,  ό  u'oro;  αν  φκινω,"" 
tjg  fi   τις  <τξηγι>.ος  rrjoffw- 

\ν^ιος. 

Ί'ονΣ^&ω'  ό  όνομα  du  i  αν- 

χοίμο?•  Cop  ίιμι,  και  syu 
α,ίή-ίζ  (3ιόωμι  κω  ό  Κογος 
Ου  TY,PS-j}, 

Koi  SJ  μη  K^iS  ΐξαγγίΚ- 
Xiu'*  ί  AyidXooi;  c^oC:ιμI* 
ό  ίί-^ατίυμα,  λαμοανω"  αν 
ΰ  coXig  Ldrti?  viCrT-ria,  tciv- 
cacac'iv  ε^μο^  ό  αμυνών '"δ 


together  dcstiiut.o  of  defenders 

16.  Verum  fi  konestis  et  oplimis  guihusgue  cum  cornpnrrm, 
jnerito  aliquis  ne  laudanti  potius,  quain  convtcianli  cornpartirit. 

17.  Clavumfrtwu!:\ele:es  ckdcre;  et  basin  globosam  pciH' 
bus  subjeccnini. 

IS.  EnuMia  ipsis  ca  qiue  a  nobis  gerantiir. 


CHAP.  XXXIX. 


Every  vab  rnaij  taL•  an  acmsative  of  a  comsponding  noun. 


1.  Tiir.Y  tre  gjirg  their  fated 
vay. 

2.  Ik  thoti  cautious  therefore 
•irith  that  ravJion  which  I  ιηί•η- 
tion. 

ίί.  Having  »i/!ni:d  a  ba-^e  s:n,  I 
will  endeavour  to  make  amends 
for  it, 

4.  AIi.>Joralile,  alone,  ho  svj'irs 
conlinnally  irilh  a  cnnd  ri.mplnini. 

."i.  AVhal  an  aiieing  tliinke.=;t 
thou,  ()  pon,  I  then  arose  from 
sleep  ? 


Ευλα?£ομαι  ov»  ό  rjXa- 
fiia  cj  ί/'ω  >.5^  ω. 

'ΛμαΡΓία  αιί^'^ο;;  άμα^- 
«■av&j,"  αναλαμβάνω*^  τει. 
faoj."' 

Auffcavo;,  μcv&.ί,  αιΐι  νο- 
tfcu  voiog  ny?"-?- 

Zj  ϋη    r£XVC«,    TCIOf   £ytu 

uvcilfradig  όοχίω  <ζ    iirvM; 
'κίττιμί"  τοτδ  ; 


GREEK  EXCECISCg. 


9$ 


6.  He  leaped  a  light  leap  forth 
from  the  ship. 

7.  They  being  besieged  a  siege 
b}'  the  sycophants  not  inferior  to 
that  by  enemies. 

8.  They  cxacise  all  cere. 

9.  It  is  better  to  ruii  this  risk  m 
Uie  case  of  foes  than  friends. 

10.  The  rich  Ze»e  a  life  more 
mioerable  than  yon. 

11.  Lest  some  ono  shall  ^  a 
hill  of  impiety  against  us  before 
Rhadamanthus. 

12.  1Γ  Tragedy  /laving  wider' 
gmre  many  changes,  rested  when 
it  became  possessed  of  its  proper 
nature  ;  and  iEschylus  first  in- 
creased the  number  of  actors  from 
one  to  two,  and  lessened  tlie  parts 
of  the  chorus. 


Τίηδψα  κο^χροζ  εχ  vayg. 
αςαλλομαι.'' 

'Ύτύ   ο   C^jXD.pavc'/ig  ifo- 

ελα-ττα,•!»  ό  i-rro  ?ro\iuwos. 
Ε•ιη,αελ;οααί  νας  splits. 

δυνβ-Λΐ  εν  εχί)^";?  χρίί-ττων 
τ;  φιλο^. 

&•ύ  β'.ος  βιοω. 

Μη    Tic:    ε^ω•"»  γ^αφω"» 
^ροφτη  arfs'cJiii,  eirj  ο  'Ρα-, 

(puCij•  καί  ό  τε  ί  ύιτοκξΊ- 
Τί;5  «rXijiJoj,   ε|  s's  mg  δυο 

ywj  Ό  (fAifOb)  ό  χο^  ελατ. 

κωμ-'^ίία,  Σωκ^ατη^  τΐί  εκεί 
τε^ιρε^ω,  φαΰχω  τε  αερο- 
CacEiJ,     και    αλλοί;   foXvff 

2'j    ετω    "τλουτεο),    και 


13.  Ye  have  seen  in  tlie  comedy 
Oi  Aristophanes,  one  Socrates  car- 
ried about  there,  and  saying  tliat 
he  walked  in  the  air,  and  babbling 
much  other  folly. 

14.  Thou  didst  awaken  me 
being  rich,  and  enjoying  a  most 
pieaaing  drearn,  and  experiencing 
wonderful  happiness. 

15.  Istum  amorem  omnes  mortui  am^mi. 

16.  Populo  amicus  erat  et  unafugii  hn-ucfagam. 

17.  Qui  turpe  consilium  cepit,  is,  si  foruma  ei  adfuerit, 
lucrum  quidem  invenii,  nihilo  vefo  minus  m.alum  ceperit  ccn- 
siliuna. 


'/■,δυ; 


ςυνει,αί,    xai 


uav^JxijTog  ευδαιμονία  su&xa- 
μονεω,  svsy^tpu.^ 


96 


6RErK  EXEHCISEa. 


CHAP.  XL. 


Particiijks  govern  the  caee  of  (heir  oxen  verbs. 


1 .  Having  done  these  thin  ^s.  t  ht\y 
depariL'd,  hei'ing provisims  from  the 
hostile  territory. 

2.  After  these  things,  Tisso.- 
phcrnes  came  to  the  Piellesjiom ; 
and  having  snizcd  Alcibiuiles,  who 
had  conic  unto  hiin  with  a  single 
trireme,  bnnging  both  gifts  of  hjs- 
pitalitij  and  prcsentg,  he  confined 
him  in  Sardis. 

3.  They  who  arc  fond  of  this 
pursuit  will  benefit  themselves  in 
many  re?pecf8. 

4.  Nor  did  he  make  those  who 
as.sociatod  with  him  lovers  of  rich- 
er; ;  for  lie  caused  them  to  cease 
from  their  other  desires,  and  did 
not  exact  money  from  those  who 
desi-cd  hiin  as  a  preceptor. 

5.  Thoy  two  seeing  these  thing?, 
and  being  such  persons  as  the}' 
have  been  before  described  to  be, 
can  any  one  say  that  they  two,  be- 
cause they  desired  to  lead  the  life  of 
Socrates,  and  to  possess  the  modera- 
tion wliich  he  possessed,  courted 
his  friendship  1 

6.  He  also  instructed  the  at- 
tendants, if  any  one  else  of  the 
heavy-armed  soldiers  might  wish 
ίο  stand  near,  in  order  to  hear  his 
words,  not  to  prevent  him. 

7.  I  know  it,  and  I  was  afraid 
whin  I  heard  thee  declaiming,  and 
especially  when  thou  didst  threat- 
en that  thou  wouldst  draw  up  from 
their  foundations  the  cartii  and  the 
sea,  witli  the  gods  ihemscLves,  hav- 
ing let  down  (hat  golden  chain. 

8.  IT  And  whenever  the  horse 


μαι,"  ό  εητηύίίος  sx  β  τβ- 

Μίτα  οι/Γ»?,  ΤιίοΌφδΡ• 
ττ,ς  εξγομ.Μ"  sg  Έλληστο?. 
cos*  α^ιχν5θ|*αί^=  Js  caoo 
avros  ε'ις  <τξη^^^ς  AXxifio- 
δτ,ς  ξενης"^  τ£  χαι  δuξvι 
αγω,  ξυλλαμίανω,''  ειζγω* 
i\i  Σαξόίις. 

Ou  μ>;ν  o-.i(j£  ε^αΛχ^ι^ 
ματο^  γε  ό  Cuveiui?  το•- 
ίω'*  ό  μίν  γαξ  άΚΧος  ΐτι. 
6υμ.ια.  i:a\,u,'  Ι'^  δί  sumto» 
εηίιιμεω?  ο.χ  r^ar-^'^ 
χρήμα. 

Οίτος  δ•.  ό^αω,•*"  xca 
ίιμι  oioff  τΡοΡϊω,'^"  'ΤοτΒ^η 
τις  rcjrcg'^^  φτ,μι  Ό  jiizg  h 
Σωχξαττ,ς  ετι^μ-'^,  S  χα» 
ό  (ίυφξο(ίύ\ιΐ\  Ις  εχεη(ς  εχω,* 
οξεγω^^  ό  ίμ4λια  «ϋτοί ; 


Π^οετω'  δε  ό  ύτηρ«•η5, 
χαι  άλλο?  :ΐ  τι^  /ϊουλομαι 
i  ότλοφο^ο^  ίΤ^οδ'(θ'->;μ>™ 
axoucj™  ό  λόχο?,  μη  χωλυω. 

αχουω"  tfu  ίημηχο^εω'  χω 
μαλκΤ-α  Ιτοτε  atstXsu^ 
αναίταω  εχ  βαθξον  ό  ^η 
χαι  ό  ίαλαΟ'Ο'π,  κιλό?  θεορ, 
ό  (Τεκα  εχϊΐνα?  •  γ^^^ιίίος 
χαίιημι.'^ 

Κα»  oiecv  Se  iirocrf.y' 


(iHEEE  ESBRCISCS^ 


9T 


kcmng  suspected  any  thing,  be  not 
inclined  to  approach  unto  this,  it 
behoves  (the  rider)  to  teach  him 
that  the  things  are  not  terrible ; 
but  if  this  cannot  be  done,  to  touch 
the  thing  tohich  appeals  to  be  alarm- 
ing, and  lead  the  horse  towards  it 
gently. 

9.  Or  smelling  or  touching  what 
things  thou  mightest  be  delighted. 

10.  He  himself  therefore  ahvays 
continued  mindfid  of  the  things  con- 
ducive to  vhtue. 

11.  For  if,  excelling  in  this  the 
rest,  thou  undertake  to  transact 
the  affairs  of  the  state,  I  would 
not  wonder  if  thou  shouldst  very 
easily  attain  unto  what  Uiou  de- 
sirest. 

12.  For  if  they  determine  to  fol- 
low, you  will  appear  to  be  the  cause 
of  it,  having  begun  to  cross  over. 

13.  For,  having  learned  that  he 
neither  sacrificed  to  the  gods  nor 
used  divination,  but  even  laughed 
at  those  who  did  these  things,  he 
said. 

14.  He  called  it  a  favour,  when 
any  one  quitted  him,  that  when  he 
made  use  of  his  services,  he  did  not 
ruin  him. 

15.  But,  Ο  Socrates,  obeying 
w-5  thy  supporters,  neither  value 
children,  nor  life,  nor  any  thing 
else,  more  highly  than  justice. 


ης  0  Wiftg,  μη  ίίλω  ητροζ 
ourog  If ξοΠειμΛ,  διίαο'χω  όει 
ότι  ου  όανος  Hfii'  si  δε  (ιλ 
άττω""?  αυτός  ό  δίΐνοζ  δο. 
xsu  ειμί,  xcu  ο  kiros  τ^αωδ 
•ϋξοίίαγωβ 


Η  τις  οΟ'φ^αινομαι  η  ά<Τ- 
ς-u^  Τ/δω.^ 

Α  ει  μεν  ouv  δ  ιτξος  αξΐτη 
χ^ηοΊμοί  αυτός  όιατελεω^ 
μναω.Ρ'ε 

Εαν  γαξ,  ούτος  διαφε. 
ξω^  Ό  αΧΚος,  εττιχει^εω  δ 
έ  ΐίο'Κις  ίτ^αττω,  ουκ  αν 
όαυμαζω,^  ει  Tiaw  ^αδιι^ς 
ς-υγχανίύ^  οςΡ  ετιόυμεω. 

Ην  γαξ  ψηφιξω™^  Ιιίο. 
μαι,  ΰυ  δοχίω  αίτιος  ειμ<, 
αρχω^  έ"^  όια^αινω.^ 

Καταμανόανω^  γαξ  α>. 
τος  ουτί  6υω^  Ό  όεος,  ours 
μαντικοί  (τέχνη)  Χξαω,'°ε 
άλλα  και  ό  ■π^οιεω?  ούτοί 
κατα^-ελαω,ε  φημι. 

Ευε^εοΊα  καταλε^ω,^ 
ό'ττοτε  τις  auTog  αφκίτημι,™- 
οτι  χ^αω"^ε  αυτοί,  ουκ  αιτολ- 
λυμι*  auTog. 

Αλλ',  ω  Σωκράτη?,  *ει- 
όω^ε  εγω  ο  ΰος  τ^οφευ?, 
μήτε  "τταΐί  τίεζΐ  •π'ολυί  ίΤοι- 
εω,">  μήτε  Ό^•"  ζαω,^  μ-τ^τί 
αΧΚος  μηίεΐί,  *^o  ό  δίκαιος» 

16.  Λ''idi  reges  et  satrapas  nostros,  mendicantes  apud  eos, 
et  primas  literas  dccentes. 

17.  Plures  futuri  sunt  vos  redarguentes,  quos  nunc  ego  com- 
pescebam. 

18.  Deos  et  heroas  precati,  fines  ita  transierunt. 

19.  Nee  reliquarum  facultatum  guicguamnon  curatum,  vel 
inexploratum  relinquenies  ;'^  amicos  vero,  egenies  ipsorum  curd, 
neslisrenies.^ 


08 


ΰβΕΕΚ  CS£RCI52a. 


CHAP.  XU. 


A  participle  is  used  absolutch/  with  a  nmtn  or  pronoun ;  mr>st 
commonly  in  the  genitivt ;  somttiines  in  the  dative ;  and  cfkn 
in  the  accusative^  eepeciallij  if  it  be  an  mpersuncU ;  in  the  no* 
minaiive  rarely. 


GENITIVE. 

1.  f Utile  the  Lacedemonians  and 
their  allies  were  deliberating  toge- 
ther. 

2.  The  enemy  emcaminng  under 
the  very  walls. 

3  Λ  day  having  irUervened,  a 
battle  again  takea  place,  and  the 
p'»plo  conquer. 

4.  And  yet,  Ο  Lacelrcmonianp, 
whci  such  a  state  aa  this  has  plaud 
iiscl/in  opposition,  yc  delay. 

5  The  men  h/:rinet  arrived,  and 
Sddthus,  the  Athenians  iinmedi- 
iitoly  put  Salajthu3  to  death. 

6.  When  a  god  grants  a  gift, 
envy  provaileth  not,  and  when  he 
d^ics  not  grani  one,  labour  is  of  no 
avail. 

T.  Both  t.hs  Syracusant  and  their 
iil'.cs  having  been  vangui&hcd,  and 
having  carried  off  their  dead  men 
under  a  truce. 

8.  !\Iy  friends  having  come  to 
me,  adnse  me  to  remove  myself 
away,  lest  I  puiTer  ?nine  punish- 
mcni  from  thee,  si-nce  I  luxvc  injured 
inoo  irreatly. 

'■  9.  But  thcs«  thingT?,  Ο  Socra- 
tes, tiiou  appcarcfit  unto  me  to  pay 
well,  bidding  rnc  endeavour  to  b»- 
;p;i  every  action  witli  the  pod.';, 
swiC''  thi  go  Is  arc  cnnirnlhra  no  lt'i>s 
«Tf  peaceful  Lhan  of  warlike  opera- 
uonsb 


χαι  ό  (f ^μμαχνς. 

Διαλυθώ'  τ,ίΐΛζα,  [W.'^r, 
au^ig  ^ιχνομα»,  χαι  νιχαω  ί 

Ούτο^  ,uivTci  rotoyric  α*- 
Tixai\'JTriu'  coXij,  ω  Λα- 
Χί(5αιμ&»ΐ'..ί,  ίιαμίλλχ.•. 

2αλαι5ο5,  ό  Α&τ^ιακς  'j  jtev 
Σαλαιί^ί  e-jd-jg  airoxriivu.' 
©iof  βιόωμί,  μηίίιί:  »C- 
Jfiiy  ipdovog•  Mcu  μη  (5ιϋϋμί, 
μηυί!^  tg^iu  Tovog. 

Kca  νιχαω'  ό  ΣυξΟΛΟίκις 
wti  ό  (ίυμααχοί:,  χαι  \ΐχ^ 
ύτο  (Γ«•ον5);Ι>  avaijec'  " 

fcojXsuu  fXTTO^ij*  Ej^ij  5μΛα- 
του,  μη  <Γ^ς  tcu  'zaQyjJ-  >rx) 
ίΤυ,  ίύζ  aJixiw'  μί^α^.Ρ 

Αλλα  OLiio^  μίτ,  ω  Σο• 
χραί-ηί,  χαλωί  iyu  ϋζτ*ω 
\iyu,  χΕΛίνω  ίτΕΐ^ίκ..•'"  Ci* 

ως  i  ύίοζ  χίΐξίος  ίιμ^  ύ^δ:^ς 
ήττων  ό  £l^r;wxof,  η  t  ίΤολβ- 
μ*Χ55  ff/o•• 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


99 


10.  Whenever  thou  seest  any 
ofte  weei)ing  in  grief,  either  when 
his  son  is  going  abroad,  or  when  he 
has  lost  hid  property,  beware  lest 
the  appearance  may  take  thee  in. 

11.  These  things  having  been 
said,  tiiey  arose,  and  hanng  de- 
parted, burned  the  waggons  and 
tlie  tent.s.  Having  done  these 
things,  they  took  their  dinners, 
and  while  they  were  dining,  Mi- 
thridates  comes  %vith  about  thirty 
horsemen. 


<s'Svuog,  η  α'ΤοίημΞω  τεχνον, 
η  αιτολλυμι  ΟΡ  saurou,  τ^ό- 
(ίίχω  (ό  νους)  μη  Cu  6  φαν- 

Οΰτος  "λεγω^  ανίσ'τημι,* 
χαι  ατεξ-χομαί^  χατακαιω" 
ό  άμαξα  χαι  δ  (ίχηνη.  OJ- 
τος    Ίτοιίω    α^ιο'το'ίτοιόω•'"- 

uf  τξίαχοντα. 


DATIVE. 

12.  Which  things  having  been 
done,  how  shouklst  thou  not  de- 
servejily  think  well  of  thyself? 

13.  While  the  Corcyrusans  were 
pitching  their  camp,  the  twenty  ships 
sailed  down. 

14.  And  also  when  Phrynichus 
cmnposed  a  play,  the  Capture  of 
Miletus,  and  represented  it,  the 
whole  theatre  fell  into  tears. 

15.  When  the  year  xoas  elapsed, 
the  Ephoii  again  make  a  demon- 
stration against  Elis. 

16.  c/3s  Jesus  departed  thence, 
two  blind  men  followed  him,  cry- 
ing aloud  and  sa\ing,  Have  rnercy 
upon  us,  Son  of  David  ;  and  lohen 
hi',  had  entered  into  the  house,  the 
blind  men  approached  hira. 


ειχοτ(».•5  fAt/ag  9|ovstJ  \ 

Κζξχυξαης     ατξατϋ'Χε. 
δευω,^^  ο  guwri  νανς  xutu- 

Κα»  δη  και  τοιεω^  Φρ^- 
νιχο$  (5|αμα,  Μίλητος  άλω- 
ΰΐζ,  χαι  (5ιδα(ίχω,^  εΐζ  δαχξ-j 
Ciirru'^  ι  όεατξον. 

ΙΙεξίζίμι^  δε  ο  Ζνιαυτοξ, 
φαίνω  "jraXiu  ό  Εφοξαζ  φξο-j- 
ξα  ε*!  ό  IIXij. 

ΤΙαξαγω  εχειύεν  ό  ίηΟΌυε, 
ακολουθεω^  αυτός  δυο  τυ- 
φΧος,  Χξα,ζω  και  "Κεγω, 
ελέω'  εγω  υΙος  Δα§ιδ•  ε^- 
χομΛί°  (5ε  εις  ό  οιχ»α,  τ^ο» 
ΰε^ομΜ^  auTog  6  τυφλοί.    , 


ACCUSATIVE. 


17,  FFAe?z  Crassvs  woe  retreating 
uath  great  loss,  and  endeavouring 
to  make  his  way  through  the  more 
mountainous  part.    ■ 

IS.  Three  spies  of  the  Cartha-       ^^.^..„^.^^^^ 
ginians  having  been  apprehended,     r '  νξίίζ  (Τυλλαμ-βανοο 


Κξα!Τ(ίος  μΐτο  ιτολυς  ήτ- 
τα αναχω^ εω,  χαι  δια  ο  ορϊι- 
νος  Ιδίυω  «τει^αω.'^ 


100 


CREEK  EXEUCISES. 


19.  It  being  an  uncertain  thing, 
when  any  other  person  having 
made  an  incursion,  will  take  away 
the  fruits  of  ilicir  labours. 

20.  The  Grecians  having  three 
fifcts  worthy  of  mention  ;  that  with 
you,  and  ours,  and  that  of  the  Co- 
rinthians. 

2\.  It  having  appeared  proper  lo 
engage  in  a  sea  figlit. 

22.  Thus  then  died  Theranie- 
nes ;  but  the  thirty,  as  if  now  it 
was  permitted  ihein  to  tyrannize 
ibarlessly,  pent  word  to  those  who 
were  excluded  from  the  list,  not  lo 
enter  the  cit}'. 

23.  Ji/thoiigh  it  teas  allo^red  liim 
to  make  use  of  many  antl  advan- 
tageous things  as  he  wished. 

24.  This  individual  being  sum- 
moned by  the  Athenians  to  a  trial 
for  his  life,  ilid  not  obey,  having 
said  that  it  was  foolish  for  an  ac- 
cused person  to  seek  to  clear  him- 
self, when  he  had  it  in  his  power  to 
flee. 

25.  Fathers  restrain  their  chil- 
dren from  bad  men,  since  their 
intercourse  is  the  destruction  of  vir- 
tue. 

26.  He  prayed  to  the  gods  aho 
jympl}'  to  give  him  the  things  that 
were  good,  since  the  gods  know  best 
what  kind  of  things  arc  gootl. 


Αψηλοί    ί'μι,    ό-cofi    rij 

Τ^εΐί  μ£ν  ειμί  λο;,  ο?  αξ. 
log  ό  Έλλην  vawcixo?  ('"J-i• 
ί•£ι,.αα)•  ό  τα  ία  (Tu,  χολ  ό 
ήμίτίί&ί:,  χαι  ό  Ko-'ivrioff. 

Θτ;£πμ£ν7;^  μεν  6r,  cu-Tc^^ 
aTO()vT;ff>iiJ'''  ό  It  "iiiACv. 
ς-α,    ΰς    E^rCTi    Ύ,^τ^    ajToff 

μεν  ό  ε5iJ  ό  JtaraXo^cg  μη 
εκίειμι  ες  ό  αύτυ. 

Πα^ίιμι  αντο.ί  ccXjf  χαι 
α'/α.'\ζ  x^'ttij'"  ίς  r,g  ρου. 
λομαι.' 

Οίτος  STi  xjiCic  χολευ 
ΰανατί'Λοζ  Li70  ό  Λίηναιορ, 
ουχ  Ccaxouoj,*  BViJ^  ί'^Χ^Λζ 
ο    εχωε   ίικη,    ζητίω    ατο 


afro  ό  TovTi^cg  avt'jijcoc,  ΰ$ 
ό  οότο5  όμιλια  ίιαλυΟΊί  ίιμι 

Και  εύχομαι'  ίϊ  cfcj  ό 
iios  άττλως  ό  ayaioj  ci3u- 
μι,  ώ$  ό  ίεοί  xaXflj  iujiu•,' 
OTciog  α^αίοί  ίΐμ». 


NOMINATIVE. 

27.   JrAf/i  ίΛίί/  //arc  opened  the  Ανοΐ)ω''  ό  (ία.'μα  co^c?, 

body's  pores,  fire  is  kindled  anew.  caXiv  γίνομαι  ό  νυξ. 

'  28.   For   the  a)~nvj  being  nvme-  Πολοί    -^αξ   ό   ίτ^ατια 

reus,  it  will  not  be  in  the  jwwer  of  ειμί,  ou  cagK  ειμί  coXij  ύ-το 

every  city  to  ncconimodate  them.  ίίχομα/.•' 

29.    Wishing  L•)  semi  eoine  one  ΒοϋλοοΛί  «•;?   κατα/τχο- 

&s  a  spy  into  Lydia,  and  to  asotT-  tcs  σ«μ«'ω''  eri  A.iia.e  koi 


CREEK  EXERCISES. 


101 


tain  what  the  Assyrian  is  doing•, 
Araspcs  appeared  unto  him  to  be 
a  suitable  person  to  go  on  this  mis- 
sion. 

30.  But  he  goes  forth  in  haste, 
and  having  both  seen  them  hum- 
bled in  spirit,  and  having  heard  the 
large  concourse  crying  aloud  Avith 
a  mournful  cry,  tears  are  shed  co- 
piously by  him  also. 


Α<ϊ(ίυξκις,  δοχεω^  αυτός  S'Tt- 
T^Jsiog  ειμί  A^atfiTog  ε^χο. 
μαι"  ε-τ»  ούτος. 

Ό  δε  ύιίουδ'ή  εξεξ-χ^ομαι, 
χα  ι  ει5ω®  τε  ταΐίεηως  δια. 
χειμαι,  και  ακουω^  ffuu  οι- 
μωγ•η  ο  -ττολυ^Ρ  /3οαω,  χαι 
avTog^  'Ζξογεω  δαχζυ. 


PROMISCUOUS. 


31 .  Tfie  storm  being  indeed  such 
as  thou    mentionest,  food  having 

faikd,  not  as  much  wine  being  at 
hand  as  to  be  smelled,  numbers  being 
vjor/i  out  with  labours,  ihe  enemy 
pressing  on  in  ike  rear. 

32.  The  loall  being  weak,  and 
in  one  place  even  fallen  down,  it 
being  also  built  low,  and  at  the 
same  time  the  gates  standing  open 
through  security. 

33.  Since  therefore  they  were 
excluded  from  the  sea,  and  plun- 
dered by  land,  some  endeavoured 
til  dehver  up  the  ciiy  to  the  Athe- 
nians. 

34.  At  last,  manij  corpses  lying 
upon  each  other  in  the  river,  and 
ike  ar)ny  being  destroyed,  partly  in 
the  river,  and  partly,  if  any  por- 
tion even  escaped,  by  the  cavalry, 
Ni(  ias  surrenders  himself  to  Gy- 
lippus. 

3-5.  Wonder  not  my  host,  if, 
vjhen  my  child  has  appeared  unhoped 
for,  I  indulge  in  many  words. 

36.  And  when  he  had  spent 
three  months  there,  a  plot  having 
been  formed  by  the  JeAVS  against 

12 


Χίιμωυ  γζ  ειμί  οιος^  λί- 
γο, ΰιτοζ  δε  scrjX£;7riJ,'""' 
OIVOJ  δε  μηδέ  ο^φ^αινω  τα- 
^ειμ»,  ύ*ο  δε  «ττονο^  τολυί 
α^α^ο^ευω,*  νολεμιο^  έϋ 
έίΓομαι. 

Ό  τε(χο5  αΰΰεν-ης  ειμί, 
και  εο'τιν  *]  χαι  ιτίττω,  ous 
βξα-χε^ς  οίχοϋομεω,Ρ'  χκι 
τυλη  άμα  δια.  ό  άδεια  ανοι- 
yw.  -^  -Μ 

Ei^ycj  ουν'  auTog^  ό  &α.• 
λαίίΓα,  και  κατά  γ7\  -ποζ. 
6εω,  εγγείξεω^  τις  νξος 
Aiijvaios  αγω'^  ό  *oXij. 

Τε>.ο5  δε,  νεχξος  τί  ■χολνς 
S'ti  αλλήλων"^  κειμκι  εν  δ 
νοταμος,  κοι  διαφύΐιξώ'  ο 
ΰτζΆτευμα,  ο  μεν,  κατά  δ 
Ίίοταμος,''^  ί  δε,  και  ει  ης 
(μεξος)  διαφευγω,^'^  ί*ο  ο 
ΙΐΓτευί,  ο  Νικιαί  Γ-ολι^-το^ 
έαυτοΐί  ιτα^αδιδωμι. 

Ω  ξεινος,  μη  θαυμάζω, 
τεκνονί^  ει  φαινωΡ^  αελτ- 
τος,  μηχϋνω  Xoyo?.^ 

Και  ?το(ϊ](3'α5''  μψ  '''ξ^^^ 
^ινομαι^  αυτο5  E'^'i^o-jX•») 
vto  ό  Ιονδαιο?,  μέλλω  ανα- 


102  GE££E  LXEC.C1S£S. 

LiiTi   v.hcn  about  to  set  sud  for  χω"'  ας  i  1>ιξ'.οί,  y<vcua/' 

Syria,  a  rccolution  wao  taken  by  7νωι*η  ό  ΰναίτξζ^  δια  Μα- 

hiiij  of  returning  privately  ttiiuugh  χϊώονια. 
jNiiiceJonia. 

37.  The  earih  being  lorn  open  Ανα^^^ν^μι  μίν  sx  ,οο- 
fiorn  ita  depths,  Τατ^απίί  t/se^ ic/« ο•  d^og  ^τ-,  a^rsf  6s  /-.μνοω 
teVy  bare,  and  Me  icAa/s  jyt/r/i/  being  Ta^a^og,  ανατ^οττη  Ji  •!,λ^J 
Irokm  up  and  re/ii  asunder,  all  tilings  xai  ukKyraffii  !.  χν;μ.ος  Xoft- 
to^jtither,  heaven,  hell,  things  mor•  βάνω,  «ας  άμα,  ο^ρανο?, 
ta.!,  things  immortal,  together  com•  dhtf;,  h  όντ,το;^  ό  αίοαατοε:, 
l:it  and  share  the  danger  in  thai  άμα  ό  tots  (Τ,;μτολ=μί-ω  χαι 
iigiit.                                               -  tfjyrivouvtvw  (■'^X'^• 

38.  Hunc  igilur  Pertinaccnv,  fiock  iniemptsta,  sopore  curr^f^ 
tii  omnibus,  Lajtus  atque  Elcctus  adcunt. 

39.  Ilk  hoBC  adhuc  dicenie,  nou  expecta\i  ego  finem  \erbo- 
rum. 

40.  His  exjiositis,  felicitas  in  laudabibbus  sit,  an  poiius  in 
bouvrabilibus  rebus  udeamus. 


CHAP.  XLIL 

Th^  infiniiive  mood  has  an  accusaiivc  before  it,  when  iis  agent  or 
suhject  is  differeiit  frum  that  of  lie  prcculing  verb  ;  but  a  no- 
vwuUive  when  they  arc  the  same. 

IVficn  the  preceding  verb  and  the  infinitiic  relate  to  the  same  per- 
af'H,  the  prorujun,  unless  cmphatical,  is  omitted  before  the  latter  ,• 
hi4  when  they  relate  to  different  ptrsons,  the  pronoun  must  be 
^pressed. 

The  infinitive  viuod  is  governed  by  verbs,  participles,  and  adjec- 
tives. 

The  infinitive,  "kvith  the  accusative  frgguently  before  ii,  is  often  put 
absolntely,  being  preceded  ly  Uic  particles  ύ?,  ώίτί,  ir^iv,  α•χξΐ, 
μ-ίγξΐ,  and S"/nc  others,  eitlier  eiiressed  ur  understood. 

Thf  infinitive  is  tftcn  put  ell^ticalli/,  ofa,  /iXfcf,  σχοτίΐ,  δις,  ίελυ, 
λίλΒ'οω,  or  ενχομΛΐ,  being  undersiood  to  govern  it. 

I,  These  indctHl  think  thii  ih*.  (Xr-p  μΕν  οημΛΐ,  ό  ί;ος 

gnils  know  sonic  ihiiiir-•^,  hut  tlial  ό  μιν  ίώι\μ.ι,  I  (5»  cyx  s»i5»j. 

ui^y  do  n<if  know  others;  Socra-  μι•  Σ^-κ^^α^τς  6;  τας  τ;^ί^- 

ι<5,  howovor,  thought  thai  the  gois  ματ  ύιοζ  stir^u. 
knew  nil  things. 


GREEK  EXERCISEe. 


103 


2.  The  accuser  also  srid,  thai 
he  (Socrates)  observed  respecting 
friends,  thai  it  is  of  no  advantage 
ihai  tkerj  be  well  disposed,  unless  they 
shall  also  be  able  to  benefit. 

o.  He  thinks  tha:  he  himself 
l-nows  all  things. 

4.  I  pass  over  in  silence  thai  I 
myself  have  been  frequently  crown- 
ed. 

5.  He  showed  thai  Cyrus  was 
an  enemy  to  the  king,  but  he  kim- 
*-■;/  1  friend. 

6.  We  shall  not  say  that  wt  aur- 
S'-Jrcs  are  blamcable. 

7.  Each  hoping  thai  ht  shall  do 
lu.tthing  himself. 

S.  And  they  said  that  ihey  saw 
tiiR  royal  standard. 

9.  And  in  doing  these  thing?, 
■'i-iit  thou  say  that  thou  art  acting  u 
yj.5t  part  1 

10.  For  he  said  on  that  occa- 
."iion,  thai  he  heard  this  remark 
from  many,  that  a  sincere  and 
good  friend  would  be  the  most 
valuable  of  all  possessions,  while 
^5  said  that  he  savj  the  generality 
of  men  caring  about  everj'  thing 
ra'her  than  the  acquisition  of 
friends. 

1 1 .  Do  not  thou  hasten  to  Ic.  rich, 
rather  tlian  to  appear  to  be  good. 

12.  A  man  who  is  about  to  do 
a  great  action  is  accustomed  to  de- 
ley. 

13.  Whenever  the  boys  seemed 
to  befit  to  learn  something. 

14.  Without  virtue  it  is  not  easy 
t'l  hear  fortunate  circumstances  pro- 
perly. 

15.  Wh.en  he  saw  AguiXYio. 

16.  Great  vengeance  fell  upon 


Φημ<  OS  χαίη^ο^ο?,  sra^ 
ti  φίλοζ  aurog  λ:^ω,  ί)ς  ου- 
ofig  οφ$λο5  Euvocs  ίιμ4,  «ι  μ.% 
Xflu  ωοέλέω  (ϊυναμΛί. 

μι. 

Cos  (ίτ^φανοω. 

Δεικνυμ•^    KyPos    ΐίόΚε. 

δΐ  φιλο5. 

Ojx  (X'jv^ri.  γε  mrt'.c  φ'/;μ»( 
£ΐμ.ι. 

Aurrn,•  μϊν  ονο;.•.ς  i-xucrag 
νοίϊω  ελτι^ω. 

Και  ό  βα(ίι\Βΐος  drii,:ivJ 
uPU'.j  ιρημι. 

Κα!   οηΜ•!,  CuTjt;  irci^u), 

^ςατίντο^,τ  αν  ειμι^^  φιλ^'ί 
Cap/is  κ«ι  ayaoog•  ε:.ΊΐΛ{  • 
λεομαιΕ  όε  <r:cii,f^  μάλλον 
ό^αν  φν-,μι  ο  tcXAjs  η  φ!- 
ACS  >;τϊ;ίΓί^. 


λον  γξτ,ιττοζ  όοχεω  ί)μ<. 

Φιλεω  οκνεω  τρα^-μα  αν*(^ 
■ffgarfCij  με^α$. 

Ετ;((7αν  ϋοχεω•'  ixav&g 
ειμί  ό  irffii  μανόανω  Tif. 

Ανευ  ο!;εΐΤ"/:  ου  t'at>i'>?  (jcs- 
»w  εμμελίί^ς  ό  5^Γ•^χ/;μ«.. 


104 


GREEK  EXEHCISES. 


CrfC3tj3,  for  this  reason,  {as  wc  may 
conjecture),  because  he  thought 
himself  to  be  the  happiest  of  all 
men. 

17.  They  marie  a  creat  outcry, 
S'j  thai  the  enemy  heard  it. 

IS.  Thoise  from  the  city  mar- 
shalled theuiselvfcs,  so  as  t'jfiU  the 
road. 

1 9.  The  Gofl  of  glory  appeared 
unto  our  father  Abraham,  being 
in  .Me.-opotamia,  befurc  hi  dive'l  in 
Charran. 

20.  Lord,  come  down  quickly 
before  my  child  dies. 

21.  I  often  spent  my  time  in 
hamjuets,  vntU  I  /<ΐΓζ'Λ  all  thin^.s, 
if  ihere  was  any  thing  troublcaoine 
in  human  life. 

22.  Do  thou  always  excel  and 
he  superior  to  other)?. 

23.  Do  thou  it/  home,  and  off^x 
».icred  hecatombs  to  the  inimortal 
gLxis. 

24.  Contradict  and  cxanine  my 
discourse. 

2.5.  Say  that  thou  hcarcst  the  voice 
ef  Hercules. 

26.  If  We  must  pameitly  en- 
dcanour,  by  whatever  niei bod  one 
c<in,  both  by  education  hud  hy  pur- 
suiL^,  and  by  tlie  scieiuiis  wLich 
W.I  It'arn,  tofec  from  vice,  and  at- 
t'ji.i  to  its  contrary. 

27.  Although  ho  ΠΡΛΌΐ  projTiised 
to  he  a  teacher  o(  ihi^.  νοτ  he  miide 
thtiic  who  associated  with  hiin  to 
hup'',  that  ihcy,  imilating  him,  roould 
bf.oms  such  (as  he  \vas). 

28.  //  is  bcttn  that  one  die  of 
hunger,  being  icithout  grirf  or  fear, 


γας  Kfoiifog,  {ύς  ειχαξω^), 
ότ»  νομίζω'  iayrou  £ιμι  >ιν. 
ipuizoi  ατας  ολβιοί. 

wiTs  ό  τολεμιο^  axojw. 
Ό  ih  εχ  affru   tfuvroi- 

Ό    Θεο5    ό    ίοξη    ocrc- 

ειμί  εν  ΜίίΤοτοΓαμίίϊ,  C'lv 
η  χατοιχίω'  aurog  εν  Xotj- 

Ku^iof,  xorafaivcj,'"  r^iv 
αΐΓ0()ν>]ί^'  ό  raiOiov  ε^ω. 

Λια^ω"  εν  (ί^μιτοίΤιον  «rcX- 
λαχΐ5  μεν,  μεχ?»  '.ΐί  εηλαν- 
όανω"!''  ■το?,ε  ει  t;s  χηλε- 
«rcj  εν  ανόίωτινο;  /Sioj  ίιμ^. 

Λιεν  a^ifftfijcj  χαι  Οτε. 
Ροχο5  ειμί  άλλο?. 

Οιχαόε  ατοΊ'τειχω,  ε^ίιο 
d'  lsi>c£  εχατομδη  α^ανατο^ 
ίεο5. 

Αντιλεχω  xeu  διε„'Λ;νω  ο 

Φαίχ-^  5*  α•J(5η  ό  Ή^α• 
χλτ);;  χλ;;ω. 

Ilξ'Jiι^μ.r]r;o;  μεν  ότη  τΐ5 
5ϋν«μι((,  Xrti  ^ια  ϊ•^03η  Χαι 
Ji*  ετιτη'^ομα.  μαίι.μ'ΐ  γ£, 
φΓϋ^ω"  μεν  κκχια,  τούναν. 
τιον  όε  α'ιξάω.^ 

Κο'Γοι  ο•-•ίε  irwrore  jTitf- 
χνίώμαι'  oiSciitxaKos  ειμί 
ojTcf,  άλλα  εΧ'τιζ'Μ  τοιε^^ 
ό  C'jvJiaTPjfiuK  εαυτού,  μι- 
μεομ:;!  sxiivcg,  foiCi^Jc  ^ινο- 
μα<.^ 

Kositftfuv  λιμοδ  οτοόνηΰ'- 
χω/    ttX-jrcs    χαι    «φοοο^ 


OBEKK  EXERCISES. 


105 


than  live  in  plenty,  being  troubled ; 
and  it  is  better  that  thy  son  be  bad^ 
than  thou  wretched. 

29.  But  he  has  come  to  this 
pitch  of  pride,  as  to  smd  now  to 
the  Euboeana  such  letters. 

30.  Having  left  the  judgment- 
&<iiit,  we  came  to  the  place  of  pu- 
nishment; but  there,  my  friend, 
there  were  many  and  miserable 
things  to  hear  and  see. 

31.  Be  present,  then,  said  he, 
at  the  doors,  clothed  with  theso 
dresses,  be/ore  the  sttn  rises,  and 
stand  as  Pheraulas  the  Persian 
shall  tell  you  from  me. 


γίνομαι,"  η  ζα.^  εν  αφ^ο. 

ό  σαΐ5  xaxoj  £ίμ,ι,  η  ffy  χα- 
χοίαιμων. 

Ό  δε  εις  ούτος^  ίξξις 
ΕΡχο,υ.αι,"  ώίτί  ετισ-τίλλω 
EuwiSug  η(5η  ToiouTOf  iricT- 
«"ολη. 

ΛφίΟ'τημι*'  ό  (5ιχα3'-ΐ9^ίο.ν, 
9ΤΡθί  ϋ  χολαιίττ]Ρ;ον  cupjx- 
νεομαί•-  ενία  is,  ω  (piXoc, 
τολυ^  χαι  ελίίινο^  ειμι 
αχουοο^  χαι  ειδω.° 

Πκ^ειμι  ουν,  φψ.ι,  ετί 
ό  ίυ^ίχ,  χο!ίμεω^«  ό  (Γτολη 
ojTos,  ίΤΡΊν  ί;λίο5  ανα-ελλω, 
χαι  καίίίτημι  ώ5  αν  Cj  φ;- 
fa-jXag  ό  Πί^ο'ηί  εξα^νελ. 
λω^  >τα|α  ε^Ό). 

Όταν  (5si  (fuj'Xjviuvsuu^ 
φιλοί'^  *]  'Τί'ατζίς,  μη  μαν- 
τευομα;,  ει  (ίυ^'λίνύυνευΓεοζ, 
Ην  yap  ίΤΡοίτω"  cTu  ό  μαν- 
τι^,  φαύλο?  γίνομαι  6  \εξος, 
δ-ηΧος  ότι  ό  ύανατος  ίημαι» 
νω,  η  ■ττη^ωα'ι^  με^ος  (ίωμα^ 


'^  32.  When  iAow  mayest  have  to 
encounter  danger  for  thy  friend  or 
country,  do  not  consult  the  sooth- 
sayer, whether  thou  oughtest  to 
do  it.  For  if  the  soothsayer  de- 
clare to  thee  that  tL•  omens  have  been 
bad,  it  is  evident  that  death  is  sig- 
nified, or  the  maiming  of  a  part  of 
the  bod}',  or  flight. 

33.  Miror  igitur,  quo  tandem  pacto,  persuasi  fuerint  Athe« 
nienses,  Socratem  de  Deis  non  sana  mente  esse. 

34.  Q,uid  jucundum  nosti,  nihil  horum  causa/ace?'e  volens  ? 
qucB  jucundorum  appetiturn  non  expectas,  sed,  priuS'^uam  ap-, 
fctas,  omnibus  repleris ;  priusquam  esurias  comedens ;  prius- 
quam  sitias  bibens  ? 

35.  Rhetor  Demias  advenit,  plebiscitum  habens  in  dextra, 
et  se  consanguineum  nostrum  esse  dicens. 


106 


GRS.ZK  tXERCI3ES. 


CHAP.  XLIIL 

ParticipUs  are  ofien  used  instead  of  the  infinitive^  after  verbt  d^ 

voting-  an  affection  'jr  ετΠ'.Ηΐ/η  of  the  mind. 
Tfi-.  participle  is  used  after  Lhc  adjectives  φα-νΐξος,  6χλος,  and  their 

ojrnpt'unfls,  cfla  αφανχς,  εη;ρα\ιτ,ς,  ^c. ;  and  thd  adjeciivt  is 

catnrnoniy  rendered  in  English  by  iis  adverb. 


1 .  I  remember  to  have  received  this 
wftilih. 

2.  I  know  thai  I  am  oame  to  a 
poworlul  city. 

3.  We  rnighl  continue  to  be  most 
happy 

i.  I  wiU  not  cease  to  have  God 
for  my  liefcnder. 

5  He  appeared  to  surpass  all  his 
conteiiiporaries. 

6.  They  wniinui  to  mainiain  the 
pt«oc. 

7  I,  my  friends,  am  delighted  to 
be  honoured  by  you. 

6.  I  perceived  that  I  was  very  un- 
wi.^e,  and  fooli-ihly  exasperated. 

9.  He  continued  to  irjure  no  one 
ir.'?''cd,  but.  to  humour  the  good  and 
f^  junish  tho=e  that  ofTende-J. 

H'.  And  I  am  not  ashamed  to  say 
thes•.;  thinijrs. 

11.  No  one  wiU  appear  to  have 
g'und  this  honour  more  nobly. 

12  No  one,  either  inoruii,  or 
dt  mi-god,  or  inimoruil,  ivill  he  found 
k>  have  received  the  kingdom  more 
honourably. 

Ι'ό.  I  never  ceased  to  pity  our• 
sdvtii!,  and  to  thii^k  the  king  and 
thr*!i  with  hirn  iiappy. 

!  4.  He  wjvs  vvidtnily  cndcavoer- 
ing  to  snrpaii.s. 

]δ    Tiioic  about  Anius,  \i-efc 


μαι'  ό  tXojtc•;. 

Oiivu^  r.xu, 

Μαλιίτα  αν  ε^όαιμονεω 
OmtcXsu. 

Osoj  ου  λ-/)χω  «ξοίΤτατχς 

lias  ό  ήλιξ  διαιρεξω  φαι. 
Ό  ίίΡηνη  αγω  iiarsXru. 
Eyu,  u  ονη?,   f,3u)  μτν 

AiC^avoaai'  a§cu>j.7  <ro- 
Xws  £χω  χ  11  μα-ry  ό^με/-.. 
μαι. 

Διατελειο"*  o-josis  μίν  αο». 
»•ω,  ό  ό;  χξτ^<ί7ος  τιμίϊ^^, 
ό  όί  •ί;αμα;•-αν£„•?  χιλο^ω. 

Και    0Ϊ7ί5  μίν   ο•<.χ   αια- 

Οχ/6εις  φαιν;.;!''  ;.  τιμγ, 
ύί^'.ζ  χαλοί  χτα^μαι,'' 

■  Ο,^δΐις,  ti>TS  ίκητο;:,  ovrt 
τ,μιίεος,  οντ•  aiuvarcg  ei^ 
jiO'xw,  χαλις  λαμ?ανο>.''  ό 
ραδΊλ:';:!. 

(>j  rri/TS  cau'*»"-  ί^ω  μ£ν 
οιχτϋξ^},  .oaffiXttj  ο;  χα<  ό 
(Ty»  αι/<•:<  μαχηίι^^;. 

Φαν;Ρο5  £ιμι  vixauj  <r;(. 
fOfcJ  "' 

Eu<5»;>.ac    (ιμι    •.•   tin    i 


GUBEK  EXE2CISES. 


Ϊ07 


andenth/  giving  leas  attention  to 
the  Greeks. 

16.  He  did  nol  secreily  moke  usQ 
of  divination. 

17.  He  evidently  did  ihosQ  things 
ftlso  from  choice. 

18.  He  openly  eacrificeil,  often- 
times at  home,  oftentimes  on  the 
public  altars  of  the  city. 

19.  !T  I  will  obey  God  rathei 
than  you  ;  and  as  long  as  I  breathe 
and  am  able,  I  will  not  cease  to  cul- 
avaie  philosophy. 

20.  But  the  Assyrian,  when  he 
knew  the  spies  to  he  advancing,  or- 
ders two  or  three  chariots  and  a  few 
cavalry  to  spring  forth  and  flee. 

21.  The  same  day,  when  he 
heard  thai  Cyrus  was  there,  he 
led  away  the  army  quickly  unta 
him. 

22.  And  thus  neither  wilt  thou 
be  found  injunng  thy  masters,  nor 
\ή\\  it  have  been  consulted  badly 
for  ourselves. 

23.  An  thou  not  asMmtd  lo  be 
so  careful  of  riches,  and  glory^ 
and  honour,  that  they  may  be  to 
thee  as  abundant  as  po.«sibIe  ;  hut 
dost  thou  take  no  ciire.  nor  think 
at  all  of  thy  understanding,  and  of 
truth,  and  of  the  soul,  tiiai  it  maj 
be  as  good  as  possible  ? 

24.  Ο  Gadatas,  thou  hast  cfi- 
deTiily  been  persuaded  by  Hy*ta»- 
pef!.  to  entertain"  those  sentiinenis 
which  thou  utterest. 

\  25.  Where  men  think,  that  he 
who  excels  will  neither  be  pro- 
claimeil  by  a  herald  nor  receive 
rewards,  there  they  cvidxnily  are 
without  feelings  of  emulation  k> 
wards  one  another. 


oux  α.φανης  ειμί. 

Και  axsivcrs  sx  c^oai^stfie 

Θυω  φανεροί  siiAi,  coXX»• 
κις  μ3ν  01X01,  <ολλαχ>ί  r!i 
£ffi  £  xoivoj  ό  ίΤολίζ  βωμΛζ. 

xui  oiog  7ί  5(^1,•=  ου μ.ι\ -rauoi"» 

Ό  δε  Αίίίυξίαζ,  ως  yif^ni- 

ζ^ϊνγ'^  χίλίυω  ύ^μ^  εξανκί- 
τημα^ϊ  iyo  η  τ^ας,  χσ.'.  ί-ττ  ■ 
νος  ο'Κιγος. 

Α•^6τ,μίξον^    SiS!    ewDvcj' 

ανΐοζ  αγωε  Ι  ΰτξα-ίυμΛ. 

Και  ούτω  cues  rfu  u.Xtr'xa 

αύίχζίύ  ο  οεοΊτοτη?,  οντε  ϊ^^ 
χαχω^  /35?ο•.'λευμεν:$Ρ"  ;iw. 

Χρήμα  |*«*  ovt  ailyyv^J^^ 
ετιμϊλομαι,  oirug  ίυ  ίιμτ* 
ίίζ  roXus,  και  όοξα  χαι  τιμή  ; 
φ^ονηίΤΊί  <5ε,  χαι  αλιοίεια,  y.ru 

ίιμι,'    0-.ΙΧ   είΐμελομαι   Ojifc 

fl  Γαίατας  ίν,/χ^  fWh 
WTO  &  'Τ(ίτα(ίίΓ7;ί  vivi<t^'•^ 
{ΛΛύζ  '/tvMJxiki  ος  XsjOi. 

'OsOiJ  μϊΐ>  οίο,Β<α!  J  σ«ί?ίίβί- 
νοζ  ό  x|flti-»CTt««i»  μντ<•£  »■»- 
Ι'^ίίω,  lA-^J  cuiXs»  >Λμ^*•- 
νω,  Offkas  3*ιιι  ίτ'τοίία  μ 
φ<>>ίΐ?ίΐχ'Λ*   «•ρο5    α>.Χ•>ϋ^•*' 


105 


CaEEK  EXCaCISES. 


26.  Non  ccseaho  ecrihae, 

27.  Scil  quoniodo  agit  ?     Sitire  desiniL 

28.  Videtvr  aniinus  immortalis  esse. 

29.  Alanifcsitim  oral  euin  neminem  diligere. 

30.  Maniftslam  crai  eum  aniriii  soUiciiudine  affici. 


CHAP.  XLIV. 

Tl>e  verbs  eiai,  rvy^avu,  Ijra^xu,  γίνομαι,  kuPu,  ίχω,  φδανω,  λαν•. 
ίανω,  and  some  others,  arc  used  with  parliciplcs  after  them,  xchick 
TC'juirc  to  be  rendered,  in  Latin,  by  the  mood  and  tense  of  tht 
vrrb  annexed,  while  tlie  verbs  thcmsdves  are  most  gai^aliij  ren- 
dered by  adverbs. 


1.  "VViLT  thou  not  be  silent  ? 

2.  Into  how  great  a  desire  hast 
thou  thrown  us,  if  these  things  are 
so  !  And  they  are  so,  suid  he. 

3.  This  plan  of  operations  icas 
ft  ftir  nothing  else,  than  for  steal- 
ing away  or  retreating  with  rapi- 
dity. 

4.  But  .if  yon  shall  do  these 
things  which  you  mention,  know 
t-hat  you  will  γιιΐ  t•)  death  a  m:in 
^vho  has  already  watched  much 
for  you. 

5.  The  river  Selinu.•*  hajfened 
to  run  through  the  middle  of  the 
country. 

6.  One  of  the  attendants  called 
him,  in  order  that  he  might  hispect 
the  entrails  which  had  been  taken 
out ;  for  he  ht^ipencd  to  be  sacrificing 
for  the  purpose  of  ascertaining  the 
future. 

7.  But  riearchu.s  ordered  Tol- 
mides,  an  Elean,  whom  he  happcry 
td  to  have  as  α  hejrald  with  him,  to 
prodaim. 

8.  I  kajfcnul  to  6a>j  that  lliere 


Ου  'ftuwatj'  ειμί ; 

μια  ίμ?αλλω  εχω,  ει  ovroj 
(ιΰτωζ  εχω.  Λλ>Λ  ειμ*, 
φημι,  οότωί  εχω. 

Ourof  ϋ  ΰ->a7Ίηfut  ειμί 
0"j(5iif  aXXcg  Oi'vaani,  η  a-zc• 

ΙΙν  Ss  "τοιεω,  ??  λε^ω, 
κίημι  ότι  ανη;»  xaraxcuvu* 
<ιμι,   ToXif   μεν-  (5η   νξο  C\i 

Τϋ^ανω'  δε  Sux  μείο^ 
|εω  ό  χωρίον  <δ(ιΤθψ.ος  2)ελι. 

νους. 

Καλεω'  <rig  αυτός  ο  Wt^- 
^irrjg,  Ivus  ΐιδω'  β  Ίίζος 
εξαι^εω/β    «-υ^χανω*    ya^ 


ΚΧεαξγρς  δε  ΤολμιίΐΤί 
Ηλείο;,  ός  τυγχάνω'  εχοβ 
ταξ'  έαυτοϋ  ^ηξυζ,  a.vi'suf 
χελευω.* 


CRESK  EXERCISES. 


m 


Would  be  to  us,  many  and  favour- 
able liopos  of  safety 

9  Tribes  have  been  separatdy 
formed  by  the  state. 

10.  We  will  endeavour,  with 
the  aid  of  the  gods,  to  inflict  ven- 
geance on  any  one  who  injirrca 
U3  ;  but  if  an}'-  one  (L•  U3  kirid' 
v-esses,  we  will,  even  as  far  as  we 
are  able,  not  be  inferior  to  this  one 
in  doing  good. 

1 1 .  AVe  never  as  yet  did  you  any 
injan'. 

12.  And  when  again  he  may 
have  turned  back. 

13.  If  my  mother  did  not  live. 

14.  Do  thou  observe  if  he  be  re• 
diiicd  in  sleep. 

lo.  But  do  thou,  if  it  appears 
goo-d  to  tliee,  hold  in  light  estimation 
the  honours  of  the  g(y\s. 

16.  Since  thou,  Ο  mother,  with 
tears  and  lamentation.^  deplore  my 
deceased  father  and  beloved  coun- 
try. 

17.  The  Sc3'fhi<\n3  came  to  the 
bridge  long  before  the  Persians. 

15.  But  the  foot  immediately 
proceeded  on  a  run  to  Epipolfe, 
and  i^ce-ndhy  Euryelum,  before  the 
Syracusans  arrived. 

19.  We  no  sooner  came  to  TrcE- 
zen,  than  we  were  seized  with  such 
violent  di-seases. 

20.  But  when  day  dawned,  they 
proceeded  in  silence,  drawn  up  in 
battle  an'ay,  against  the  enemy  ; 
aiid  (without  dilficuity),  for  there 
was  a  mi.=t,  so  that  they  a-pjnroach^d 
near  uruiiscavered. 

21.  And  Cyratadas,  while  they 
were  Landing   at  Piraeus,  escaped 

Κ 


Xwff  xai  χαΚος   ελίτ»?  fyit 
EifU  (fw-τηΐια. 

δίΜξεω'^  φυλή. 

ASmsuS  (aevtoi  Tft^aw"• 
tfuv  ό  δέος  αμυνω,"^  εαν  μϊ». 
τοί  τις  εγω  ευ  τοιεω  ύ•7τα^- 
χω,  χαι  ούτος  εις  γε  δυναμό 
ονχ  ητταομαι  ευ  iroteu. 


Έγω  Cv  ουδείς  itu^oui* 
ί'ταξγ^ω^  ^αχως  ιτοιεω. 

Καί  ίταν  αυ  -ταλιν  afSi- 
μι^  γηομαι.' 

Ει  μτι  χυξω  ζαω  δ  τιχτω.^β 

Ό^αω  χαΑ'  ύτνοί  μη  χα- 

Συ  δ'  ει  δοχεω,  ό  ό  βεαζ 
ίντιμο»"^  αημα^ω'  εχω. 

Ε*ει  tfu,  μητηρ,  ε*/  δαχ. 
ξ-j'^  xaj  γόος  ό  SvrtCfxu"  1(0.. 
Trp,  iraTjij  τ«  φιλοίτ,  χα- 

ό  IIsfG'ijff  SiTi  ό  7^?^έ"  "φ* 
ιχνίομαί.^ 

'Ο  δε  'τεξος  χω^εω*  ευίυ^ 
ί^ομοί  T^oj  ό  EirwoXai,  χα* 
φύανω  αναβαίνω'  χατα  έ  Eu- 
^;;ηλον,  «ξίν  ό  Συ|αχουΛος 
«■α^α^-ινομαι.® 

Ουχ  φ^.ανω"  ει^  Τ^οιξην 
ε^ομαι,^  xoi  tcoO-jtcj  voOOg 
λαμβάνω.^ 

Ετει  δε  ημε^α  ί-τοφαινω,' 

ετι  ό  τολεμίορ,  χαι  γαξαμ^ 
χλη  ^ινομα»•^  ώιίτε  λανία. 
νω"  ί^Τ'^^  *f  β^ε^χομβί.' 

Και  ό  Κ^ξαταδας  η  i 
όχλο?,  αποβαίνω  εν  Πει^α« 


140 


OftEER  (XEBCISE^. 


J 


unobswi'i  aumi  the  crowd,    and 
βαν  eJ  himself  into  Decelea. 

22.  V  A3  often  also  ri3  he  sup- 
ped and  slept  in  any  pkice,  he  dkl 
noi  kindle  a  fire  by  nighi  in  his 
Ciimp,  but  in<vle  a  light  m  from 
of  his  army,  in  order  ilmt  no  one 
ηύζΐίΐ  ajij/Tuach  unobserved. 

23.  When  the  camp  of  the  As- 
8\•ηαη3  was  taken,  her  husband 
hajipcned  not  to  he  in  the  camp,  but 
wjls  gone  as  embassador  to  the 
king  of  the  Buctrians. 

24.  I  would  be  very  grateful  to 
the  Deity,  if  I  should  not  be  mis- 
taken in  ihe  opinion  which  I  hap- 
pen t)  have  of  thee. 

^5.  And  if  you  will  l>reak  these, 
or  succumb  to  those  who  are  break- 
in?  Ihem,  I  preilict  to  you,  tluit  you 
will  insensibly  i^ive  up  tiie  govern- 
ment of  the  state. 

26.  Do  not  forget  hospitality  to 
strangers  ;  for  hy  this,  some  have 
eni'irtained  angels  unawares. 

27.  If  the  murder  of  husbands 
sliall  be  lawful  for  woiuui,  yon 
cannot  any  longer  acaid  dying 
(death),  or  you  muei  become  the 
slaves  of  women. 

* 

28.  Foric  in  Satumi  sacello  dcambulahamm. 

29.  Imprudais  interfectorem  filii  sui  oiiic,'•. 

30.  Ut  nee  Cjtus  nee  Cilices  juga  praoccupent. 

'      31.  Una  adhuc  pars  imperii  reliqua  eel,  si  quid  modo  /jrte 

vntclMgo. 


'Oroj  5ε  iJi>rvcToieu°^xai 

iov  ffuf  vuxrcj^  o'jx  xaw," 
rr^a  ti  ό  (ίτξατε.μα  ^ci 
•zotSu),^  ίνα  μη'5£•5  λανόανω  ' 

'Οτ£  άλκΓχω^  ό  ό  Atftfu- 

τοί  c'j  Tvyya^'J^  εν  ό  arfa- 
τοβ-ϊίον  siju  αλ.λα  νξος  ό 
Βαχτ|»ανο$  /οαίιλ?.?  τ^ίί- 

ITcXjg  αν  ό  Θίος  χαξ^ς 
εχ^/*^  ει  μη  δίαμαρτανα*  "^ 
ό  Oof αΚ  CS  εχω  •κ?ζΐ  <J-j  r-^y . 
χάνω. 

Ei  5e  και  otTogf  xara- 
λυω,'  η  ό  χαταλυω  ετκ•^.-. 
VU,  rfoXeytj  tfu,  w»  Xftv. 
ίανω'  ο  τολιτίιαβ  ταί'αχω- 

Ό  φ'ιλοξενια  μη  ειτιλανία- 
νομαι*  δια  oCTogS  yaf  >.α». 
ίανω'  τις  ξϊνιζι^^  α^^ελς^. 
Ι^  ά|<Τη»  (pov'j^  Ειμί  )ν»η 
03'»5?,  cy  c(?av!j^  £τι  αν  ivr.i. 
XW,  η  ji^ri  OouXEww  Xfiw- 


G&EBH  EXERCISES. 


Ill 


CHAP.  XLV.  '' 

The  Greeks  use  μίλλω  v;ith  an  infinitive,  to  express  thefuture^ 
both  active  and  passive,  lohich,  in  Latin,  would  be  rendered  by  a 
pariicipk  of  thcfiUwre  and  the  verb  sum.  , 


1.  And  here  I  mean  to  e-zhih-u 
it  against  the  third  day — (ostensu- 
rus  sum). 

2.  They  are  abov.l  to  perform  the 
funeral  obsequies — (factuii  sunt). 

3.  CouQermng  what  things  ye 
are  abaui  to  decide — (judicaturi  ee- 
tis). 

4.  First  consider  in  thy  mind, 
every  thing  which  thou  mayest 
be  aboni  to  utter — (verbis  prolaturus 
sis). 

5.  Did  not  I  say  that  you  two 
were  going  to  he  trouhlesame  to  me  ? 
— (molestiam  allaiuri  essetis). 

6.  If  thou  wouldst  even  hea^  the 
words  which  are  going  to  be  men• 
tiomd — (sunt  proferenda). 

7.  After  this,  Seuthes  removetl 
his  camp  farther ;  but  the  Greeks 
took  up  their  abodes  among  the 
villages,  \vhence,  after  havhig  sup- 
plied themselves  with  cis  much 
provisions  as  possible,  they  intend- 
ed to  proceed  to  the  sea- — (ituri 
CTani). 

8.  He  said  this,  signifying  by 
what  death  he  loas  about  to  die — 
(moriturus  erat). 

9.  When  the  nightingale  ivas 
about  to  be  killed — (occidenda  es• 
set). 

10.  tr  Thou  appearest  to  me  to 
Bay,  Socrates,  that  if  we  would  ac- 
quire a  good  friend,  we  ourselves 
must  be  good  both  at  speaking  and 
acting — (comparaturi  eesenms). 


Οίίχνυμι  ε»5  T^irog  7;μ?^α. 
Ταφή  μέλλω  <soiSu. 
IIs|i  05  ffu  μελλί*;  x^ivw- 


ΐΐαζ  otT'Tig  αν  μέλλω  λε/ί^ 
τ^οτερον  ε*κίκοτεω  δ  ^νωμη. 


Oux  α^ο^ευω  ότι  ιτο^ε- 
χω^  ΐτ^α^μαΡ  μέλλω  zyu  ; 

Καν  οχουω  ο  μέλλω  \itj^ 

Χογος. 

Εντεύθεν  Σζυβγις  μεν  ανο- 
ΰτξατονίδευω^^  ιτ^οίω,  ό  δε 
Έλλην  (Τχηνεω^  εις  >Μμ•τ„ 
ό4εν  μίλλω,'  ιτλεΐίίτοδΡ''  ειτι- 
ΰιτιζω,^^  εΐΓΐ  ίαλαττα  ήχω. 


OUT05   λίχω,*    οΊιμαίνω 
«Oios  oavarog  μέλλω  ανο- 

Αηδών  οναι^εω  μελλω.ε^ 


Δοχεω  syu,  ω  Σωχ^ατηδ, 
εΑ'ω"  ώί  ε»  μελλω*^  ayadog 
τις  χταομα4^  φιΚος,  αοτος 
syu  αγα6<ίζ  Ssi  γίνομαι® 
λε^&Ζ  τ2  χα  ι  ντξαττν. 


112 


βΚΕΕΚ  £XKKCja£5. 


11.  For  who,  being  about  to 
make  any  thing,  is  i-rnorant  what 
he  is  about  to  niuke  ? — (facuturue 
eit),  (faciurus  est). 

12.  Those  who  arc  about  to  be 
auxiliaries,  ought  to  be  friends,  not 
eiicmic.^ ;  neither  envious  in  the 
prosperity  of  their  coniinandiT,  nor 
treacherous  in  his  adversity — (fu- 
*un  sunt). 

13.  In  the  (play)  Crc.<phontcs, 
Merope  is  about  to  kill  hti  son. 
bLd  does  not  kill  him,  but  on  a 
sudden  di.ocovers  who  he  is  ;  und 
iri  the  Helle,  the  son,  bang  abovU 
to  ^ive  up  his  mother,  finds  on  a 
Fudilen  who  she  is — (occisura  est), 
(dedituru.-). 

14.  Nonnullus  occidit,  nonnuUos 

15.  In  hoc  ip.so  die,  laturus  erat 
ler.tiam,  dc  sui  ctiam  ipeius  diccndi 


T.»  yaξy  μ:Χ>^^   το*βω•'' 


ό  μίλλωί  ίϋμααχ:£  5ΐμ(,' 
χα»  μηί•ί  ετι  ό  αγα,όζς^ 
ςίονεω,^ε  μτ,ίί   :»  i  xcxcgP 

Εν  ό  Κξα^:'}Ττ,;,  ό  Μ?. 
ξοντ,  μ£λλ.ω  ό  vl:f  arcxrt». 
vu;,  asOxrsivij  ό£  cj,  άλλα 
ava^vujji^w•*  xou  ev  ό  Έλ» 
λη,  ό  '.leg,  ό  μηΓ»;^  rxciJy. 
|Μ  μελλχί,  ανα^να'Ρίξω.^ 


(ί/ί"αί?ίΓ.ν,5)  erat- 
unusquisque  vesirum  sen- 
libcrtate. 


CHAP.  XLVI. 

TAe  time  when  ts  commonly  pxu  in  /Λ«  genitive,  sometimes  in  the 
dative  ;  how  long  in  the  accusative. 

1.  But  the  Greeks,  having  gone  Όδε'ΕλλΓ,νί^ειμι- ίχαί. 
forih  ίίΖΐ'Λ  ί/ay  with  their  beasts  of  Tcg  >;μ£;α^  ffw  ό  icc^y^io; 
burien  and  slaves,  brought  away  χα»  ό  ανϋίατοό:ν,  ;Ε>>ώ,η^^ 
without  fear,  wheat,  barley,  wine, 
figs. 

2.  For,  on  the  preceding  day, 
Bending,  he  ordered  us  to  deliver  up 
our  arms. 

3.  On  the  following  day,  sailing 
thence  with  a  favourable  wind, 
tl.ey  roa.«tod  along//r  lico  days. 

4.  For  we  indeed  thought  that 
you  intended  to  attack  the  enemy 
hy  flight. 

5.  I'LL?  then  was  the  termina- 
ΐϊοΐϊ   of  affuiri   on  this  night  '  but 


aoto^  e-ujoc,P  x*»5t;,P  uvif, 

Ό  μ£ϊ  γαξ  rrp^aivj  fa?, 
fa,'^  τίμΛω  i  ocXov  τ^'α- 
ίιJwμι  χελί^ω.* 

KvTi^/oiv  ό  ί,ίίτεζαι^,ς  {rat• 
ξα"^)  ανοχω""  «"νεύμα  xcXcf, 
ΐτλεο^'  »;μ?;α  5.ο  «"α^α  yr,. 

Γ.γω  μεν  ^α*  :.(Ίααι•  (ij 
i  ν;ξε  ijxy^  £«(  ό  «-ολεμίΓ^. 


GREEK  EXEB.CISES. 


lis 


on  the  following  day  ihcy  brought 
them  to  the  army. 

6.  And,  havhic:  stationed  watch- 
es, they  slept  during  th-c  night. 

7.  Havmg  said  these  things,  he 
was  not  guilty  of  a  fidsehood  ;  for 
the  young  man,  becoming  delight- 
ed with  wine,  ceased  not  drinking 
cither  by  night  or  by  day. 

8.  I  wish  to  inform  some,  and 
to  remind  others  of  yon,  that  of 
those  advancing  against  us,  they 
who  occupy  the  right  wing,  are 
the  same  whom  you,  on  the  fifth 
day  (preceding  this),  having  rout- 
ed, piu'sued. 

9.  Thence  they  proceeded,  diir- 
uig  all  the  succeeding  day,  through 
snow., 

10.  Xenophon,  having  taken 
with  him  Polycrates,  went  by  night 
to  the  army  of  Heuthes. 

11.  In  this  imnth  ye  sent  aΛvay 
Charidemus,  having  ten  empty 
ships,  and  hve  talents  of  silver. 

12.  But  the  generals  and  cap- 
tains, having  come  from  Aristar- 
chus,  brought  back  intelligence, 
that  at  present  indeed  he  requests 
them  to  depart,  but  to  come  ai 
evening. 

13.  IT  And  they  come  to  the  sa- 
cred mountain  on  the  fifth  day  : 
the  moimtain's  name  was  The- 
ches.  But  wh(jn  the  foremost 
came  upon  the  mountain  and  be- 
held the  sea,  a  great  cry  arose. 

14.  Thus  many  lay,  as  if  a  rout 
had  taken  place,  arid  the  despon- 
dency was  great.  On  tL•  follow r 
ing  day,  however,  tto  one  died, 
but  almost  about  the  same  hour 
tbey  recovered  their  senses,  and 


ΐοζ  ίΐζ  ό  ίτ^ατευμα. 

Και  δ  μεν  νυ|,   φνλαχν\ 

άλλα  ό  νεανκίχο^  fjow  «- 
νος,  ουτί  νυξ,ε  ουη  ήμε^αδ 
crauoj"^  ίτινω. 

Ό  μεν  iiJatfxw,^  ό  ίί 
αναμναω^  (f\)  /3ουλομαι,  ότι 
£ΐμι,  ό  ?τ^οα'£ΐμι,'^  6  μεν  ό 
δφος  {^εξας)  s^uS  Ός  <τυ 
τ,μεξα'^    τεμιιτος    τ^ετω"*^ 

Εντεύθεν  ό  ετειμι'"ε  *;με?α 
όλο5  ίτα^ενω'''^  δια.  χιών. 

Ό  «ενοφων  ^α^αλαμ^α- 
νω^  ΤΙο'Κυχξα.τνις  οιχομαρ'  ο 
νυξο  εΐΓΐ  ό  Σίυύ-ης  ατξατευμ,α. 

Ούτο^  ό  μην?  δε-χα  χανζ 
αιτοσ'τίλλω  εχω  Χαρίδημος 
χενος,  χαι  «εντε  ταΧαΊΐτον 
a^yugioj, 

Ό  5ε  (ίτξ(χτψ/ίς  και  ο 
λοχα^οζ  τ,χω  ναξα  Ό  A^iff- 
τα^χο?,  αίΓα^^ελλω"  cti 
νυν  μεν  α^ειμι  αυτοζ  κελεύω 
ό  ίειληε  δε  τ^χω. 

Και  αφικνεομαι  ετι  ό  Ίίξοζ 
ορς  ο  τεμττο^  >)με^α•  όνομα 
δε  ειμί  ό  οξοζ  Θ^γγις.  Είτει. 
5η  ^6  ό  'ϊΤξωτος  γίνομαι^  ετι 
ό  οξος^  χαι  χατειίω'^  ό  όαλατ- 
τα,  "Τολυζ  χ^αυχη  ^ινομ-αι.^ 

ΚειμΛΐ^  ούτω  ίτολυς,  wC- 
νεζ  T^otfr)?  χινομαι,'ε  χαι 
ηίοΚυς  ειμί  δ  αίυμια.  Ό  Ss 
χ^τεξαιος  α.«ο6νη<ίχω''  μεν  οι/» 
δεις,  αμ4>»  5ε  ό  aurog  tro-j 


114 


CR££E  EXERCISES. 


cn  the  third  ΛΧϊά  fourth  day  arose,  as 
if  after  a  draught  of  rnetlicine. 

15.  The  rnan,  having  taken  me 
with  him,  washed  me/br  mnc  and 
twenty  daySy  having  begun  with  the 
u.oon. 

16.  Hai\,  Menippus !  and  whence 
hast  ihou  come  unto  us  ?  for  thou 
hast  not  appeared  this  long  time  in 
the  city. 

17.  The  narrative  of  the  Odys- 
sey is  long ;  a  porson  being  many 
years  abroad,  and  watched  by  Nep- 
tune, and  being  alone. 

13.  I  say  tliat  five  hundred  of 
these  should  be  Athenians,  of  what- 
c\er  age  may  appear  to  you  to  be 
rght,  serving  an  appointed  time,  not 
long,  but  as  much  as  may  seem  to 
be  right,  in  succession  to  each 
other. 

19.  If  a  law  should  be  enacted, 
that  persons  not  eating  be  not  hun- 
gry, and  not  drinking  be  not  thirs- 
ty, nor  be  cold  in  icintcr,  nor  warm 
ill  summer,  no  law  could  be  able  to 
bring  it  to  pas.s  that  men  obey  as  to 
the.sc  things. 

20.  IVforeover  even  yet  at  the 

frr.sent  day,  every  ninth  year,  the 
VIphians  st-ud  boys  of  noble  Inrth, 
end  one  from  among  themselves  as 
an  archithcorus. 

21.  Poslridie  Tigranes  ipse  aderat. 

22.  Cinuni  vero  advenent  finis  a  fato  prastitutus,  non  obli- 
ΛΊοη-^  iidionorati  jacenf,  set!  inemoria  per  omne  tempus  hymms 
cclebraii  florcnt. 

23.  νο-^ίρηι  indueris  non  modo  vilem,  sed  camlem  quoque 
«ifl.'c  ci  hyeme. 


αΜΥ,ξ  ττ,μ:ξα.  rvv£a  xfu   Stno- 

Χαιξ(,),  ω  MsviirTc.c•  χαι 
c&iev  εγω  a^ixvrcaai ;  coAjg 
γαξ  χξΟ'ίΟζ  ου  ystvw"'  £ν  ό 

Ό  O'jygfJzia  μΛχξ:ς  ί  λο- 
γας'  fi.uu,  ατοΰτμίω  Ttg  ΐ7ος 
τολυρ,  χαι  caia~j>,a<'r:j 
Cto  ό   IIoffiiooL'v,    Χ2(  μ:ν?5 

Οί/τος  ΰε  Air,vaif5  φτμ.ι  usi 
ειμί  crjvraxoiioi,  εξ  'ς  av  ng 
ffu  ήλιχια  xaXijj  ί^ω  ooxs^j, 
χοονοί  ταχτ;5  (ΓτίατΓ.^.",'" 
μη  μΛχξος  oCrcg,  αΧΧα  Icr^ 
αν  ζοχεω  χαλνς  βχω,  £χ  ϋια- 
(Jc.j(r)  α>.λ»;Χ:»;ν. 

Ει  νομ^ί  τιό>;μΓ'<^  μη  EffiiiJ 
μη  -ττεΐναω,  και  μη  τινω  μη 
Ji^nw,  μη'5ϊ  j"i^oc"  ό  χίιμαν^ 
μηίί  cVXtc.."'  ό  <?ejOc:,  c;/<I--is 
αν  νομός  ίι,ναμαι^  cJiawjai- 

Και  ετι  χαι  wv  erc.i  ίννα- 
TOf ,  ό  Λ:λ? OS  cai5  fu^  '^'^ 
τεμτω  χαι  a'-^it!5:j|c5  £15 
(Γφεΐ5  awTCf. 


GHEEE  EXERCISES. 


115 


CHAP.  XL VI  I. 


The  quesiion  whither  1  is  commonly  answ'Trcd  ly  eig  cr  νξος  with 
the  accusative  :  where  ?  by  tv  idth  ike  dative  :  whence  ?  by 
εχ  cr  airo  with  the  genitive  :  and  by  or  through  what  place  ? 
by  δια  with  the  genitive. 

Adverbs  in  ύι  and  di  are  used  to  sigiufy  at  a  place  :  in  oz,  a;,  or 
ζ:,  to  a  place  :  and  in  6εν  and  us,  irom  a  place  :  os  is  also  add- 
ed to  accusatives,  to  signify  to  a  place. 

T'tc  distance  of  one  place /rum  another,  is  piU  in  the  accusative. 


1 .  Thence  he  advances  three  days' 
march,  thirty  parasangs,  to  the  plain 
of  Cayster. 

2.  Thus  Cyrus  spoke,  an-ϊ  hav- 
ing done  these  things,  went  to  the 
Persians. 

3.  After  these  things  they  pro- 
ceeded to  the  Taochijfire  days^  march, 
i/tirty  parasangs ;  and  their  provi- 
sions failed. 

4.  Through  this  region,  both 
through  that  which  was  hostile, 
and  that  which  was  friendl}•,  the 
Ό  reeks  proceedexi  eight  days'  march, 
and  come  to  the  Chalybes. 

δ.  An  overthrow  having  hap- 
pened to  them  at  Leuctra. 

6.  Intelligence  having  come  un- 
to him,  that  in  the  battle  at  Co- 
rinth, eight  of  the  Lacedcemonians 
lay  dead. 

7.  Lysander,  having  drawn  up 
on  shore  the  siiips  at  Ephesus,  re- 
mained quiet. 

5.  He  was  enabled  to  say,  that 
they  alone  of  the  Greeks,  fought 
in  aid  of  the  king  at  Platdde. 

9.  But  when  there  came  to  him 
twenty  ships  froyn  Syracuse,  and 
others  came  BAsofrom  Jcnia. 

10,  But  when  he  had  come,  he 


x&vT«  εις  Κα.ΰιίτ?ίς  tS'Jjov. 

(i-jTog  US  TOicu),''  cig  ΐΐΐξΰνιξ 

Ex  οίτος  r:ofi-j'a.P^  :ΐς  Ταν 
γ_ος,  αΐο.6μ.οζ  τίντί,  τuξu- 
(Ταγγτ,ς  τξνχχοντα,  χα»  ό 
S'THrrfOSirrV^  S-riXsicoj .'-^ 

λην,  ύια  -ί  ϋ  ΐ7ολίμιε^,  xci  ό 
φίλιο?,  το^ευω'*^  cxru  drad^ 
μο?,  κκι  κΐίχνίί,μαι  :ΐζ  Χκ. 

λ-.fcj. 

AuTcg  εν  Ae:>y.TPa  ff-j^. 
φζζσ.  γίνομαι. ρ" 

ως  ίν  ό  εν  Kofivcot:  ^ο.-χ^τ„  οχ- 
τω  Ααχίΰαίμονίο?  ίνηίχω.Ρ'''^ 

Ό  Αυίίανϋ^ο?,  ανελχυω'' 
ό  εν  ό  ΕφεαΌ^  ναυ?,  ήίοχια 

F-XU^  λε^'ω,  ότι  μονο^  ό 
Έλλην  βαΰιΧί^ς^  ϋ•Μμ.α• 
■χο-,Μιΐ'  εν  Ιϊλαταίαι. 

Ετε/  οβ  iJ>y^cj.c.<^  αυτος  ό 
τε  εχ  Σ\>ξα\ου^αι  Μα\^ς  ε;χο- 
tfiv,  ί^γοιιαί^  όε  χκ(  airo 
luivio.. 

Ετει  ίε  >)χω,"  avaCouvw' 


116 


G-nEEK  EXEECISUe. 


vkcnt  up  unto  him,  wiih  the  em- 
basi.iduis yVc/m  Laccdamion. 

11.  TAfAice  he  ad vancee  MrciW^A 
Syna^  and  comes  to  Ui6  nver  Araxts. 

12.  Thence  the  Greeks  proceed- 
ed ihrou^k  the  JMacrvncs  ;  but  on 
ijjc  tirsl  day  ihej  came  i(?  ^ic  river 
vliich  separated  both  the  territory 
of  the  Macrones,  and  thai  of  tlie 
Scytiiini. 

13.  But  the  soldiers,  having 
sold  the  corn  which  they  had  col- 
lixtcd  to^Tthrr,  and  the  other 
ihijiiTi?  which  they  had  taken,  i>iu- 
ceeded  thence  (hruugh  the  Bithypi. 

14.  They  epent  the  winter  be- 
ing occupied  with  these  tiling?  ; 
hi!t  at  thii  opening  of  the  spring•, 
Phariiubazus  having  nianm-d  ma- 
ny oliips,  and  having  hired  in  addi- 
tion u  ineieenary  force,  sail'-d,  and 
Corion  along  with  liini,  i/irough  t/ic 
ialu/ii/s,  to  wMtlos. 

1 5.  The  in.-;olencG  of  the  slaves 
and  stranger.^  (U  Aihais  is  very 
great ;  and  it  is  neither  allowed 
i/icrc  to  strike  a  blow,  uor  will  a 
slave  give  way  for  thee. 

16.  Pau.sanias,  having  received 
thi.•»  letter,  though  being  even  be- 
fore helil  in  great  estniiaiion  by 
the  CJreeks  on  arcoinit  of  the  chief 
command  at  Pl(Ua£,  was  then 
much  more  elated. 

17.  Bui  the  hives  wexe  nume- 
rous L'icrc,  and  as  many  of  the 
soldiers  as  ale  of  tlic  honey-combs, 
bocame  all  deprived  of  iheir  sensee. 

IS.  Wiiat  in  rnanij  therefore  and 
o:ker  itKi:(:ru:es  is  fully  apparent, 
ihal  there  is  nolo,  firmer  band,  than 
•^•heji  it  is  composed  of  friendly 
iellow-combafanti!,  is  in  this  in- 
stance also  made  maiuieat. 


νξος  aiTcg  Ci^v    i   -x  Aaxs- 

ΣνξΜ,  χα<  α^ιΐινίομαι  ΐξος 
δ  Λξαζγ,ς  <Γοταμοί. 

Εντίνίίν  νοξί-^νΡ^  Ό  Έλ. 
λην  6(α  ΛΙαχ|ί«ν•  ό  T|c«ro5 
δι  γ.μεξσ.  a?lx*;C/JWXl*  sn  ό 
«Ό-ταμοί,  Ις  ο^ι^μ"  ό  τε  ό 
Μαχ^ων  χω^α,  χω  i  ό  Σχ,. 

Ό  οε  ίτξατι^ττ,ς,  όιατι. 
ότ;μι"'^'  ό  (ίιτος,  Ις  ίιμΓ  ΰιγ- 
χομι^ω,Ρ"ε  χαι  ό  akXcg  Ις 
λαμ"ανω,^  Εχτο^ίι^"'-'  ϋισ, 
ό  Bn)cvof. 

"Ο  μ^ν  χίιμα,ν  sv  οίης 
ειμί  διάγω''   άμα  us  ο  sae 

χαι    ^swxcg"    τίοίμίίίΐί.;,'"••-' 
c>.£oj'  ό  >Ι>αί>να§α£ο5  τ;,  χαι 

•  'ί- 

ο   Kwuiv    μετ     α\ιΐος,    ΰια 

ντ,ΰίζ  fig  iMr,>c5. 

Ό  iouXcj  xaj  ό  με-τοιχο5 
flroXij  ειμί  Α^ηνι^ίΊν  αχολα- 
da,  χαι  cu-ε  ταταίΤίο»•'  εξ- 
είτιν  a;/Tot'i,  οντε  -τεξιττ»;. 
μι"'  Cu  Jo-jXtj:. 

0;Jro5  λαμίαν'Α^*^  ό  Ilaj. 
tfavws  ό  ^^αμμα,ΐ'  ειμί  χαι 
ajCiTejcv  £ν  με^α^  αξι:*)μα 
ίιτο  ό  Έλλτ;ν  (5ια  ύ  Πλο- 
•rataUiv  ίίχεμονια,  τολνδ 
τότε  μαλλο»  ai^w.' 

Ό  ίε   ίμηνο;   TiXif  ειμί 

φαχω'   ό   tfcf  ανίατη?,   νας 
off  ων  ^ι^νομαι.^ 

ΙΙολλα^οί3ι  μεν  ιιιι  xaj 
άλλοθι  δτ,^.οζ,  ότι  cux  ει/ω 
iffj^ufof  φαλα^Ι,  η  ίτα»  εχ 
φ^λο^  (?υμμα;^05  «ί^οι^ω,"'* 
χαι  εν  οίτοζ  oj^ktM,-' 


GREEK  EXEKCISX^ 


IIT 


19.  If  thou  come  to  any  of  the 
nearest  citiee,  cither  to  Tktbss  or 
to  wMegara,  (for  they  are  each  go- 
verned by  good  laws,)  thou  wilt 
come  as  an  enemy  lo  the  govern- 
ment of  these. 

20.  And  they  decreed  that  they 
cause  those  to  cease  from  their 
authority,  and  choose  others  Λvuh- 
oui  delay  ;  and  they  chose  ten,  one 
from  each  tribe,  and  the  tliirty  with- 
drc\v  lo  Eieusis. 

21.  But  he  went  ίο  Lycia  under 
tlic  safe  guidance  of  tiie  gods. 

22.  Bring  thou  forward  another  ; 
or  rather  those  two ;  that  laughing 
man  who  is  from  Abdera,  and  that 
weeping  one  who  is/roiii  Kphesus ; 
for  they  theniselves  wish  to  be  sold 
together. 

23.  And  he,  having  t<aken  in 
addition  from  Athens  both  other 
ships  and  heavy-armed  troops,  sail- 
ed av/ay. 

24.  They  selected  Dracontius, 
a  Spartan  ;  who,  when  a  boy,  fled 
from  home^  having  unintentionally 
slain  a  boy,  having  struck  him 
with  a  Spartan  sword. 

25.  They  v/ent  each  of  them 
home. 

26.  The  storm  earned  them  to 
sec. 

27.  The  Greeks  thereupon  were 
in  great  perplexity,  reflecting  that 
they  were  distatii  from  Greece  more 
than  ten  thousand  stadia. 

28.  But  when  the  Greek?,  hav- 
ing crossed  over,  were  distant  from 
the  ravine  as  much  as  eight  stadia^ 
Mithridates  also  crossed  over,  hav- 
ing his  force. 

29.  Some  άί^ίωιί  a  journey  of 


Eav  £ig  •  tyY'jrara  τ>ζ 
ToXis  έπομαι/'  η  Θτ,ξαξΒ, 
■η  Μεγαξαυε,   (ίυνομΕω  γαρ 

Και  ψης^ι^ω™^  fxjivcj 
μεν  χαταιταυω,"  άλλο?  ΰΐ 
αιξίω'''  χαι  α'ιξεω'^  ίίχα,  εΊς 
aro  φυλτ]•  χα»  ό  r#iaxovra 
ΕλίϋίΊναΟ;  ατβ^χομΛ».'* 

Α\ιταξ  ό  /3α»νω''  Λνκηινοδ 

Αλλο?  ifCL^ayu,^  μάλλον 
δε  ό  δυο  oCr-;*  ό  yjXau  δ 
Α^δ-ήξούίν,  xaj  ό  χλαιω  ό  εξ 
Εφϊίο?'  άμα  γαξ  αιτοζ  irt. 
tfiaixw"  /3ουλομαι. 

ΙΤ^οίίλαμξανω^  is  Α6η• 
vr,Ssv  αλλοί  τε  vaug  χαι 
ότλίττ]^,  α'ΤονΧξω.^ 

τκχτϊ]?,  05  φευγω^  faig  £(μ*β; 
οιχοόίν,  THIS  axcjv  χαταχτίί• 
νω,*  ξυηλη  iraTaiCaJ.' 

Ό  μ^ν  /3αινω°  οίχονδβ 
exairos. 

Ό  φε^ω"  τοντονΟί  όϋΐλ- 
λα. 

Εν  «οΧυς  όη  α-το^ία  £/μ»  ό 
Έλλην,  ενΰυμεομαι  ότι  ατε. 
-/_ω^  ό  Έλλα5  ίλεο»  η  μ■J. 
^101  ίταόιον. 

Ετϊΐ  ίε  ό  Έλλην  'Jiatou. 
νω'  αΐΓϊ3;(ω-  ο  χα^αο^α  offog 
οκτώ  (ίταίιοί,  Οιαβαινω"  xfx< 
C  ?*Ιιί)|ΐί)ατη5,  εχω  ό  5ϋνο- 

'Ο™  μ5ν  α•ϊ5χω*ί  τίψ« 


lis 


Gft££K  LXCSLnscs 


many  days,  ειηά  oihera  even  of  ma- 
nj  months. 

30.  Τ  Thence  they  proceeded 
ϋιτου^Κ  Trvos,  and  having  crossed 
ever  Ida,  they  come  first  ίσ  ^intatt- 
drof,  ihf-n,  passing  by  the  sea-coasl 
of  Lj'dia,  ίο  tke  plain  of  Thebe. 
Tkcfice,  having  come  ίΑΓσυξλ  Adra- 
myUiun  and  Ctrtonium  by  Aiameus 
ft)  the  plain  of  C»iycu3,  ihey  reach 
Pergainus  cf  Mycia. 

31.  Aftf-r  these  tilings,  Xeno- 
phon  negociated  for  vessels,  in 
order  thai  they  might  cra*3  over 
as  soon  as  possible  tnto  Aaia ;  but 
during  this  time,  Arietarchus  the 
piaiect /rcmj  Byzantium  having  ar- 
rived, having  two  irircint's,  told  the 
soldiers  not  lo  croso  over  inlo  dsia. 

32.  Aristarchus  me€t3  <U  Cyzi- 
(ys  Aiiaxibius  sailing  away  from 
Bvzanhum,  and  Anaxibius  enjoins 
upon  Aris'iirchi-.s  to  sell  into  slave- 
ry as  many  of  the  soldiers  of  Cyrus 
as  he  should  find  left  ai  Byzanlium. 


33  I  ad\-;.=ed  both  thy  father 
and  my  brother  Doriiis,  not  lo  go 
on  an  expediuon  aaainit  the  Scy- 
thians, men  inhabiting  a  city  iw 

3i.  If  moreover  it  behoves  to 
make  mention  also  of  minor  mat• 
u-T?,  they  nr»f,  through  their  com- 
i.^ATul  of  the  sea,  diioovcro«i  new 
rnutlcs  of  A'asiing;  uhaievpr  was 
agreeable  in  StcUy,  or  in  Itah/,  or 
in  Cyprvs,  or  jm  Egypt,  or  in  Lydia, 
01  υ*  PaofuHfvsus,  or  any  wkcrt 
else,  all  tbe:>e  thinge  were  collected 


l^r,  :»S  Ανί•ανϋ;^5  αφ»χν«;- 
μΛΐ  «^ίωτον,  είτα  ra»a  da. 

θτ;ϊη  c=oiiv.  Evre;/3ev  6Γ 
Ατ^αμ-Λ-τιον  xcu  Κί^τενίο» 
*α^'  Arajvr^s  itg   Kalxc^ 

χα?•α>Λμία*!.)  ό  Μ-ί/α. 

ό  Α(Τια,  ε»  έϊ  oCrtf  αίκ 
χτεομα»'  Aiiirai^rs  ίχ  Β^ 
ξαιτιο•»  ίξμοίττ,ς,  ε•^  o-jc 
«■^rfi?,  ε€•ω^  ό  CTPaTfij. 
Tr5     μη     τζξΟΜ'^^     ϋζ     ό 

AtfMX. 

AccT>4i^  Oi  Α'.Λξιξ.:ς  ΐχ 

Ava|iltc<:  ;^ι?Γίλλω  ϊ  μΛ 
Λ/κΤ-αρχοί,  cxiJci  αν  ;.- 
Piffxij'  εν  Β-^αντιβν  ό  Kj- 
|t;5    ΰτξαη,,-χς    ilTc>>£icu-' 

Ε/  u  (is  xoi  rarri*•  i  :Γχ , 
αόί>-ί£:5  t«   £μ:ρ,  ΛαίίΐΕί, 

*ΐμω. 

El   Oe    oil    ΧΛΙ    μ(Χ;οί•ί^?$ 

μναι:,Ρ^  όια  ό  ο^>;  ό  «)α• 
λΛΤτα   Tj'^rtv    μϊν    rjtflrog 

t^-^ta     ige-wjiawj'"      ί^     fig 

εν  £ιχ5λια  ή^υ^,  t)  £>  Ιτα- 
>ja,  τ,  ev  Κ,/ΓΡο<:,  τ;  iv  Α»- 
yj«T&f,  ϊ;  εν  λ^ύια,  η  εν  ό 
riovroc,  *)  εν  nfX:^cvvr/7ft(, 

η  c;>J^JO^ι  «•ου,  cucog  »»$  Sig 


0«EEK  ESBIItiallB. 


\lO 


into  one,  by  ttoqon  of  their  com- 
mand of  the  sea. 
,  35.  Bui  the  soldiers  of  tphicra- 
tes,  having  made  irruptions  »«aj 
m-any  parts  of  Arcadia  also,  both 
carried  away  plunder  and  attacked 
the  walled  cities. 

36.  But  let  us  see  Gnipho  the 

nsurer,  if  it  appear  gcKxl  to  thee ; 

he  docs  not  live  far  off,  and  his 

cjoor  itself  is  open  to  us. 

/•  ■ 

37.  Do  not  thou  hesitate  to  go  a 
great  distance  to  those  who  promise 
to  teach  any  thing  useftal. 


bakarra. 

foXXaxotfi  χα»  ό    AficouSia 

χα<  ί^οίβαλ^ώί^  c^og  ό  ς-su 

Εχω  6t,  ei  έοχΣΐ,  Ttt^ut 

otxiu,  ανοιχωΡ*  ανΤί5  ε^ω 

Mr,  xaroxvsu  μΛΧξτ,ς  hoos 
τοΡΐνω,""    i-^j   ό    o»oatfxw 


3S.  Sed  mihi  neque  ciiW2<3  exeunti  mane,  dei  signum  adver- 
saium  est,  neque  quondo  hie  nscendebam. 

39.  Descenditque  post  iintm  annorum  ad  Achab  in  Soma- 
nam* 

40.  Iviudaverit  jure  aliquis  ilium  Athnis  legislatorem,  qui 
vetuit  parentem  a  filio  aJi,  quom  nullam  artem  edocuissei. 


CHAP.  XLVIII. 

Verbal  adjectives^  governing  a  dative  of  the  agent  end  the  case  of 
th/jr  (jwn  verbs,  are  us^  to  signify  necessity . 


1.  The  sayiag,  Know  thy?olf, 
means,  if  thou  kuoweet  thine  o\»n 
circumstances  and  rv^uU  thou  mnsi 
do 

2.  Both  all  who  speak  and  ye 
who  hear,  must  j^cfer  things  which 
arc  best,  and  will  be  saliatary. 

3.  If  they  were  to  liave  done 
any  thing  ba?e,  thou  shouldst  have 
chfj^en  death  rather  than  it. 

4.  If  it  be  not  com4iitcnt  with 
■what  is  honourable  to  be  eared,  wc 
must  choose  dcalL• 


μι,   αν   ό   c^a^/jux  εΐ'!(€α''  ό 
Ca\fTov,    aeai    τις    <S\i    tcii*- 

Kcu  ό  yjiytxR  cMTOtf,  *xai 
ό  axc»w  <i\i,  ό  ^i>.T»(rTcff  xoi 

Κ  ι  ^i>jlr'  ay:^!^  τις 
eξyaζcμJιι,  dctvttrc^  <Αι  αντ' 
a'v^cf  cζ<■Ja^ξBτn^  eiyj.' 

Av  μ,η  sifu*  cfog  ό  χαΧος 


ίοο 


CRr.tE  EXF.acia&e. 


5.  Jf'c  must  shcrw  that  we  have 
bei:n  ednciitoil  betu-r  than  otliers, 
an-i  instructeil  in  the  way  to  virtue. 

6.  tVe  mvil  not  overcome  xcomcn 
by  "tren^th. 

7.  The  tffisc  man  ought  to  avoid 
h'.in^  for  fiune,nn(l  regarding•  thiii^ 
pleasing  to  the  innltiiiuie,  without 


T.yu  entoitxttoi  fiui,  art 
;  α>.λοί  αμίιν^ν  TfffiJ,  tsu 

Ou  (fdiVOJ  Vlxr,TfO?  (-/^') 


?«:../ 


5  roX-jf  ίοΚίωβ  rsgiixoirscj, 


rr.akinn:  right  rcftson  the  ruler  of    xai  μ-η  ί  ofdoi:  Xc^os  r,ys 


his  life. 

S.  But  'his  mtiiit  first  is  cr-fist' 
d^ed  l/y  us,  wheth»i  lliere  be  any 
art  of  sublimity  or  depth  ;  for  some 
persons  think  that  they  are  quiic 
mistaken  who  refer  such  things  as 
these  to  precepts  of  art. 

9.  ΤΓ  If  thou  wishcat  that  the 
gala  be  propitious  to  thee,  thou 
must  worship  the  eod^ ;  or  if  thou 
vi.ahost  to  be  beloved  by  thy  friends, 
thou  must  do  good  to  thy  fnends  ;  or 
if  thou  desirest  to  be  honoured  by 
any  state,  tbnu  viust  assist  that  state, 

10.  I  think  that  a  person  sh/)}d/I 
eaptivaic  those  whom  he  would  wish 
to  make  willing  ast^istants  in  the 
work?  of  war,  by  all  good  words 
and  derils. 

11.  I  nay  then  that  you  ου  git 
to  give  aid  to  the^e  thing.^  in  two 
manner.^ ;  first,  in  saving  their  ci- 
ties for  the  Olynlhians,  and  send- 
ing the  soldiers  who  will  do  this; 
and  secondly,  in  injuring  this  coun- 
try by  ships  and  by  other  soldiers. 

?^• 

12.  Si  qui.',  qtinm  tibicon  bonus  non  ."it,  videri  vclit,  quid 
d  flicienduin  .sit '?  An  non  vniUindi  boiii  tibicincs  in  iis  quas 
simt  extj-a  nrtem  ?  Ac  priraum  quidcm,  qunin  illi  instrumcnta 
pulchra  habeant,  multoeque  pediidequos  circuniducant,  ctiam 
^^  kecc  faci^nda. 


μω*  «Όΐίω"'  ο  βκζ, 

f 5'jf  ev   Ο^η,    £l    flfJH  ύψο5 

τις  η  βαίος  τίγντ^•  ετει  η; 
όλω^  βιοααι  οιαταταω,*  ΐ?* 
S  roiouTcs  ayuS  ίι;  ?•5ρζνιχ:^ 

Ε»  ό  icoj  iX:i>i  ciai  ΑΊ; 
/SojXofwti,  oe'aTsvTccg  (α".) 
ό  6ίος•  ειτ:  ύιτο  ς;ιΧο<:  ίί;. 
Χω  αγαιταω,  Ό  ς;ιΧο?  ((T-j) 
ε•Λ^ίττ;7£05•  ει•Γ£  Ceo  τολι^ 

ωφίΧητεο^. 

Ός  ό  £ΐί  ό  coXeijms  i^/cv 
■roisUJ  Tij  ροοΧομαι  (Τ^ν;;^  af 

£χω  χ£  ίοχίι,  αχαίο5  ii;fa- 
CeoS  ειμι,χαι  Xoyog  xoj  ε^  cv. 
Λ'τ,μι  δη  (5ιρζη  βογ,ίητί'^ 
ειμ*  ό  «"^αχμα  (fj,  ό°*^  «•£  ό 
coXif  i  OX'jviioj  •''ω^ω,'^  χαι 
ό  oiiTcj:  βΌΐε^ο^ε  ΰ•ζατ>'^ττ;ς 

iXZc^CU,    Χαΐ    C™*    ό    cXelV?^ 

χω^α     xaxi^    «Όΐεω,*^    xtj 


β&εεΚ  EXERCIS£3. 


131 


CHAP.  XLIX. 

The  infinitive  mood,  or  a  participle,  is  used  to  supply  the  place  of 
gerunds  and  supints. 


INFINITIVE. 

1.  The  first  of  the  Athenians, 
most  powerful  in  speaking  and  act- 
ing. 

2.  The  Cretans  are  skilful  in 
using  the  bow. 

3.  He  will  be  hard  to  make  war 
against. 

4.  Thou  wert  going  to  leave 
this  deserted  house  lo  others,  to  be 
plundered. 

5.  Do  thou  refrain  entirely  from 
shouting,  ixnafrom  laughing  al  any 
thing. 

6.  He  spent  the  greatest  part 
of  his  time  in  enquiring,  and  consi• 
dering,  and  consulting. 

7.  It  is  time  for  thee  to  depart 
from  fighting. 

8.  Such  wert  thou  to  be  looked  at. 

9.  What  went  ye  out  to  behold  ? 

10.  For  he  was  stern  to  behold. 

11.  It  happens  that  our  state  is 
worthy  to  be  admired,  both  in  these 
respects,  and  besides  in  others. 

12.  If  indeed  the  valiant  spirit 
of  thy  father  has  been  instilled  in- 
to thee,  such  a  one  as  he  was  to 
perform  both  a  deed  and  a  word. 

13.  And  bij  injuring  his  country 
both  with  ships  and  other  troops. 


n|cjrc5  Α&Ύ,νΆΐύζ,  λεχω 

ΚζΎ^ς  ειμί  τοξεύω  ιχγοώας. 

Χαλε-ττοδ  ειμί  «ξοζ  ό"* 
ιτολεμεω. . 

Αλλοί  ίομο?  λειιτω"  μέλ- 
λω ορφανοί  δίαζ'Χα^ω,^ 

Βοη,   χα»  ό"«  ειτι^ελαω 

Εν  ό"«  ^ητεω,  χα»  φξον. 
τιζω,  χαι  /ίουλε^ω,"  ό  cro- 
"Κυς  χξονος  διατ^ιβω.- 

Και^οί  (ίυ  ο"^  αΐΤϊ<μι' 
ατο  ί'^  μάχομαι. 

Ειμί  SiS'J"  ToieuToj. 

Τις  φξχομαι^  θεαομαι  ;* 

Στυγνός  γαξ  ό|αω  είμι. 

Και  εν  τε  ouroj  β  ιτολι? 
άξιος  ειμί  όαυμα^ω,  χαι  ετι 
εν  αλλο$  γίνομαι. 

Ει  δτ)  701  tfu  ιτατηΓ  ev. 
ύταξω'  μένος  ηυί,  βίο?  ε.<εί- 
VOJ  ειμί  τελεω^  ε^ον  re 
ε^ο^  τϊ. 

Και  ό"*  6  εκεινοί  χω^α 
χαχωί  τοιεω,  xoi  τ^ιη^ηί 
χα»  (Γτ^ατιωτη?  έτε^β^. 


PARTICIPLE. 


14.  Ι  myself  acquired  them  by 
conferring  favours, 

L 


EvS^'8T£W*    aWOf-  ΧίΌβ- 


UMt. 


133 


CREEK  EXERCISES. 


15.  Thou  dool  endeavour  lo  de- 
ceive me,'  by  purposely  speaking 
thinirs  contrHiT  to  those  on  which 
■ue  were  jusi  now  ag'ree<l. 

16•.  AVe  {ja in  friend?,  not  hy  rt- 
ceiviiig,  but  Oy  conferring  favour»:. 

17.  I  ha\e  .«pent  xny  own  pro- 
perty in  ώήη^  nothinsr  else  than 
honouring  and  bestowing  i^i/ls, 
^'lienevL-r  I  admired  any  of  the 
Boldier.s. 

IS.  He  made  those,  who  a.<?oci- 
ated  witii  him,  entertain  the  liope, 
that  they  by  iifiitating  hi:n  woukl 
become  sucii. 

19.  The  accuser  said,  that  he, 
by  selecting  i\Uo  tlie  wor.-t  pas• 
sages  of  the  mo.st  celebrated  poets, 
nnd  using  these  as  proofs,  taught 
those  who  a.=.-ociated  with  liini  to 
be  evil-doors  and  tyrannical. 

20.  He  observed  moreover,  with 
an  air  of  plensant ry,  that  he  thoughl 
that  Circe  niade  (men)  swine,  by 
entertaining  them  with  many  such 
things. 

21.  I  went  to  thee,  in  order  to 
tee  how  thou  art. 

22.  And  thou  never  gro\vest 
wear}•  in  c^/n!riving  how  these 
thiiigs  may  be  to  tliy  friends. 


Oj  rraV^u  su,  αΧλα 
όξα-^,  χταομαι  ό  φιΚος. 

χω,  <ι\)δίις  aXXof  rot;•^,  η  -τι- 
μάω, χω  γαζΐζομ.αι,  όταν 
<ης  αχαξομΐϋΡ^  ό  ffr^ariu:- 
ττ,ς. 

Ελ«Ί£ω  τοιόω^  ο  β';,ν- 
outCPibU?  ΐαοταυ,  μιμ;θμα< 
ίχεηοζ,  τοιοίϋ:  ^Ίνομαι."''* 

Φημι  (3'  αυτό,  ό  xaTr.. 
yoPof  χαι  ό  evJcfo;  ιτοιητη^ 

χαι  οϋτο?  μα|ΓυΡΐον  ρ^^αω,™ 
ίιίαίχω  ό  (ΓυνΕίμιΡ  xaxo.j• 
yof  ειμί  χαι  τυξα\νιχα;. 

ΟιομΛΐ  (5;  φημ*  f^'C- 
χωίττωε  ό  Κι^χν;  ίί  «Όΐ:"ω, 
TOIOUTOS  croXu;  όΐιτνιξω. 


Εχω  «riog  Cu  ειμ*,"^ 
Γπο'χίίΓΓομαι'  tcoj  εχω. 

'O'TTug  Te  ο^τος  ^ι^νομαι 
b  φίλο;  o'jx  α«Όχαμνω  μη- 
χαναομαι. 


Ι 


PROMISCUOUS. 

23.  In  living  indulenthj  ami  in  Ev  ό"*  ξa^.μ.'.u  χαι  5 
Zoif/i Λ"  satiet}•,  pains  quiclcly  cling  τληίΤμΛνηΡ  απατάω,  ε;,ί«( 
to  pleasures.  ό  Xuirr;  ό  ή(5οντ)  'Καξα.ΊΤΎίγΜν- 

μ,  m7 

24.  'J'hi.s  i.-;  the  way  loadinrr  lo  Οίιαξ  »ιμι  ό  όι5ο?,  ό  a^u» 
true  learnin•?,  and  it  is  very  ditiiculi  νζ^^ς  Ό  αληθινό?  traiSna, 
in  appearance.  xoi  μαλα  ^;  χαλίτο^  irfo- 

tfeiicj.* 

25.  Da  tliou  piously  reverence        EviiSsw  β  σ^  ό  ίί»ί, 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


lae 


the  things  which  appfrtaiu  nnto 
the  god.-,  not  only  ly  sacrificing^ 
but  also  ill  abiding  by  thy  oaths. 

26.  Who  are  given  to  change, 
and  quick  i)i  rrfieding  and  in  ac- 
tually performing  whatever  they 
may  have  devised. 

27.  But  if  battles  arc  decided 
even  now  as  formerly,  by^  those 
that  fight  Λνβΐΐ,  thou  wouldst  not 
do  wrong  in  taking  heart. 

28.  For  a  faithful  friend  in  ad- 
versity is  more  pleasant  to  behold 
than  a  calm  to  mariners. 

29.  It  is  not  ea.sy  to  be  told^  how 
ranch  pleasure  they  feel  in  hanng 
put  their  enemies  to  flight,  how 
much  also  in  pursuing,  and  how 
much  in  slaying  their  enemies. 

30.  He  had  soon  destroyed  the 
wild  beasts  in  the  park,  by  pursu- 
ing, and  striking  and  killing  them. 

31.  And  le.'ive  no  pretence  to 
your  general  of  sailing  to  another 
place,  or  of  doing  something  else. 

32.  Having  said  the.«e  things, 
he  showed  some  valuables  both 
numerous  and  beautiful,  and  told 
them  of  other.s,  so  situated  that 
they  were  not  easy  to  be  seen, 

33.  1  wish,  Ο  king,  rather  to  fail 
hy  acting  honourably,  than  to  stic- 
ceed  by  deceiving. 

34.  And  what  decrees  have  been 
passed  against  the  rich,  which,  by 
C<!rberus,  they  have  no  mean.s  '/ 
tscaping. 

35.  By  dying  I  ehall  afford 
laughter  to  my  enemies. 

3G.   A  person  may  know  the 


μη  μόνον  iuoj,  κλλα  χα»  Ιζ, 
χος  £μν£νω. 

Ός  μίν  γε  νεωτίξο'χοιοζ^ 
χαι  ETivofw'  οξύς,  και  ειτι- 
TjXsij^  ξξγον'^  ός  «ν  yiuwo"- 

El  μίντοι,  Jjtf'ffSP  'ΤΓ^οσ'- 
ίίν,  δια  ό""^  ευ  μαχομκι,Κ 
ετ(  χαι  νυν  ο  μάχη  κ^(νω, 
όα^^ίω   o-j()sig"e    αν   ίφαλ. 

ΐίκίτος  γαξ  sv  xaxogP 
ανηξ  xj'Sitfcfi.jv  γαλήνη  ναυ- 
τίλος εΐΟΌ^αω. 

Ου  ίαδιος  svu,^  o(fcg 
μίν  ί;ί/ονη  εγω  εν  ο'"^  rj-s- 
iru"^^^  ό  ΑΤολίμιο?,  όοΌς  5s 
εν  ό"^•^  (5ιωχω,  Ισος  Si  εν  Ό^^ 
αττοχτεινοο  ό  ίΤολεμιο?. 

Ταχύ  ό  εν  ό  ιταξαδίκίος 
όη^ιον  avaXiCx:<j,  (5ιωκω,  χαι 
/3αλλω,  χαι  χαταχαινω. 

Και  μη(5Ξΐί  τ^οφαίΤι^  ό"^ 
«rXsw  αλ-λοίε,  η  τ^αττω 
αλλο5  τι?  ό  (Γτ^ατη^ο^  χα- 
ταλεΐ'ϊτω.'' 

OUT05  ετω,^  ό  μεν  (δει- 
κνύω" "ffoXug  TS  χαι  χαλο? 
χτήμα,  ό  δε  χειμαιδ  wf  μη 
|αδιο5  Σίμι  tiuw.^ 

Βουλομαι  δ'  ανα|,  χαΚως 
δραω  εξαμ-αρτανω'^  μάλλον 
η  νικάω  χαχως. 

Και  oicg  χΐι^τ&νεω  ό 
ψηφιίμα  χατα  ό  «λονίΊ. 
ο?,  cj,  μα  ό  Κεξξεξος,  ου- 
δείς μηχανή  r>e  διαφεύγω* 
auTof. 

θνηο'χω''  τιίημ»  ό  εμο^ 
5χ5^οί  7ελω5. 

ΛΙελιττα  ήλιχια  iiayi- 


124 


GREEK   EXERCISES. 


age  of  bees  in  ilus  manner :  iliose 
which  are  but  a  year  old,  are  glos- 
sy, and  ret^einble  oil,  in  colour  ;  but 
the  elder  ones  are  rough  both  lo 
iouk  at  and  to  touch,  and  appear 
wrinkled  by  their  age. 


37.  For  thou  shah  never  hij 
wc'.ping  bring  ι•ρ  the  dead  from  be- 
low. 

36.  When  he  was  ]irovcnied 
froin  discharging  public  duties  him- 
Sflf,  hy  being  employed  about  great- 
er things,  he  called  to  hun  for  this 
purpose,  Archiadas,  α  religious 
man. 

39.  De  rebus  inccrlis  vero,  oracula  consuliiim  mittcbat  sues, 
an  puscipienila  csseni. 

40.  At  isle  eerie  pater  tuus  apiior  est  ad  ^jcendttm  raimis 
quam  plus  habere. 


vojtfxu***  Tif  or;,  fj  τ;οϊγο;* 
oorej*  ό  fi.sv  «i^TOerrfC  ffnX. 
cwff  <TS  ειμί,  χαί  6ίχώ"'' 
ΐλαιον,  ϋ  χίοια•*  ό  if  ve^.'i- 

ό^αωΡ  5ια  ό  ^r,»ag. 

Oj  γαξ  rtvayw  Tars 
ίνίξΰΐν  xXaiy  ό  φίιμενοί: 
ανω. 

xuXutJ*   ό   coXiTis&CjP"   όια 

Αςχιαδας,    ό    Sirx'^  piXcc, 


CHAP.  L. 


Τίίίο  or  Wi>rc  negatives  strengthen  the  negation. 
Bia  if  the  two  negatives  belong  to  two  differtnX  verbs,  iheyfornt 
tn  cui-mative. 


1.  JYor  did  any  other  one  of  the 
(ireeks  suffer  any  thing  iii  this  bat- 
tle. 

2.  That  is,  not  only  not  to  have 
prejudged  any  thing. 

3.  A  mean  nature  ncrcr  docs 
a>i>j  thinsr  groat  unto  another,  either 
liiiio  an  individual  or  a  slate. 

4.  'I'hc  other  things  have  no 
where  in  no  way  any  roiunumion 
with  any  one  of  the  things  which 
are  not. 


Oji5e  αλλοί  (5ε  ό  "ΙΆλην 
εν   οίτος  ό    μάχη   «"aff^cj" 

Οίτος  ειμί,  ου  μόνον  ('.««■ 
μη  t^QKCLTaytvuiixu'  μτ,• 
5ει?. 

2μιχ?ο5  ^\)(ίις  OD-isij  μί- 
^α5  o'jJs  <Γ0ί"3  odOsij,  cuts 
ιϋιωτηί  ο-τε  "ffo^Ji;  Jfaw. 

Ό  αλλοδ  ό  μ>ι  iifuS  oi- 
Jifi;  ουϋαμι;  c'jjaawt:  ouJcig 
χοιτωνια  c^u. 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


125 


5.  I  will  not  omit  to  ascertain 
hy  inquiry  tlie  whole  truth  respect- 
ing these. 

6.  It  is  diserraceful  to  deny  that 
he  who  both  labours,  and  benefits 
the  state  niost,  is  7ioi  deserving  even 
of  the  gi'eatest  rewards. 

7.  We  were  compelled  to  change 
to  the  opinion,  that  the  ruling  of 
men  was  ncithei'  among  impossible 
nor  diticnlt  things. 

8.  They  said  that  they  would 
not  march  forth  on  the  ninth  day, 
il  the  moon  were  not  at  the  full. 

9.  Cities  many  in  number  and 
difficult  to  take,  if  (they  are)  -mt 
(taken)  by  a  long  siege. 

10.  I  would  not  pay  even  an 
obolus  to  any  person. 

11.  Thus  there  is  iwi  eren  one 
M'ise  person. 

12.  ."Miserable  art  ihou,  in  re- 
proaching me  with  these  thing.-', 
Avliich  every  one  of  the^e  will  re- 
proach thee  with. 

13.  If  thou  wishest  thus  to  in- 
terrogate any  one  of  those  here 
present,  every  one  will  laugh. 

14.  Both  infantry  and  ships  and 
every  thing  perished. 

15.  He  certainly  wiW  attack  ug. 

16.  Thou  art  certainly  a  gene- 
rous man. 

17.  ΤΓ  For  the  then  Athenians 
fijd  mt  seek  for  an  orator  or  general 
ilirough  whom  they  might  enjoy  a 
happy  slavery. 

18.  That  he  thoughtj  therefore, 
that  command  became  no  mie  who 
was  nat  superior  to  those  govein- 


ου  ηα.ς  τ^έοαομ^.ι'^  ιτε^ί  ios 
αληίίια. 

Αΐ(^-/_ξθζ  ίιμι  αντιλέγω, 
μη  VJ-/)  ό  ToX-jg  χαι  tovsm 
και  ως;ίλε^  ό  xoivoj,  ourog 
χυ.\  μ.εγας  αξι&ω. 

Αναγχαζώ-  μίτανοεω,  μη 
Oj-ri  ό  αυονατος  ούτε  ί  χα- 
λ;ΐΓ05  ε^;  &ν  ειμί  &"*"  «νό^ω. 
τοζ  ο.ς~χ_ω. 

Ev-ciTog  US  ot/x  ε^ε^χο. 
μαι  φημι,  μη  cj  τλη^η^ 
ειμίβ  ό  K'jxXof. 

IloXig  rrcy.vg  xat  χαλέ- 
Toj  λαμ^αν^;,''  μη  ου  χξΛ- 
νοζ  Jcfti  ί7θλοχια  (λ^μ^α. 
vw.P'^g) 

Ον<  αν  κΓθϋΐϋ^;μι'^  oj- 
ύζ  αν  ocoXoi  οιϋει.ί. 

OCrws  οιχ  ειμί  σΌφο^ 
o'^Oc  ε  i.e. 

Σ^J  ίΐ'  ad>jc..c  ^-ε,  circs* 
ονειϋι£α;,  eg"  G-j*^  ooosij  (ει. 
μι)  of  ουχι  t&s  ονειόΐι^ω  τα- 

Ε(  TIS  είελω  oirug  εξο- 
μαι  ό  ενόαο;,   ου^ίι^   (^'μ') 

Και  Ts^Gi:  χαι  νανς,  χμ 
ο\)'5ίις  (έιμι)  cc  τιςουχ  ατολ- 
λυμι.""5 

Οιιχ  ειμί  icwg  cux  εοτι- 
τιήημι"'^  ε;.  C. 

Ουχ  ειμί  ''•7Τ£.'5  ουχ  ειμί  tfu 
yivi/aiaj  κνηρ. 

Ου  J  σ.ξ  ζγ;τί'^^  ο  Tors 
Αόηναιοό  ούτε  «ηται^,  ο;.,τε 
<S7^a.Triy(,g  owl  'uCrig  dcu- 
>.ευω^  ευτνχ^ί. 

Ότι  μεν  owv  ουχ  οιομα»' 
ΐΓ^οο'ηχω  ουόεΐί:  α^η,ε  ίί- 
ng  μη  ,βίλτιμν  ειμ;•^  »  α|. 


L2 


12b 


CKELK  KXI:BCI9ES. 


ed,  is  evident  lo  all,  even  in  tho 
lhL-i:;d  alreiidy  incmioued. 

19.  I  agiiin  a-sked  ihee  lo  g^ive 
BBC  a  lliinsr,  than  which  I  knew 
thai  thou  iiadsl  mudng  of  less 
yahiQ  lo  give  me ;  nor  any  tiling 
easier  to  be  commanded. 

20.  He  docs  not  therefore  hoM 
in  estimation  praise  from  such  per- 
sons as  these,  who  do  not  even 
plea.?e  themselves. 

21.  \Vlion  he  saw  him  unable 
to  bear  iho,  spear,  he  gave  liim 
the  other  things,  and  did  not  fmr 
thai  he  would  not  be  able  lo  bear 
them. 

22.  They  who  arc  most  hostile 
in  the  play  having  become  friond.s 
al  last,  go  out,  and  no  one  u  killed 
by  an\j  person. 

23.  Since  he  aflfarda  himself  to 
him  of  'ih•.;  Gret;k.s  who  wi.she.-s  to 
hi^k  whar.ioever  thing  any  one  may 
»"i-»h,  and  givoo  an  an.swer  iu  evcrij 
one. 

24.  But  .^incn  thou  dost  i^all 
those  ihing.•?  wliich  are  many,  by 
one  ginvrle  name,  and  dool  say  thai 
every  oat  of  them  io  a  form. 


■y'>;,P  xat  ό  'Z'-jil'y.    T«c  ότ). 

Λ     '  is  οι 

"Κος. 

Πα>αν  curi'jj'  tfj,  ίζ  ft. 
isij*  ojTS  (To  αιχ•'β?  £»aiP  Oi- 

Oj  ϊΌΐννν  ουί:  «"aja  j 
τοκυτος  sroivos  iv  Xo^c.^ 
Ti5r,^(j"'    itfyi    'yjji     α„ΐος 

ναμοι  .oaffra^w'  i  (5of  j,  'j 
aXXfij  ίιίωμι,"  xai  o.;X  vO• 
fsoj™-  μη  ou  ουνο,Λ^ίΐ*:  ^=^j 

Ό  ίχί^05  ειμί?  £ϊ  ό  μ•;• 
όοί,  φίλο;  ^'ΐνομαι'"'  5τι  c ί- 
Xfjr^,-  ϊίί^χομΛΐ,  XWI  ατο- 

Άτ£  ayro5"  va^r^j.'S 
oirou  cjwraij  ό  '£XXr,v  ο 
β(,■J\oμ.aιι:  ίς  τις  αν  τι; 
/ίουλομαι,  και  ouiiig  όίη; 
Οχ'Χ  aroxfiv'jj.'"" 

Αλλ'  siiiiSr.  ό  -roXbg  ci- 
Tof  ί'ις  7ΐζ  ir»o(fayo^£yw 
ονο,αα,  χαι  ?»)μ•  ouoiic  au- 
ccg  (ϊίμι)  <'>ί  tij  cj  (Γ^ημα 
Ειμί. 

O^etg  (ίιΐ'ΐ)  otfrij:  oj  χα- 
ταχλαιω'  ό  τα^.-ιμι,ε  irAr.> 
ye  ojTOi  Σωχ^ατη.ί, 


25.  Ηθ  subdued  to  tears  a-ery 
•w  of  'hose  present,  except  So- 
oratee  himself 

2G.  Dixcrim  ogo  quidcm,  ncmbn  nullam  esse  insiitutionem 
tJo  iilo  qui  non  placeat. 

27.  .Wm/)  nusguam  pugnabit  tecum. 

2S.  .Υαηο  ηυη  faciei. 

29    .Wfnj'ni  non  placet. 


GREEK  Έ,ΧΈΤίΟΙΒΖ». 


127 


CHAP.  U. 

The  article  is  used  io  niark  a  disiinciion  cr  emphasis.  JVith  the 
infinitive  it  supplies  the  place  of  nouns,  gertauls,  and  supines. 
JVith  the  participle  it  is  translated  by  the  relative  and  indicative. 
iVith  μεν  and  (5;,  i(  signifies  partly  ;  atid  it  is  often  used  fur 
omametii  sake. 


1 .  The  celebrated  Socrates  seeing 
the  famous  Alcibiades. 

2.  The  famous  Leonidas,  he  of 
Laced  aemon. 

3.  in  the  beginning,  the  mighty 
(iod  created  the  heaven  and  the 
earth. 

4.  And  after  the  seven  days,  the 
water  of  the  deluge  came  upon  the 
earth. 

δ.  They  lead  away  the  Euphrae- 
us  (I  was  mentioning)  to  prison. 

6.  The  Ismenias  (of  whom  we 
are  speaking)  said  to  him,  conduct 
me  in. 

7.  For  a  person  to  cotiguer  him- 
?elf,  is  the  chief  and  best  of  all 
rictories  ;  but  for  any  one  to  be 
overcome  hy  himself,  is  the  basest 
and  worst  of  all  things. 

8.  To  injure,  is  nothing  diiRcult, 
but  is  in  the  poAver  of  every  man  : 
but  to  benefit,  is  by  no  means  in  tlie 
power  of  every  one. 

9.  To  know  how  to  govern 
others,  this  appears  to  us  to  be  sur- 
prising, 

10.  It  is  honourable  even  for 
one  who  is  giOwing  old  to  learn. 

11.  It  is  better  to  be  dead  than  to 
Jive  miserably. 

12.  Death  is  frequently  more 
eligible  than  life. 

13.  Towards  the  arcomplishing 
«f  ihoce  things  which  he  might 


OfCTij  i  Σωχζατγ,ζ  ό  Αλ- 
x^ζ^aϋ■r,ς. 

Εν  ο.ζγτι,  ffoisco^  ό  Θίο; 
ό  ojPavos  χαι  ό  yi\. 

Και  μ^ΐτσ.  ο  ίπτα  ν;μϊ?α 
ό  ύίω^  ό  xaTaxX'jC^cg  ^ινο- 

Avay'^i  ό  Εΐ)φ|αί05  £($  ί 

Ό   ΙίΓμενία^,   αγω  ε^ω, 

'0"^  νικσω  avT(,c°-  αύτου, 
«ας  νικ/5  νξ^.τοζ  τί  χα» 
αξιΚτοζ'  1°^  δί  ήτταομΛΐ 
ajTos°-  ύφ'  ίαυτου,  τας  «jcT- 
γζος  Γί  άμα  χαι  χακο?. 

Ό"*^  μίν  /5λαττω,  ουϋίΐζ 
χαλετο?,  αλλ'  ανό^ωτο^Ε: 
νας'  ό"^  OS  είΤωφε)^Μ,  oy- 
ίαμτ,  ανας. 

Ό""  βϊΊιίΓαμοϋ  ανό^Μ- 
το?  αλλοί  cpoffrariyio,  βύ- 
τορ   όαυμαίτο^    ί^•ω    φα»- 

Καλοί  και  ^Patfai^f  ό" 
μανίανω. 

Καλορ  ό"*"  μη  ζαω  ειμί, 
7;  ^aw  αόλΐίι)?. 

Α  Ιρετο?  ίιμι  τολλακίί 
one  airoi3vr//Txcj^  ό"»  ^αω. 

Ε*ι     ό'**    χατβ^^οίζομαί 


19β 


CREKR  EXERCISBS. 


desire,  he  ihoughl  that  the  ehort- 
eet  route  lay  through  holh  pajwi/, 
;xvA  falsehood,  and  deceit. 

14.  He  contrived  the  rendaing 
his  soldiers  obedient,  from  his  juin- 
υΐξ  ια'Λ  ihtm  in  commiuing  injus- 
tice. 

1 5.  Since  he  wshes  to  be  vic- 
torious in  the  pancratium,  having 
tonsidcrtd  v.-ith  th•;»•,  he  will  as- 
sociate with  this  one,  wliosoever 
ir.ay  appf^ar  to  him  to  be  the  iiueal 

j'jr  his  jiravtining  these  thii:!.?^. 

16.  We  notwithstanding  an- 
KO  '.nee,  hij  our  huvins^  always  grant- 
ed pernii.-iftion  to  him  ot"  the  Atlie- 
n:an.s  ich•)  has  ici.'ihed  it. 

17.  We  i-pf-nd  the  lime  of  acting 
vi  making  ourselves  ready. 

19.  Upon  thi?,  Xenophon  took 
counsel  with  the  rest,  what  it  be- 
liovcs  them  to  do  about  their  go- 
uig  up  any  farther  on  the  expedi- 
:ion. 

1^.  A  sower  went  out  to  soir, 
and  in  sowing,  some  ppcd.-  fell  by 
t!"jp  way  piJf,  and  the  birds  came 
and  ale  them  up. 


20.  Woe,  woe,  woe  fo  those 
who  dwell  upon  the  earth,  from 
the  remaining  bla.-t.s  of  the  irum- 
p't  of  the  liiree  ;uigels  who  are 
about  to  ijound. 

21.  But  when  they  had  .«uppi^l, 
and  it  was  night,  they  who  wire 
ordiT'd  went  and  seize  upon  the 
mouhtain. 

22.  ('hiriFophui?  having  in.spccl- 
id  the  i^iitrinl.»-•,  Ι*•<1  fhis  force)  along 
the  ruud,  while  (iicy  who  had  seized 


aofior  stai  oic  o"*  eric*. 
xfoj  T:,  xai  Ϋέί,ΰω,™  χα» 
ε^αταταω. 

(Γοίβχ^ί,    SX   ό"''   (T'^vctJixiy 

μΜ^  ό  τα^χ^ατίον  γίνομαι,' 
d-jv  <Sj  σχείΓΓω,'"^  ίς  «ν 
Ooxi:j  avroj  ixavoj   ειμ/    =ι$ 

CUVclUI. 
,^50JΛ»μΛl.ε 

Ό    ''"*    c^naSu    y?cvog 

λκΓχω. 

Ex  oCcoj  ύ  μίν  sc-.ejuv 


όε  (rc£i|w•  χα•  ev  0'*'  ffTi/- 
Pij  ouTcf,  ij"•  μ=ν  τιττω* 
«ταΡα  ό  ί6(ί<:.  χοι  ί^ομαι' 
ό    rsrSivov,    χα»   xoTQ^a^y 

Οχιι,  ουαι,  cuai  ό  xa- 
Toixfu  ετί  ό   yy\,  εκ  ό  λοι- 

ayys'krji  Ι  μίλλο)  (Γαλτι^ω. 

Ecei  Ss  itioEcj'  χαι  νΐ'ξ 
^  ινομαι,''  ό  μί»  ταίΟ'ω'  "Χ•** 
μαι,'   χα»   χαταλαμ?ανω    ό 

ηγω^  (ό  ίτιίαΓεί/μα)  χΛτα 
ό  iiof •   ό   όί,   ό  0^  xarof 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


129 


upon  the  mountain  and  the  height 
advanced. 

23.  But  their  kinff,  who  xom  in 
the  wooden  tower  which  was  built 
upon  the  height,  would  not  come 
out,  nor  those  luho  were  in  the  place 
iohich  was  first  taken. 

24.  How  then?  said  Gobryas. 
Because,  replied  he,  it  behoves  us 
10  Jiiplay  these  things  as  injuring 
men,  but  those  as  benefitting. 

25.  It  appears  to  me,  to  be  a 
more  difficult  tiling  to  find  a  man 
supporting  prosperity  in  a  becom- 
ing manner,  than  adversity ;  for 
tlie  former  gives  rise  to  insolence  in 
most  persons,  the  latter  to  modera- 
tion in  all. 

26.  Those  with  the  king  also 
died ;  owe,  while  opposing  some- 
thing ;  another^  while  fleeing  ;  and 
a  third.,  while  striving  to  protect 
himself  with  whatever  he  could. 

27.  Having  adopted  this  prin- 
ciple, he  has  conquered  and  pos- 
sesses all  things ;  partly  as  one 
would  possess,  having  taken  them 
in  war,  and  partlij,  having  made 
them  friends  and  auxiliaries  to  him- 
self. 

28.  Come  then,  what  sayest 
thou  is  the  number  of  thy  force? 
There  are,  said  he,  Median  horse- 
men more  than  ten  thomand. 

29.  For  one  man  is  better  than 
Zc/?,  hy  working  in  season. 

30.  IT  But  after  the  second  ir- 
ruption of  the  Peloponnesians,  the 
Athenians,  since  both  their  terri- 
tory was  ravaged  the  second  time, 
and  the  plague  as  well  as  the  war 
afflicted  them,  altered  their  senti- 
ments. 


'ka.μ.ζσ.vιJ'  xa.i  q  a)<|ov,  Sfl-ij- 

Ό  άί  βαύιΧίυς  auro^,  ό 
(ίίμι)  εν  ό  μοίΤυν  ό  £•?γ'  ακ^ον 
οιχοοομίω,"  ουχ  6cXuP  £ζ:>~ 
χοααι,''  οιιΟΞ  ο  ;ν  ο  τ^οτί^ος 

Τίώς  (5η  ;  φημ»  ό  Γω- 
€|u«g•    ότι,    φ^μι,     ο    μ,ίν 

2ri(StixvLi(jLi,"'  ά  ύε  ευ. 

Δοχίω  S'/Cj}  ■χαλΒ'Ζοζ  ει- 
μι  ίίριίκω"  αν-ήξ  α  αγα.• 
ύοςΡ"  xaXcJS  ??^ω,  "^  ό  χα- 
xog-P"  ι  μίν  γαξ  ί^ξΐζ  ό  το- 
Χυς,  ι  Οβ  ΰ'^ίφξοΰ-^ν^ι  ό  'καζ 
εμ.'ϊ'οιεω. 

Και  ό  (fv'j  βα.ϋι\ε%  6ε 
αιτοίνηο'κω,-  ό  μ-εν  ΤΡοβαλ- 
λω™  Tier,  ,0  δε  (ρΐ;;γο,  ό  Ss 
γε,  xHi  ccp/j"«j™  ίΰτις  (Juva. 
μαι.^ 

Ούτος  χ^αομαι'  ό  yvcj- 
μ//  fas  χαταίΓ^εφω,^  χα< 
εχω•  όΡ"  μεν,  ως  αν  αι- 
ξίω^ε  <Γ{ς  εχω  ίτολεμοί,  ό 
ίε,  (Γυμμαχοί^^  wu  φιλο^''^ 
τοιεω.^ 

Αγω  5η,  ό  Co?  S-j'>aujg 
τις  'ϋΧ-ήόος  ©ημ*  είμ; ;  ειμί, 
φημι,  Μ/,ίΰ^  ίττε^ι^  μ;» 
«roXiig  ό  μι;?(οι. 

EJj  yet»  ανη?  •τκ»α  ο 
οεχα  oii/.:p:iij  ό  εν  ώ*«  ε*- 
α^οααι. 

Λίετα  ίε  ό  ίευ-τε^ο^  εο"• 
§ολ>]  ό  Πίλο'Τοννχ^αΊοί,  ό 
Λ^ηναιοίΤ,  ΰ)ς  Ι  τΒ  γ-η  u-jTig 
τεμνω^  ό  δε-οτίΡας,  χα»  ο 
νο(ίος  ετιχειμαι"  άμα  χω  ό 
νοΧεμος,  αλλοιοω"^  ό  ^νω• 


7-ξ 


130 


CREt£  EXERCI?E6. 


31.  W.it  dooi  thf.  ill  oiher  re- 
ep«ct3  divine  I'lato  ?  wishing  lo 
Rpcak  of  the  tableus  of  laws,  "  hav- 
in;j  w'ritleii,"  says  he,  "  th»'y  will 
lay  'ip  in  tlieir  leinpltis  Uic  cyprcts 
Di'j'norials." 

32.  In  this  wav  also  the  famous- 
lawi^ver  of  the  Jews,  no  conunon 
man  he^  when  he  had  formed  a 
just  conception  of  tiu;  power  of  Μδ 
Deity,  even  expressed  it. 

33.  To  succeed  wt-ll  beyond  be- 
girt, is  to  the  iniprudent  the  occa- 
sion of  thinking  wronfr :  wiiercfore 
to  have  preserved  gooil  ihings,  often 
eeems  to  be  more  dithcull  ihan  .'t> 
Acre  acquired  them. 

34.  Pythagoras  .=aid,  that  these 
two  things  were  given  from  the 
^(yU  to  men  a•»  tlie  best,  viz.  to 
ipeak  truth,  and  t'j  do  good. 

35.  But  if  ever  tiiere  be  any 
suspicion  of  a  scarcity  of  those 
things  whence  these  are  to  anse, 
there  is  no  fear  lest  1  lead  liiee  to 
tke  attiihtnent  of  the.so  thiiigs,  by 
thy  labouring  and  undergoing  priva• 
Has  in  body  and  in  mind. 

36.  That  iu;iii,  I  think,  who,  in 
oppo.-ition  to  these  thingc^,  is  ttiii- 
perate  in  rria'i'm  to  rovporeul 
OTtitihcaiions,  ii<lhert's  alt=o  to  iiis 
oath,  and  happen.-?  to  be  iui  easy 
pefjon  to  have  dtaling.s  wiih,  and 
fond  of  stiivinir  with  rrirard  to  the 
not  bf-ing  infcriir  in  benrjitting  those 
who  do  him  a  good  turn. 

37.  Thinking,  tlierefore,  that 
the  contempt  of  eni'tnifs  gives 
risp  to  a  certain  ront'idmce  fur  tn• 
eagm?,  ho  prrviously  instrucietl 
the  cryors  to  Fell  nakfvl  those  of 
ihe  barbariane  xvho  irtre  taken  by 
the  robbers. 


Tis  xai  ό  ς•'  άλλο;  iiiog 
n>.a7ijv ;  ό  OsXtos  deXu 
iirw,*  "  γξαφω"'  φτ,μι,  "  iv 
ό  ίί?ον  ηύις,αι  xucra«iTri»cs 
μνήμα." 

Οΐιτος^  χοι  ό  ύ  Ιο.Οίζιος 
6ΐδμο6;ττ,ς,  ουχ  ό  τ•-/χα- 
voj'C  αντ]Ρ,  ετίιίη  ό  ό  ijiov 
ί^ναμΐ5  χατα  ο  agiog*'  χω- 
|ίω,^  και  ίχ^αινω.^ 

Ό"*  ej  'ζξαττω  ca'a  δ 
C!|ia,'^f  αφο^μη  ό"*  χα,χ^ς 
φί&νίω   ό   avorrcj  γίνομαι• 

tf;j'Kua(iu^  ό  ayaooi,  ό"* 
χτο(ομαι  χαλετοί  ειμί. 

οίτος  εξ  ό  Θέο5  ό  α•^6ξ(ύνος 
δΐ'5(..'μ»"  χαλο^,  ό""^  c:  αλη- 
όί-oj,  χα»  ό"*  i\ii»yiriu. 

Καν  Oe  coTc  ^ινομα»*  tij 
ύτο^ια  ffravif,  αφ'  of  ειμί 
ιΐτίζ,  ου  φο€ο?,  μη  tfv  aj'*.* 
Ετι  ό,"*  Ίτονεω  χαι  ταλαιτι. 
ficj   ό   (ίομα   χα»  ό  >}'i'X';j 

(ExJivof  )  ciUKi  μ5ν,  '■$ 
τάνκντια  oCrcs,»  ε^χίατη^ 
μ•ν  :ΐμι  ο  όια  ό  (Γωμαβ 
ήόοντ;,  ε-^οίχοί  ίε,  xoj  ίι- 
§υμέολοί:  ειμί  τ^^χανω,  χα» 
φιλονίιχο^  cjof  ό"'-'  μη  ίλ• 


ΊΙ^εομηι  5ί  ό°'  xara- 
gjjC'VitJ  i  τολΐμιοί  ίωμη  τι^ 
εμβάλλω  cPcf  ό''  μάχο- 
μαι, TfotTui"  ό  χη^υξ,  ό  6το 
ό  \ηβ<Γτ,ζ  aXiCxu  βαξζαξοζ 
^.-μνεβ  τωλίω. 


GRBfift  exi:bcisb5; 


131 


3S.  There  may  be  great  excess 
in  all  the  tiungs  which  we  have 
mentioned  ;  the  one,  drawing  us  to 
extravagance ;  the  other,  driving  U8 
to  baseness. 

39.  The  expression  "  rnan,"  or 
"  white,"  does  not  denote  the  time 
when ;  but  this,  "  he  walks,"  or 
"  he  has  walked  ;"  the  former  de- 


Tivrj^cu'"^  a»  εν  ra.c,  hg'^ 
etru,"  αμί•τ|ια  <ταλυ?•  hg 
με»,  ντξος  I  ^ολυτίλη?  sj- 
a.ywy  of  ii,  νξος  ό  ^υίτα^ος 

Ό"'«  μεν,  σν5ίω*ο?,  % 
"kswog,"'  ου  -τΓ^οΟΊιμαινω  ό"* 
"ττοτε-  ό'"•  έε,  βαοιζω,  η  ^α- 
ΰι^ω,  0"•^  μΛ  ό  "τα^ειμι  -χξα' 
νορ,  ύ  ίε  ό  ιταξεξγϋΐχηι.'ί 


•  notes  the  present,  /Ae  /ari'i/•  the  past 

40.  Horum  minime  est,  qui  prudentiam  exercent,  vim  in• 
ferre;  sed  illorum  est,  qui  vires  habeiU  absque  consilio,  tale 
facere. 

41,  Gtuo  aulem  modo  mihi  visus  sit  familiaribus  suis  pro 
de.==e,  partim  opere  semetipsuin  demonstrans,  qualis  esset,  pat' 
t-im  colloquiis  ususj  scribam. 


METAPHRASIS. 


**  Vcrbum  aliquod  poeticnm  cum  per  alteri'.m  prosaicum 
ejtisdein  linguce  ialerpretelur  tyro,  cog-nirioncrn  νοοαΙυΙ'> 
rum  dupio  augeLii  atque  acleo  majores  ?olito  profectus  fa- 
cicL  Eudem  quoqueoperfi  maturius  vidt-bir,  quid  differant 
vocabnla  antiqui^.-imre  Gripciai  el  roceiniorii,  ac  quid  poe- 
ticJD  nota  noinina  et  prosaica•.  \"im  porro  particularum, 
quce  Graico  interprete  aliis  redduntur,  discernere  adjuescet." 
Bl'rgess  {Episcopi  JMe):evc7isis)  InUia  Ilomerica, 
Praif.  vi. 


SLMILITUDIXUM. SERIES  EX  ILIADE 
COLLECTARUM. 


Z.   146—149. 

0(»i  Πξ  ς;υ>.Χων  ySv-r,,  roir,5s  xai  avi^wv. 

Φολλα  τα  μεν  τ'  ανε,αο?  χ«μα'3ι<:  ^c.-i,  aWa  if  ()'  ύλη 

ΤηλίίοωΟ'α  9yi•,  ΐ^ιξος  6'  sriyty\irai  ύξτ)• 

"As  is  the  generation  of  leave?,  .v>  is  al.-o  that  of  m»»n. 
Some  loaves  the  wind  scatters  up»:)!»  the  <rrovuid,  \\')u\e  oth^Ts 
the  baddinff  \voo<l  protUices,  And  they  bloom  in  the  season  of 
Fprin^r.  Thus  the  gcntration  of  men — oiie  spring?  up^  aiio- 
Ihcr  ends." 

'Oir»io(  I  I  ^λλο»  (5\>tf«f,  <"οιοΐΛ"(>ί  xat  I  avr,t.  Ό  φύλλο»  ο  μίν 
i  α»«^ο;  Χ"'."•""  ^i»TW  ϊτϊξος  6ί  Ι  όλη  ό  fjia>>ij  ,S>.a(J'ravu•  ίτ»  ϋ  » 
$αξ  γινομου  χαι^οί*  oixrw(  ο  α»»;^  ό  yί»oί,^  «οτί  μί»  βΚαύΨοη»,  χατί 
is  ^kifu.  ρ 


eaSBC  SXERCISB3.  199 


I.  323—327. 

Ώί  5'  osyig  α«ττ,(ίι  vsotftfoitfi  κξοφεξί^ίί 
Maifi-ax',  ενεί  χε  λαβηίΊ,  xaxug  St  τι  β5  «Άει  «vtj3• 
^Ωί  χαι  ενω  «τολλ^ί:  μεν  av'jrvoi;;  νύχτας  ιαυον> 
Ίΐ/χατα  ο   αίμα-ο^ντα  aisirfrjtfflOv  ΐΤίλέμ,ι^ων, 
Av'Jpatfi  μα^ναμενο?,  οα^ων  ένεχα  ίφεΓε^αων. 

"  Α?  a  bird  brings  food  to  her  unfledged  young,  when  sh» 
hath  found  it,  and  yei  it  is  badly  -with  herself;  so  I  al&O  have 
spent  many  sleepless  nights,  and  gone  through  bloody  days 
in  combat,  fighting  \v-ith  heroes,  for  the  sake  of  their  wives.'' 

'Ρ.ίιτΐξ  δε  οξνις  ό  ίιτί-αμαΐ  μη  δυναμαιΡ  νε&ίβΌ^  <τ^ο(Γφε^ω  *"f  οφ•»".» 
fiT.-ioay  λαμοανω/»^  χαχω?  ίε  χαι  αύτου  (ι^αζχω'  olru  χαγω  τ»λυί 
(ΐίϊ  αϊ*νο$  vug  ίιαχω,^  »;με|α  δε  αΙματοωΡ»  διανύω''  «"βλίμίωΡ  av»j 
(Μ.χομ.αι  yuvr(  ίνεχα  auTog. 


0>  360—364. 

Τη  ^'  οί^ε  ιτ^οχεηντο  φαλα^^ηδον,  -τ^β  δ'  ΑΐτοΧλων, 
Αι^ιδ'  ε^^ων  ε^ιτιμον  ε^ειιτε  δε  τει^^ο^  Αχαιών 
'Ρεια  μαλ',  ΰζ  οτε  τις  ψαμαίον  ιταΐζ  "^Χ'  6αΚα^((γ\ς' 
'Otf?•'  ε*£ΐ  βυν  ^Όί-ηδγι  αόυΡματα  vri'ZiSrjdtv^ 
Αψ  αΐΐΐς  β'ϋνεχευε  ιτοβΊν  χαι  χε^Λν,  αίΐ)|ων. 

"  Along  this  Avay  then  they  poured  forward  in  troops,  and 
Apollo  before  them,  holding  the  awful  yEgis.  But  he  Je- 
gtroyed  the  \vall  of  the  Greeks  very  easily,  as  when  a  boy 
would  the  sand  near  the  sea  ;  who,  when  with  childish  incli- 
nation he  may  have  formed  play-things,  again  overtuma 
ihem  with  his  feet  and  hands,  sporting." 

Δια  oUTos'  OS  oCrog  διέπομαι'  φαλα^χηδβν  ίμ*^οίόεν  δε  ό  Ατολ- 
λων  .\17ii  χατεχω  ό  μέγα\οτ\μος'  xara^aWuP  6ε  ο  τείχος  i  Έλλην 
ΐυχο'Κως  λααν,  ως  ότΐ  *-»g  κότα  h  ψαμμο?  ιται^  νλτ)ίιον  ό  ioXotftfa* 
CtfTi.c  eirsioav  τοίεω^*  «-αι^ιβ»  ο  αφιοβΊινη,Ρ  «Όλιν  (Lsta  ovrof  9\ιγ• 
ysu^  «  «rowi  xoj  ό  χεΐ|,  tai^u. 


184  GREEK  EXERCISES 


η    257—265. 


Οι  (Γ  άμα  na'rPrx>.oj  μεγαΧγ,τοξε  ίω*ηχί£ντί? 
Etfci^'/».  05*'  Εν  TiijiT•  μέγα  jiovjowtj  o^o-j(fav. 
Αΐιπχα  Js  ff^r.xjCCu  .-οιχοτί;  ίξίχίοντο 
Σινοόιοΐί,  oC;  TttiJtg  ε^ιίμαινουίιν  idovrEj, 
Αι:ι  xsi>T-o.asovr=c,  ic^  Sti  οιχΓ  ίχοντα^, 
ΙΝτ;•τιαχο|•  ju^-•'  i^s  καχον  τοΧίϊίίΤι  τιίειΟΊ, 
Toug  J'  61  cio  ir^cpa  τι;  τί  xiijw  avd|:jcros  οίιτηί 
ΚινηΟ"»!  acxujv,  ο!  '3'  α>Λΐμον  ητο^  s^ovt.-.c 
TleOtftfu  ca;  ir£r:rai,  χαι  αμυνίΐ  oitfi  TixiCffi. 

Thoio,  howRver,  '.vlio  v/oro  armed  along  witli  the  mag- 
nrtnimous  Patroclus,  rnarchoil  iu  gocnl  order,  till,  full  of  cour- 
aire,  tlicy  rushed  uj)0n  the  Trojans.  Ininicdiatoly  they  pour- 
ed out  like  to  wa.^p.-?  dwcllinfr  by  the  road,  %\hich  fooli.-h 
boys,  acconlinrr  to  custom,  irritate,  con.«fantly  vexing  fhtrn 
rnaiutainiu'i  their  habitations  oa  the  road  ;  and  cause  a  coin- 
inou  evil  >uito  many.  For  if  perchance  any  way-faring  man, 
trtavelling  there,  disturb  those  unintentionally,  then  they,  pos- 
.«sessiiig  a  courageous  heart,  all,  to  an  insect,  fly  forth  and  de- 
fend their  young." 

Οϊτοζ  δε  άμα  Πατροχλο.?  ό  μίγαΧο^υ'χρς  ό'Τ>.ιξ:ο*  τοΡί^υ,"""  h.'.C 
ίν  ό  Ύζως  μεγαφξονί'^}"  ειτιξαινω.'  F.uOciJa  δε  (ίφτξ  όμοιο;  ϊτιτι^ημι"•- 
ah:<iv  ε5ίΐμι''Κ  τα^οόιί;,  ό;  caig  τα»οξυνω  (ίυνηίη;,  αϊι  i'iot^u,  ίτι  ό 
*ύας^  ί  οιχικ  s^oj,  νητιο*;•  χοινο;  6;  xaxc;  ό  ΐ(ο}.\:ςτι6τ,μι.  Ouco.c  ya» 
«ρν  •τ$ξ  τι;  η  ίΓ«»£^ομσι  ctvdf^uriog  Όόοίΐτοξος  xivsw  axuv.  ούτο;  δί  κ!χ;- 
ζις  -Ι-^χι]  :'/^u  615  το;)μ:Γξο(ίί£ν  τα;  τίΓομαι  χαι  3or,d;u  ό  I'Jiof  cixvov. 


Π.   297—300. 

Ώ;  '5'  ότ'  ας)'  ύψηλτ)^  xoξ■Jφr,ς  ejsof  μ?Λ  όλοι• 
Κινηίΐι  ίτυχινην  ν£φ;λτ,ν  dTe'ocriye'Sra  Zrv'f, 
Κχ  τ'  ίφηνον  craffai  CxoTiai  χαι  tpujovs;  αχΜ», 
Και  ναται,  oyfavoiiv  ί'  α^'  ΰιτί^ίαχη  αίνετος  aidyif. 

"  As  wlicn  from  the  lofty  pummit  of  a  vast  mountain,  Jove, 
who  collects  the  lightning,  shall  remove  a  thick  cloud,  forth 
in  an  in.'*taiu  appear  all  the  rocks,  and  hifrh  ridges,  and  forest.-<, 
while  from  the  heaveup,  iinmcivflurable  aiher  thereupon  bursts 
hvh  upon  the  new." 


GREEK  EXERCISES,  135 

'Ω^Τ:^  δί  ότ'  αφ'  -υψηλοί  κοξυφτ,  ojof  μ-ίγας  xivcw  ca)(up  ve^tMj 
β  9  αίτραίτη  a^^ri^ij  Zeu?,  εκφαινωΡ^  δε  <!τας  ό  (rxocia  χαι  ό  ίζο'χ^^ζ 
C  αχ^α,  χα»  ό  σύμφυτος  τοίΓο?,  ου^ανο^ίν  5ε  (5/,  cxXa/jwrw'  ό  αμέτρητος 


Δ.   127—131. 

OuJ:  Ccdsv,  Μ?;ελαε,  ίίοι  μαχα^ίί;  λελαόοντο 
Αίανατοι,  cr^wr•/!  οε  Διοί  δ^^ατη»  αγελειτ:, 
ΊΙ  τοι  ffpco'^ev  (Tratfa  ;i»Xoc:  εχεαΛκε.ς  κμ;;νίν• 
ΊΙ  (5ε  Toffov  μεν  εε^χεν  ατο  χ^οο?,  ώ?  ότε  μητγ;ί 
iIa;uoj  εε^^ει  μυιαν,  od'  ήοεϊ  λεξα^ο  uirvoj. 

"  Nor  were  the  blessed  immortal  gods  forgetful  of  thee, 
Menelaus,  and  first  the  plundermg  daughter  of  Jove,  wlio, 
standing  before  thee,  averted  the  deadly  arrow.  She  repelled 
it  from  his  body,  as  much  as  v/hen  a  mother  drives  away  a 
fiy  from  her  son,  when  he  reclines  in  sweet  sleep." 

OvSs  tfu,  ω  Μενέλαο?,  ό  βεος  ο  μακα?ιο^  ετιλανόομαι*  ό  αθάνατο?., 
trp'^rog  δε  Ό  Ζεις  ό  hyarr^'  ό  αχελειο?,  crfcig•  ΰ\)  όμ.ιτξο<ίάεν  ((ίτ'/ϊμί*  β 
βΐλοζ  ό  irixfcg  ατοοΌ?εω•^  auToj  δε  τοΰουτοζ  μεν  κωλυω^  ατο  c  (Τωμα, 
χα^ατε^  μητηρ  εχ  iraij  χωλνω  μυια,  ότε  yXuxu?  χοιμαωΡ^"^  yTvog. 


Γ.  10—14 

Eyr'  βίίο?  λο^υφι^ίΊ  NoTog  χατεχε^εν  ομιχλην, 
Ποιμει^ιν  0-JTI  φιλην,  χλεττ;}  ίε  τε  vuxrog  αμείνχ», 
Totftfov  Tts  τ'  εηλευο'5'ει,  οίον  τ'  ειτι  λααν  ίηοΊν• 
*Ώ,ς  αξα  CUV  ■j':ro  τοίίσΊ  κονίίίσ'αλοζ  w^vuc'  αελλτ;? 
Ερχομένων  μαλα  6'  wxa  ίιε'Τ^ηίΤσΌν  τείιοιο, 

"  As  when  the  south  wind  has  poured  down  a  mist  upon 
the  brow  of  a  mountain,  by  no  means  agreeable  to  the  shep- 
herd, but  to  the  thief  better  than  night,  and  one  sees  as  far 
as  he  ca.sts  a  stone,  thus  the  excited  dust  rose  from  benealh 
•heir  feet  as  they  advanced,  and  they  crcssed  the  plain  v;ith 
great  rapiility." 

Καία*ερ  ίη  εν  ό  χο^υφη  ofog  ό  Noro;  ό  ομ»χλη  χαταχεω,'  ό  τοιατ)» 
(κδαμ.ως  τ^οί^ιλοί,  ό  xT^'iCrrig  δε  ο  νυξ  χξεκίδων,  χαι  τοδΌυτο?  <ης  ε^5β- 
^Oij,  εφ'  ό(Γο5  λιί)ο$  αφ»ημί•  o-Jrw  δτ,  -j-to  ύ  crojS  ούτο?  xoviofTcj  <5ι«- 
yiiju?-  αελλωίηί  ^ο^ευω-^ε  >^αν  ϋε  ταχέως  ota  ό  •τε5»ον  ί;ε|χομαι.^ 


18β  CREEK  E.XERC1.?M. 


Γ.  23—29. 


'Clin  λίων  ίχβ*ϊΐ  μίχαλω  Er»  ί^.•μα«•ι  χ•οξβα4, 
Κ;^-•ν  η  £λαφον  χΐ^αον,  η  a^ficv  aiyo, 
rif-vau-v  μαλα  γαξ  ts  χατί(Γ(3ιί(,  eitj^  ov  αντο» 
Σ;,4Λται  ϊ•οχ£ί$  τί  χ^νίί,  ia>^foi  c'  αιξηοι* 

Οφίαλμίίίίν  (όω*•  (faro  yc^  ηία^όα/  αλίιτην. 

"  He  rrjoicetl  like  a  lion  having  lighted,  when  huncry, 
upon  a  liuge  carcase,  having  found  either  a  horned  sia:* 
or  v,ild  goiit ;  for  he  gjeedily  devours  it,  ahhough  sv.u\  dogs 
and  blooming  youths  stir  themselves  in  pursuit  of  him.  ΎΊ\\ΐΛ 
rtjoiced  Menclaus,  when  he  beheld  -s^iih  his  eyes  the  hand- 
BiMne  Paris ;  for  he  conceived  that  he  would  chaitiie  th4 
g-jiliy  one." 

φ«;  χί^αιίφοξος,  η  αγξίοζ  αΐζ  Tirvaw,  λίαν  γαξ  xaTurfx^u.•,  xay»ff 
arrcj  oiwxcj  τα-χυς  τί  xuu*,  χαι  ludo>.r|g  vfcf.  Oiru^g  yaiCLP*'  « 
14ivE>.oos  Αλίξανύ^βς  όίοίιόης  ό  όμμα  ό^αομαι•'  etui''  ^α^ ημα^ί•^"" 
(  όμο^Μ>.05. 


Ρ.   1— β 


O.'J'  £>.αί•  ΑτξΒος  uiev,  ορηϊςιιλον  MivfXaov, 

IlrtTfoxXcj  Tfijsfftfi  όαμίις  fv  or/ioTrt-i. 

Βτ)  Oi  Jia  τ^ομα^^ων  χ(χο^ν()μίνο<:  «i^cti  ^a>.xU/' 

Αμφ(  J'  «^'  ajTOJ  ,βηιν',  ΰ$  τις  crs^j  τοί-ταχι  μίΐΓ*;', 

n»iJToroxof,  xivjfr;,  o'j  •tpiv  itOjta  rcxoic, 

■*fiC  «ί^ι  riar^oxXij  βαηΐ  ξανίος  MsvsXaoj. 

"  Nor  did  Patroclns,  subdned  in  battle  by  the  TrujiT.?, 
Hude  the  obser\alion  of  th•'.  .«^on  of  Atreu?,  tlie  warlike  Me- 
r4e!aus ;  but  he  advanced  through  the  foremo.-t  rombaranrs, 
nruiod  in  .«hining  brass.  Hound  him  then  he  stalk•.!,  like 
Λπν  dam  round  its  young,  having  brou<jht  forth  for  »h•^  firfi 
liiii'',  moaning,  not  luing  before  accjuainted  with  pprturiljon  : 
•o  stalked  tln!  yellow-haired  Mom-laus  round  PatriKlus." 

O.x  λανίανω"  Ss  I  I  Ατξΐυς  uiof  ό  φιλοτολίμς^  Μίν£λαί(  Ό  Ua. 

rjoxXec  i«o  ό  Τ»ν><:  φονεύω'  £ν  ό  μοχη.  rio^cjwt**  ί;  ο»α  ό  ^τ^εμΛ. 
^β{  xaSoxyj^J^  λομίΓ^ος  χα>Λΐ? •  τ£ρι  δ•  όη  α./Τ05  μάχομαι'  uffrif 
*-f(i  ύαμαΚις  μητ»;»  τί^τιτοχοίτ,  i;r,v»;rixo.i:,  ου  r^oTffov  ίτκίτημαι 
«»*  «  Toxc::»  »νΓν>  τ•"|ι  'J  Ι1κτ»Όχλο;  μάχομαι^  ;α>ί:ί  MfviXabf. 


EXCERPTA 


Ε  DUOBDB 

GR^CIS  HOMERI  PROSAICIS  VERSIONIBUS, 

Altera  Paraphrase  altera  J\iIetaphrasi^ 
ϋΛ  EXTANT  IN  M6S.  BODLEIANIS  APUD  OXONIENSES, 

COLLATA  COM 

PLATONIS 

BJUSDBM  LOCI  ENAARATIONS. 


ILIADIS  LIBRI  PRIMI 

LOCUS,  QUI  INCIPIT  A  VERSU  OCTODECIMO. 


I. 

Ατ^ί<5α»  η  XRi  άλλο»  εϋχνημιίβ?  Αχαιοί, 
"fpuv  μ•ν  (?£5i  ioisvj  ολυμίΓία  δί<)ματ'  ίχοντε^, 
ExiTf  itfa»  Π^ιαμοιο  τολιν,  eu  ό'  oixaiS'  Ixstfiar 
Παιόα  ό£  (Αοι  λυίαιτε  φιλην,  τα  5'  α-Τοίνα  ίεχείί?, 
'^Λ^ΐ|Λενοι  Διο^  υΐον  2χη§ολο»  Α-ίολλωνα.  $ 

Evfl'  άλλοι  μεν  -ravTSs  ε'ττίνφημηβ'αν  Αχαιοί, 
ΑιίειίΆαι  β'  Ιε^ηα,  χαι  α^λαα  ίεχίαι  α^οινα* 
Αλλ'  OUX  Ατξειύτι  Α^αμεμνονι  ήνίανΐ  ίυμω* 
Αλλα  xax'jjs  αφιει,  χ^ατε^ον  5'  firi  μ,υίον  ετελλβ* 
Μη  tfs,  ysfov,  χοιλ7)<τΊν  ε^ω  •τα^α  νηυοΊ  χιχειω,  1ϋ 

Η  WV  ίηδυνοντ',  η  ίκίτΐξον  αυτί?  ιοντο, 
Μη  »ν  τοι  ου  -χ^ξακίμ^  (ίχηιττ^ον  χαι  ίτεμμα  ίεοιο. 
Την  5'  ε^ω  ου  λυ(ίω,  irjiv  μιν  χαι  ^η^α^  Sfl'Sitfiv, 
ΉμετεΡω  ενι  οιχω,  «ν  Α^^ει  τηλοδι  «"«τ^ί:, 
Ίστον  ε^οιχομενην,  χαι  εμον  λεχο^  αντιοω^αν.  11^ 

Αλλ*  ifli,  μη  μ'  εξίύιξΐ,  ύαωτΒξος  ως  χε  νεηαι, 
'Ωί  9φατ'•  sikidev  ί'  ο  ysgcov,  χαι  tifSidero  μχΛψ. 
Bn  δ*  axtcjt  «rrafa  ίινα  *ολυφλοΐ(Τ§οιο  6α\αί^της, 
ΙΙβλλβ  ί'  ίΐτειτ'  αιτανευβε  χιών  T)god'  *  γΐζΟΛος 
Μ2 


198  CREEK  SXERCISte. 

Ατβλλωνι  avaxn,  rov  r,jxcu/.j  rtxt  \r,T'^.  20 

Κιλ>>αν  τ£  ^αί£ην,  Ί'εν'όοιο  rt  t^»  a.\a/iinc^ 

Σμι•/6ί^•  encore  cci  j(a»i:'wr'  en  vr,ov  i^fya, 

Η  St  (ίη  «OfS  Toi  xara  ciova  μ.τ,ζ\   ίχτ,α 

Τα\>ξ'^ν  τ,6'  αι^•ων,  tc'3:  μοι  χ^ηηνον  £:λ6ω^•  25 

ΐιίίιαν  ΔανοΜ  ΐμα  όαχ^υα  tfotS't  ,βίλίβ'ιΓιν. 

"  Ye  sons  of  Atreua,  and  ye  other  "well-armed  Greek?,  may 
the  gods,  who  posseas  the  Olympic  mansions,  "rant  that  yc 
ttay  destroy  the  city  of  Priam,  and  return  in  safety  to  your 
homes.  But  give  freedom  to  my  beloved  daughter,  and  re- 
ceive these  ransoms,  reverencing  the  son  of  Jove,  the  far-dart^ 
ing  Apollo."  Then  all  the  other  Greeks  ap.sentcd  to  n^jn-ct 
ihe  priest,  and  to  accept  the  rich  ransoms.  But  it  pleapod  noi 
ihe  mind  of  Agamemnon,  the  son  of  Atreu.=,  but  he  db^missed 
fcim  with  disgrace,  and  added  a  threatening  speech.  "  Lcl 
me  not  find  thee,  old  man,  either  now  loitering  at  the  hollow 
Fhips,  or  again  retuniing,  lest  perhap-s  the  sceptre  and  garland 
of  the  god  avail  thee  not.  For  this  female  I  will  not  free,  old 
agn  fihaJl  first  come  upon  her,  in  my  home  in  Argolis,  far  from 
tit-r  native  land,  plying  the  web,  and  pliaring  my  bed.  But 
t'^gono  and  irritate  me  not,  in  onlcr  that  thou  mayeet  de{>art 
m  Riifety."  Thit^  he  .«poke,  and  the  old  man  wa.-=  afraid,  and 
cbryed  hL-5  order.  He  walked  in  silence  along  the  .=hore  of 
the  loud-roaring  sea,  and  havincr  £:οη»"ϊ  apart,  the  old  man  tb'.'n 
po  jred  forth  an  earnest  prayer  to  king  Apollo,  whom  the  fiiir- 
hairod  Laiona  bore  :  "  Hear  me,  (.)  god  of  the  silver  bow,  thou 
who  protectest  Chrysa  and  the  glorious  Cilia,  and  rulest 
kr^.v•  ly  over  Tenodo.s,  Ο  Sminiiiian  god,  if  ever  I  decoratid 
With  garlanda  thy  beautiful  temple  for  tliee,  or  if  ever  I  con- 
*an»)d  in  honour  of  thoe  fat  ihighs  of  buil.-^  or  of  iroafi,  accora- 
plish  thi-i  do'^ire  for  me  ;  May  the  Greeks,  with  thy  arrows, 
atonement  for  my  tears."' 


Π. 

PARAPHRASIS. 

il  Ατξοζης  τι  xaa  αΧλο?  .λχαιβί  τολίμκίΓηί;•  (fu  μ?ν  nit  iKJouu*"^  h 
if»?  '.  oiirfij  I  e^faviof  οιχημα,  fxTOfif'..j*  μίν  ό  iroXic  ό  Ππαμο?,  xaXj'c: 
it  σ^τίρ^ομΛΐ"  fij  ό  iajrcu  01x05  \%ααης•  tyu  Si  I  •χαΐζ  ό  jiXcc  Xju,^ 

♦  trrr  -   »*f    ■i-'fitv  l'yiMJt\,'   εκ>.'Τ*ιθμΓΊ   9  vloC  0   ZftjT,   ITOiJu.'t'fV  fe^Si/CU 


eftF.F.K  BXERCISBe.  139 

αξ>οω'  «ι•5:ομο:ι  cs  ό  li^iui,  χαι  ύ  <ίΐξΐκαΚΚτ,ς  αυτός  ttfoncv  ίίχομαι•'' 
αλλ'  ουκ  αξ^αχω^  Ι  Aτf;Ί(Jηί:  Λ^'αμβ,ανων  οΰτο?  wxTa  ό  «uTog  ψυχή"  τκαι 
όη  σχλτίίΐ'ωί  aurct:  α•!Γο•Γίμ•τω,'  ετιτα^μα  ϋ;  ειτιτοττω'  ^jvaffriia?  xcu 
Μ-ίχίατίΊα?  ϊχω.'"&  Όί:*"*  ε»μι•  Όραω,  ω  7'^^^^*,  '*'«  Μ•1  <'''>^  '^σ.ξα  5 
κοίλο?  νανί*•  ej'tj  καταλαμβάνω,"  (10)  η  vjv  ίηίυνο;,  τ,  ί(ίηξον  f^rav. 
ftar'  ίνα  μη  oj  χρηθΊ|ίΐίυω*  tfu  ό  ^αξδϋζ  χαι  ό  ίτεμμα  ό  όΐος,  εφ'  β^ 
6a^ku  r,xu.  Οότοίτ  (5s  ε^ω  ου  λυτ^ονΡ  ελευόε^οο),  ir_^iv  εα'  aucoj  ε^- 
χομαι^  ό  γν,ξας  εν  ό  εμος  οιχο?,  εν  ό  Α^^'ολι?,  ιτο^^ω  ό  «τατ^ι?  aurc^, 
liro.c  μεταχει^Ί^ομαι  χα»  ό  εμο5  χοιτ/,''  ύίττ^ρετεω*  (15)  β>>λ'  ατειμι, 
μη  ε^ύϋ  ϋιίγ^ίξω,  ώζ  αν  α^ημιοί:  ατε^^ομα).*  Οίτως  ειτιταο'ίω•'  φο- 
έ'εοοΡ^  οε  ό  γίξων,  χαι  irfidwP^  ό  ε^τιτα^μα-  ατε^ο|χα("  (5ε  βΊωτταω  μετ' 
ίχτληξι?,  ΊτληίΐΊον  ό  αι^ιαλο^Κ  ό  6άλα(ί(ία,  Ό  ΰυνίγτ^ς  ηχτ;  ό  «ίτα^α  ό 
αίΛίαλο^Ρ?  ειτιχλυίΊ?''  ■τοιεω,'^  ό  το^εια  «τοιεω•"'?  αίΓερχομαι"  ίε  •!Γο|^£4 
ό  γηξαιος  εχιτεταμίνως  αναιτεμιτω^  ευχή  ό  Ατολλων,  ό  αναξ,  ο$  ς 
χαλλιχομο?  «τικτω^  Αητω•  (20)  λε^ω,^  εταχουω''  ε^ω,  Ap^n^oTo^of:, 
Ις  β  Χ^ϋίΤηδ  ύτε^αίΐΊηξω,  xoj  ό  Κιλλα  ί  ίια  tfy  όίιοτητος,  χαι  i  Τε- 
νείο^ε  x|araiwf  αναδύω ;  Σμιν^ευε*  ειβΌτί  rfu  ειτι  ό  ναο^  «'εριχαλλ•*)^ 
αναόημα  χαι  ειτα^ωχο^Ρ"  φε^ω^  ανατιίημι*'  η  ει*οτ3  tfu  μΌ?οί  λιτά. 
^  ταλΐ^5  χαι  αι^  καταχαιω/  οίιτος  ΐγω  ειηθυμια  τελειοω•*  ώιίωμι*έ 
Λαναο5  β  «"^οίτιχω^τιμωΐια  ?ΐ5  ίχδιχησΊ^  ί  εμ^δ  Oaxfu. 


III. 

METAPHRASIS. 

Ω  Ατξίνς  caif,  χαι  ό  λοι-ϊΌί:  ευοτλο^  Έλλην  Cu  μεν  ό  ίϊος  τα«- 
,.ω  :  :  /Λ\ Λ.,. .5:  τ-τ .• %..  ..-,^     _ 


(5)  Τότε  ο  μεν  Ελλην  άλλο?  cag  μετ  ευφημία  βοαω,  ευλαεεομω 
ψί  6  Ιεξενς,  χαι  ό  Χαμτξος  δζ-χομΜΐ'  iw^civ  αλλ'  ου  ό  Ar^S'jg  ναις 
Α^αμεμνων^  αξχεω^  ο  ψυχη,•^  άλλα  μεό'  ύ?^κ:  αοΌΐτεμ'η-ω,*  αιτειλη- 
Tixog  5ε  λοχοί  λε^ω.^  Μηϋαμω<Γ,  ω  τ^ίίτβευτη-ί:,  ετι  ό  /3α(3ϋί  ε^ω 
ίε  vayg**  χαταλαμ§ανω,^  (10)  η  νυν  ΐγχξονιζω  η  εχ  ϋευτε^ο?:  ίταλ» 
ιτα^'α^ινομαι,*  μηιτω^  ουχ  αν  cTu  βοτβϊω'  Ό  ^ottJof,  χαι  ό  ίτεφανωμαΐ" 
ό  4ieg.  O'jToj  ε^'ω  oux  ατολνω,  Ι  γτ,ξας  αυτορ  ΐΤ^οτε^ον  χατ'αλαμ- 
^ανω  εν  ό  ημέτερο?  οικο<:  εν  ό  Α^/ολιρ  πο^^ω  ό  τατριρ,  ίίτου^εω  χα» 
έίκίίνω  χαι  ΐις  ό  εμορ  χοιτη  ύτανταω.  (15)  Αλλ'  ατειμι,  μη  ίγω 
rafo^uvtj,  Ινως  αν  ίω^ωΡ?  είανε^ομαι.*  Οίτως  iiru,^  ό  ίε  γεξ(Μ 
<pobt-jP''  χαι  ίτειίω•"^  ό  λο^ορ.  Πο^'ε^ιοΡ^  ^ε  ijtf'OC^'S)  "«"α^α  ό  αι^^ιο- 
λο^  ό  ίτολυτα^αχοί:  όαλσδ'ο'α•  τολυ^Ρ"  5ε  μετά  οϋτο?  ατο^εν  V(>ξεJ(,)^ 
ηχοματ  ό  ^sfOJv  ό  βαύι^^ευς  Αιτολλων,  ό^  έ  καλλιχομ&ί  γεννάω' 
Atjtw.  (20)  Εταχουω'  βγυ,  Ααμ^Ροτοξο?,  Όίίτις  Ό  Xgytfa*  ί'^ίξ- 
μαχω  χαι  ό  ίειο^  χαι  έαυμαιϊτ^  Κιλλχι,  χαι  ό  Τενείο^Ρ  Ιί/χυ^νδ  .^β- 


140  CREEK  EXERCISES. 

C"c:ia»t'A),"  7;  fiTfj  co-ie  tfj  >jra#os   xai  μ»;?ιουοί  oCtEov  xniw^  τα-,ξ-'^ς 
r  «αϊ  αιξ-  c;^ro5  ty u  i\ri>iui''  sτιflJμI;,αα"  Ti/xwfia  όιοωμ<*^  9  Έλλτ;? 


IV. 
PLATOMS  ENARRATIO. 

Γfχoμoι*β  ΰ;•  ό  le|;ji  ίχχοααι'  fJtiivoc  μ£ν  ό  iiog  ΰιϋωμι,*  άλ^;νΡ• 
ι  Γ^οια,  ο-ί•ο5  ίί  iu^u••'^  ό  όί  dj^ar»;»  oC**  d.-jjoc^  Xjoj/  ύί^ομΛΐ-'? 
aTMvov,  λαι  ό  ίίο;  αιό-οασ.ι.-'ϊ  (5)  Totouro?  6i  ετω'ε  a>rc<:,5  5  μΐν 
Γ.λλο;  ίίίομαι^  χαι  ffjvaiv^uj•'*  ό  δί  Αχομΐμνων  α^|ια/να!,^  ϊνΓίλ>.9. 
μαιΡ  vgv  -ί  5ΐμι,*  (10)  χαι  ajiij  μη  έπομαι,*  μη  αντο^  τοτί  ίχτ;τ- 
«•^ον  χαι  6  Q  ί:(^  <ί::"μμαΡ  ουχ  ίτα^χ;(,Γ''**  -τ^ιν  ύε  XjuP^^  fljroiS  ό  ό.» 
•)αττ,ξ,  £ν  Af^os  φηα»  χη^αίχω'  μίτο  oj•  (15)  ατίιαι*  ύί  xt\z-j•^* 
%fu  μτ,  Ci'idi^:^},  /να  ffu^j  οίχαόε  ε^^χομαι.'^  Ό  όό  Tf.fftorjTr-.j  axcjc^.•^? 
ioiJcj-•  Tt  χαι  ατ:Ίμι'  ύιγη,  οτοχω^εω^?  6'  εχ  ό  ίτΡατο^τεόον,  oX.-gP» 
«  ΑίΓολλί^ν'  Γϋ5(ομαι,'-  (20)  ό  «τ;  ετωνυμιαΡ  ό  ύίοζ  αναχαλεω,ε  χαι 
ίτοαιμ'/ηίχω,'^  χαι  affavraw.P  ει  τι<:  «Τιλ/τοτ:  τ,  εν  vacj  οΐχβύομηίΤιτ.Ρ  η 
ίν  ί:j^;i:t'K  ί-^διαΐ'^  Χ'^^ζ'ζ'•^^'^  ucjjtw"'''^  όςΡ  ίη  χο^ιν  χατε•»•^οααι^ 
πω'  ό  λ•χ€αος  Ό  ίς  uax|u  ό  ε%ί\\ι%  ββ'Κοζ. 


REMARKS 


05  THE 


GREEK  dialects; 


I. 

"  The  Greek  language,  like  every  modern  one,  waa  not 
in  ancient  times  spoken  and  written  in  the  same  manner  in 
all  parts  of  Greece ;  but  almost  every  place  had  its  peculi- 
arities of  dialect,  both  with  respect  to  the  use  of  single  let- 
tors,  and  of  single  words,  forms  of  words,  inflections  and  ex- 
pressions. Of  these  dialects  there  are  four  principal  ones, 
the  ^olic,  the  Doric,  the  Ionic,  and  the  Auic.  Originally,, 
however,  there  was  but  one  common  language,^  and  this 
was  the  Doric  ;  not  indeed  the  Doric  of  later  times,  but  a 
language  spoken  by  the  Dorians,  from  Λvhich  were  derived 
the  ^olic  and  Ionic  varieties,  after  the  colonization  of  tho 
coasts  of  Asia  Minor.  It  was  not  till  the  Greeks  colonized 
Asia  Minor,  that  their  language  began  to  assume  both  con- 


'  MatthiiE's  Greek  Grammar,  vol.  i.  §  L  ei  seqq.  (Blomfield's  trat»- 
lation.) 

*  "  tit  omnium  Grsecanim  urbivim  et  nation  lam  origo  refcrrnda  est  ad 
Thessaliam,  Macedoniam,  Epiruni,  et  loca  vicina,  quoniain  qui  ra  !oce 
primis  temporibus  incolebant,  ct  antoa  Γρ«ι»κοί  vel  ncXavyoi  uiccbantur, 
primum  'EXXr^tf  leguntur  noininuti  fuisse  ab  Hellene,  Deucalionis  nlio, 
qui,  ut  Deucalion,  in  Phthiotiile,  Thessalia;  regione,  re£!;naist'  traditur ; 
ei  quoniam  'BXXaj  fuit  urbs  atque  n^io  in  Thessalia,  cuiii  nondum  uila 
aba  in  t<'rranim  orbe  nota  esset  Έλλα? :  ita  linguuin  antiquissuxiara  ct  pri- 
mitivam  Grsecorum,  qu»  proprie  dicebatur  'Έ,Χληνικη,  I'uisse  Thcsialorum 
Mve  Macedoiium  propriain,  sed  ab  initio,  si  (juidein  cum  linfiua  Gra:'ft> 
rum,  qualem  in  libris  hodie  exstantibus  repcrinms,  iinpriniis  cum  Attica 
comparaveris,  valdc  horridani  et  incultain,  et  barbaram  potiua  qcain 
Grajfam,  reliquarum  tameii  Gra^'ia?  dialectorum  omnium  fontfm  et  origi- 
nem  statuendam  esse,  non  verisiniile  modo,  «rd  pteue  certum  ert,"  StVkV- 
zitu  de  Dialccto  Macedonicu  ct  Alixand.  5  3. 


142  CRKEK  KXERCisES. 

«afcncy  anJ  polish.  Tiie  lonians  uer*?  ;ho  nrst  who  cofter.ed 
its  ;u.p«j;ritics,  and,  by  altoniion  to  euphony,  Iriid  aside  by  dt•- 
grees,  the  broadne.^.•?  and  liardlines*,  which  were  retained  by 
lhi;ir  .lyjlian  neiirhboiirs  on  Uie  one  hand,  and  by  the  Donans 
on  th<^  other.  'I'he  rich  soil  of  Ionia,  and  the  harmonimis 
icmp'irature  of  its  cliniate,  coinbiiUMl  with  the  more  proxiniate 
causes  of  its  vicinity  lo  Lydia,  and  iu  commercial  prosperity, 
wiJl  accottm  for  tliis  cliange  of  language.  It  was  from  the 
colonieis  tlial  the  motlu  r  cuuntry  first  adopted  any  improve- 
rucnlt?  ill  btjr  own  dialecia."' 

"  It  .=ocms  probable  that  till  the  Greek  coloni.st.5  in  Asia 
Almor  spoke  at  firui  a  common  languag'e.  One  of  the  mo.sl 
remarkable  foixturee  in  the  chanire  which  originated  with 
th<;  Ionian-!,  wa^  the  «rradual  di.-nie  of  the  digarnma.  This 
letter  the  Dorians  laid  a,-ide  at  a  later  period.  The  iEolians, 
on  ihc  contrary,  always  rerainetl  it;  whence  its  appellation 
of  JEolic.  The  lir.st  change  which  the  inhabitants  of  Attica 
iTiad»'.,  was  to  modify  their  old  Doric  to  the  more  elegarit 
dinleot  of  their  nclier  and  more  polished  colonist.•* ;  .^o  thar, 
if  we  recur  to  the  period  of  about  1000  years  B.  C,  we  may 
conclude,  that  the  language  of  Attica  was  nearly  the  sanie 
a.s  that  in  which  the  Iliad  was  compo.^fd.  Subsequently, 
howr.ver,  as  the  people  of  Attica  embarkeil  in  a  niore  ex- 
tended commerce,  tlie  form  of  tlieir  oiaiect  was  materially 
altered,  and  many  ciianjes  wer^  in'r-jduced  Horn  foreign 
id...::ii" 

III. 

"  The  ."ROLir  DI.VI.ECT  prevailed  on  the  northern  Fide 
of  the  Isihinur:  of  Corinth,  (except  in  .M»\!:aris,  Afticu,  and 
Dori-i),  as  well  as  in  the  .Eolic  colonics  in  A.-ia  Minor,  ami  in 
.«ome  nor! hern  islands  of  the  iEgaau  Sea;  anil  wa.•?  cliiefly 
cultivated  by  the  lyric  poet;;  in  Lesbti.s,  as  Alccus  and  Sappho  ; 
ajid  in  Birotia,  by  C'orinna.  It  retained  the  most  numerous 
iraecs  of  the  ancient  ( Jreek  ;  hence  also  the  T.iatin  coincides 
more  with  this  than  with  the  other  Grefk  dialects.  It  is  pe<  •ι- 
iiarlv  distir.gni.-iiu'd  by  n-taining  the  old  digarnma,  called  from 
tht*  circunir-tanre  the  A-lolic  digcDiuna.  Alcacus  is  considered 
ΛΛ  the  model  of  this  dialect." 

IV. 

■'IV  DORIC  DIAI,E("T,  ?.^  b^ing  the  Inngxtafire  'V 
flicn,  who  wf re  most  of  them  originally  nioun'.ujneers,  vi  as 


GHEES  EXEnCISES.  143  / 

hard,  rough,  and  broad,  particularly  from  the  frequmt  use 
of  α  for  η  ;ind  ω  ;  as  for  instance,  ά  \a6u,  τάν  xofav,  for  η  ληίη, 
τΰν  xiP-Jiv ;  and  from  the  use  of  two  consonants,  Avhere  the 
other  Greeks  employed  tlie  double  consonant ;  as  for  iri,- 
stance,  aS  for  ζ,  as  μ,-λκτ^ίται,  &c.  The  Doric  tribe  was  the 
largest,  and  the  parent  of  the  greatest  number  of  colonies. 
flence  the  Doric  dialect  Avas  spoken  throughout  the  Pelo- 
ponnesus, in  the  Ihrica  Teirapolis,  in  the  Doric  colonies  of 
Magna  Gra;cia  and  Sicily,  and  in  Doris  in  Asia  Minor.  It 
is  divided  by  the  grammarians  into  the  old  and  new  Doric 
diiilects.  In  the  old,  the  comic  Λvriter  Epicharmus,  and 
Sophron,  author  of  the  Mimes,  were  the  principal  writers, 
in  the  new,  which  approacherl  nearer  the  softness  of  the 
Ionic,  Theocritus  is  the  cliief  writer.  Besides  these,  the  first 
Pythagorean  philosophers  wrote  Doric,  fragments  of  whose 
Λvorks  are  still  remaining ;  for  instance,  Tinueus,  Archytas, 
(who  is  considered  as  the  standard  of  this  dialect,)  and  Archi- 
medes. Pindar,  Stesichorus,  Simonides  of  Ceos,  (who  proba- 
bly, howeve,r,  iised  the  Doric  only  when  he  was  writing  for 
Doric  employers,)  and  Bacchylides,  use  in  general  the  Doric 
dialect,  but  softened  it  by  an  approximation  to  the  others,  and 
to  the  common  one.  Many  instances  of  the  dialect  of  the 
] jacedfemonians  and  Megarensians  occur  in  Aristophanes. 
Besides  these,  the  Doric  dialect  is  found  in  decrees  and  treaties 
in  the  historians  and  orators,  aiid  in  Inscriptions.  This  dialect 
was  spoken  in  its  greatest  purity  by  the  Messenians." 

V. 

"The  tONIC  DlAt.ECf  was  the  softest  of  all,  on 
account  of  the  freqiient  meeting  of  vowels  and  the  deficiency 
ot  aspirates.  Ii  was  spoken  chiefly  in  the  colonies  of  Asia 
Minor,  and  in  the  islands  of  the  Archipelago.  It  ivas  disided 
into  old  and  new.  In  the  former  Momer  and  Ilesiod  wrote, 
and  it  was  originally  very  little,  if  at  all  different  from  the  • 
ancient  Attic.  The  new  arose  when  the  lonians  began  to 
mix  in  commerce  and  send  out  colonies.  The  writers  in 
this    were   Anacreon,    Herodotus,   and    Hippocrates.^    The 


^  "  Tlip  studrnt  is  to  attribute  to  Anacreon  only  the  fragments  whieb 
were  collected  by  F.  Ursinufj  ;ind  a  few  additional  ones ;  and  not  those 
potniLS  wtiich  commonly  go  under  LI?  name,  a  few  only  excepted.  Ae 
Anacreon  lived  more  than  1(*0  years  before  Herodotus,  his  dialect  wa» 
probably  diflerent.  With  reupjoct  to  Herodetu.s•,  it  is  to  be  observed  that 
Q€  adopted  the  Ionic  for  hie  lastorj'.  lining  himself  a  Dorian,  coneequeot- 


144  r.KEEK  CXEBClSCSv 

prinripal  re*idencp  of  the  Ionic  tribe  in  th»•  earliest  times  was 
Attica.  From  this  Γ'ί^οπ  thev  -"cnt  forth  their  colohie*  to  the 
ehorea  of  Arfia  Minor.  Λβ  these  colonics  bepm  earlier  than 
the  mother  country  th<:  inarch  of  cultivation  an«l  refinement. 
Xlift  term?,  Ionia,  Joniaiis,  nnd  Ionic,  were  used  by  way  of  errii- 
nenci•,  to  ilonote  their  new  settlements,  tht-in.selvea,  and  their 
dialect,  and  iiiially  were  extluiively  appropriated  to  them. 
The  oriirinul  lonian.e  at  home  were  now  called  ^iiticif,  Alhfnt- 
ύη.'.  and  thVir  country,  laying  aside  its  primitive  name  of  Ionia, 
look  thai  uf  Attica,''* 

VL 

*  Th^  ΛΤΤΤΓ•  ηΤΛΤ.ΕΓΤ  underwent  three  chan?ei«. 
Th»*  old  Attic  was  .joarcfly  dith.-rtnt  from  the  old  loiuc,  ad 
Attica  Λν;ι.•ί  the  original  country  of  the  Ionian? ;  and  hence 
we  find  in  Homer  many  form.«  of  word.-,  which  were  other- 
wise peculiar  to  the  Attics.  In  thLs  dialect  Solon  wrote  hii 
laws.  Throuirh  the  proximity  of  the  original  lijoXic  and 
Doric  in  B<voiia  and  Megaris,  the  frequent  intercourse  with 
the  l>jriaiis  in  Peloponnesus,  and  with  other  (ireeks  and 
foreiirn  nations,  it  was  gradually  intermixed  wth  words 
which  were  not  Ionian,  and  departed  farther  from  the  luriic 
in  many  re.spects,  and  jKirticuKirly  in  using  the  lonjr  α  where 
the  lonian.s  employed  the  η,  after  a  vowel,  or  the  letter  ^  ;  in 
avoiding  the  collision  of  several  vowels  in  two  difft-rent 
words,  by  contracting  them  into  a  diphthong,  or  long  vowel ; 
in  prcfi-rring  the  consonants  with  an  aspirate,  whilst  the  loiii- 
aa^  usptl  the  tfimesi ;  6ic.  Thus  arose  the  middle  Attic,  in 
which  (iorgias  of  Lcontium  was  the  first  who  wrote.  The 
writers  in  this  ilialect  are,  bLsidi\s  the  one  jtist  mentioned, 
'I'hucyilidi•.-!,  the  trag'tlian.?,  Aristophanes,  and  others.  The 
new  Attic  is  datod  from  [Vmopthenos  and  /Eschines,  aU 
th^)U!rh  i'lato,  Xi'uophon,  Aristophan»^,  Lysias,  anrl  Isoorn- 
tee,  have  many  of  its  p«'culiaritir.•?.  It  differed  chiefly  from 
the  fi)ri>L'"oiiig,  in  prcfi-rring  the  softer  forms  ;  for  in.-tancf^ 
the  2d  .\or.  tfjXXi^fi.c,  αταλλα^ίι;,  instead  of  the  ancient  Attic 
arxd  Ionic,  βΊ;λλίχ<)'(<:.  a^oKKitybu:  ;  the  double  i'^  iutifead  of 
the  old  ftf,  which  the  old  Attic  kad  in  common  with  tbe 


W  tte  Μ  not  a>w.i>«  cin-n^trnt  in  hi»  o*acrii,  arul  prrhap•  in  more  loni* 
man  .1  tmI  lonijii  ««oulil  havo  Nni.  Hid  diuWvt  Lt  rrrtaijilv  Jii!rn>nt 
fi\>.i»  tli.il  of  Ilijipurralp*."  i/ii/miir.'W,  UcmatK»  en  .\J(iit\\a.'*  Gr.  Gr. 
p.  I X  τ  liL 

*  \ti  U-f  »^  U  IIouKT  tbc  Attic•  nrni  ttil]  calkxl  ko««|. 


GREEK  EXERClSiaa.  145 

Ionic,  Doric,  and  ^Eolic  ;  the  double  ττ  instead  of  the  hiis• 
ing•  tfC.  They  said  also,  cXsu.aujv,  ^ναφευ<:,  for  ίτνευμων,  χναφι-^ζ, 
and  Cjv  instead  of  the  old  ^υν." 

VII.5 

'•  Athens  having  attained  an  important  political  elevation, 
and  exercising  a  species  of  general  government  over  Greece, 
became  at  the  same  time  the  centre  of  literary  improvement. 
Clieeks  from  all  the  tnbes  went  to  Alliens  for  their  educa- 
lion,  and  the  Attic  Avorks  became  models  in  every  depart- 
ment of  literature.  The  consequence  was,  that  Avhen  Greece 
ίίοοη  after,  under  the  Macedonian  monarcW,  assumed  a  po- 
litical imity,  the  Attic  dialect,  having  taken  rank  of  the  other.?, 
became  the  language  of  the  court  and  of  hterature,  in  which 
the  prose  writers  of  all  the  tribes,  and  of  whatever  region, 
henceforth  almost  exclusively  wrote.  The  central  point  of 
this  later  Greek  literature,  was  established  under  the  Ptole- 
mies at  Alexandria  in  Egypt."  , 

VIII. 

'•'  With  the  universality  of  the  Attic  dialect,  began  its  de- 
generacy. Writers  introduced  peculiarities  of  their  provin- 
cial dialects ;  or  in  place  of  anomalies  peculiar  to  the  Athe- 
nians, or  of  phrases  that  seemed  artificial,  made  use  of  the 
more  regular  or  natural  forms  ;  or  instead  of  a  simple  phrase, 
which  had  become  more  or  less  obsolete,  introduced  a  more 
popular  derivative  form,  as  νηχίίόαι  for  vsiv,  io  sivim,  and 
αξοτζίαν  for  α^ουν,  to  plough.  Against  this,  however,  the 
grammarians  often  pedantically  and  unreasonably  struggled  ; 
and,  in  tlieir  treatises,  placed  by  the  side  of  these  oiFensive 
or  inelegant  modernisms,  the  true  forms  from  the  old  Attic 
Avriters.  Hence  it  became  usual  to  imderstand  by  Jlliic,  only 
that  which  was  found  in  the  ancient  classics,  and  to  give  to 
the  common  language  of  hterature,  formed  in  the  manner 
indicated,  the  name  of  voiv>i,  '  the  vulgar,'  or  Ιλληνικη,  '  the 
Greek'  i.  e.  '  the  vulgar  Greek.'  This  κοινή  διάλεχτο?  after  all, 
however,  remained  essentially  Attic,  and  of  course  every 
common  Greek  grammar  assumes  the  Attic  dialect  as  its 
basis." 


*  Buttmann'6  Greek  Gramniar,  p.  2.    (Everett'3  translation.) 
Ν 


146  CREEK   CXi:r.CI3ES. 

IX. 

"  To  the  universality,  however,  of  ihc  Attic  dialect,  an 
exceplioii  was  made  in  poetry.  In  this  departnienl  the  At- 
tics n.'inftin•-•'!  thf  models  only  in  one  bmnch,  ι  he  rfra^^ev*. 
For  ih.;  other  iort.s  of  {«oetry,  Homer  and  the  other  elde* 
Ionic  bank,  who  continued  to  be  read  in  the  school.-;,  re- 
niained  the  modeb.  The  Doric  diakct,  however,  even  in 
later  days,  wa3  not  exclnd<;d  from  poetry  ;  on  the  contrary, 
it  austainod  itjelf  in  aomo  of  the  .-jubordinaie  branches  of  the 
art,  pariicnhirly  in  the  pa>torul  and  humorou?.  When,  how- 
ever, the  langtiafrc  which  prevails  in  the  lyrical  j)orfions  of 
the  drama,  that  i.-,  in  the  choru^e.^  and  pn.-iionate  .<peeche^■, 
ii  called  Doric,  it  ii  to  Ije  remembered  that  the  JJ^ricis/H 
consists  in  little  eL-ii'  than  the  predominance  of  the  lung  a 
frarlicularly  in  the  place  of  η,  wliich  wa.s  a  featiirc  of  the 
ancient  hmgiiag-e  in  general,  and  retained  it.self  for  its  digniij' 
in  sublime  poetry,  while  in  comnion  life  u  remained  ia  use 
oiJy  among  the  LlKjiian.i." 

X." 

"  The  .Macedoniiin  dinlect  niu.st  be  r.-^j^ecially  regarded 
among  tlio.sc  which  were  in  vurioti.-;  degre«s  incorporated 
with  the  later  Grecli.  The  Macedonian.^  were  allied  to  the 
Greelcs,  and  niunbtTed  them?elve.-5  wiih  the  Dorian.-.  Tluy 
introtlucod,  a.^  conqneroi»,  the  Cireek  cultivation  and  refim•- 
ι.ΊοηΙ  among  the  roinpiered  barbarians.  Here  al.-o  the  Cireek 
wa.^  spoken  and  ^\'ritten^  not  however  Anthout  t-omc  pecidi- 
aritics  of  form,  which  the  grammarians  denominateti  JMuc-- 
dininn.  A.«  Egypt,  ;ind  its  capital  city  AUxaivIria,  becanie 
the  prhicinal  s»'at  of  tlio  later  (ireek  culture,  the.se  forni.^ 
Wf>rc  comprelimded  untler  the  name  of  the  Akxiindriim  ili.i- 
I'-ct.  Tlie  native.^  also  of  the.-e  conquered  countrie.-  began  to 
speak  the  Oreek  (iXXrvi^fiv).  and  Mich  aii.A.-iatic  Greek  wa.i 
denominated  ίλληνί'Ττη!:.  Hence  the  .style  of  the  writers  of 
this  cla.s.=«,  with  which  were  incorporated  many  form.s  not 
Greek,  and  many  oriental  turns  of  expre.>»sion,  was  di'noini- 
n.ileil  IIcllriHStir.  It  need  .scarcely  b»•  observed,  that  tbit 
dialect  is  contained  in  the  Jewish  and  Christian  jnonutht>nin 
of  tha^e  times,  especially  in  the  S<^ptuagint  ami  in  the  New 
Teaiament,  wln-nce  it  pns.sed  mor-r  or  less  into  tin•  works  of 
the  Father.-).     iVew  liarbarisms  of  everv  kind  were  intrmlucfd 


'  Petton'•  trinilttion  of  Huttmnnn'e  ncrount  of  tho  Cin-^k  DUWctik 
«fpoixlcd  to  TUiciv-h'i  Urcek  laWis.»     Sote  V2 


CREKK  kxehcises.  147 

durini!;  the  middle  ag-cs,  when  Coiiitiiiuinoplo,  the  ancient 
liyzanliuin,  became  the  seal  of  the  Greek  empire  and  cemre 
of  literary  rultivalion,  Ont  of  this  arose,  the  dialect  of  ilw 
Byzantine  writers,  and  finally,  the  yet  living  language  of  the 
modern  Greeks." 


EXERCISES  OX  THE  DIALECTS 


MOIAO  GREEK  TO  BE  RENDERED  INTO  ATTIC. 


SAPPHONIS  FRAGMENTA. 
I. 

ΠοιχιΧοφΡον,  αίανατ'  Αφ^οίίτα, 
Παι  Λιοί:  ooXocrXoxc,  λκίσΌμα»  τε 
1\Ιη  μ'  «tfaitfij  μη5'  oviaitfi  ύαμνα, 

Ποτν;α,  όυμον 
Αλλα  rui(5'  εν9',  α»  -rora  χατε^ωτα 
Τα?  εμα^  αιιία^  αϊοκΓα  -τολλα^ 
E'<^'je?,  "ττατξοζ  τε  δομον  XcnOicCa 

Χρυίεον,  r/voe?, 
Α^μ'  υ'Τοίόίίιχο'αο'α•  χαλοι  όε  r'  α^'ον 

Πυκνά  δίνε•ο\ιτεζ  ττε^'  α-π-'  w^avw  ίε- 

.Pi-jj  Ota  [i.t(S<Su, 
Αιτία  6'  εχτΊχον-Γο•  τιι  ο',  cj  μάχαιρα, 

H^cj  oTTi  τ'  vjv,  TO  τετΓονία,  xw-m 
Δη  Te  χαλημ», 


■ί  The  rcadhigs  here  followe»],  are  those  given    in  the  "  Cambridgt 
Classical  /icf-earthcii,"  vol.  i.  p.  3.  et  tc/^•. 


146  GREEK  EXERCISES. 

JNIajvoXa  6:μ-'^: — Tivoj  αυ  τυ  τίιίί» 
Ma-rj  (Τα^ην^υία?  f  iXocara  ;   T15  τ',  CJ 

Σα*φ',  αίιχηη  j 
Και  γαξ  αι  9-^7^'  ''"'Χ-^»  ^'t..|s', 
Λι  Js  όω^  μ»5  ^''χ}'^\  α/.λα  owtfe», 
Λι  0£  μη  p(>.£i,  ταχίωί  ςιι>.αίίΐ 

KoJx  ε^ςλοιίαν. 
Evie  μοι  χαι  νυν,  χαλϊιταν  τε  λυΟΌν 
Εχ  μ.-ριμνάν  otfcTa  ό'  εμοι  τελειίόαι 
Θϋμο5  ιμε^τί:',  τελείον,  tu  ϋ'  α.τα 

Συμμα;^05  Stftfo. 


το  VENUS. 


ο  arlful-miixled,  immortal  Venus,  \vi]y  daughter  of  Jove, 
do  not,  I  entreat  thee,  Ο  revered  one,  subchie  me  wiih  trouble.-:, 
jior  my  spirit  with  woes.  But  come  hither,  if  ever  even  befor•• 
I  hi.'',  hearing  my  earnest  supplicationp,  thou  g-avcst  an  a.ssfni 
to  my  prayer,  and  having•  left  the  golden  home  of  thy  father, 
came,  having  harnessed  thy  car :  while  thy  beautiful  sv.ifi 
.«parrows  mo\ing  their  rapid  pinions,  bore  thee  along  from 
heaven  over  the  black  earth  amid  the  blaze  of  noon.  Uuick- 
ly  they  came  ;  but  thou,  Ο  blessed  one,  having  smiled  with 
thy  heavenly  countenance,  inquired  what  it  was  that  1  suffer- 
ed, and  \vhy  I  now  call  thee,  and  what  in  particular  1  wish  to 
happen  to  my  raging  breast — whose  love  do  you  aeain  fruit- 
lessly seek  to  ensnare  by  your  persuasive  art,  who,  0  Sappho, 
.«lights  you  1  For  if  now  he  even  flee,  soon  will  he  pursue  ; 
and  if  now  he  receive  not  gifts,  3'et  will  he  soon  bestow  them  ; 
and  if  now  ho  love  not,  soon  \\i\\  he  love  thee,  even  though 
unwilling  to  make  a  return. — Come  thou  unto  me  now  also, 
and  free  mc  from  cruel  cares  ;  and  do  thou  accomplisli  for  me 
whatsoever  tilings  my  bosom  dcsiies  to  be  accomplished,  and 
be  thyself  my  ally. 


•REEK  EXERClSEe.  149 

U. 

E*5  Ε^ωμεναν.* 


Φαίνεται  μοι  χηνο^  κίος  iioitftv 
Εμμ-εν'  ανη^,  ottij  ενάντιος  «rot 
Itfiovei,  χαι  τλασΊον  άίυ  φωνο»- 

Και  γίΧ^ααζ  ιμε^οεν.      Το  μοι  'μαν 
Κα^ΰίαν  εν  tfraostfiv  ί-τττοασΊΓν• 

OjCiSV  £τ'  (Χ£|• 

Αλλα  χαμαεν  ^λωδ'Α'α  FiFays,  λείΤτον  ι 
Αυτιχα.  χ^ω  *υ^  υ*οδ35^ομαχΓν, 
ΟττατεοΊίι  (5'  ουΰεν  ο^ημι,  ]6ομ§ίυ- 

rfiv  ί'  αχοαι  μοι. 
Καΰέ'  »δ|ωί:  '^τύυχξος  χεεται,  τ^ομο$  (5s 
Tlatfcv  αγρετ  -χΧοίξοτίξα  δε  νοιας 
Εμμ»•  νίδναχψ  δ'  ί^ιγω  ν»(5£υ<Γην 

Φκινομκι  acrvo-jg. 


ΤΟ  Α  BELOVED  ΟΝΕ. 


That  man  seems  to  me  to  be  equal  with  the  god?,  whe 
ύΐα  facing  thee,  and  in  deep  silence  liears  thee  sweetly  speak- 
ing, and  laughing  in  love-inspiring  accents.  This  always 
causes  my  heart  to  tlirob  in  my  bosom,  for  when  I  behold 
thee,  in  an  instant  no  portion  of  my  voice  any  longer  comes  : 
but  my  tongue  falters,  a  subtile  fire  immediately  runs  be- 
neath my  skin,  I  see  nothing  with  my  eyes,  my  ears  tingle, 
fi  cold  sweat  pours  down,  a  trembling  seizes  my  whole  frame, 
I  become  paler  than  the  grass,  and,  breathless,  eeem  to  want 
but  little  of  death. 


•  In  thia  ode,  the  readinge  given  in  the  "  Cambridge  Clasfical  Re- 
tearche»,"  voL  i.  p.  7,  are  principally  followed.  A  few  are  a^pt«d  frWBk 
Wei*ke's  edition  of  Longinue.       __^•  "  *  , 


N5 


150  GREEK  EXERCISES. 

DORIC  GREEK  TO  BE  RENDERED  INTO  ATTIC. 


L 

CORINNiE  FRAGMENTUM. 

Ex  ApoUonia  Dyscolo. 


Μίμ-φο/ΧΛΐ  ιων^α  rav  Xij'oi/^av   Mu^iia,   In  βάνα  φοχ,ύα  stx 
Ώηδαξαιο  'JTct'  ί^ιν. 

"  I  blame  the  melodious  MjTtii!,  because,  being  a  womai\ 
she  engaged  in  a  contest  with  Pindar." 


II. 

LACONUM  LEGATUS. 
.Ex  ArUtophanis  Li/sistrata,  v.  1-^47 — 12T2,  ed.  Brunfk. 


Tug  χυ^ίανιω?,  u  ΛίναμοΛνα, 
Ταν  τ'  £μα«  μωαν,  άτκ 
Οιδεν  αμμ?,  τω^  τ'  ΑίΤαναιωδ* 
Όχα  τοι  μεν  ετ'  Α^ταμιτί'^ 

ΙΙοττα  χάλΛ,  ΐΓω<:  Mr.iujf  ς•'  tvixwv' 
Αμΐ  δ'  αυ  A:wvi(5a5 
Aj  εν,  άτεξ  TW5  χαιτ^ω? 
Ga^ovras  «"ον  oJovra.      IToXuj  d* 
Λμφι  τας  jsvjag  «9^05  rvcTii, 
rioXvj  ί'  άμα 
Και  χαττων  ίχελων  ιετο. 
Ην  ^α^  7ψ\,δξίζ  OJX  ελαί'α'ως 
Taj  ψαμμαί,  τοι  iri^ifai. 
Α^^οτε»'  Λξτα.μ»  CT;;Oxrov?, 
Μολβ  ίϊυ^ο,  Ίτα^ο'ενί  rfia, 
Ποττο5  C'Tiiviaf,  uj 
^•■ε-χρς  *ολυν  ομμ?  χ^ονον• 
Λ\ν  J'  αυ 


GR£EK  EXEnCISES.  l5i 

Ταις  Λν^ηχαι^• 

Και  τάν  αιμυλαν  aXufoxuv 

Παυ(ίαιμ5<3'.      Ω 

Λευξ"  ιό»,  isuf',  ω 

Κιινα^ε  "ffaPcTsv?, 

Arouse  these  youths,  Ο  Mnemosyne,  and  my  muse, 
Λv•hich  knows  us  and  the  Athenians  ;  Λvhen  the  latter  at  Arte- 
misium,  like  gods  made  an  attack  upon  the  vessels  of  the 
foe,  and  vanquished  the  Medes ;  while  on  the  other  hand, 
Leonidas  led  us  whetting•  the  tusk  like  wild  boars.  Much 
foam  frothed  around  our  mouths,  and  much  at  the  same 
time  flowed  down  even  to  our  legs.  For  our  opponents  the 
Persians  were  not  fewer  in  number  than  the  sand.  Ο  Diana, 
who  presides!  over  the  groves,  destroj^er  of  savage  beasts, 
come  hither,  virgin  goddess,  to  our  league,  in  order  that 
thou  maj'est  unite  us .  long  in  friendship  :  now  again  let  there 
always  be  unbroken  amity  to  our  agreements,  and  may  we 
cease  without  delay  from  the  craft  of  foxes.  Ο  come  liilher, 
come,  Ο  virgin  huntress. 


III. 

CHORUS  LACONUM. 
Ex  Aristophanis  LysUiraia,  v.  1297—1323. 


Ταϋγετον  αιιτ'  ε^αννίιν  εχλι*ωα  Μωα 

Μόλε  Αακαινα,  ^ξεντ^ν  ά/χιν 

Κλεωα  τον  ΑμυχΚαις  σΊον, 

Και  χαλχιοικου  Atfavav, 

Ύννδαξιδας  τ'  ayadug, 

Το/  δι]  Ίίαξ'  Ευ^ωταν  ψιαίίοντι. 

Εια  μαλ'  εμξγι,    ~\ 

Ωϊα  χουφα  τταλλων, 

*Ω.ς  ΣιΤαξταν  ύμ,νιοψεί, 

Τα  tficjw  χοξοι  μελοντι, 

Και  "Τοίων  χτυ<κΌζ' 

'Ατε  *ωλοι  5'  αϊ  χο^αι 

Πα^'  τον  Ευ^ωταν 

Αμίταλλοντι  ίτυκνα  τοδοιν 

Ε^χονιωίΤαΓ 
Tcu  6s  χομαι  tfeiovo',  ά^ίξ  Βαχχα» 


152  CREEK  tXZRCiSEi, 

Άγτ,ται  ό'  ά  Λτβας  vaij 

Αλλ'  ay  e,  xooiiv  τα^αμΤνΧΐίόε  Γβ 

Ά  Tif  i>jx.t05•  xjOrc»  d'  άμα  tcu 

Kat  rci»  ίιάν  ο'  αυ  τα)»  xrantfrav 
Χαλ.χίοιχον  CfivE»! 
Ταν  '!Γα}Χ|χαχον. 

Come  again,  Ο  Laconian  muee,  having  left  lovely  Tay- 
goius,  celebiaiing  fur  us  tlie  revernd  iroil  of  Amycla',  and  the 
Chalcicccan  Miner\a,  and  ihe  vulianl  sons  of  'lyndarus,  \v\>o 
f:j>ori  along  the  Eiiroias.  Coine,  eiiter  with  ppint  upon  the 
task,  shaking  the  liglu  borders  of  tliy  garment,  ihal  we  may 
suiir  the  praisee  of  Sparta,  to  which  llie  choirs  of  the  gods 
are  a  care,  and  the  noise  of  feel :  since  the  damsels,  hke 
young  colts,  leap  up  along  the  Euroias,  liastening  oitwarde 
with  the  frciiuenl  beating  of  their  feet.  Their  tresses  stream 
in  .the  air,  hke  those  of  female  Bacchanalians,  wielding  the 
thyrsis  and  sponing.  The  chaste  daughter  of  Leda  leads  the 
way,  the  beatiieous  leader  of  the  band.  Bui  come,  with  thy 
hand  contine  thy  hair  under  a  fillet,  and  leap  with  thy  feet, 
leap  like  a  stag ;  and  make  at  the  same  time  a  loud  clapping 
serviceable  to  the  chorus,  and  celebrate  again  in  song  the 
Chalcia:can,  the  most  powerful  of  tile  goddeoees,  who  con- 
iciidi  with  every  foe. 


GEEEK  EXERCISES. 


153 


m. 

SPARTANORUMiDECRETUM  CONTRA  TIMOTHEUM," 
Cum  Salmasii  Versione. 


DECRETUM. 


ιταραγηο(ΐε\οξ  ετταν  ά^ετί^αν 
coXiv,  ταν  "π-αλαιαν  μωαν  κτι- 
(καΰογι,  χαι  ταν  Λα  ταν  έ•7Ττα 
χορίαν  χκϊαξίξιν  αιίο(ίτξεφομε• 
νοξ  ιτολυφωνιαν  H(fuyuv  λυμ,αι- 
VHTKI  τα^  αχοα^  των  vscjv,  ίια 
TS  τα^  "Π-ολυχο^δια?  και  τα^  και- 
νοτατορ  TW  μελβο^  α^εννεα  κα» 
τοικιΧαν  ανη  άτλαρ  xaj  τε- 
ία^μεναρ  αμφιεννυται  ταν  μωαν, 
«7•»  χρώματος  (Τυνισ'ταμίνο^  ταν 
TCO  μεΚεοξ  βιεσΊν  αντί  ταρ  εναρ- 
μινιω  ίΤοτταν  αντκίτ^οφον  αμοι- 
€αν,  'iragcoikrjSsig  Ss  χαι  εττον 
ο,γωνα  ταξ  ΕλευυΊνια^  Δαμα- 
TPC5  αιτ^ίτεα  (^ιαίκ/ατο  ταν  τω 
μικίω  διαίίχευα.ν,  ταξ  ταξ  Σεμε- 
"Καξ  ωδιναξ  ουχ  ενΰιχα  τω^  ν£ω^ 
Οίδαχχ-ή,  δεδοχύαι  φαν  τερί 
■τούτων  τω^  βαύϊΚεαξ  τωξ  Εφο- 
ξωξ  μεμψασ'ίΤ'αι  Τιμοσεον,  ε-ϊτα- 
vayxarfai  δε  χμ  ταν  ενδεχα  χο^- 
όαν  εκταμοντα  τα^  •π'ίξιτταξ 
ύτολι^ην  μβνον  τα^  ε'π'τη,  οΊίωξ 
εχαΰτοξ  το  τα^  -ττολιο^  β'^ξ^ξ 
Ipuv  ευλα§•ηται  ετταν  Σ-ττα^ταν 
είτιφβρην  τί  των  ηδων  μη  νοτταξ 
αξάταξ  χΧεοξ  αγοψτων. 


SALHASII  VERSIO. 


Εΐτειϋη  ΤιμοόεοίΤ  5  ΜιληοΊος 
*α^α^ινομενο5  ει?  την  τ,μετεξαν 
*ολιν,  την  τταλαιαν  μοί/ίίαν  ατι- 
μαι^ει,  και  την  (Jia  των  είττα 
χο^όω-ν  xioafirfiv  ο.*ο(ί7ξεφί•Χί- 
νος  «τολυφωνιαν  εκίαγων  λυμαί- 
νεται τα5  αχοα^  των  νέων,  οία 
τε  τη5  ffoXuyoPOiaff  και  της  χαι- 
νοτητοί  του  μελ&υ?  κ^εννη  και 
"Γοικιλην  αντι  άίτλη^  χαι  τε- 
ro:γιJ-εvriς  αμςιεννυται  την  μουίΤαν, 
ειτ)  γ^^ωΐ)Μτι>ς  ΟΊινκίταμενο^  την 
του  μίλου?  (5iiCiv  αντί  τη5  ενα^- 
μονιου  ίΤ^ο^  την  αντιίτ^οφον  άμοι- 
ρη», «ταΓ-αχληόει^  δε  χαι  εις  τον 
σ.γω\α  τν,ς  Ελευύινιας  Δημη- 
τ^ος  α.ττ'ξε-^Ύ]  (5ιαεΐ(7'ατο  την  του 
μυί)ιυ  (5ια^κευην^  ταί  τηδ  Σεμε- 
"Κτ,ς  ωδιναίτ  ουκ  sv^jxa  του^  νεουί 
διδαϋχζι,  ίείοχόαι  έφαγαν  τερι 
τούτων  του^  /βαοΊλεα^  του$  Ε^ο. 
^oug  μεμψαίΤόαι  Τιμοόεον,  εττα- 
να^καί^αι  δε  χαι  των  ένδεκα  χο^. 
δων  εκταμοντα  τα^  ΐΐεζιτιας 
xi'Ko'ki'itsiM  μόνον  Tag  Ι•*τα,  οιτωΐ 
εχο.(ί7ος  το  τη^  τολεω^  βαξος 
άξων  ευλα§ηται  ει?  την  Στα^την 
ειτιφε^ειν  τι  των  ηίων  μη  'π'ξος  τγις 
α^ετηί  κλεοί  αγόντων. 


^  This  decree  has  come  down  to  us  in  Boethius,  "de  3Tusica,"  1.  1.  p. 
1372,  ed.  Basil.  1570,  fol.  It  is  given  in  the  notes  to  Scaliffer's  edition  of 
Manilius ;  in  Casaubon's  Comments  on  Athenaens,  (8.  p.  332.  a ;)  and  in 
Salmasius,  "  de  HcUenistica."  It  is  licrc  prrsentpti  lo  the  student,  not  as 
an  exercise,  but  as  a  species  of  classical  curiosity.  It  fiirr.irhes  a  «tronrf 
|>Γθθζ  if  such  indeed  were  wanting,  of  the  attachment  of  the  ancient 


]54  OREPK  CXERClSEa, 


J'.'MC  GREEK  TO  BE  RENDERED  INTO  ATTIC 


L 

Ex  Herodoli  HUtorid. 
CLIO.  c.  ITS,  17?. 

Tla'uXuiv  \si-at  εν  -sioif)  με^αλν,  μ'.γα^;  tojiCa  μ£r:Jcov  ίχαβ". 
r'jv,  Eixotfi  wii  ixarov  (Τ-ταοκ-ιν,  eojCr?  τίτρα^^ονου•  ο^τοι  (ΓταΟι&ί  CTig 
Tfiioo'/j  τη;  τολιο?  ^ινονί-αι  gj-mravrs;  O/OWkovra  χαι  i-£riaxo(r»oi. 
To  μ?ν  vjv  μίνα(3ο5  τοβΌυτον  stfri  του  atfTjo.c  του  Βαονλ.ωνιου.  Ext- 
χοΤμητο  OS  oos  ουόεν  άλλο  ιτολι-Τμα  twv  raiic  ιόμ*^'  «"«φ^β;  μίν  t^w- 
Trt  αιν  βαίεα  τϊ  χαι  ί-^εα  χαι  τλεη  ΰοατο?  ιτε^ιόίει•  μ;τα  όε,  τειχοδ 
τεν-ηχονς-α  μεν  irr;;;(£u)v  βαΟΊλτ/ίων  άον  70  Svjof,  ύψο;  ϋε  6»>ιχο(ί»ων 
"τηχίων.  Ό  όε  ,βασιληΐο;  ΐΓτ;χυί:  του  μέτρου  είη  ιτ/,χε&ί  με^^ων 
ΤΡίί»  όαχτυλοιΟΊ.  Δ5»  (5ri  μί  r^oi  -ouroiCi  β-τίφΡαίαι,  ίνα  τε  εχ  rrg 
TrtjjO'j  ή  γτ,  αναι-ΤκΑω^η,  χα»  το  Ttt^sg  Ιντινα  τ;οιτον  s^yrjj^ro.  OpuC- 
C'.iTtc  άυ^  την  ταφ'ον,  ?τλ(Τί>Γν5ν  Τ^ν  γη"  '''ψ  i*  '"OV  c?;i-,  ματο^ 
ίχφίίομίνην  'λχυο'βτντί;  is  «rXiviou?:  \χΜ(ί4,  ωνττ-ο'αν  ftu-fa^  ίν  χ«μ(. 
νοιβΤ  μετά  ί=,  τελματι  χ?soJμ£voι  α^φαλτ^;  ^i^^rj,  χαι  ίια  τ^ιν^χοντα 
ίομων  τ-λινίου  ταΡΟΌυίΤ  χαλαμω»  iSia'ircxoa^ows.r,  εύειμαν  vfuita  μβ» 
ί•ι:•5  τοφοου  τα  χειλεα"  άευτε^α  δε  αυτό  το  Tii^rj  τον  αυτόν  τΡΟίτον. 

Β  ibvlon  lies  in  a  larsre  plain,  and  is  in  size  oach  u'ay  a 
huniiie  i  and  twenty  Rliidia,  being  a  ?q  :aro.  These  stadia  of 
The  city'i  circuit  amount  in  all  to  four  hundred  and  «-ight}•. 
So  ereat  then  is  the  sine  of  the  Ribvlonian  city.  It  was 
embollishod  iiioreover,  sncb  ais  no  other  rity  of  those  Λνίναΐι 
■wr  know.  III  the  fiv.-it  phue,  a  iliirh  Muoinpa=ses  it,  deep 
Willi  hroad,  anil  full  of  water  ;  next,  a  wall,  which  ii  in  l)re;^d;h 
lifly  royal  culniis,  Hiid  in  heiirht  two  hundred  cubit.-!.  The 
royal  cubit  is  greater  than  the  coinnion  one  by  ihre.e  dii;-ii?. 
I  uUirhi,  in  adihiinn  to  these  parlicular.-,  to  tiicntion,  to  wliat 
use  the  earth  from  the  ditch  wa.-=  applied,  ami  in  what  way 
the  wall  w.ii  built.     Λΐ  the  .«aine  time  tlial  thev  were  (ΙϊίΤίΐίι•? 


Fpartuns  to  the  f  {canin»  littern.)  Tlic  ^ColoTViric  triSw  wore  nil  lOinl 
of  tUo  UiW  of  tliis  K-Uor,  nml  sii.l  ΐττοβ,  vop,  cop,  \r.  lor  ir-ro>,  toij,  Otof. 
So  ;.Uo  re,))  for  »en,  wlwui-f  ilie  L;itiii  purr.  I'hi•  iloiil'lr  Ι,ιιΐιη  ι«•πιΓιηΜ• 
lioti  in  «r  und  c,  »h  ΊυτινΓ,  ,Ηοπο,» ;  liihor,  /,»,'•.->(. ;  ma)  thus  Ix?  *as»Iy  tkO 
CiunUxi  §ar.     Htc  foruirr  is  tin•  iiH>n•  aiwHUl  iofui. 


CREEK  EXERCrSES.  155 

the  ditch,  they  formed  into  liricks  the  t^arth  which  was  brong-ht 
out  of  the  excavation.  AVhen  they  had  a  tMghed  a  sufficient 
number  of  bricks,  they  baked  them  in  furnaces.  After  this, 
usiui^  for  cement  heated  bitumen,  and  between  every  thirtieth 
course  of  brick  placing  a  frame-work  of  reeds,  they  first  built 
ttie  sides  of  tlie  ditch,  and  next,  the  wall  itself  in  the  same 
Way. 


II. 

t\x  cadem. 
EUTERPE,  c.  28. 

Ταύτα  μίν  vuv  fifTW  w^  Siii  is  5cat  ug  ^ξχχ^  ζγίνίτο.  Του  δ? 
ΓΝϊΐλου  ταζ  "nr^yixg  ουτί  Κ\γνντι•^ν,  O'jtc  AiSuiJv,  ούτε  Έλλ•>;νο;ν 
TWV  εμοι  αττικομίνων  ζζ  λο^οικΓ,  ουίει^  ύιτείχετο  εκϊενα),  ο  μη  εν 
AiyuirriJ  εν  Σαϊ  'ττολι  ό  γξαιχμ.ν.τκίττ,ς  των  Ι^ων  ρ^^ηματων  τ-ι;^  Αΐ'η- 
ναι/;?.  OUToff  (5'  εμοι  ^ε  ται^ειν  εύοκεε,  φαμενο^  ειόεναι  ατξΒχίωζ. 
Ελε^ε  (5έ  ώδί.  "  Είναι  ίυο  ου^εα  ες  οξυ  τα^  χοξυφας  ατι^μενα, 
με•.•α|υ  Συ^ινη^  τί  ■π'ολιοί  χειμενα  7τ,ς  ΘηβαϊϋοίΤ,  χαι  Ελεφαντιν»)$• 
6(^νοματα  '5ε  εινα;  τοίοΊ  ηυ^εοΊ,  tw  μεν,  Κ^ως^ι,  tw  όε,  Μωφι.  Ύαζ 
UV  όη  ιΐι\γας  του  Νείλου,  εουίώ^  αβυδΌΌυ?,  εχ  του  μεοΌυ  των  ou^fwv 
toutJojv  is£iv•  xc/,ί  το  μεν  ήμιο'υ  του  νδσ/τος,  Sir'  Αι^υττου  |εειν  χα» 
νξος  βο»ίι\\  ανεμον  το  5'  έτερον  γ,μ.κϊυ,  ε*<  Αιόιοσιη^  τε  χαι  νότου. 
'Γ25  (3ε  abjCoOi  ειΛ  α!  ίΤντ^αι,  eg  ύια'ττει^αν  εφγ,  τούτου  Υαμμιτιχον 
Αι^υττου  ^ασΊλεα  α-ίΤίχε'Τ'όαι.  Πολλεων  yae  αυτόν  χιλιάδων  οξ. 
^υιεων  -τλεξαμενον  χαλον,  κατεινα»  ravTj],  χα»  ουχ  εξικεί^αι  ε^  βνα- 
tfov. 

ι» 

Be  these  thing.?  then  both  as  they  are,  and  as  they  have 
been  from  the  beginning.  But  of  the  sources  of  the  Nile, 
no  one  either  of  _the  Egyptians,  or  Libyans,  or  Greeks,  who 
conversed  with  me,  professeil  to  have  any  knowledge,  except 
in  Egvpt,  in  the  city  of  8ais,  the  scrik^  of  the  sacred  treasures 
of  Min('r\-a.  'I'his  person  apj>eare<l  to  me  indeed  to  be  jest- 
ing, when  he  declared  that  he  was  very  well  acquainted  Avith 
them.  He  expressed  hiiuself  moreover  in  the  following  man- 
ner : — '  That  there  are  two  mountains,  whose  summits  termi- 
nate respectively  in  a  pharp  point,  situate  between  S\"ene,  a 
citv  of  Thebai?,  and  Elephantine  ;  and  that  these  mountains 
are  named,  the  one  Crophi,  the  οίΙκ^Γ  Mophi.  That  ttie 
sources  of  the  Nile  then,  which  are  of  unfathomable  depth, 
flow  from  bfclween  these  mountains  ;  and  that  one  half  of  Um 


156  GREEK  EXERCISES. 

water  runs  tov/nrds  Egypt,  and  in  a  northern  direction,  and 
the  other  half  lowarjs  Ethiopia  and  the  fouth.'  Bui  to  show 
tljat  its  sourci-s  weic  unfelhomablo,  he  stated,  that  Psanuniii- 
chiis,  king•  of  Eyypr,  had  aicertaintd  this  by  actual  trial :  for 
lliat,  having  causi-d  a  rope  of  niany  tliousand  falhoins  to  be 
made,  he  lei  it  down  in  this  place,  and  did  not  reach  bottom. 


111. 

Ex  cudem. 

EUTERPE,  c.  lis,  Ua.' 


E»po/a6vcj  δ:  μίυ  tojj  IgSaf,  ει  μ«ταιον  Xeyov  λί^ουβΊ  ol  EXXij- 
vij  τα  irept  IXicv  γε\ΐΰδαι,  *)  ου,  ίφαίΤαν  τξος  ταύτα  ταδ-,  Ίδτο. 
fl>j^i  φαμενοι  ίιδίναι  *«»'  αυτού  Μενβλίω.  EXdeiv  μεν  γαξ,  μετσ. 
<rr,\t  Έλίνη5  αξ<αγτ,ν,  ες  Try  ΤευκΡίία  ^ην  'Ελλήνων  ύτοατιψ  ίΤο>.- 
λ*;ν,  /SorjOsuffav  Μ£νίλΕ0ϋ•  SXcatfav  δε  ες  yry  χα»  ί^Ρυόειίαν  την 
Cr^aTuiv,  ίΓέμ*όΐΟ  ες  το  Ιλιον  κ^^ελουί:•  ίυν  ίε  (Γφι  ιίναι  και  αυτόν 
Μίνδλ.βων•  τους  ό'  rirei  τε  είίελόίιν  ες  το  τειχο?,  αταιτε^ιν  Έλεντ^ν 
τε  χα  ι  τα  χρήματα  τα  ο»  οιχετο  χλεψα?  Αλεξανό^οί,  των  τε  αίιχη- 
ματων  δ^xa.ς  αιτεειν  του;  (5ε  ΤευχΡου;  τον  αυτόν  λο^'ον  λέγειν  τότε 
χαι  μετϊτειτα,  χαι  ομνοντα;  χαι  ανωμοτι,  μη  μεν  εχειν  Έλεν7;ν, 
μηόε  τα  ειτιχαλευμενα  χρήματα,  αλλ'  είναι  αυτά  νταντά  εν  Αι^η^τ- 
Tij•  χαι  ουχ  αν  oixaiwf  αυτοί  Jixa^  ΰ•η'εχίιν,  ά  ΥΙζωτΐυς  h  AiyuifTiocr 
βαΰιΚεχις  έχει.  Ο)  ίε  Έλληνες  χατα^  ελοί^αι  ίοχεοντε;  υ^*'  αυ- 
τών, ούτω  δη  είΓολιορχίον,  ε;  ό  εξειλον.  ΈλουοΊ  δε  το  τειχο;  ώ;  ουχ 
εψαινότο  ή  Έλενη,  άλλα  τον  αυτόν  λο^ον  τω  «τ^οτερω  ετυνόανοντο, 
ούτω  ί5τι  «■lO'TrjCavTfs  τω  λο^ω  τω  ν^ωτω  ο!  Έλληνε;  αυτόν  Μένε. 
λτων  α-ίτοίτΕλλουίι  ταΡα  Π^ωτεα,  Α'ίΐΊχομενο?  δε  ό  Μενελεωί  f?  ''ΐ•;*' 
Λι^υ^ττον,  χαι  ονατλωΰ'α;  ε;  ττ,ν  Μεμςιιν,  ει^α?  ττ,ς  αλ•>;(?τ;ϊτ;ν  ταν 
ΐΓΡη^ματων,  χαι  ξΓ;ιων  ηντηίε  μ:J'αλ(,Jv,  χαι  Έλεντ;ν  acaofa  χαχων 
ατελαβ'ε•  c^oj  5ί  χαι  τα  ί'ωϋτου  χρήματα. 

Upon  my  nskinfuf  the  priest.^,  Nvhcthcr  the  Greeks  relate 
an  idle  talc  rc^^pectinp•  the  occnrroiicc?  at  Troy,  or  not  ;  they, 
in  na^wcr  to  these  thing•.^,  nienlionod  the  ft)llo\ving-  particulars, 
havinp:  assured  me  that  tht^v  had  learnt  them  by  actual  in- 
quiry fiom  Men»Iaus  him.';eir.  Tiiat  after  tlie  abduction  of 
Helen,  κ  numerous  army  of  (treoks  came  to  the  Trojan  land, 
10  ns.ej.'it  Mriielnus.  That  when  the  army  had  disembarked 
and  pitched  their  camp,  they  sent  ambassadors  to  Troy,  and 


εΚΕΕΚ  EXERCISES.  Ί57 

that  along  \nth  them  went  Menelaus  himself.  That  these, 
when  they  entered  within  the  Avails,  demanded  back  Helen, 
and  the  wealth  which  Paris  had  stolen  along;  with  her  person  ; 
and  also  claimed  satisfaction  for  the  injuries  inflicted.  That 
the  Trojans,  ΙιολνοΛΤΓ,  made  the  same  statement  then  which 
tiiev  afterwards  did  both  under  oath  and  not,  that  they  had 
not  Helen,  nor  the  wealth  which  was  made  the  subject  of 
accusation,  but  that  these  were  all  in  Egj-pt,  and  that  it  was 
not  just  for  them  to  render  satisfaction  for  things  which  Pro- 
teus the  Egyptian  king  had.  But  the  Greeks  thinking  that 
they  we:e  trifled  with  by  them,  for  this  reason  laid  siege  to 
the  cit}',  until  they  took  it.  When,  however,  Helen  did  not 
make  her  appearance  on  their  ha-\-ing  taken  the  city,  but  they 
received  the  same  statement  as  the  former  one  in  ans\ver  to 
their  inquiries,  upon  this  then  the  Greeks  credited  the  assertion 
first  made,  and  send  Menelaus  himself  to  Proteus.  And 
when  Menelaus  had  arrived  in  Egypt,  and  had  sailed  up  to 
INIernphis,  having  stated  the  true  circmiistances  of  the  case, 
he  both  received  splendid  gifts  of  hospitality,  and  obtained 
Helen  back  uninjured. 


IV. 

Ex  eadem, 
CLIO.  c.  36. 

Ev  δ:  ΐω  0MT(fj  χ^ονω  τούτω,  εν  tu  ΜυοΊω  Ουλυμ.'Κ'ω,  (fucg  χ^νι,αα 
■/ινΐται  μΐγα'  οξμζωμζνος  Si  ούτος  εκ  του  ou^soj  τοντου,  τα  twj  Μυ- 
(fuv  εξγα  διαφ&εΐξε(ίχε.  Πολλαχι  δε  ο\  ΜυοΌ;  ειτ'  αυτού  εξεΧβο'ηες, 
Toiritfxov  μΐν  ουδίν  κακόν,  εταί^ζον  δε  <τίξος  αυτού.  ΎεΧοζ  δε,  αιτι- 
χομ,ίνοι  7Γα»α  τον  KPoitfov  των  MucOiv  αγγεΧοι,  εΧεγον  τάδε•  "  Ω 
/oaCiXcu,  υος  γξ'ήμα  μεγ{<ίτον  ανεφανη  γ,μιν  εν  τ'ρ  χ^ξ^ι•,  ος  τα  εξγα 
όιαφόε(?ε<•  τούτον  Ίΐ'Ρού-ομ.εομενοι  έλεειν,  ου  δυναμε6α•  νυν  ων  ffjorf- 
βϊομεία  ΰεο,  τον  ναιδα  \a\  Χογαδας  νεψιας  και  χυνας  ο'υμ'ττεμψαι 
ij,ajv,  ώ?  αν  μιν  εξελςομεν  εκ  της  X^Jf^S•"  Ο'  Μ•^"  ^>)  τούτων  εδεον. 
το.  Κξοΐ(ΐος  δε  μνημ,ονευων  του  ονείρου  τα  ε'π'εα,  εΧεγε  (ίφι  τάδε, 
"  Τίαιδος  μεν  ητεξί  του  εμ,ου  μτη  μνΎ\(}6'ήτε  ετΓ  ου  γα^  αν  νμιν  ίυμ• 
«ίτε,αψαι,αι•  νεογαμος  τε  γα^  ε({η,  κα»  ταύτα  ci  νυν  μέλει,  \υδuτJ, 
μεντοι,  Χογαδας  και  το  χυνη^εαΊον  ιταν  (ΐ'υμ'π'εμψω•  και  5ιαχελευσΌμα« 
τοιΟΊ  ιουδΊ,  είναι  ύς  τί^οίυμοτατοιΟΊ  σ'υνεξελειν  νμιν  το  θ-ηξίον  εκ  τη5 
χω^η»•"     Ταύτα  αμειψατο. 

At  this  same  time,  there  is  a  large  monster  of  a  boar  ia 
the  Mysian  Olympus,  and  this  boar  rushing  from  this  moun- 

O 


i5S  GBEEK  EXEnClSES. 

fam,  \va3  accu.stouici  lo  deoiroy  the  agricul  m'al  labours  of 
the  Mysians.  The  iMysians,  alilwugh  they  cfien  went  forth 
agaiiiHt  him,  did  hi:.•  no  uijur\',  but  eufTered  from  hitn.  Ai 
I.;u9t,  however,  mes-cngers  of  ilic  ^lysians  came  to  Crcisue, 
and  siiid  these  thiug^s.  "  Ο  king,  a  very  large  iiiODSler  of  a 
boar  13  in  the  halit  uf  appearing  m  our  country,  which  de- 
stroys our  labours.  Although  ile.=irou.s  of  takini:  this  boar 
v.c  are  not  able  to  do  so.  Now  then,  we  request  of  thee,  i.i 
addition  to  other  favours,  to  send  thy  son,  and  chosen  young 
men,  and  dogs,  along  with  us,  that  we  may  dri\e  hirn  out  ol' 
the  country."  Tiiey  liien  made  this  request.  Crasus,  how- 
ever, remembering  the  words  of  the  dream,  spoke  thus  to 
them  :  "  Do  not  make  mention  an}•  longtr  respocting  niy  son, 
for  he  is  both  newly  marrieii,  and  these  iluug^s  nov/  occiqiy  hi3 
attention.  I  will  send  chosen  young  men  however,  and  dog-, 
and  every  thing  "bt-donging  to  the  hunt ;  and  I  will  order  thosB 
Avho  go,  to  be  as  acli\e  iis  possiblt;  in  aiding  to  drive  the  wild 
btast  out  of  your  co'intry."     Tlius  he  aiisv.ered. 


EXERCISES  IN  PROSODY. 


DIFFERENT  KINDS  OF  VERSE  REDUCED  TO  PROSAIC 
ORDER,  TO  BE  RETURNED  INTO  METRE.' 


HEXAMETERS. 


Ev  αΐν  sTi'jf  ya;av,  ev  υ'  cu^avov,  εν  5b  βα.\αί(ίαν, 
(s)   Αδάμαντα  τ'  rsXiiv,  crX^iostfav  tj  (ίόληνην. 

Εν  6s  ταντα  τα  tbipco.  ~ά  sypavoj  τ'  είτεφανωτοί, 
(s)   ΠληΤα^α^  δ\  'Taias  τε,  το  rfiJsvoj  r=  Ω^ιωνο^, 

Α^Ητον  ό',  Tjy  χα»  ίϊικληίιν  καλίου ίιν  αμαξαν, 

Ή  τ'  (ίτ^ίφεται  αυ-ου,  χαι  JoxJusi  τ'  Q^iwva* 

0;η  'J'  ΐίτι  αμμοΐ^ί  Ωκίανοιο  λοετΡο;ν. 

la  it  lis  formed  the  earth,  and  the  sky,  and  the  sea,  the 
unwearied  sun,  and  the  full  moony  in  it  also,  all  the  con- 
stellation?, Vv'iih  v.'hich  the  heaven  is  crowned,  the  Pleiades, 
the  Hyade?,  and  the  strength  of  Orion,  and  the  Bear,  which 
they  likewise  call  by  the  appellation  of  the  AVain.  \vhich  is 
there  turned  rcmd,  and  watches  Orion ;  and  it  alone  is  de- 
prived of  ths  baths  of  Oceanus. 


Ev  (5'  ίπίΐι  αλωην  μϊγα  βη&^ιία,Ί  iTa^v'Kjidt, 
Καλην,  )^fjii5ir,v•  βοτξ^Ες  ο'  μ.ίΚωί^ς  rj(iav  ανα• 


'  The  student  will  observe,  that  each  line  is  separately  reduced  to  pro- 
saic orJer,  and  must  be  separately  returned  into  metre. — Those  lines  wnicb 
arc  oiurked  thus  (s),  axe  spondaic  '         •»• 


160  CREEK  EXEHCISES. 

Αμ;ι  ii,  «XatfCs  χατ£τον  kjav?y;v,  τΐξΐ  6'  }p«4 
Kaffffifi^&w  μια  d'  ara^ciro;  η/ν  οιη  Ξτ'  ανττ,ν, 
Ύη  φ'ί'τ,ΐς  Midg'jvzo,  or?  αλωην  T^uyouEw 
Ilodivixai  r)i  χαι  ηΐ3:οι,  gjpoviovrsj  αταλα, 
<I'£*ov  u.tXiro:a  xa;>-rov  fv  r/.exco/i  ταλα^οιΛ. 
Δ'  £v  με1<Το>(Τ»  τοιίιν  craif  XiyeiTj  J3';^^r,  χι 
Κιίβ*!'';  ία:ίο£ν•  (5'  ύιτο  χαλον  αίώ:  λινον 
Ι'ωνη  λίτταλεη•  coi  οί  ojxefrTj  ^r^/JTovrcg 
MnXirr)  τ'  luy^w  τε,  έ^βντο  ffxai^ovrig  coffi. 

On  it  he  likewise  placed  a  vineyard  very  heavy  wiih 
grape?,  beautiful,  golden  ;  but  the  clusters  throughout  it  \vcre 
black ;  and  the  vineyard  (i.  e.  ihs  vines)  stood  against  silver 
poles,  placed  in  order.  Round  he  drew  an  azure  di;ch,  and 
around  thL=i,  an  hedge  of  tin  ;  but  one  path  alone  was  upon 
it,  by  which  the  carriers  went  when  they  gathered  the  vintage. 
Young  girls  and  youths  of  tender  minds,  bore  the  luscious 
fruit  in  twisted  baskets,  and  in  the  rnidst  of  these  a  boy  sweet- 
ly played  upon  a  shrill  lyre,  and  with  a  soft  voice  sang  beauti- 
fully 10  the  string  ;  whilst  they,  boating  the  eailh  at  the  same 
lime,  with  singing  and  shouts  of  joy,  foUov.ed,  skipping  with 
their  feet. 


3. 

Κύμα  5'  «μφ'  ΑχιΧληα  Ιίτατο  Jiivov  x^;XiJμεvov, 
'Ροος  ί'  εν  tfaxii  iric-ων  uSsi,  ου5ε  ToJci'a'iv 
Στ•ηξιξα<ίόαι  Ειχί"  ό  (5s  έλ5  '^s^rfiv  rfTSXetiV 
Σ,υφυεα,  με^αλην  ή  ό'  ε^ιιτονσ'α  εχ  ^ιζων 
Διω^ίν  άταντα  χίημνον,  ενε<!-χΐ  δ:  hsi-'a  χαλά 
ΙΤυχινοιβΊ  ό^οιι^ιν  μιν  a-jTcv  όί  ys^j^uifcv, 
E^irowiff'  Taff'  siffui•  ό  δ'  αξ'  avoξo\J(faς  sx  λϋμν»;^, 
Tliretioai  xfaiTvoitfi  ifoft  τείιοη  τμζΐν. 
Δειράς•  ουύ'  μ.εγας  6εος  ετ'  ελη^ε,  ετ'  αν«•ον  6'  ω^το 
Αχ^οχελαινιοων,  ίνα  ιτονοιο  μιν  ταυίΐ'ίι» 
Αχιλληα  ίιον,  αλαλχ•ι  <5c  λοιπόν  Ύξωείαι. 
ATflPcutfiv  Πηλ5ΐί>;5  ό',  ftri  τ'  όβΌν  είωη  5ou<Off, 
(s)   Εχων  οιματ'  μελανό?  αιετου,  «του  ^τρ-ηττιΡος^ 
Ός  ύ'  άμα  τετίτ,ν^*  χαξτιιίτος  τί  χαι  uxiSrog. 
Ειχως  τω  ηϊ|εν•  χαλχοί  is  ίβΊ  (ίττ,Ιϋΰίι 
Κοναοΐ^εν  (fafP'SaXtciv  Xiatftleij  ίε  ίναιόα  τοιο 
Φίυ^',  ό  J'  έτίτο  μ.-χαλω  of  υμα}  5ω,  ^ίων  oritfis. 
'OtriTuxi  ό'  ΊΤύδαζχγις  δη;  Λχιλλευ^  ό^μ/](Τειε 
Ενανη^ιον  (ί^ψου,  χαι  ^Λίωμεναι,  ίΐ  a«rovref  μιν 


GREEE  SX£RCIS£St  161 

,    Φοβεο^ιίι  αί3ανα•το<,  tci  ey^ovdi  Su^uv  oy^avov, 
Mcya  χύμα  ύιί'χετΐος  τοταμοιο  Toa'Caxi  μιν 
KaouTeiJiV  '^λα(ξ'  waojir•  ό  (5'  ετηία  ίψοσ'ί  coiiiiv, 
ΛνίΛί^ων  JujUtj)•  *οταμο5  δ'  ico  ίί5αμνα  γουνατ 
AaS^oc,  i;uv  Wuiua,  ΰτίξίτίτί  ο'  κονίτ,ν  «δοιϊν. 

Terrible  round  Achilles  stood  the  swollen  water,  while  the 
wave,  lulling  upon  his  shield,  pushed  him  along-,  nor  could  he 
stendy  himself  on  his  feet.  He  seized  v/ith  his  hands  a  bloom- 
mg  large  elm  ;  it,  hawover,  faUing  from  its  roots,  threw  dov/n 
the  whole  bank,  and  checked  the  beautiful  stream  with  its 
thick  branches,  and  made  a  bridge  over  the  river,  falUng  en- 
tirely in.  Then  having  leaped  up  from  the  gulf,  he  hastened 
■to  floe  \vith  rapid  feet  tovv'ards  the  plain,  filled  with  terror. 
Not  yet,  however,  did.  the  mighty  god  desist,  but  rose  to  rush 
after  him,  blackening  over  the  surface,  that  lies,  might  cause 
the  noble  Achilles  to  cease  from  warlike  toil,  and  avert  de- 
struction from  the  Trojans.  But  Pehdes  leaped  back  as  far 
£13  a  spear-cast,  having  the  force  of  a  dark  eagle,  the  hunter- 
bird,  which  is  at  once  the  strongest  and  fleetest  of  the  winged 
race.  Like  to  this  he  rushed,  and  the  brass  rung  dreadfully 
upon  his  breast ;  but  bending  obhquely,  he  fled  from  it,  wiiile 
it,  fiowing  behind,,  followed  with  a  mighty  noise.  As  often  as 
the  swift-footed  noble  Achilles  attempted  to  stand  against  it, 
and  to  know  whether  all  the  imm.ortals  who  possess  the  wide 
heaven  put  him  to  flight,  so  often  did  a  vast  billov/  of  the  river 
tioAving  from  Jove  wash  his  shoulders  from  above  :  v\-hilst  he 
leaped  high  with  his  feet,  sorrowful  in  his  mind,  'and  the  rapid 
stream  subdued  his  knees  under  iiim,  and  forced  away  the 
sand  from  beneath  his  feet. 


Κϋλλ&*ο5ιον,  Juov  Tjxoj,  o^tfio,  αντα  γαξ  (fscsv 
Ηϊίίκομίν  OiV/jivra  Ηανίον  ίΐναι  μαχ^* 
Αλλ'  τα^;3'τα  :•?αμνν?,  «τολλι^ν  δε  φλο^'α  «iijaU'Txic. 
Eyu  αυτά?  Ζίφ^ιοιο  xaj  Νοτοιο  αργ;ίϊταο, 
ΕιύΌμα»  cfJ'cuc'a  γνΧενγ^ν  6^s\Xav  ίξ  ά.Χοΰίν, 
Ή  χίφαλα^  "ΚΙ  τίυχεα  I'^ojojv  xsv  uvo  yir,at, 
ΦοίίουΟ'α  καχον  φλε^•μα•  ffu  Ss  «αξ'  οχίας  Savi3oio 
ΚαΓ  δίνύί'ία,  εν  ο'  ίει  ιΐυξΐ  αυτόν  μηοε  -ίΤαμίταν  ffs 
Α-πΌτ^είτετω  μειλίχιοι^  ετεείίΐίν,  χα»  αξειγι' 
lVIr,5s  τεον  μίνο^  '!''^<Ί'  απΌ'ττανε•  αλλ'  ό-ιτοταν  5η 
0  2 


162  GREEK  EXERCISES. 

Eyuv  ιαχοΐιία  ^6Βγξομ\  tots  tv|  αχαματον  C^tiv. 
*Clg  ίς;αθ'•  itjp  is  ifif'ridai?  τιτυ^χετο  'II^jaitfToj. 
rijwra  μΛ  τυ?  δουίτο  £v  «-idiw,  νεχίον?  όί  χαΐ5 
Πολλου<,  οί  ^α  £(fav  άλις  χατ'  αντον,  cyg  A;;^iXX£jj  χτα*' 
IlsJiiv  iraw  6'  £^η?ανίτ),  i'Jui^  (5'  αχλαον  (f^t'TD. 
Ώδ  6'  ότ'  aXuj>jv  vioai'Js'  Βο|£»;5  οιτω^ινο^ 
Ηη^αιντ?  αιψ'  αν,  otfrig  5ί  £(3£ι^;Ί  μιν  χαΐ|ε»• 
*fij  COV  Τίίίον  εξη^ανίη,  χαί(3'  ν£χ^ο;;5  α^α 
Κϊ;£ν,  ό  is  ιτααφανοωβ'αν  φλο^α  τ^ίψ;  5^  ίΤ&τααον, 
Γίτ£λ£αι  τ£,  xa<  ίτ£σι,  r,i:  ^u^iXijy,  xaiovro, 
AcjToj  5s  τ'  χαι£το,  %δ:  ^pjov,  τ]ίη  xjceiPjv, 
Τα  τεφυχει  ΰ.}^ς  τϊ»!  χα).α  ^ί-3ξσ.  τοταμοίο• 
Εχ)<ελυε?  re,  χα»  i^JuSg  τεΡοντ',  ο*  xafa  5ιναί, 
01  ενία  χαι  ενία  x^^itf-wv  χατα  1^:3ξα  χαλά 
(?)   ΤεΡομίνοι  crvc';i  Ήφαιίτοιο  ττολυμηπο?. 

AiTso,  Vulcan,  mj'  son  ;  for  ag^ainst  thco  do  we  iloem  etl- 
(hiiig  Xiuiilius  to  be  a  fit  opponent  in  fight:  but  assist  with 
all  haste,  an>l  show  forth  abundant  flame.  In  the  mean  whilu 
I  will  go  to  excite  a  severe  storm  of  the  west  \vind  and  rapid 
souUi  from  ihc  sea,  which,  bringing  a  destructive  conflagra- 
tion, may  consume  the  heads  and  armour  of  the  Trojans. 
IBurn  thou,  however,  the  trees  along  tlie  bank•»  of  Xanihr..", 
and  send  l!iy  fire  against  himself;  nor  let  Jihn  at  air  turn  thee 
away  with  kind  words,  or  threatening:  neither  do  ihoir  pre- 
viuttsly  restrain  th}'  violence ;  but  when  I,  .shouting,  shall 
give  the  signal,  then  check  thy  unwearied  fire.  'I'hus  .*hti 
F|K)ko  ;  and  Vulcan  darted  forth  his  fierce-buniing  fire.  First 
uf  all  ho  lighted  a  fire  in  the  plain,  and  burni'd  up  the  mune- 
roua  dead,  whom  Achillo.s  slew,  ;,vhirh  were  in  h  in  vast  num- 
ber.^, luid  the  whole  plain  v.-as  dried  up,  and  the  hmpid  water 
r-strainod.  A?  when  an  autiunnal  north  wind  immediately 
diios  a  newly-wcl  garden,  while  he  njniccs,  whosoever  culti- 
vates it ;  so  w.a.5  the  whole  plain  dried  up,  and  he  cons>inicd 
the  dead  :  whereupon  he  turned  his  shining  fiame  against  the 
river.  The  elms  were  burned  np,  and  willow.^,  and  tamarisk?  ; 
tile  lotus  was  consumed,  and  rushes  and  reeds,  which  grew  in 
great  abundance  around  the  beautiful  strcanis  of  the  river. 
The  eels  and  the  fishes,  which  through  the  whirlpools,  wliich 
throucrh  the  fair  streams  dived  here  and  there,  were  fatigued, 
wearied  out  by  the  breath  of  the  various-aitificer  Vulcan. 


GREEK  exercise's,  163 

HEXAMETERS  AND  PENTAMETERS, 


1. 

Τα  δξοίίοεντα  τα  ho5a,  χαι  εκείνη  η  χαταιτνχνοζ 

ΈξννλΧος  τοις  ΈλιχωνιασΊ  χίιται, 
Ται  δί  (5ας;ν:'.ι  μίλα|Λ;;υλλοι  τιν,  Παιαν  Πυόιε' 

E.'zSi  "τΤίτ^α  Δίλφΐ5  αγΧάίΰί  couro  τοι. 
OuTof  ό'  ό  μαΧπζ  χί^αυς  τζαγας  «ίμαξίΐ  /3ωμ,ο 

T|o.yi/jv  ΕίΤ'χατον  αχ^ΐμονα  Τί^μινόου. 

Tl'iose  dewj  roses,  and  that  thick  wi!d-thyme,  nre  sacred 
to  the  Muses  of  Helicon :  Liit  the  dark-lea\'ed  laurels,  to 
thee,  Ο  Pythian  Apollo  ;  for  the  Delphian  rock  adorns  thee 
with  these.  That  white  horned  he-gOat,  which  crops  the 
lowest  twig  of  the  turpentine  tree,  shall  stain  the  altar  with 
liis  blood. 


2. 

A  Θ-Ρ(Τι  ίίιλαιί  Γ-j•  τι  "jrXc-sv  το/,  ει  κατατα^ίι^ 

Δΐ7λν;νον?  ojirog  δαχξ-^ΰι  οίΐ'Ρομενο?  ; 
Ά  ■χ\μαξος  οι^/ίται,  το  τϊχίς  χαΧον,   Eg  'Αδανοιχ; 

Αίικο?  ya^•  τξαγνς  αμς;eclaςr  -χυΧαις• 
Κ}.ο.γγίΊ'^τι  δϊ  ο.'ι  χ-^ίς'  <ri  τλί&ν  τοι,  avixa  τηνκ^ 

Or/jj^:t'jag  ουίε  λει^τίται  offrsuv  Πψξα  ; 

Ah  wretched  thou,  Ο  Thyrsis !  what  will  it  avail  thee,  if 
mourning;  thou  waste  away  both  ihy  eyes  with  tears  1  The 
younir  she-goat,  beautiful  offspring•,  is  gose  to  the  shades  ; 
for  a  fierce  wolf  seized  her  with  his  fangs.  The  dogs  are 
barking  ;  but  Avhat  will  it  avail  thee,  since  there  is  not  even 
left  thee  the  ashes  of  her  bones  1 


.1 


3. 

Ποτ'  εν  αλωϊ]  ιζαΧος  εντίωγοιν  toCij  ai/Oj 
Έίαψε  rravTO.;  του?  άταλου?  xXaoo'jj  οινη?. 

Το(Τον  ίιτοζ  α-πΊ-ε  tw  εκ  γαιτ,ζ'  κει  ρε,  κακιίτε, 
'Ημετε>ον  το  κα^ιτοφο^ον  κλημ,α  ^ναθμοι^• 

Γα?  ^ι^α  o-jtfa  εμτεϋοί:  γΧυχν  ΜΒχ-α.ξ  ταλιν  av/jO'si, 
'Otftfov  tfoi,  τ^α^ε,  όυομενω  ε'7ηα''π'ειΑ'αι. 

Once  in  a  vineyard,  the  wanton,  well-bearded  husband  of 
<he  she-goat,  de\Oured  all  the  tender  branches  of  the  vine. 


164  CHEEK  EXERCISES 

TLia  cry  issued  forth  unto  him  from  the  earih  :  ''•  Gnaw,  0 
tUest  animal,  our  fruitf-ol  branch  ;  fur  the  root  remaining 
vic-orou.?,  shall  again  yield  swcci  nectar,  suincient,  Ο  εοαΐ, 
for  a  libation  at  thy  sacrifice. 


4. 

Me  r5vra;Tr,^e»  ταιία,  έχοντα  αχ/;5ία  juftov 

ΗξΊταϋ  νηλίιηζ  'λΊδηζ,  Καλλιμαχον. 
Αλλα  μη  χλαιοΐ5  μ;    μίτίίχον  γαζ  χμ  /ίιοτϋί 

Παν|ον,  και  των  /Sioroio  xuxuv  ταύρων. 

Cruel  death  carried  off  me  Callirnachu?,  when  a  boy  n\  β 

iears  old,  possessing  a  rniod  aa  yet  untlist-uVbed  by  cares. 
)o  not  weep  for  rne  ;  for  1  pariicip-.^.tcd  in  little  of  life,  and  in 
few  ofthe  evile  of  existence. 


I.\MB1C  DIMETER  CATlLSCTlC  VEI^SE. 


1 

Τα  Θ7\ξrζ  tfj  'key;:g  μ?; 
δ'  αυ  ό  νξυγων  ajrac, 
Άλω'?'::;:  ■?  ΐμ-ας  £γ•^\ 
Ms  ωλΐίίν  ονχ'  ΐ-ττοίτ, 

Αλλο?  US  xaivog  Cr^a-cg 
βΐ:  ατ'  ομμα-ωι  /3α>^•ν. 

Thou  indoetl  dost  tell  of  the  wars  of  Thebc?,  and  ho,  on  the 
other  han(>,  of  the  loud  shouts  of  the  Piiry^ians ;  I,  however, 
of  my  own  cajitivity.  No  horse,  nor  foot  soldiery,  nor  floftt 
destroy  nic;  but  another  new  host,  woun'iing  me  froai  the 
cyos  of  the  fair. 


Ilivii  ή  μίλαινα  γη, 
Autt;v  δε  *ivfi  δ-Μδξα* 
Aujcts  β'  uaXx'fScf.  Tivs», 
Θαλα^ίαν  6'  Ό  >;λ/ο;, 
^Ιεληνη  δ'  τον  ηλιον. 
Τι,  Eroij'oi,  μαχ'^ΐ)'  μοι ; 
ΙΙ<ν(ιν  ί-λοντι  χ'  aurij  ; 


GREEK  EXEUCISnS.  165 

The  black  earth  drinks,  and  the  troes  drink  it ;  the  sea  also 
drinks  the  breezes,  and  the  sun  the  sea ;  and  the  moon  the 
sun.  "Why  do  you  contend  with  nic,  Ο  companions  !  when  1 
myself  have  also  a  mind  to  drink  1 


3.• 

Ω  y-jvaixs;.,  5jt\  Sots  μ-ci, 

H()>3  γοίξ  ΰττο  χανμ.ατϋζ 

Δ'  εχϊΐνων  δοτέ  avosojv 
Δ'  oioug  irwaPu  C-Tsipavouj 
'Πιχαι;ι  μr'J  <ra  μετο.'π'α• 
Των  (5;  ί^ωτων  το  καυμ-α, 
Τινι  dxinta.tSdu,  κ|α5ιη  ; 

Give  me,  give,  Ο  women  !  to  drink  copiously  of  Bacchus  ; 
for  now  exhausted  by  sultry  heat,  I  pant :  and  give  rne  of 
those  ί^OΛvers,  for  my  forehead  scorches  the  garlands  which  I 
vv-ear :  but,  Ο  heart !  with  what  shall  I  screen  Ihce  from  the 
ardour  of  love  'i 


4. 


Ova§  τ^οχαξίΐν  εβοχονν 
Ετ"'  ωμών  φί?ων  crf^u^ag* 
Ό  ό'  Ερω^  μολυ§5ον  έχων 
Πε^ι  TCI5  ffoiitfxois  χαλοι^ 
Εϋιωκε,  χαι  ν^χανεν. 
Τι  y'  ονα^  «το  6'  ίελει  είναι  ; 
.^Δ'  ζγωγε  ΐΤοΧΚοΐζ  ίοκεω 
ΡιΊε  τλακεντα  εν  ε^ωαΊ, 
Εν  άλλοις  ίιολίίόανίΐν, 
Συν(5ε57)ναι  ενι  τωδε. 

Ι  seemed  in  a  dream  to  run  with  speed,  bearing  wings 
upon  my  shoulders  ;  but  Love,  having  lead  round  his  beauti- 
ful little  feet,  yet  pursued  and  overtook  me.  What  does  this 
vision  mean  1  I  think  indeed,  that  I,  being  involved  in  many 
loves,  shall  escape  from  the  rest,  to  be  enfettered  l)y  this  one 
alone. 


*  In  this  and  the  following  ode,  the  first  foot  of  the  measure  is  an  ana- 
neel. 


16C  GREEK  EXTRCISEe. 


lAMSIC  TRIMETEn  ACaTALECT!•:  VuKSE. 


Ω  iT'M  Aa^rtcj,  au  μ€ν  osucpux  as 

Ko.i  vyv  OJ"^j  ii  irj  Jxr,\ais  νπν*ηϊ««ι$ 

irjvr,^  Ξτουντα  ταλαι  χαι  μίτ^ΟνμΓ.ον 
'   Τα  νίτ/αξαγ^'  ί•χ^:•/\  Xcivou,  ότω;  (5r,j, 
Ειτ'  ενϋον,  £1-'  fjx  ενδύν.     Ευ  c;  εχς:«/•'  ""' 
'P.;  τις  i-jfmg  βαη;  Aaxojv.•;;  χ.<ν:;. 
Αν»;ί  JO»  Γ^χρ^ανίΐ  α»η  fvJr^,  χα|α 
Κα»  jcoxTcvoj;  χϊξι^ζ  Ί^ξχτί  Cra^uv. 
Και  Tacraiviiv  (>'  6ΐ3'ω  Γ>:(7ύ£  ττ-,λ»}?  CuJ^ 
Efyov  ϊτ'  £?τ•ν,  ο'  ε•.ν£ίΓϊιν,  ^£»?ιν  croj 

•lb 

On  every  occasion,  Ο  son  of  Laertes,  have  I  b.;hoM  ihee 
v.-atchin!^  to  seize  some  opportunity  ngaiast  ihy  foes,  and 
now  do  I  perceive  thcc  at  iho  naval  tents  of  Ajax,  wlurc  he 
occupies  the  Ia=t  station,  ranging  for  a  long  time  back.  anJ 
exploring  with  thine  e3'c  the  fresh  iirijireidons  of  liis  steps,  m 
order  li'.at  thou  niaycst  see  wheiht-r  lie  be  within  or  absen*. 
In  good  season,  doui  as  i",  were  some  jK-^-gacious  movement  cf 
η  Spcirtan  hound  lead  theefonh  to  the  object  of  thy  search,  for 
the  Avarrior  chances  at  present  to  1  e  within,  dripping  v.iih 
Fweai  as  to  liLs  hcail  an<l  Uiurderous  Lands,  li  is  needless  fiT 
thee  any  longer  to  be  l'X)king.  within  this  entrance ;  but  declare 
wily  thou  tli-lsi  undertake  iliis  loilsoi.AC  task,  that  thou  rnayest 
Icurn  from  her  who  knows  all  tilings. 


Ω  Toj  τότε  rv  T^owt  (Τϊ-ραττ^η/ανη^ 
'  Παι  Α}•αμεμνονο5,  vuv  εξί<ί•.ι  Cci  ."χ;»ν' 

Tcii  γαξ  90  ίταλαιον  Αξγος  ού  eoifif. 


'  Λ  Dact_\l  U1  the  iluni  plac». 
*  Ad  Anjpxtit  to  the  liibt  I'laoe. 


GREEK  EXCHCI?»).  167 

AXCos  >rr,;  οιίτξοζ>.τ,^  ας  Χ':ργ]ζ  Ιναχου* 
Αντη  ο',  Ο^είτα,  του  ^εον  λι-^οκτονο-^ 
'  Auxsios  αγ(ιξα'  ooa  ο'  οΟ^  αξιίτερα;, 
Ό  xXsivos  ναο5  Ή|α5•  οι  6'  ixavojixfi', 
Φαίχίίν  ί^αν  τας  σο'Κ-οχξαΰο-ος  Μ^κηνα^•, 

Όι3εν  εκ  φόνων  carpoj  ενω  cere  .is 

Νυν  ουν,  Οξείτα,  >.«ι  Cu  ^svi^v  φίλτατί 
*  Πυλαο»:,  /3ou>>.iJT;ov  εν  τα;),^Ξ»  rj  p/pv;  ό|αν 
'P.S  r,3-/)  λαμτΡίν  tfcXa^  νλιου  vjasv 
Σοί^η  k;vc»  ε^;α  φίί^ματ'  οξ\;ι5ων, 
Ευφίονϊ)  τ'  μ.;λκινα  «tf-r^'i^  Γ/./.ίλοιτεν. 
n^iv  cuv  ε|οθ;ίίτο|ϊ(ν  ccv&jiov  civ"  Crcyr.j, 
AojOKiiv  ΙυναίΓτότονί'  ug  εμεν  ενταυΆ', 
Ίύ'  ci,;<  £7'  καιξος  szviriv,  αλλ'  αχμη  epj'cjv. 

Ο  son  of  the  Agamemnon  v?he- once,  led  ov::  forces  at  Τ1Ό3•, 
it  is  now  penrdtied  thee  lo  behold,  in  person  those  things 
which  thou  wast  alwajs  desirous  to  view;  for  this  is  the  an- 
cient Argos,  after  wIugu  thou  longest,  the  grove  of  the  gadfly- 
smitten  daughter  of  Inachus,  ami  tills,  Orestes,  the  Lvcaean 
forum  of  the  v.-olf-slajing  god  ;  wiiile  diat  edifice  on  the  left 
hand  is  the  celebrated  tuuiple  of  Juno.  But  as  regards  the 
place  to  Λvllich  we  ha\-e  cor;~.G,  say  that  tliou  bekoldeit  the 
rich  MjTencs,  and  tire  blood-stained  abode  of  the  descendants 
of  Pelops,  whence  iu  forihei•  daj-.S;  after  thy.  father's  murder, 
having  received  thee  fropi'  her  v.  ho.  was  of  the  saufic  blood 
with  thee,  and  tiiine  own  sister,  ί  bore  awa}',  and  saved,  and 
nurtured  thee,  for  an  avenger  of  the  miirder  of  thy  father. 
Nov.-  then,  Orestes,  and  thou,  Pylades,  dearest  of  strangers, 
quiciiiy  must  3OU  deliberate  what  plan  3'ou  should  purstje, 
since  already  the.  bright  beam  of  the  sun  calls  forth  in  clear 
st.-ains  for  us  the  matin  songs  of  the  birds,  and  the  gloomy 
night  arrayed  in  stars  liath  departed.  Before  then  any  one  of 
the  irihabitants  come  forth  from  beneath  his  roof,  arrange  to- 
gether your  plans,  since  we  are  here,  where  there  is  no  time 
for  delay,  but  instant  action  is  demanded. 


^  An  AnapiBsl  in  the  first  place, 

4  A  Tribrach  in  the  fourth  place. 

5  An  Anap!E£t  In  the  first  place. 


1Θ8  CHEEK   EMEr.CISES. 


3. 

Ου  ^)3ovij  Ϋ  ovv  <Γον<Γθΐ5Ί  μ; ν  η  yaf  Jci  μ£  ; 
'Λ  δ'  γ,μαοτγ,χ:  εις  εμ.\  riu.'^ ξτ,^ομ^.ι 
'    Εν  Tr,5'  τ.μίξχ  ΊίΤ^τολυτον  τα  ιτολλα  J; 
Π^οχοφαί'  ίτα^.α»,  ou  &:Ί  μί  τολλου  roveu. 
Ν IV  ^α^  -τοτ'  ελίοντα  £χ  ίομον  Πιτίδω^^, 
Es  όψιν  χαι  τ£λ-<]  ί^μνί.,;  μϋίτχ,ριων, 
Γην  Πανοιονο^,  evyivijg  ζαμαζ  νατξος 
Φαιδξα.  ιέουία,  xaTScT^srD  κα^διαν 
Δίιννι  ε»ν)•Γΐ,  coiff  /3ουλενμ«σΊ  εμοι^. 
Και  τ^ιν  e>,d-:iv  μίν  τηνί;•  Τ^ίΐ^ηνιαν  y^v 
Πα^•'  αιτ/,ν  Cer^av  Παλλαοο?,  χατοψιον 

*  TrjiJc  ^njr,  iyxadeiCaro  v«ryv  Kir^iJog 
^  Εχίϊτ,μον  ί^ωτ'  5^ω<ί'•  fci  ό'  Ίτττολυτω 

Τολν«•7Γον  ίίαν  (J^vffJai  ίμνηοΌυίιν. 

*  EffSi  Js  Θη^ϊ-α^  λϊΐτίι  Κΐχ^οτιαν  χαονκ, 
Φόυ^ων  μιχιίμα  αίματο?  ΠίχλλαντιΟων, 
Και  ίίυν  ίαμα^τι  νανί'τολϊι  τηνί;  νόονα, 

'   Λινίία^  ενια'νΐ'ιαν  ίχΟΓ,μον  φυ^ην 

Στενου^ία  δη  εντΛνϋα,  χάχΐτί'ίτλε^μίνη 

EfUTos  xivrfoib,  ατολλυ7&:ι  ή  ς-αλαιν' 

Σι^  ί)'  oi>fii  ο"  οιχότων  ξυνοιίϊ  νοβΤον. 

Αλλ'  ούτι  χ|η  τ&νυ'  £^ωτα  ταΐ/ττ)  crSffeiv• 

Π^αχμα  (5;  0»;Cii  o;i|jj,  κακφαν/,Λται. 
*■  Κ«ι  rev  μίν  τϊ^ϋχοτα  τολεμην  ν;μίν 

Πατη^  αβαιβΊν  xrivii,  «g  ϋ  Tovricj; 

Ανα|  noCsiJtJv  Θν^ίΤει  yfjaj  ucatfcv, 

Εν^αίΤ^αι  ίζ  τξις  βί^)  μηοεν  ματαιον. 

Ι  fed  no  envy,  howcvcF,  on  account  of  these  things — why 
shouM  1 1  But  I  Λνίΐΐ  punish  Hippolytus  this  day,  for  the 
oflTencos  which  he  has  commiited  against  mo.  As  I  long  ago 
brought  the  most  of  these  my  plans  to  maturity,  there  is  no 
need  now  of  much  romaining  labour.  For  Pha-dra  formerly, 
the  illustrious  wife  of  his  father,  having  seen  him  when  he 
came  from  the  abode  of  Pittiicus  to  behold  and  celebrate 


'  A  Dactyl  in  llic  I'.rst  place. 
2  Λ  DactU  ill  l]w  third  placo. 
■"  An  Aiiira.st  in  the  /ilih  placo. 
*  A  Dactyl  in  the  third  placo. 
'  An  Anai>.Tst  in  tho  first  place. 
^'  A  Dtictyl  in  the  third  place. 


onEEK  EXERCISES.  169 

the  sacred  mysteries,  was  seized  in  heart  with  X'iolent  love, 
iu  accordance  with  my  decrees.  And  ere  she  came  to  this 
Troezenian  land,  cherishing  a  passion  for  an  absent  one,  she 
founded  near  the  very  rock  of  Minerva,  a  temple  of  Venus, 
obvious  to  the  view  of  this  land  ;  and  for  the  time  to  come 
they  shall  record  in  song  that  the  tempte  of  the  goddess  was 
founded  on  account  of  Hippolytus.  But  when  Theseus  leaves, 
the  Cecropian  land,  flying  from  the  pollution  occasioned  by. 
the  blood  of  the  Pallan  tides,  and  with  his  wife,  sails  to  this 
country,  submitting  for  the  space  of  a  year  to  a  voluntary 
exile  in  a  foreign  land,  here  then,  deeply  groaning  and  wound- 
ed with  the  stings  of  love,  the  wretched  woman  pines  away 
in  silence,  nor  does  any  of  her  attendants  know  the  cause. 
This  love,  however,  shall  not  thus  be  in  vain.  I  will  disclose 
the  affair  to  Theseus,  and  it  shall  openly  display  itself.  The 
father  shall  destroy  the  son  become  hostile  to  me,  by  the  im- 
precations which  Neptune,  monarch  of  the  main,  bestowed 
as  a  gift  upon  Theseus,  that  he  should  not  thrice  fruitlessly 
ask  a  favour  of  the  god. 


DOCTRINE 

OF 

THE  MIDDLE  VOICE. 


Te  κα\ονμ(ια  μεσοτητοί  ρήματα  ηιιμτττωσιν  ανΰεζατο  ενψγίτικης  και  ταΘητικης 
ίιαβίσίωί.  Αικ)11οη.  lib.  iii.  c.  7.  • 


1. 

The  Λΐίιΐιΐΐο  Voice  in  Greek  is  so  called,  because  it  has  a 
middle  signification  between  the  Active  and  Passive  Voices, 
impl}-ing  neither  action  nor  passion  simply,  but  an  uiiion  in 
some  degree  of  both. 

2. 

IMiddle  A'erbs  may  be  divided  into  Five  Classes. 


In  mi.Mle  verbs  of  the  FIRST  CLASS,  the  action  of  the 
f  erb  is  reflected  immediately  back  upon  the  agent,  and  hetice 
verbs  of  this  class  are  exactly  equivalent  to  the  aclive  voice 
joined  with  the  accusative  of  the  reflexive  pronoun  ;  e.  g. 
λούω,  "  I  wash  another,"  λούομαι,  (i.  q.  λούω  εμαυ-ον)  "  I  wash 
myself." 

4. 

In  middle  verbs  of  the  SECOND  CLASS,  the  agent  is 
the  remote  object  of  the  action  of  the  verb,  with  reference 
to  Λνΐιοιη  it  takes  place  ;  so  that  middle  verbs  of  this  class 
arc  etpiivalent  to  the  acUvc  voice,  with  the  dative  of  the 
reflexive  pronoun,  εμαυς•^,  ΟΈαυτω,  έαυτω  :  e.  g.  αίΓίιν,  "  to  take 
up  any  tiling  for  another,  in  order  to  transfer  it  to  another  ;" 


GREEK  EXERCISES.  171 

«fi'ao'Jai.  "  to  take  up  in  order  to  keep  it  one's  self — to  transfer 
to  one's  self;"  αφαι^ειν,  "  to  take  any  thing  from  another," 
without  any  reference  to  one's  own  advantage  ;  αφαΐξ;ιΰ6αι, 
"  to  take  any  thing  from  another,  for  one's  self,  in  order  to  re- 
tain or  use  it." 


Middle  verbs  of  the  THIRD  CLASS,  express  an  action 
which  took  place  at  the  command  of  the  agent,  or  with  regard 
to  it ;  which  is  expressed  in  English  by,  "  to  cause."  In  other 
words,  this  class  may  be  said  to  signify,  "  ίο  cause  any  thing  to 
be  done ;"  e.  g.  γξοι-φω,  "  I  write ;"  ^^αφομκι,  "  I  cause  to  be 
written,  I  cause  the  name,  as  of  an  accused  person,  to  be  fiiken 
down  in  Avriting  by  the  magistrate  before  \vhom  the  process  is 
carried  ;  or  simply,  "  I  accuse." 


The  FOURTH  CLA  SS  of  middle  verbs,  includes  those 
which  denote  a  reciprocal  or  mutual  action :  e.  g.  cf'jrsvSegSai, 
"  to  make  libations  along  with  another,  to  make  mutual  liba- 
tions, i.  6.  to  make  a  league  ;"  διαΧυείίύαι,  "  to  dissolve  along 
with  another,  i.  e.  to  dissolve  by  mutual  agreement." — To  this 
class  belong  verbs  signifying  to  contract,  quaiTel,  contend,  be 
reconciled,  &c. 


^  The  FIFTH  CLASS,  comprehends  middle  verbs  of  the 
first  class,  when  folloAved  by  an  accusative  or  some  other  case  ; 
in  other  words,  it  embraces  all  those  middle  verbs  which  de- 
note an  action  reflected  back  on  the  agent  himself,  and  are  at 
the  same  time  followed  by  an  accusative  or  other  case,  which 
that  acuon  farther  regards  ;  e.  g. 


είτϊερ  αν  αυτόν 

Χευωνται  ταχεεζ  τε  κυνες,  κ.  τ.  λ.  Iliad.  Γ.  25. 

Althougii  fleet  dogs  stir  themselves  in  pursuit  of  him. 


'  Tliis  class  of  middle  verbs  is  in  fact  only  a  branch  of  the  second. 
Thus  γραφεσθαι,  "to  accuse,"  implies  for  one's  self,  i.  e.  to  gratify  one's 
love  of  justice,  or  one's  desire  of  reparation  for  injuries  received  ;  ποίεισθαι, 
"to  cause  to  be  done  (for  one's  self);"  διίασκεσθαι,  "to  cause  to  be  in- 
structed, (for  one's  self,  as  a  father  Us  son,  to  gratify  his  parental  feel- 
ings)." 


172 


GUEEK  EXERCISES. 


CO 


ε 


c  la 
c  « 


2Λ 


.-  -  ο 


ο    to  =         ο 


ε   r;  fe  ο   -i:  :^ 


>> 


1 

ο 


.  8  -"  i- 

g-g  a-8 

3   s  ^    fc- 

a.  >  >    > 

t;  <  -^  <5 


^ 


ο 

> 

ο 

α 

η 

Η 

W 

υ 

5 

>< 

δ 

ο  tJ 
0=  ο 

ν-    c3 

C 

^  §  « 

ο  >-• 

Cit!    Ci. 

ο    d  ^S 


3    -Γ 


•—ι  .ΐ5 
»  to 

^a 

to  a, 

•C    ο 

~  >.;    5  •« 

S    I-    ^- 

ο  -=:  -Ξ 

S  ο  2 

κΐ  c  s 

-  s  <y  >^ 

iz    ci   >^ 


< 


„  3 


-     „  3 

3    I    ^  S 
i  >    >    > 


to 

c 


7?    5  - 

t— 1    fj  to 


3 

< 


:   <2 


1.8- 

C  ο 
'S  u 

ο   g 


—  S  ■ 


^    V    ?> 

oi-2" 

c  !s  3 

f  J-l 

cog 

3    '^    Μ 

"II 


GREEK  EXERCISES.  173 


ρ  ^        ο 


f>  •-< 


α, 


ο 


-   rf 


G  χ  ^    ί>^  i« 


l-H  >— ( 

1— 1  t— 1 

H-<  HH  1— i 

»— ι  ΗΜ 

>—t 

•« 

a 

a 

ri. 

:i. 

a    _♦> 

^ 

cvr> 

fc•     •» 

a.  s 

|-:l 
m 

r*        ■•                           ** 

a     „ 

Μ 

ο     ο 

1  Ϊ  -  5  1 

δ 

ο 

ΐ=  b 

ν    fe 

V  5   ^- 

ϊ^  ΐ=  =vp-to    ΰ 

a   ο 

QJ5 

<  < 

<3  < 

<i  U  Η 

Η  Κ  Γ-  r  W 

Ui  '^ 

Ο 

Ι 

-Β  S 

S-4      -^ 

ο 

ci 

ither. 
down. 

S 

φ 

ο 
c 

ο  ο 

0      «3 

0 

f    .      .^ 

ο 

ci 

^ΐ 

s  - 

§  ■"§      '^ 

s 

Tj 

^  ^ 

s  0 

bo 

•-■  ΰ  0        ο 

^ 

ο      Μ 

'S    Γ§ 

,--        -^w 

^ 

ο  δ  *-" 

-ίΤ* 

© 

is 

§1 

CO     ^J 

g 
0 

ρ 

rG                    !-,       iJ       '-• 

«  &^  δ  s  rf 

iP  "   °   0   a   0 

3:     0     0     CO     0     Μ 

^  .2   fc/J  3   rt   5 

Γ3 
^    0 

73 

i  0 

Ο 
Ο 

0 

ι— ι  Η-4 

Cj    ο 

0    ci 

"Sj 

Ch  rf     ii     rf  -7^     rf 

0  ΰ 

ci 

^    0 

1— 1  "H 

ΗΗ 

'^     %H       ^       ϋ       &     0 

1— (  H-( 

C/2    =^' 

3" 

.3; 

3"     ^ 

©-  3 

ί 

•> 

a 

3 

Ρ 

a   s 

0      0 

ί^3 

ο      ^ 

3 

a 

3"  3^       :f  3^ 

CS     ~     3     l•-  Ό 

1    3-" 

b  ^ 

b    te 

ν   5 

^s! 

r-^  b  <^J3^g  a 

a   ο 

^     <vn 

<< 

<< 

<1  ί-^Η 

w  wr  rlii 

MMi^O 

P2 


in 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


«5 


'2 

3 

Ο  ^_ 


ο 


']=  HM         =i 


ο  -r. 


s  '-'  ϋ  <u 
Ξ  '^   s  ^  _ 


•Z.  2  2      is  5  <_-«  -^ 

-r"  <II  •_  '*-    -    ■-«  T•     „•_- 
02    .-3    ii    fy    — i-H    .'Λ  -— r    ο 


«22 


>>  >.  ^  '^ 

c 


ο  ο  1)  h  ::;  c 
>  en  m  ;5  ο  — 
c    ~   ~   ο   =J  ^ 


Η 

ό 

fcu 

s 

ci 

J3 

rf 

<D 

rt 

^ 

C) 

-^ 

,-^ 

r^ 

fcc 

»— 4 

^-:' 

rt 

ο 

^ 

W 

>^ 

^ 

cti 

c; 

^ 

^• 

bf 

C 

>. 

9^;   .-'gi^-sio 
"ot  i  So  ^  "^  "^ 


β   a 


CK 


§  i  s  §-  § 

°  2  =*-  S    S 

S  «  °   5  i^ 

C  i_  Π  >s  w 


5.    "  _•~  =*■ 
°   δ  a  S 

3    g   S   « 
3-  a  "o   3 

Η  ■5•  -e-  "S• 


>^ 

C 

rt 

d 

fc 

1^ 

ο 

cd 

CJ 

tn 

^ 

e5 

C 

Ρ 

rt 

sJ 

W 

•.-> 

u 

α 

ν 

ο 

rf 

>> 

ο 

ο 

Ο 

ο 

to 

ο 

C 

u 

ο 

> 

.3 

ο 

Ο 

ϋ 

Ο 

c 

Ο 
53 

■μ 

ο 
5 

ι-• 
C 

Ο 

C 

ο 

-3 

3* 
tn 

c5 

3 

Ο 

α 

ο 

C 

C 

Ο) 
Ο 

1 

Ι 

> 
CJ 

c 
a 
a 

CJ 

V.-. 

ο 
a 
."2 

ο 

«2 

-3 
cS 

3 

2 

> 

α 

to 

5 
(β 

3 

C3 

ο 

'ο 

to 

5 
•g 

ς; 

«3 

> 
'S 

•< 

OQ 

rt 

ο 

ο 

rt 

rt 

« 

Μ 

^ 

3 

α> 

"p. 

ο 

Οι 

ο 

y 

ο 

ο 

-3 

Λ 

tn 

to 

Ό 

1-4 

H-l 

»-4 

Η-( 

^^ 

^Η 

Η- 1 

Η- « 

t-K 

•-^ 

ΗΗ 

ΗΗ 

hH 

3    3 


t=;c 


5    3 


§  5  3  5  >< 

>3    ^  ^    a  ^• 

txn  '^  <\/ι  ;j    a 

C  C  C  Η  H 


5^  Α  ^  ^ 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


175 


m 

Pi 
Q 


DQ 

<i 

Ο 

Ο 
Ο 
Η 

Ο 

w 
.J 


o-^^S-g 


176 


CREEK  EXERCISES. 


i 


a. 

I-! 

£ 

'H 

'8 

a 

ο 

.^ 

«-Τ- 
ο 

_o 

00 

%s 

c 

93 

a 

ο 

<d 

2 

ο    »<  3} 


S^  .5-5 


1-    ?    X 

α,    Ο  -^ 

ω    .  -  — 
-3    ^,    G 

"  S 

'3  ,rt  ■= 


CQ      ~    ' — • 

>,  "    ο 

C    .^     ?^       . 

^  J  ^-^ 

^  £  --  ζ  5 

^  ρ  5  νΞ  2 

<Β  "   §  iS  .S  — ' 


v.  .5^0 


.2  .£  ΐ 


'Z3         a  "a    Ti   '^   ^ 


a    a    i  3 


C  "S  ~ 

-'^  3 

c  u-  ο 

^   ο  κ 


υ  ο 


-^   rf 


ο   ."    =ί 

s  ϊ*  s 

^^    Ci    Ο 


tC   ;-i     5 


.Λ  .Λ    « 

«3      «     S 


4)  .^    ο 


c   2  ^ 


(-        ο       ο       ΛΛ 


^-  S  -  f  ^0 

1  :^  -2  ο  £ 

rt  γ:  « 


^  -  s  ;;ia 


ε      Cd  trj 


ο 


-5 


^  ^  ^ 

t,     i)     u.     « 


Φ 


3 


3    ° 
a   -   «v/i  ο 

(,        ο         ^        CVjJ 


m 

> 

Ρ 
Q 


GREEK 


Ο 

Q 

m 

Ο 
CO 

Hi 

}^ 
w 


ΰ 

a 

g. 

3. 

:i. 

X 

« 

■xo 

U 

u 

ό 

s 

•^ 

β 

Cj 

nQ 

ra 

:=i 

Λ 

φ 

^ 

(μ 

ο 

Η 

tJ 

Ο 

•3 

δ 

CQ 

^.^ 

> 

W 

C) 

> 

t- 

0 

^ 

Q;> 

Η 

Π 

s 

υ 

cS 

•c 

•«! 

s 

s» 

^ 

li 

<  <\ 


a. 

ο 

a 


ο 

0 

0 

S 

0 

V- 

s 

0 

s_i 

0 

0 

**■' 

<u 

CO 

C    03 

Λ 

ο 

Si 

Gi     0 

ν 

J3  'ZS 

ο 

ο 

^ 

•tJ  % 

σ 

> 

0  a 

0 

G 

0   g 

->-> 

^ 

0 

δ 

ο 

0 

•a 

% 

'0 
0 

3 
Θ- 

a 


3    3" 

^   Θ- 

3^ 
3 

a   5 
<  <1 

X 

17S 


CREEK  EXERCISES. 


11. 

EXAMPLES  OF  THE  FOURTH  CLAS3  OF 
MIDDLE  VERBS. 


'Λμιλλαβ'ϋαι, 

BouXe'jEiiJai, 

Διαχοντιξεο'ίαι, 

Δ»αλ5χ;ίΤίαι, 

AtaXkaTTSddou, 

ΔιαλυεοΊ}αι, 


Διαξιφι^Εί^αι, 
Δια'τληκηξίΟ'^αΐ, 

'  Δια•7£ΐν£(3Ό'αι, 

Δίατοξίοεί^αι, 

Eifi'^MTi&stfdai, 
Καταλυ£(}'(}αι 


KoivoXoyfitfoai, 

Κ^ιν£ί()αι, 

Αο'ρζβδύαί, 


Το  contend  tog-ether.  • 

To  skirniish  together. 

To  contend  together. 

To  deliberate  together  with  another  or 
with  one's  own  self. 

To  throw  darts  at  one  another. 

To  converse  together. 

To  become  reconciled  with  one  an- 
other. 

To  di.-solve  a  contest  between  one  an- 
other, to  become  reconciled  toge- 
ther. 

To  combat  together  with  the  sword. 

To  smite  one  another. 

To  stretch  across  together,  to  contend 
together. 

To  contend  together  in  using  the  bow. 

To  reflect  together  with  one's  self,  to 
pontler  in  one's  own  mind. 

To  deposit  \\-ith  another. 

To  di.^solve  a  contest  between  one  an- 
otlier,  to  become  reconciled  toge- 
ther. 

To  commune  together. 

To  contend  together.  ■ 

To  reflect  together  with  one's  self,  to 
deliberate  in  one's  own  mind. 


>  Thid  verl)  is  more  frrquontly  found  with  the  signilication  of  the  first 
cla.'«a,  as  harttviaOat,  td  cxiTt  one's  .self,  to  urge. 

'  The  various  meanings  of  tliis  verl),  and  the  connexion  suhsisting  hc- 
twtvii  ihem,  are  worthy  of  the  student's  notiee.  'I'luis,  κ^ινω,  I  ^tpariiie, 
I  e«'|iar.ite  the  various  partieulars  of  a  case,  1  consider  tlieni  seiwralely,  I 
jMisa  iin  i>|>inion  u|K)n  tlieni,  I  jtitl^e,  I  comleriin:  κρίνομαι,  I  separate  niy- 
eelf,  I  wjiarate  niyiu'if  in  Imltli•  tron>  otliers,  (for  example),  I  distinguish 
niyscif  in  haltle,  i.  e.  I  βι^ΙιΙ  strenuously,  &c.  Vid.  αιτοίρπω,  ill  the  cx- 
aui]>los  of  the  llrnt  clues  of  middle  verU•. 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


179 


ΜαξνΒίίύαι, 

ΣίΓονδο'ίΌι£ι3'<)αι, 
Σ-.νΓίόϊίόαι, 


To  revile  one  another. 
To  contend  together. 

η  ))  53 

To  make  (peace)  together. 
To  make  hbations  together,  to  make  a 
mutual  treaty. 

))  »  Η 

To  agree  together. 


12. 


EXAMPLES  OF  THE  FIFTH  CLASS  OF 
MIDDLE  ΛΈΕΒδ. 


Ανκμναίίίαι  τι, 

A'l'oousCiai  τι, 

EvSustfdai  τ;, 
Kii|ei(ia»  κομην, 
Ko'iTTStf^ai  τίνα, 
AoDStfiiai  ίωμα, 
Λυίίίίαι  ^ωνην, 
Mvacdai  τι, 
?ν  i-TTScTOai  χΒίξας, 
Οξεγΐαύαι  τι, 
Us^aio-oduai  τοταμον, 

ΣτεοανουίΤίαι  κεφαλήν, 
Στ-φεΰίαι  κεφαλήν, 
ΦοξϊΚίίαι  τ;, 
Φϋλαττ2<τ3ϋΐι  τι, 


Το  recall  any  thing  to  one's  own  re- 
collection. 

To  strip  any  thing  oil  one's  self. 

To  wash  one's  own  hands. 

To  put  any  thing  on  one's  self. 

To  cut  one's  own  hair. 

To  mourn  for  a  person. 

To  Λvash  one's  own  body.  . 

To  loosen  one's  own  gii'dle 

(See  ανοψ-ναΰβαι.) 

(See  (xwovcTrTsrfdai.) 

To  desire  any  thing. 

To  ferr}^  one's  self  across  a  river,  to 
cross  a  river. 

To  croAvn  one's  own  head. 

!)  J)  ) 

To  fear  any  thing. 

To  guard  one's  self  against  any  thing, 

to  be  on  one's  guard  against  any 

thino•. 


3  This  verb  is  very  rarely  found  with  the  signification  of  this  ckss  oi 
middle  verbs,  but  almost  always  with  that  of  the  second. 


ΙβΟ  GREEK  EXERCISES. 

REMARKS 

ON  THE 

7Ea:ses  of  the  middle  voice. 


1. 

The  proper  signification  of  the  Middle  Voice  is  most  appa- 
rent, as  has  been  remarked,  in  the  Aorists,  especially  the  first. 
In  the  present  and  imperfect  the  distmction  betΛ\•een  the  pas- 
sive and  mitldle  voices  is  often  indeterminate,  as  the  form  in 
both  is  exactly  the  same. 

2. 

The  future  middle  has  usually  the  sense  of  the  active,  also 
sometimes  of  the  passive.  The  future  passive,  on  the  contra- 
ry, has  seldom  if  ever  the  signification  of  the  middle. 


In  many  verbs  the  aorist  passive  has  also  a  middle  signifi- 
cation ;  as  xaTakXivHtfoai,  Mid.  to  lay  one^s  self  clown  ;  xarsxXi- 
όην,  /  laid  myself  down  :  αΊΤαΧΚαττεΰόαι,  Mid.  ίο  depart,  {send 
one's  self  away)  :  ατηλλαχην,  /  departed.  The  same  holds 
good  in  irf^aiou,  φοβίω,  Teidw,  χοιμαω,  ο^β^ω,   ατοχ^ινω,   αίχω, 

4. 

In  such  verbs  as  those,  where  the  aorist  passive  has  a  mid- 
dle signification,  the  aorist  middle  is  generally  obsolete  or  rare. 
Sometimes,  however,  it  has  one  of  the  significations  of  the 
verb  appropriated  to  itself,  and  the  passive  aorist  another. 
Tl^is,  tlie  aorist  passive  ίς-αληναι,  is  attached  with  the  medial 
si,gnificatiun  to  dTsKksdiai,  to  journey  ;  whereas  cfTEiXaffuai,  the 
proper  aorist  middle,  belongs  only  to  (Ττβλλίίόαι,  ίο  clothe  ons^s 
eelf,  or  send  for. 

5. 

The  perfect  middle  is  called  by  the  grammarians  of  the 
present  day,  the  second  perfect  active.  They  maintain  that 
k  novcr  has  the  signification  of  the  middle,  but  ahva3's  that 
of  the  active  voice  ;  and  that  this  signification  is  an  intranei- 


GREEK  EXERCISES. 


181 


live  one.  This  d'^^trine  does  not  appear  to  be  well  founded. 
That  in  some  verbs  we  find  the  perfect  middle  supplying 
the  place  of  the  perfect  active,  is  readily  admitted  ;  as,  εκτονα, 
αχηχοα,  εί'πΌξα,  λελοιτα,  <ηε:ρυγοι,  οιία,  ιε-τονΰα,  τΐτολα,  είτο^^α. 
ίη  these  verbs,  however,  the  perfect  active  is  obsolete  on. 
account  of  euphony,  and  therefore,  it  is  conceived,  no  argu- 
ment v/hateyer  can  be  deduced  from  the  use  of  these  middle 
perfects,  which  can  have  a  bearing  on  the  present  quesiion.7 
In  the  case  of  other  verbs,  the  peculiar  meaning  of  the  perfect 
middle  may  easily  be  recognized.  The  following  examples 
will  serve  to  illustrate  this  remark  :  to  understand  the  mode  in 
which  the  last  meaning  is  obtained,  the  student  must  bear  in 
mind  merelj-  the  peculiar  force  of  the  perfect  tense  of  the  verb, 
in  all  the  voices  ;  viz.  its  reference  to  an  action  already  done, 
but  continued  in  its  relations  and  consequences  to  the  present 
time,  in  other  words,  its  reference  to  continued  action,     .    ' 


AyvuiAi,  I  break. 
Αν•ο;^ω,  I  open. 

E/Si^w,  I  waken. 
ΕλίΤΜ,  I  give  hope. 
Ολλυμι,  I  destroy. 
Πείθω,  I  persuade. 


EXAMPLES, 

Perf  middle,  zu.ya.,  I  have  caused  my- 
self to  be  broken,  (by  not  offering, 
for  example,  sufficient  resistance,) 
and  I  continue  broken,  i.  e.  /  arti 
broken.  \ 

Perf  middle,  ανεω/α,  I  have  caused 
myself  to  be  stood  open,  (speaking, 
for  example,  of  a  door  wliich  does 
not  offer  sufficient  resistance  in  re- 
maining shut,)  and  I  continue  open, 
i.  e.  I  stand  open. 

Perf  middle,  εγξνιγοξοι.,  I  have  wakened 
mj'self  and  continue  awake,  i.  e.  I 
am  aivake. 

Perf  middle,  εολ-τα,  I  have  given  my- 
self hopes,  and  I  continue  in  hopes, 
i.  e.  /  hope. 

Perf  middle,  ολωλα,  I  have  destroyed, 
ruined  myself,  and  ί  continue  ruined, 
i.  e.  I  am  undone. 

Perf  niiddle,  ίτειτοι^α,  I  have  persuaded 
myself  and  I  continue  persuaded, 
i.  e.  I  rely  upon,  trust,  confide,  (in 

α 


162 


CHEEK  EXERCISES. 


another,  for  example,  in  whose  argu- 
ments or  assertions  I  have  persuaded 
myself  lo  acquiesce,  or  whose  wishes 
or  commands  I  have  persuaded  my- 
self to  obey.)  I 

Πηχνυμ*,  I  fix.  Peif  middle,  •χ'.'τψ/α,  I  have  fixed  my- 

self and  continue  fixed,  i.  e.  I  am 
fixed. 

ϋ^αο'β'ω,  I  do.  Perf.  middle,  •:ηκξαγα,  I  have  caused 

myself  to  do,  I  have  acted  in  such  a 
way  as  to  do ;  ffSir^aya  χαΧως,  I  have 
caused  m3'self  to  do  weU,  I  have 
acted  in  such  a  \va.y  as  to  do  well, 
and  I  continue  doing  well,  i.  e.  /  do 
well,  I  am  fortunate,  or  prosperous. 

Φαινι*,  I  show.  Perf.  middle,  *εφηνα,  I  have  shown  my- 

self and  continue  shown,  i.  e.  I  appear. 

Mevcj,  I  remain.  Perf  middle,  μίμονα,  I  have  caused  my- 

self to  remain,  and  1  coutinue  remain- 
ing, i.  e.  /  persevere — (stronger  in  its 
meaning  than  the  perfect  active, 
μίμενηχα,  which  signifies  simply,  / 
have  remained.) 

The  list  might  be  still  farther  extended,  but  a  sufficient 
number  of  examples  have  been  cited,  it  is  conceived,  to  show 
that  the  perfect  middle,  in  numerous  instances,  has  the  true 
signification  of  its  voice ;  and  to  make  it  fully  ai)parcnt,  how 
very  unphilosophical  it  is,  and  how  much  at  variance  with  the 
principles  of  the  language,  to  maintain  that  the  perfect  middle 
ia  nierely  neuter  in  its  signification,  when  that  very  neuter 
meaning  can  only  be  deduced  from,  and  is  in  fact  based  upon 
the  peculiar  meaning  of  the  middle  voice. 


6. 

The  perfect  and  pluperfect  passive  are  sometimes  used  in  a 
middle  sense.  This  is  the  case  when  the  conesponding  mid- 
dltt  tenses  are  either  obsolete  or  used  for  those  of  the  active 
voice.     Vid.  page  181. 


STATEMENT  OF  SOME  OPINIONS 


.RESPECTING  THE 


GREEK  ACCENT. 


(From  the  Museum  Criticum,  No.  5,  pp.  65—  69.) 


The  question  respecting  Ihe  pronnnciation  of  the  Greek 
language  has  divided  itself  into  two  distinct  parts  ;  one  relating 
to  the  sound  of  the  νοΛνεΙβ,  diphthongs,  and  consonants  ;  the 
other  referring  to  the  manner  which  should  be  adopted  in  the 
prolation  of  words  Avith  a  proper  regard  to  accent.  In  the 
controversy  which  arose  on  the  former  part  of  the  subject, 
many  scholars  of  the  continent  Λvere  engaged :  among  our 
own  countrymen,  Bishop  Gardiner,  Professor  Cheke,  and  Sir 
T.  Smith,  took  the  most  active  part.  The  diversity  of  opinion 
which  has  been  entertained  on  the  expediency  or  inutility  of 
attending  to  the  information  pointed  out  by  the  Greek  accents, 
has  produced  many  treatises.  The  works  of  Primatt,  Gaily, 
Foster,  Horsley,  and  Mitford,  are  those  of  our  own  couniiy, 
which  contain  the  most  detailed  information  on  the  subject. 

It  is  probable,  that  on  neither  one  nor  the  other  of  these 
questions  will  the  learned  world  ever  come  to  an  entire  agree- 
ment ;  accents  will  still  be  considered  by  many,  "  mute  and 
unmeaning  marks" — (Gibbon)  :  nor  will  the  most  strenuous 
advocates  for  the  use  of  them  either  understand  clearly,  or  be 
able  to  explain  to  others  satisfactorily,  "  that  secret  power  of 
harmony  and  tone,"'  which  was  so  pleasing  to  the  ear  of  a 
Greek.  With  respect  to  the  pronunciation  of  the  letters  of  the 
language,  the  various  nations  of  Europe  diifer  from  each  other, 

» Milton. 


Id-i  GREEK  EXERCISES. 

and  all  (Jifler  in  a  greater  or  less  degree  from  the  right  mode. 
In  England,  wc  arc  almost  singular  m  the  erroneous  and  \-i- 
tiated  pronunciation  of  some  It-uers :  '•  Wc  EngUshmen," 
Bays  Milton,  in  his  'IVactate  on  Education,  "  being  northerly 
do  not  open  our  niou{h  in  the  colj  air  wide  enough  to  grace 
a  southern  tongue." — Scaligcr  was  once  complimented  by  an 
Irishman  in  Latin,  but  the  sound  of  the  words  was  so  unlike 
any  tiling  to  which  the  ears  of  that  scholar  Lad  been  accus- 
tomed, that  he  supposed  the  stranger  was  arldrcssing  him  in 
his  native  idiom  ;  luVd  in  answer  to  liis  address,  he  replied — 
Doviine.  non  i.itci^igu  Irlundke.  If  it  coidd  be  pjssible  to  cite 
the  best  Echoitxr.3  in  Europe  before  the  ΙΙλίκια  at  Athens,  or 
the  assembled  senate  of  Rome,  we  suspect  that  few  entire 
sentences  of  a  pleading  of  Isreiis,  or  a  A'errine  oration,  would 
be  so  spoken  by  them,  as  to  be  comprehended  by  their  audi- 
ence.— These  questions  must,  from  the  nature  of  them,  con- 
tinue to  be  involved  in  doubt  and  obscurity  ;  and  although 
some  hghl  may  be  tlirown  upon  them  from  what  Ave  find  ia 
Dionysius  of  Hahcarnassus,  and  giammarians  and  scholiasts, 
yet  there  will  be  many  things,  which,  to  use  the  words  of 
Sanctius,_/i/^;cH/  nos:ras  avrcs. 

The  first  opponent  of  the  propriety  of  accents  was  Isaac 
Vossius  ;  for  it  does  not  appear  that  Scaliger  doubted  whe- 
ther these  virgula  were  properly  placed,  as  we  find  them  ; 
he  ob.served  only,  that  if  the  nice  tonical  pronunciation  of 
the  ancients  could  be  expresscil  by  a  moilern,  it  would  be 
disagreeable  to  our  ears — (Foster).  But  Vossius  questioned 
their  situation  upon  the  words,  and  thinking  them  inconsis- 
»•ίοηΐ  with  the  short  syllable?,  he  removed  them  to  those  v.-hich 
were  long. 

It  has  been  remarked,  that  in  examining  the  question  con- 
cerning the  use  of  accents,  we  ought  to  attend  to  the  testi- 
monies which  the  ancients  themselves  atTord,  for  they  alone 
are  competent  to  give  propia•  evidence  on  the  subject.  Did 
they,  then,  consider  them  as  opposed  to  quantity  1  The  de- 
fenders of  the  accents  answer  in  the  negative  ;  for  quantity  is 
the  foundation  on  which  the  accentual  system  stands  ;  it  is 
the  circumstance  which  tiie  most  general  rules  for  the  scat,  or 
species  of  accent,  regard — (llors.  39).  "  The  ancient  Attics, 
eays  Eustathius,  (Od.  H.  p.  2S4),  made  the  final  a  of  such 
words  long  ;  wficrc/ure  they  acutcd  their  penultima,  and  said 
riyvoia" — (Foster,  339). 

The  opjxjnents  of  the  accents  say,  that  in  the  time  of 
Aristophanes  the  graimnarian,  and  his  immediate  successors, 


GREEK  EXERCISES.  1S5 

they  were  placed  according  to  quantity  ;  but  that  afterwards, 
the  grammarians  departed  from  that  system,  used  tliem  in  a 
different  manner,  and  assigned  to  them  their  actual  position. 
Vossius  contended,  that  until  tiie  time  of  Antoninus  and 
Comraodas,  and  indeed  to  the  seventh  centurj^,  accents  and 
quantity  agreed  ;  and  that  the  marks  Λvere  employed  for 
instruction  in  metre.  But  the  observations  of  iElius  Diony- 
sius,  Apollonius,  Herodian,  and  other  critics  of  the  time  of 
Hadrian,  show  that  they  read  their  copies  of  the  ancient 
writers  by  the  same  visible  notation  of  accent  which  was 
used  by  the  grammarians  of  Alexandria  ;  and  the  scholiasts 
and  commentators  of  subsequent  ages  to  the  times  of  Eus- 
tathius,  Lascaris,  Gaza,  agree  Avilh  those  who  preceded  them. 
The  chain  of  evidence  on  this  part  of  the  subject  is  unbroken. 

Bishop  Horsley  endeavoured  to  show,  that  the  accentual 
sj'stem,  as  handed  do\vn  to  us,  was  not  phonetical  merely, 
before  the  time  of  Aristophanes,  but  was  a  written  notation 
used  in  Greece.  The  decision  of  this  point  does  not  appear 
very  important.  If  it  be  asked  why  accents  were  not  used 
in  writing,  as  in  pronunciation,  before  the  time  of  the  Alex- 
andrian critics,  a  visible  notation,  it  is  answered,  was  not 
wanted :  this  was  necessary  at  Alexandria,  not  at  Athens  ; 
it  was  of  use  to  strangers  and  the  children  of  strangers  leani- 
ing  Greek,  but  not  to  those  Λνΐιο  were  acquainted  with  it  as 
a  vernacular  idiom.  Mr.  Blomfield  has  observed,  that  in 
the  Venetian  Scholia,  when  mention  is  made  of  the  gram- 
marians who  succeeded  Aristophanes,  they  are  said  to  use 
the  accentual  marks  ;  but  that  nothing  of  the  kind  is  stated, 
when  the  names  of  those  who  li\'ed  before  him  are  referred 
to :  and  this,  he  adds,  is  a  strong  presumptive  proof  in  favour 
of  the  common  opinion,  which  ascribes  the  first  introduction  of 
them  to  that,  grammarian. 

But  accent  (■jr^orfwiia),  it  is  said,  had  a  reference  to  music 
only  :  it  is  defined,  τόνο?  *foi  ov  άίομεν. — This,  it  was  replied, 
is  only  one  part  of  the  definition ;  the  other  adds,  και  <τους 
Xoyous  ιτοιούμε^α,  which  extends  it  to  reading  and  speaking.^ 
Dionj'sius  also,  when  he  mentions  the  constituent  parts  of 
perfect  writing  or  speaking,  uses  the  Avords,  τάΰΐΐς  φων^?,  ai 
καλούμενα»,  cr^ οο'ωδίαι,  διάφοροι,  "  different  tones  of  voice  that 
are  called  accents." — They  were  musical  marks. — Ans.  This 
is  not  true  ;  music  had  its  own  marks,  namely,  characters 


a  Foster,  p.  6. 

a2 


186  GREEK  EXERCISES. 

formrJ  from  alphabetical  letters.  (Hors.  37). — They  were 
metriral  marks. — ./iijs.  duantity  bad  its  own  separate  marks. 
The  literary  researches  which  are  now  aciivcly  carried 
on  at  Naples,  will  inform  the  learned  world  whether  the 
virgulre  are  observable  in  the  Uerculanean  AISS.  A'illoi- 
Bon,^  on  the  authority  of  Winkelrnann,  quotes  the  word 
OTKOTN,  from  the  treatise  of  Phuodemus  en  Rhetoric,  as 
having•  accents.  They  have  been  seeii  on  no  in.<?cription  of 
the  cursive  character,  of  old  date  ;  for  that  which  was  said  to 
have  been  discovered  on  a  Vv^all  at  Ilerculaneum,  is  now  con- 
sidered by  the  best  scholars  on  the  confinent  as  rpurious.  In 
the  following  words,  Avhich  we  give  from  Gruler,  we  fmd  a 
rare  instance  of  an  accented  inscription  in  uncial  letters  : — 

λιλιΊμω.χ 

ΠΡΟΜϋΙΓΟΣ 

ΝΩΣΛΣ. 

Varionan  Corrigenda,  cccxlvii. 

That  the  want  of  a  visible  notalion  of  them  might  sonic- 
times  lead  to  a  misapprehension  of  a  passage  in  the  ancient 
writers,  is  evident  from  the  "instances  quoted  by  H.  Siopha- 
nus,  of  the  confusion  of  Λα^αλών,  cWiaXuv,  ίία^ολών,  in  a  pa"^- 
sage  of  Plato — (Fo.sfer,  341).  Origen,  we  arc  told,  read  the 
words  0ΤΛΙΣ01ΧΩΓΑΖΙΝ  as  if  they  meant,  "  ΛΥοο  to  thee, 
land  of  Zin,"  instead  of  "  W^oe  to  thee,  Chorazin."  We  may 
add,  that  Jerome  confoundeil  a^voj  and  «^vrcr,  "and  under- 
ftood  by  ΚΑΘΑΙΓΚί,  .sH/ar/Zi/,  (xadaijEr),  wliL^n  the  meaning 
of  the  passage  requires  xftJai^et,  imundav't. — (G.  AOssiu.•!,  De 
A.  G.  L.  2.  c.  8). 

It  Avas  contended  by  those  Λνΐιο  assertctl  that  accent  affect- 
ed the  syllable  over  which  it  avjis  placed,  that  the  scholiast 
on  Hcpha'.siion  quotes  thi.s  line  of  Homer  in-the  12ih  Iliad, 
and  adds,  thai  the  acute  in  ojiv  lengthens  the  first  syllable. 

Τ^ώ£5  ο'  fjj;iyr)(7av,  iVsi  TJov  μίόλον  o^iv — 

and  that  Eustaihius,  on  the  line  (Od.  K.  v.  60),  B^v  sip  Λΐόλου 
χλυτά  ίώματα,  ^nys,  there  is  a  violation  of  the  metre,  of  which 
the  acute  in  A/jXou  is  to  be  the  de^airs/a,  the  restorative  re• 

TroUg.  !>.  11. 


GREEK  EXERCISES.  •  187 

medy.  (Foster's  Reply,  38).— ^/is.  The  scholiast's  expla- 
nation is  Avrong-,  upon  this  principle  ;  that  If  accent  had 
made  any  part  of  the  doctrine  of  quantit}^,  ''  is  strang-e  that 
Hephies'ijn,  professing  to  treat  on  the  uitter,  should  not 
have  mcmioned  the  former  in  the  course  of  his  work — 
(Ilorsley,  137).  With  respect  to  Eustathius,  it  appears,  says 
Foster,  that  he  was  far  from  being  satisfied  \v'\(h.  his  own 
explanation.  The  two.  Avords  were  probably  pronounced 
ο-τφ^ν,  AiojXou.  The  reader  will  fiml  in  Pvir.  Gaisford's  Hcphces- 
lion,  two  passages,  cited  from  EiL^taihius  and  Scaliger,  res- 
pecting the  firstof  these  word3-^-(pp.  181,  182). 

In  examining  the  >vork  of  Dr.  Gaily  we  may  remark, 
that  a  great  part  of  it  is  irrelevant  to  the  discussion  of  the 
question  between  himself  and  Dr.  Foster  ;  for  he  observes 
towards  the  end  of  if,  tiiat  his  chief  object  was  to  show, 
'•  that  the  Greek  language  cannot  be  prouQunced  according 
to  qccent,  i.  e.  according  to  that  actite  accent  wlilch  we 
use,  witiiont  spoiling  the  quantit}•."  This  w'ould  be  readily 
conceded  by  every  one  v.dio  lias  attended  to  the  first  prin- 
ciples of  the  question  ;  becaiise,  in  our  own, language,  quan- 
tity and  accents  usually  go  together  ;  "  the  longest  syllable 
in  almost  every  word,  being; that. .on -which  the  accent  falls." 
(Hors.p.  4).  Dr.  Gaily  should  have  sho,wn  that  they  were 
not  separated,  nor  separable  jn  the  Greek  language-! — If,  as 
he  asserted,  eleva.tion  necessarily  implied  prolongation,  some 
one  of  the  sjdlables  ίη•λϊ7?,  X-sj'Srtj.Xs^'Oiasva,  must  be  long; 
the  acute  must  be  placed  on  one  of  them  ;  but  which  would 
be  length3ned  ? — (Foster,  25,5;.  - 

The  prejudice  against  dip  Greek  accents.  (; he  defenders 
of  theni  rentiark)  seems  to  •havc'ansen  from  sui'-posmg  that, 
because  in  most  modern;  laiTguage's,  a  long  lime  is  com- 
monly conuec  led  with  elevation  of  λ;οϊοο,  they  w^ere  neces- 
sarily connected  in  tJie  lan.£>^;ages  of  Greece  and  Rome. 
'■  You  are  deceived,"  ■  says  ,  idelancihon,  "if  j^ou  ^^J  that 
acute  and  long,  or  grave  and  short,  are  the  same.  The  ge- 
nerality of  grammarian.s  are  apt  to  blunder  wretchedly  in 
this  aftair.  ΑΠ  long  syllables  are  not  acuied  :  in'  Virg-ilhis, 
Vir  is  lona",  but  not  acuted  ;  nor  are  all  acuted  s^yllables 
long;  in  VirgiHuSy  gi  is  acuted,  though  short."— (Foster. 
120).  The  distinction  between  accent  and  Vjuantity,  in 
Greek,  as  well  as  their  vise  in  ordinary  pronunciation  and 
discourse,  are  pointed  out  by  Dionjsius  in  the  following 
passage  : — "  When  we  are  taught  our  letters,  we  first  learn 
their  names,  then  their  forms  and  powers  ; — after  this,"  he 


188  CKEEK  EXERCISES. 

addi?,  "  we  proceed  to  whole  words,  with  their  particular 
modes  and  qualities  :  I  mean  the  length  and  shortness  of 
them,  and  their  accmts. — (Foster,  160). 

In  answer  to  a  question  asked  bj  Dr.  G.,  whether  an 
acute  accent  may  be  sounded  in  such  a  manner,  as  will  not 
make  the  short  syllable  on  which  it  is  laid  appear  long  ? — ■ 
Dr.  F.  replied,  that  he  Avoiild  elevate  and  shorten  the  pe- 
nultimate of  χυ^ίου  in  the  judgment  of  any  c»r  that  can  dis- 
tinguish a  high  from  a  low  tone,  in  as  easj'  and  discernible 
a  manner  as  he  could  shorten  the  gra\'e  pcnullima  of  maxi- 
mos.  He  quoted  Cheke's  words,  who  said  that  many  of  his 
Greek  scholars  were  capable  of  expressing  the  true  sound 
of  the  letters,  their  quantit}',  their  accent,  Avith  great  ease. 
He  had  already  referred  to  the  words  of  Michaelis,  who 
approved  of  the  opinion  of  Gesner,  "  that  the  accents  do 
not  at  all  determine  which  S3'llable  is  to  be  pronounced 
longest ;  that  the  accent  for  instance  οΐ  ανίξωητος  being  placed 
on  the  first  syllable,  doth  not  oblige  us  Jo  pronounce  the 
wor<l  as  a  dactyl :  thus,  as  the  Greeks  spoke  somewhat 
more  musically  than  we,  they  pronotmced  some  syllables 
more  distinctly  than  others  ;  they  raised  their  tone  and  drop- 
ped it  ;  and  the  accents  are  evidences  of  this."  The  learned 
translator  of  Michaelis  was  informed  by  Professor  Reiz,  that 
he  had  frequently  heard  Eugenius,  a  Greek  priest,  after- 
wards Archbishop  of  Clierson,  read  Greek  verse,  and  that  he 
marked  by  his  proniuiciation  both  accent  and  quantity.— 
J\Iurs/i's  Mich.,  vol.  2,  p.  901. 

It  is  to  be  regretted  that  some  of  those  eminent  scholars 
who  were  well  qualified  to  treat  this  subject  \vith  great 
accuracy  and  clearness,  have  only  left  us  a  few  remarks 
upon  it.  Eentlcy  uses  the  words,  Rntio  hodie  prcrposicra 
atfjue  perversa  Grcecorum  acccntnum. — (Epist.  ad  Miluum,  p. 
S2).  He  seems  to  have  thought  with  Dawes,  that  the  use 
of  them  now  would  be  wrong,  because  it  would  be  difficult 
to  aji])ly  them  without  vitiating  the  t[uantity  of  the  syllables. 
Bui  whatever  Avas  his  opinion  in  the  passage  we  have  cited, 
in  a  later  work,  as  Foster  remarks,  written  professedly  on 
Metre  and  Rhythm,  {de  Terenl.  metris,)  he  considers  the 
Greek  accents  as  differing  from  the  Lathi,  Avithoul  hinting 
the  least  suspicion  of  their  present  visible  sj-stem  being  vicious 
or  corrupted. 

Valckenaer  allowed  that  ihey  Averc  to  be  used,  as  being 
necessary  to  "  deti-rminea  diversity  of  signification  in  words," 
but  was  of  opinion  that  no  one  verse  of  a  poet,  or  sentence 


GREEK  EXERCISES.  189 

of  an  orator,  should  be  read  according  to  them. — Vid.  Dawes. 
JMisc.  Crit.  edit.  Burgess,  p.  369. 

D'Orville  thought  they  were  foniicrly  used,  non  quantiiatis 
indicandcs  causa,  sed  ad  proniuiliationcm  ct  rytJanum  regendum, 
Crit.  Vann.  p.  333. 

The  remarks  of  Gerard  Yospius  (c.  10,  \.  2,  de  A.  G.) 
show  that  he  thought  the  Romans  shortened  and  sharperied 
the  penuhimate  of  calefacis,  tepcfaciSy  saying  χαλεφκκι?,  ts-its• 
φάχις,  but  that  the- moderns  either  pronounce  χαλεφακι?,  'rs'irs- 
(paxij,  or  καλεφαχι?,  τειτέφ^'χΐζ  ;  similar  errors,  he  says,  pervade 
our  pronunciation,  of  Greek.  Jludic  guisquis  Podce  aUcujus 
versus  recital,  aut  accentus  tanium  rationem  habet,  aut  solum  quan- 
tiiatis. Veteres,  vae  judice,  longe  aliter,  qui  uiriusque  rationem 
habehant.. 

Markland,  in  a  letter  to  Dr.  Taylor,  thinks  they  ΛνοΓβ 
designed  by  those  who  left  Greece  to  settle  in  a  nation  of  a  dif- 
ferent tongue,  and  were  desirous  that  their  children  or  succes- 
sors should  continue  in  the  knowledge  or  use  of  speaking  the 
Greek  language. 

Those  who  have  directed  their  attention  to  the  subject  of 
accent,  cannot  have  forgotten  the  two  remarks  m.ade  by  one  of 
the  most  judicious  and  accurate  scholars  of  modern  times  : — - 
Ου,  the  negative  particle,  vv^as  pronounced,  in  the  age  of  Aris- 
totle, οξυτόνω?,  but  we  never  find  it  acuted  in  the  middle  of  a 
sentence  :  again,  the  same  particle  ou,  and  the  adverb  w,  aspe- 
rate and  circumfiexed,  were  confounded  in  pronunciation  in 
.Aristotle's  time. — {Tyrwhitt  in  Aristot.  Poet.  sec.  46).  As 
nothing  can  be  collected  from  the  treatises  on  accent  which  we 
have  examined,  we  should  be  glad  to  see  some  solution  of 
these  difficulties. 

If,  after  all  that  has  been  written,  we  might  venture  to  offer 
an  opinion,  we  .should  say  that  the  pronunciation,  according 
to  the  marks  invented  by  Aristophanes,  was  attended  to  by 
the  Alexandrians  and  their  successors  ;  that  a  gradual  abuse 
of  the  povver  of  the  acute  was  introduced,  and  at  last  prevailed 
to  a  great  degree.  Part  of  the  evidence  which  we  should 
bring  to  prove  this,  would  be  taken  from  many  verses  in 
Greek,  in  which  Λve  find  the  acute  lengthening  the  s}• liable 
over  which  it  is  placed.  That  this  tone,  in  the  days  of  the 
scholiast  on  Hephaestion,  and  of  Eustathius,  was  considered 
by  some  as  afFeciing  the  metre,  is  evident  from  the  passages 
we  have  referred  to.  We  have  no  doubt,  that  if  we  were  to 
attempt  to  use  the  accents,  the  same  erroneous  pronimciation 
would  be  adopted,  which  has  been  established  among  the 
Greeks  for  many  centuries.     If  a  modern  Greek  was  to  recite 


190  GREEK  EXERCISES. 

the  following  vcr.=e  of  Archilochus,  it  λνουΐιΐ  be  impossible  to 
discover  the  second  and  fourth  iambic  feet:  cf-rapae'vos  <5t'  όδτέων. 
In  alterutrum  vitium  incidtbant  omnes,  gui,  me  audiente,  acccntuum 
vim  in  Graca  ling-u<E  pronuntiatione  exprimere  conati  sunt ;  aiU 
eniin,  voce  sublaia  el  sbno  inteniiore  vocalem  producebant ;  aiU  ictu 
vel  iinpelu  quodam  vehetncntiore  articulandi,  consonatUem  sccutam 
co/iduplicabaiU. — (Knight,  Proleg.  8S.) 

The  abuse  of  the  accents  in  their  poetical  compositions,  is 
one  of  long  standing  among  the  Greeks,  and  must  have  arisen 
from  a  wrong  application  of  them  in  common  discourse.  Mr. 
IVhlfard  remarks,  "  that  we  arc  no  way  positively  assured 
U'hetJier  the  Greek  restorers  of  Grecian  learning  in  the  ΛνεεΙ, 
expressed  exactly  the  ancient  quantities  of  syllables  j  but  \vc 
know  that  in  poetical  couipoiilion  they  Avere  justly  attentive 
lo  them."  We  cannot  agree  \vith  him  in  this  observation, 
because  instances  of  metncal  inaccuracy  may  be  found  not 
only  in  the  writings  of  C  Lascaris  and  Piiilclphus,  but  in  the 
works  of  Greeks  who  preceded  ihem  more  than  a  thousand 
years. 


APPENDIX. 


REMARKS  ON  THE  GREEK  SYNTAX. 


1.  GENITIVE. 

The  Greek  language  takes  a  much  wider  range  in  its  use 
of  the  genitive  case  than  the  Latin.  In  Greek,  words  of  ali 
kinds  may  be  foHowed  by  other  words  in  the  genitive,  when 
tlie  latter  class  limit  and  show  in  what  respect  the  meaning  of 
the  former  is  to  be  taken. 

In  the  case  of  Verbs  :  as  ΚΆψαιοί  5s,  us  ι^οδων  ειχον,  εβο-ηδεον, 
"  the  Athenians  brought  relief,  as  they  had  themselves  toith 
respect  to  their  feet"  i.  e.  "  as  fast  as  they  could  run  ;"  kcikus 
εχειν  μϊ^η?,  "  to  have  one's  self  well  with  respect  to  intoxica- 
tion," i.  e.  "  to  be  pretty  drunk  ;"  ώ^  εγ,ατ'ίξος  rtg  εύνοιας  η  μνή- 
μην εχοι,  "  as  each  one  had  himself  with  respect  to  favour  or  re- 
membrance," i.  e.  "  as  each  one  wished  well  to  a  party,  or  re- 
membered the  past ;"  ευ  ήχειν  του  /3iou,  "  to  have  come  on  well 
with  respect  to  the  means  of  subsistence,"  i.  e.  "  to  be  in  pros- 
perous circumstances ;"  ειτειγεαθαι  α,ξΥιος,  "  to  urge  one's  self 
an  with  respect  to  the  fight,"  i.  e.  "  to  be  eager  for  the  fight ;" 
ανιεναι  <rr)g  εφοίου,  "  to  slacken  with  respect  to  one's  approach," 
i.  e.  "  to  slacken  in  one's  approach  ;"  ο'φαλλβίΤ^αιελ'τηίοί,  "  to 
be  deceived  luith  respect  to  hope,"  i.  e.  "  to  be  deceived  in  one's 
hope  ;"  κατεαγα  της  κεφαλή?,  "  I  am  broken  loiih  respect  to  my 
head,"  i,  e.  "  I  have  broken  my  head." 

In  the  case  of  Adjectives  :  as  (ΐ'υχ^νωμων  των  ανί^ω-ηΊνων  αμαξ* 
βημάτων,  "  forgiving  with  respect  to  human  errors ;"  α^αΐζ 
«^tfsvoc  yovou,    "  cliildiess    with  respeci    to    male    offspring ;" 


192  GRKKK  EXEHCISES. ΑΡΓΕΝΟΙΧ. 

Γΐμηί  αη,αο^  'καΠγς  s(Stu^  "Jet  liiin  be  unlionoured  with  re- 
spect to  all  honours,"  i.  e.  "  let  all  respect  be  denied  him  ;" 
tyj\)S  <ry\g  -zo^euic,  near  with  respect  to  the  city,"  i.  e.  "  near 
the  city;"  ξυνί^τείον  ες  τούτο  ανα^χ-ΐ!?,  ''they  fell  into  this 
vit/t  respect  to  necessity,"  i.  e.  "  they  fell  into  such  nec.es- 
sily;"  ες  toJouto  μΐοΌυ?  ηλίον,  "  ibey  came  to  so  much  wtVA 
respect  to  hatred,"  i.  e.  "  they  feli  into  so  much  hatred  ;" 
£v  To'jTu  τα^'αο'χευ»!?  η7αν,  "  they  were  in  tliis  state  with  re- 
spect to  preparation,"  i.  e.  "  tliey  were  in  this  state  of  pre- 
paration ;"  y-n  cXsia  xaxuv,  "  a  land  fall  toith  respect  to  enls," 
i.  e.  "  full  of  evils  ;"  ύξμ,α  χενον  τ,Μίο-χου,  "  a  chariot  empty  with 
respect  ίο  a  driver,"  i.  e.  "  Λvithout  a  driver ;"  μίΐ^ων  τατξος, 
"  greater  ιοϊίΊ  respect  to  his  father,"  i.  e.  "  greater  than  liis  fa- 
ther." 

The  giinciples  to  be  deduced  from  all  this,  are  easy  and 
natural. 

1.  That  all  words  which  represent  a  situation  or  opera- 
tion of  the  rnind,  which  is  directed  to  an  object,  but  without 
afTectlng  if,  are  followed  by  a  genitive  ;  such  are,  the  verbs 
"  to  remember,"  "  to  forget,"  "  to  concern  one's  self  about  any 
thintr,"  "  to  neglect,"  "  to  consider,"  "  to  reflect,"  "  to  undcr- 
Ktanii,"  "  to  be  desirous  of,"  6ic.  ;  the  adjectives  "  experienc- 
ed," "  ignorant,"  "  remembering,"  "  desirous,"  a:c. 

2.  All  words  which  indicate  fulness,  to  be  full,  defect, 
emptintss,  are  followed  by  a  genitive ;  because  the  worcl 
which  expresses  of  what  any  thing  is  full,  or  empty,  indicates 
the  respect  in  which  the  signification  of  the  governing  word 
is  taken.  Under  this  head  fall  the  adjectives  "full,"  "  rich," 
♦'abounding  in,"  "empty,"  "deprived  of,"  "destitute  of;" 
thn  verbs  ""'to  fdl,"  "to 'want,"  "to  bereave,"  "  to  deliver," 
"  to  desist  from,"  "  to  cease  from  ;"  adverbs  denoting  abund- 
ance, want<  sufficiency,  deprivation",  &c. 

3.  The  .'^amc  original  signification  of  the  genitive  appears 
to  be  the  basis  of  the  construction  of  the  comparative  with 
the  geniii  e :  thus  μ£ΐ£ ων  «τατ^ο^  signified,  "  greater  with 
respect  to  his  father."  From  this  construction,  all  words 
which  involved  a  comparison,  took  the  object  of  this  com- 
pari-^iin  in  the  genitive:  such  are  verbs  which  tigiiify  "  to 
surpa.^ii,"  or  the  contrary,  "  to  be  surpassed,"  "  to  be  infe- 
rior to  another ;"  as  -χεζίγηομω,  ήτταομαι,  «Sec. ;  those  also 


GREEK  EXERCISES.— APPENDIX.  IS^ 

which  signify  "  to  rule,"  or  the  opposite,  together  wdth 
many  verbs  which  are  derived  from  substantives,  and  are 
equivalent  to  the  primitive  with  the  substantive  verb ;  as 
κυ^ιευ£ΐυ,  («ufioj  είναι)  ;  κοι|ανειν,  (xoi^avog  είναι)  ;  α^χειν,  {α.ξ-χΐΜ 
είναι) : — such  again  are  adjectives  and  substantives  in  which 
the  same  itlca  of  governing  is  in)plied ;  us  ε^κραττ)^  ηδονής, 
"  master  over  pleasure  ;"  τ^ττων  ήδονη?,  "  a  slave  to  pleasure  |" 
ήττα  του  ιτομ-ατος,  "  defeat  by  means  of  drinking,"  i.  e.  "  iriF 
temperance  in  drinking ;"  εχκ^ατεια  ίτονου,  "  mastery  over  la« 
hour." 

To  this  same  head  must  be  referred  all  Λvords  which  im- 
ply  a  comparison  with  respect  to  value^  or  require  a  defini- 
tion of  value  ;  as  άξιο?,  wliich  properly  signifies  "  equiva- 
lent," "  equal  in  value  ;"  so  that  άξιον  τούτου,  which  we  com- 
monly render  "  worthy  of  this,"  strictly  rendered  would  be, 
"  equal  in  value  loith  respect  to  this."  Hence  too  the  adjective 
ανάξιο?,  and  the  adverbial  forms  αξιω?  and  αναξιω?  take  the 
genitive  ;  and  hence  moreover  this  case  is  joined  with  all  words 
in.  which  a  determmation  of  value  is  contained  ;  as,  for  exam- 
ple, verbs  signifying  "  to  buy,"  "  to  sell,"  "  to  exchange,"  &c. 
On  this  is  foundeil  the  general  rule — "  The  price  of  a  thing  is 
put  in  the  genitive."  , 

And  lastlj'•,  to  this  head  belong  all  words  which  express  a 
difference^  and  in  which,  of  course,  a  comparison  is  imphed, 
as  ίιαφο^ο?,  ϊ-εξος,  άλλο?,  αλλοιο?,  αλλότριο?  :  as  διαφοξον  τούτου, 
"  diiferent  tcitk  respect  to  this,"  i.  e.  "  different  fi-om  this  ;'* 
έτερον  τούτου,  "  other  with  respect  to  this,"  i.  e.  "  other  thaa 
this." 

4.  From  the  meaning  of  the  genitive  "ivith  respect  to" 
we  deduce  also  the  general  meaning  ,of  the  cause  of  any 
thing's  being  done,  in  which  case  the  genitive  is  to  be  ren- 
dered by  "  on  account  of"  Thus  with  verbs  :  Δαναών  κεχο- 
λωμενοι,  "  enraged  on  account  of  the  Greeks,"  i.  e.  "  with 
the  Greeks  ;"  'κενθιχως  εχουία  του  αδελφού  τεόνηκοτο?,  "  melan- 
choly on  account  of  the  death  of  her  brother;"  φΟονειν  τινι 
οΌφια?,  "  to  envy  any  one  on  account  of  wisdom  ;"  ονεκίκΤαι  tcj 
βεοο  τούτων,  "  to  upbraid  the  god  on  account  of  these  things." 
Hence  the  genitive  is  foimd  with  verbs  signifying  "  to  ac- 
cuse," "  to  criminate,"  with  verbs  of  praying,  with  verbs  of 
beginning,  the  genitive  being  that  of  the  person  or  thing,  on 
account  of  which  the  accusation  is  made,  the  prayer  oif'^red 
lap,  or  the  affair  begun.  So  too  the  genitive  stands  alone 
ia  exciamaiions  with  and  without  an  interjection,  or  a  wor4 

R 


194  GREEK  EXERCISES. APPENDIX." 

that  i.'xpresses  adiniration,  indiirnation,  compassion,  &c. ;  as 
AffoA.Xov,  του  ■χ^α.ίμ.τιμ.ατος,  "  Apollo  !  what  a  swallow  !"  Ω  Zrj 
/ίαίιλευ,  τη?  λίττοτητοί  των  (pievcjv,  "  Ο  king•  Jupiter  !  the  aciite- 
ness  of  his  miml !"  Ύτ,ς  τυχ/,?,  "  the  misfortune  !"  In  all 
the  instances  above  enumerated  under  this  head,  however, 
artd  in  others  of  a  similar  nature,  the  grammarians  supply 
Jvexa,  or  some  equivalent  term.  ι 

Π.  '■ 

i  The  second  principal  relation  which  is  expressed  by  tho 
genitive,  is  that  of  the  proportion  of  a  Avhole  lo  its  parts,  in 
other  words,  the  genitive  is  put  partitively.  This  use  is 
•ommon  to  the  Greek,  the  Latin,  and  other  languages,  ex- 
tcpl  that  in  Greek  it  has  a  much  more  extensive  range. 
Thus  in  the  latter  language  the  genitive  is  put  with  verbs 
tff  all  kinds,  even  w^ith  those  which  govern  the  accusative, 
when  the  action  does  not  refer  to  the  whole  object,  but  ordy 
to  a  part.  This  is  expressed  in  Engli.-;h  by  the  omission  of 
the  article  in  the  singular,  or  by  the  word  "some;"  as 
vaicis  δ'  ΰλος,  "  he  sprinkled  salt  over  it ;"  oirTr,(fai  χρίων,  "  to 
foast  some  of  the  flesh  ;"  ε/ω  oiSa  των  εμων  ήλ/χιωτων,  "  I  know 
some  of  those  of  the  same  age  with  myself;"  αναόίιν  των  ται. 
νιων  τον  Σωχρατη,  "  to  bind  Socrates  with  some  of  the  fillets  ;" 
«"^.c  711?  ετίμον,  "  they  laid  Λva3te  a  part  of  the  land."  On  the 
kke  princijile  the  genitive  is  put  Avith  many  other  ^•orbs  which 
signify  participation,  or  in  which  at  loast  this  idea  is  im]ilied  : 
euch  are  the  verbs  μίτεχίιν,  κοινωνην,  ΟΊιλλαμ,βανειν,  μετίίτι, 
ΐΓ^οίΤηχίιν,  μετα(5ΐ!5οναι,  α-τολαυειν,  &c. 

Upon  this  principle  of  the  reference  to  a  part,  is  founded 
Uie  construction  by  which,  with  the  verbs  "  to  take,"  "  lo 
seize,"  "  to  touch,"  "  to  carry,"  a:c.  the  part  by  which  any 
thing• is  taken  is  put  in  the  genitive,  while  the  whule  is  put 
in  the  accusative;  as  ελαβοντο  τη^  ^ωνη^  τον  Ο^οντην,  "  they 
took  ( )runtes  by  the  girdle."  The  same  construction  is  ro- 
taineil  also  with  the  verbs  which  signify  the  oppo.-ile  of  to 
take,  or  to  seize,  viz.  "  to  let  go,"  "  to  loo.se,"  "  not  to  obtain 
5nv  thing,"  "  to  miss,"  &c.  ;  as  αφιεται  του  Jo^aro.c,  "he  leta 
go  til••  spoar  ;"  while  αφιεναι  το  δοξυ,  in  the  accusative,  would 
iignifv,  "  he  hurls  the  spear  ;"  in  the  first,  reference  being  made 
to  a  fiarl — in  the  latter,  lo  the  tvhole. 

Upon  this  principle  also  arises  the  construction  of  the  su- 
firlative  with  the  genitive,  that  .^iubstantive  being  i)ut  in  ihi* 
eaee  which  marks  the  class  from  which  the  supevlaiive  lakee 
the  chief  est  as  a  part. 


GREEK   KXERCISES. APPENDIX.  195 


in. 

^'  Tlie  genitive  is  used  also  to  mark  the  person  or  thing  to 
which  any  thing  belongs,  whether  it  be  a  property  or  quahty, 
habit,  duty,  &lc.  ;  and  those  also  from  which  any  thing  arisoe. 
Probably  here  also  an  obscure  idea  of  the  relation  of  this  qtia- 
lity,  duty,  &c.  to  that  which  possesses  it,  as-of  a  part  to  the 
whole,  is  the  basis  of  the  construction.  Hence  the  common 
rules,  that  "  verbs  denoiing  possession,  property,  duty,  &c.  go- 
vern the  genitive,"  and  that  the  "  material  oi  which  any  thing 
is  made  is  put  in  the  geniiive." 

IV. 

The  genitive  is  also  put  with  verbs  compounded  with  pre- 
positions which  govern  the  genitive,  that  is  to  say,  when  these 
prepositions  may  be  separated  from  the  verb,  and  placed  in> 
mediately  before  the  case,  Λvithoαt  altering  the  signification  of 
the  verb  ;  as  αντιτα^ίχειν  τι  τίνος,  for  ΐίαξε-χ^ειν  τι  αντί  τινο^  ; 
α'τΤο'τΤηδαν  άρματος,  for  •π-ηδαν  αφ'  άλματος  ;  εξί^χείθαι  οικίας,  fos 
εξχ_ειΐόαι  sg  οικίας  :  not,  however,  αντιλε^'ειν  τίνος,  "  to  contra- 
dict any  one,"  for  τινι,  becatise  λε^ειυ  αντί  τίνος  would  give  an 
entirely  dilferent  sense,  "  to  speak  in  the  place  of  any  one." 

V.      • 

Tlie  genitive  serves  also  to  determine  place  and  time,  m 
answer  to  the  questions,  "  where  ?"  "  Λvhen  ?"  &c.  Hence 
the  adverbs  oD,  irou,  όίτου,  loherel  which  are  in  fact  old.^e-- 
niiives. 


2.  DATIVK 

The  Dative  in  Greek  expresses  two  senses,  one  that  of  the 
dative  in  other  languages,  answering  to  the  question,  "  to 
ΛνΙιοηΊ  1"  and  one  that  of  the  Latin  ablative. 

1.  The  dative  expresses  the  distant  object  of  a  transitive  or 
intransitive  action,  with  reference  to  Avhich  this  action  takes 
place.  It  answers  thus  in  most  cases,  as  in  Latin  and  Eng- 
lish, to  the  question  "toAvhonn?"  as  ίιίοναι  τι  τινι,  "  to  give 
any  thing  to  any  one  ;"  «ττει^εο'ίαι  τινι,  "  to  obey  any  one." 
Thus  also  with  adjectives  :  φίλος  τινι,  ιχ6ξος  τινι,  εονους  τινι,  &c. 
Α  larger  proportion  of  verbs,  however,  are  joined  with  the 
dative  in  Greek  than  in  Latin. 


196  GREEK  EXLKClStS. APPENDIX. 


II. 

The  Greek  dative  also  supplies  the  place  of  the  Latin  abla- 
tive, and  in  this  case  expresses  tb^  relation  of  the  connection 
or  companionship  to  the  qiiestions  '•  wherewith  ?"  of  an  instru- 
ment Of  mean  to  the  question  "  whereby?"  of  an  impulse  or 
excitement,  "  froin  what  ?"  of  an  external  cause,  '•  by  what 
means  ?"  "  on  what  account  1"  "  for  what  1"  &c. 

III. 

The  dative  expresses  the  relation  of  the  tncasiirc,  degree. 
Arc.  wiih  the  comparative.  Hence  the  dutivos  wsXX^,  ύ^ιγφ, 
β^α-χει,  wiih  the  comparative. 

IV. 

It  is  put  in  deftnitions  of  time  and  place,  in  answer  to  the 
question  "  when  1  and  where  1" 


3.  ACCUSATIVE. 

The  accusative,  as  in  other  languages,  marks  the  person 
or  thing  which  is  aflected  by  the  action  of  the  accompanying 
verb,  i.  e.  which  suffers  a  change  of  any  kind.  'I'he  verbs 
which  govern  an  accusative  are  hence  called  verbs  aclive  or 
transitive,  i.  e.  which  show  an  action  passing  on  to  an  object, 
and  affecting  and  determining  it  in  any  actual  manner.  There 
are,  however,  other  verbs  not  properly  transitive,  which  yet 
govern  an  accusative  in  Greek  ;  tliis  is  particularly  the  case 
in  iho.^e  verbs  which  do  not  mark  the  passive  object  of  the  ac- 
tion, but  the  object  to  which  an  action  has  only  generally  au 
bnmcdiate  reference  ;  as  cr^otfxuvfiv,  ίο^υφο^ειν,  ffftsiv,  TjoCcj^jiv, 
φίανίΐν,  επΓ^οτευίιν,  βτιλειιτειν,  «kc.  In  these  and  others  of  a 
similar  nature,  the  construction  with  the  dative  ΛνοηΜ  appear 
to  be  the  most  natural  one. 

n.  ' 

Many  verbs  which  signify'  an  emotion,  a  feeling,  with  re- 
ganl  to  an  object,  as,  "  to  bo  ashamed,"  "  aiiaid,"  "  to 
com{>assionalc  iuiy  one,"  are  accompanied  by  an  accusative, 
which  expresses  the  object,  and  at  the  same  time  the  effec- 
tive cause  of  this  emotion  ;  as,  ακίχυνομοι  τον  Θεον,  "  1  revere 
the  Deity  ;"  αιδεκτίαι  ιανζ  αργονταζ,  "  Ιο  respect  rulers  j"  ί«οι>»- 


GREEK  EXERCISES. — APPENDIX.  197 

τίίξο  viv,  "  I  compassionate  him  ;"  ύμα^  ελέω,  "  Ι  pity  you.** 
The  same  takes  place  \vith  some  neuter  verbs  which  express 
iin  emotion,  ahhough,  even  without  indicating  the  object, 
tliey  convey  a  perfect  idea  ;  such  are  aXystv,  ^ηόείν,  ειτ»χα*- 
ξει-j,  &c. 

Many  verbs  have  the  accusative  not  only  of  the  nearer 
and  more  immediate  object  of  the  action,  but  also  of  the 
more  remote  object  of  it,  i.  c.  the  person  or  thing  to  ΛνΜοΙι 
the  action  with  its  immediate  object  passes,  which  in  Eng- 
hsh  is  generally  expressed  by  a  dative  ;  as  ευ  or  χαχως  'κοιαν 
τίνα,  "  to  do  good  or  harm  to  any  one  ;"  ευ  or  χαχως  Χεγειν  τίνα, 
"  to  speak  well  or  ill  of  any  one."  Hence  these  verbs  often 
take  two  accusatives  at  the  same  lime :  such  are  •π-&(ειν,  irpar. 
τείν,  δξαν,  εξδϊιν,  "  to  do  :"  λέγειν,  ειπείν,  αχο^ευειν,  "  to  speak  of 
or  against ;"  ε^ωταν,  "  to  ask  ;"  α*αίτειν,  "  to  ask  ;"  "  to  re- 
quire," "  to  desire  ;"  αφαίξεκίύαι,  αιτούτΐξειν,  &c.  "  to  take  away," 
"  to  deprive  of  a  thing  ;"  MadASiv,  "  to  teach  ;"  εχδυααι,  εν^κίαι, 
"to  put  off"  or  "on,"  &c. 

Other  uses  of  the  accusative  have  been  enumerated  under 
the  rules  of  syntax. 


APPENDIX   II 


NOTES  ON  THE  RULES  OF  SYNTAX 

Given  in  the  Commencement  of  the  Volume. 


The  object  of  the  following  Notes  is  merely  to  remo%*e 
such  little  difficulties  as  might  otherwise  impede  the  pro- 
gress of  the  learner.  The  doctrine  of  Ellipses,  which  was 
resorted  to  in  almost  every  instance  by  Dr.  Neilson,  in  the 
•dition  of  his  Exercises  from  which  the  first  American  im- 
pression was  made,  is  here  only  retained  in  part.  It  appeared 
far  more  advisable  to  refer  the  stiidunl  as  often  as  jx)ssihle  to 
the  principles  of  grammatical  solution,  Avliich  are  laid  down 
in  Appcivlix  I. 


Rile  1. 

Καχων  (•τ^α^ματων)  των  ir^i»  (ovrcov)  μνειαν  εχειν. — Τα  (χξτ,μΛ- 
«•α)  ίξ'^. — Εν  ς-ω  φρονειν.  (t  is  from  tlic  infinitive,  obsen'es 
Harris,  {Ilermcs,  p.  164,  n,)  thus  participating  in  the  na- 
ture of  a  noun  or  substantive,  that  the  best  granmiariane 
have  called  it  somclinies  όνομα  ^ηματιχον,  a  verbal  noun  ;  some- 
times όνομα  ^ημαί-οί:,  the  verb's  noun.  The  reason  of  this  ap- 
pellation, ho  mhh,  is  in  Greek  more  evident  from  its  taking  the 
prrjxjsitive  article  before  it  in  all  cases.  The  same  construe- 
lion  is  not  uidcnown  m  English :  thus  Spenser — 

For  not  to  have  Ικτη  (Γιρ|Μ<ϋ  in  Lflhc  lako, 
Could  save  the  ηοπ  υΓ  Thrlw  from  lo  die." 

A*•  τον  iaveiv.     In  like  manner  we  say,  He  did  it,  lo  b€  rich^ 


OHEEK  EXERCISES. — APPENDIX  Π.  199 

where  we  must  supply  by  an  «'llipsis,  the  preposition  for : 
He  did  it- for  to  he  rich,  the  same  m-,  if  we  had  said,  JIc  did  it 
for  gain  :  in  Greek,  ένεχα  του  "ττλουτειν,  hsxa  του  χε^(5ο.υ?,  in 
French,  pour  s^enric/ier.  Even  in  such  sentences  as  the  fol- 
lowinij,  /  choose  to  philosophize,  ra/hcr  than  to  be  rich,  το  φ<λο(ϊΌ- 
φειν  |βουλο,αα(  μάλλον  η  το  τλουτειν,  ilie  infinitives  are  in  nature 
as  much  accusatives  as  if  we  were  to  say,  /  choose  philosophy 
rather  than  riches,  την  φιλο(Τοίριαν  /τ'ουλομαι,  μάλλον  η  τον  •τλουτον. 
Thus  too  Priscian,  speaking  of  infinitives,  observes ;  "  Cur- 
rere  eni'm  est  cursus  ;  et  scriberc,  soiptura ;  ei  legere,  lectio  ; 
itague  freqixerder  et  nominibus  adjnnguntur,  et  aliis  casualibus, 
Tiiore  nominum  ;"  and  soon  after,  ''  cum  enim  dice,  Bonum  est 
legere,  nihil  aliud  significo,  nisi,  Bona  est  lectio."  Lib.  48,  p. 
1130. 

Ό  (avilpwirog)  ερχόμενο?.  This  mny  also  be  rendered  more 
in  accordance  Aviih  the  Greek  idiom,  by  the  person  coming. 
In  Laliii,  however,  the  relative  and  indicative  are  always  re- 
quired in  such  expressions  ;  as,  ό  ε^'χ^μενοί,  qui  vcni't :  u  τυατων, 
gui  verherat. 

T'  avilfwirs/ov  ^ενος  τύ\  μεν  (με^Ί'^ι)  fx^/a^DV,  ττ]  L•  (μεριίι)  φκυλον. 
The  student  must  understand  by  I  lie  term  partly,  as  emidoyed 
in  the  language  of  the  rule,  that  a  reference  is  always  made 
in  this  use  of  the  article  to  a  division.  Thus,  ό  μεν,  ό  L•,  the 
one,  the  other,  or  the  former,  the  latter ;  and  so  of  the  jilnral, 
01  μει/,  ol  δε.  This  construction  is  based  upon  the  original 
pronominal  meaning  of  the  article  ;  thus,  ό  μεν  α•7Γηλ<)εν,  ό  δε 
εμεινεν  ;  the  one  departed,  the  other  remained ;  literally,  t/lut  one 
indeed  departed,  but  this  one  remained ;  as  in  the  Latin  ill&—' 
hie. 


0^5ov  [-χ^ξ^γιμα)  ή  αλήθεια  αει. — ΊΙ  'τ(ατξ\ς  φιλτατον  (ρ^^ίμα) 
βξοτοις.  This  construction  is  often  imitated  by  the  Lathi  wri- 
Icrs  ;  as,  Triste  lupus  stabulis,  supply  negotium — Varium  et  mih 
tabile  semper  femina — Triste  maturis  frugibus  imbres — JJukt 
sails  humor,  &c. 

4.  i 

Ό  θΌφο5  (ανκ]^).— Ή  οξύη  (Ιδοζ). — Τα  εμ.α  (■χξίηματα), 

5. 

Αόηνη  Αιος  τεκο^  (θυγατίξ)  ατξυτωνη. — Ω  ψυχή  (οΌυ)"  Ις  μηδ* 
ν^ηδ.    Such  is  the  grammatical  mode  of  supplying  those 


aOO  GREEK  EXERCISES. — ΛΓΡΕ.νΟΙΧ  Π. 

ellipses.  I  am  inclined  to  think,  however,  that  in  all  such 
cases  it  is  simpler  to  say,  that  the  gender  of  the  person^  and 
not  of  the  preceding  noun,  is  considered. 

6. 

For  οιομενοΛ»  ajroi  είναι  flO;;;jraT&i,  the  nominative  before  the 
infinitive,  there  being  no  change  of  person. 

8. 

This  idiom  is  more  observed  by  the  Attics,  than  by  the 
older  writers  in  the  Ionic  and  Doric  dialects.  The  latter  often 
join  the  neuter  plural  with  a  plural  verb  ;  as,  oote  η  νωϊ«  hξx^a 
etftfovTai,  //.  χ,  266 — αμήχανα  ε>-/α.  ^ενοντο,  //.  λ.  310.  The 
scholiasts  on  these  passages  observe  that  they  are  constructed 
αζχαίχ^ς.  The  Attics  also  sometimes  join  the  verb  in  the  plu- 
ral with  the  neuter  plmal,  especially  in  two  cases  ;  I.  AVhen 
the  neuter  plural  signifies  Uving  persons  ;  2.  When  the  abstraci 
is  put  for  the  cmcrele,  and  animate  creatures,  not  things,  are 
referred  to.  Perhaps  the  construction  of  neuters  plural  with 
singular  verbs  may  be  accounted  for  on  the  principle  of  the 
association  of  ideas  ;  neuter  and  inanimate  objects  being  con- 
eidered  generally,  but  animate  agents  individually. 

12. 

The  construction  of  the  nominative  with  the  infinitive  de- 
pends upon  the  principle  of  attraction,  that  is,  upon  the  asso 
ciation  of  ideas. 

15. 

For  ΊΤζπς  τούτοις  a.  Χίγει  Ηενοφων — and  οίτοί  ffrn  α\/&Ρ(>3*ος  Ui 
"Κεγίις.  With  reganl,  however,  to  the  antecedent's  being 
attracted  into  the  same  case  with  the  relative,  it  may  be 
considered  as  nothing  more  than  the  full  e.xpression  of  whal 
is  couuTionly  uttered  elliptically  ;  for  the  relative  is  in  fact  a 
epecics  of  adjective,  having  its  substantive  alwa^'s  under- 
etooil,  if  iK>t  expressed  ;  as  οίτο;  srfTiv  avi?o>«ro5,  όν  ανί^ωτον 
λίχίι;.  So  also  in  the  passage  oj-pj  sdriv  όν  avsxc^ciktda  Ιωαν• 
νην,  the  full  expression  is,  cutoj  siTtiv  Ιωάννης,  όν  Ιωαννην  ατεχβ- 
ψαΚκία. 

18. 

See  the  ob.^ervations  of  Emesti,  Gcsner,  and  Gilbert  Wak* 
field,  on  the  ilual  used  as  a  plural,  refuted  by  Dalzol  in  tho 
Botes  of  the  second  volume  of  the  CoU.  Alajora,  pp.  36,  37. 


GREEK  EXERCISES. APPENDIX  II.  201 

19. 

Eo'riv  a'iPSra.  (■χξημ.α.τα). — Τα  διχαια  [ητξαγμητα).  When  two 
or  more  substantives  are  united  by  η,  or,  which  reciprocally 
exchide  eacli  other,  the  verb  wliich  is  common  lo  them  ia 
sometimes  in  the  phiral ;  as,  '^fus  αν  Πλάτων  η  Λη,αοίίθίνη^ 
Οψωβ'αν,  η  εν  ιίτο^ια  Θουκυδίδη?.  Longin.  14.  So  in  Cicero, 
Or.  2.  4.  16.  ne  Sulpicius — aut  Coda  plus  qiiam  ego  apud  te  va- 
le! e  videantur. 

20. 

So  in  Latin  ;  tanta  circa  fa ga  atque  irepidaiio  fuit :  Liv.  21. 
7. — figritia  ei  dssperatio  in  omnium  vidiu  eiTiineret.     Id.  21.  35, 

22. 

To  iratfiv  a^Sifa»  δυ<ίαξζ(ίτα.τον  {εξγον)  sdri. 

24. 

Similar  to  these  are  expressions  both  in  our  own  and 
other  languages ;  as,  sea-water,  icine-glass,  steam-boat.  The 
only  difference  between  the  English  and  the  Greek  languages 
in  this  respect  is,  that  the  former  requires  the  qualifying  noun 
immediately  to  precede  that  which  it  limits,  and  be  joined  to 
it  by  a  hyphen,  Λvhile  the  latter  admits  of  their  being  uncon- 
nected, and  even  separated  by  other  words.  The  principle  on 
which  this  construction  depends,  however,  is  the  same  in  all 
languaires.;  and  proceeds  from  the  great  law  of  the  human 
mind,  the  association  of  ideas.  The  juxtaposition  of  two 
terms  suggests  that  one  of  them  is  a  quality  of  the  other ; 
and  hence  the  former  losing  its  ΟΛνη  independent  meaning,  as« 
sumes  the  dependent  character  of  an  adjective, 

26. 

The  grammarians  commonly  make  a  noun  to  be  under- 
stood in  this  construction,  which  governs  the  genitive :  thus 
the  examples  under  the  rule,  when  the  ellipsis  is  thus  sup- 
plied, become.  To  Xwcrov  (με^οί:)  τη?  Ί]\ΐΐΡα.ς. — To  χξα.τιιϊ7ον  {με- 
ξος)  φ(λο(Τος;ια<:.  Α  much  more  rational  solution,  however,  ίβ 
given  in  Appendix  I.,  in  the  remarks  on  the  genitive. 

27. 

Hence  ΤΤατ?^  ή,αων  in  our  Lord's  Prayer,  not  Πατε^  ί;μετε^ί. 
Tliis  last  would  be  emphatic,  and  convey  a  meaning  which 
is  not  intended  :  it  would  signify,  our  Father,  as  if  God  Λverβ 
ft  Father  of  only  a  pari  of  his  creatures.     Πα-ε^  ήμων,  cm 


S02  GREEK  EXERCISES. APPENDIX  11. 

the  contrary,  expresses  the  true  idea,  Father  of  us,  or,  cnu 
Father,  i.  e.  Father  of  us  all. 

2S. 

Δια^αξουβΊ  τα  εμα  (χ^τ,μ,ατα)  του  χαχο5αιμονοί,  foi'  διαξναζον 
it  ΤΛ  χ^η.αατα  εμο^  του  καχοίαιμονο^. 

Ι  ''■     . 

The  grammarians  supply  the  elhpses  as  follows  : — Έ-ξγο. 
(αντί)  ΐΓλϊίΤτου  άξια. — Γΐ/μνα(7ια  μΒ(ίτα  {ιξ)  ανό^οΑ. — (ΓΙ:"^ι)  ύ» 
νΡ96•4μος  γ^ιίά'  α£ΐ.  See  however  Appendix  I.,  Remarks  on  the 
Genitive. 

30. 

AvaiTiof  (ειτ')  Oippotfuvyjg. — ΤΙ(,ξΐ<ίτκος  (*ε|ι)  ειτιτη^ειων.  So  the 
grammarians  supply  the  ellipses.     See  however  Appendix  1. 

31. 

Oi  ιταλαιοι  (jx)  των  Ποιητών. — Μονό?  (εκ)  /3^οτων. — Οι  νεώτεροι 
(εξ)  αν6ξωιτων  ;  and  so  of  the  rest.  It  is  somewhat  surprising 
tliat  they  Λvho  framed  these  ellipses,  did  not  tliink  of  others 
far  simpler:  thus,  01  ταλαιοι  (τοι/,Γαι)  των  «πΌΐηί-ων. — jMovoff 
(βξοτοζ)  /3|οτων. — Ο)  νεώτεροι  (ανίβωτοι)  αν(?Ρωτων — &c.  That 
is,  "  Tlio  old  poets  among  the  poets." — '•  The  only  mortal 
among  mortals'' — &c.  The  true  principle,  however,  is  laid 
down  in  Appendix  I. 

32. 

The  preposition  αντί,  or  *fo,  is  said  to  be  understood,  and  to 
govern  this  genitive.     See  however  Appendix  I. 

35,  36. 

See  Appendix  I.,  Remarks  on  the  Dative.  The  gramma- 
rians pretend,  that  with  the  dative  of  the  measure  of  excess, 
βίΓΐ,  or  some  preposition  of  equal  force,  is  understood. 

37.  •       -f 

Ό  ιτΐίραο'χομενοδ  ';ηξου  [κτηαα)  ^ινε-αι.  See  however  Ap- 
pendix I. 

38,  39,  40,  41. 

The  principle  on  which  each  of  these  ndes  is  based,  has 
already  been  explained  in  .Vppondix  I.  The  roinarks  there 
made,  apply  with  peculiar  force  to  \'erbs  which  indicate  an 
operation  of  the  extcrnftl  senses.  Since  the  subject  of  thorn 
is  not  represented  as  affucted  by  them,  α  genitive  in  cons©- 


βΚεεΚ  EXERCISES. ΑΡΡ 

quence  folloAvs.  The  use  of  the  accuscUive  after  verbs  of  see- 
ing, has  been  supposed  to  arise  from  ihisi  circuinstaiice,  t^iat  .• 
tlie  Greeki  considered  the  eye  as  deriving  'its  images  from  its 
man  operations  on  the  presented  objects,  and  not  frum  the  im- 
pressions of  these  objects  upon  itself  The  objective  noua 
therefore,  as  being  thus  an  effect,  is  put  in  the  accusative 

\ 
42,  43,  44.  • 

See  Appendix  I.,  Remarks  upon  the  Dative.  | 

47. 

In  this  construction,  if  the  verb  be  an  active  transitive  one, 
the  government  of  the  accusative  is  evident  enough.  If, 
however,  it  be  an  active  intransitive  or  a  neuter  verb,  we  must 
pesort  to  an  ellipsis  of  κατά,  or  some  equivalent  preposition : 
such  is  the  opinion  of  Perizonius,  in  his  Notes  on  the  Minerva 
of  Sanctius,  vol.  ii.  p.  21,  ed.  Baver.  Perizonius  understands 
a  preposition  also  in  the  corresponding  Latin  idiom,  viv&rs 
viiam,  ciarcre  cur  sum,  &c. 

48,  49,  50,  51. 

See  Appendix  I.,  Remarks  on  the  Genitive  and  Dative. 
With  regard  to  the  double  accusative  which  follows  some 
verbs,  Sanclius,  Perizonius,  and  other  grammarians,  make 
are  of  them  to  be  always  governed  by  a  preposition  under- 
stood ;  maintaining  that  no  verb  can  govern  more  than  one 
accusative.  According  to  this  opinion,  the  following  ellipses 
CKicur  in  the  examples  under  the  rule  : — Χ^η  airsiv  rcug  0£oug 
(χατ-α  or  sot)  τα  aya&a. — Aita^ta.  (ει?)  ίε  (5(5«|ομαι. — Αιτοιίτε- 
|3ΐ  με  (κατά)  τα  χ^ημκτα.  This  ellipsis  ^νάΐΐ  indeed  answer 
extremely  well,  and  in  fact  may  be  considered  as  necessary, 
in  verbs  of  ansΛvering,  using,  dividing,  and  many  others.  It 
will  not  however  suit  all  passages,  but  makes  the  expression 
in  some  cases  stiff  and  a\vkward,  especially  in  inany  of  those, 
where,  besides  the  proper  object,  another  accusative,  com- 
monly that  of  a  pronoun,  is  added,  which  mdicates  the  whole, 
of  Avliich  the  proper  object  is  a  part.  It  is  much  more  pro- 
bable that  in  these  a  species  of  apposition  tokes  place,  hy 
means  of  Avhich  the  whole  is  more  accurately  defined  by  the 
addition  of  a  pai't. 

53. 

To  ιιιγΐόος  {"ίτοίξα.)  βχεινω  ΐ(ί'ΐτξαγμε\;ων. 


ί04  GREEK  EXERCISES. APPENDIX  Π. 

54. 

Many  of  the  verbs  which  are  called  impersonals,  that  is, 
verbs  belon^ng  to  no  subject  or  person,  are  in  strictness  per- 
sonal verbs,  that  is,  have  a  real  subject  to  which  thej•  belong. 
The  peculiarity  connected  with  them  is,  that  the  action  to 
Λvhich  they  reft-r,  whether  expressed  by  an  infinitive  or  other 
dependent  clause,  is  their  true  object :  thus,  ίξϊί'τι  μοι  ατιένα/, 
i.  c.  TO  arrisvai  φίτι  μοι,  "  the  going  away  is  lawful  to  me." 
So  in  the  example  under  the  rule  ;  με^ιίτον  αυτω  εβοξεν  είναι, 
i.  c.  fo  ειναι  μί^ιίτον  εϋοξίν  αυτω,  "its  being  greatest  appeared 
to  him."  Of  this  kind  are  (5ει,  χζτ„  αιτοχξη,  le^evu,  ενδζ-χεται, 
&c. 

57. 

The  infinitive  is  in  fact  a  verbal  noun,  (see  Remarks  on 
Ride  1,)  hence,  when  governed  by  verbs,  participles,  or  adjec- 
tives, it  is  precisely  the  same  construction  as  if  a  noun  supplied 
its  place,  and  were  governed  by  them. 

58. 

Zeune,  in  his  Notes  on  Viger,  makes  an  ellipsis  of  some 
verb  in  those  and  similar  constructions.  AVhen  the  particles 
Avhich  are  joined  with  the  infinitive  in  such  cases,  have  the 
meaning  of  (i/ier,  to/tai,  before,  wilil,  «kc,  he  supposes  ίΤυμ^αινει, 
or  ΛΊ-νεβη,  or  'i  ι;,?»»-*),  or  ίυμβη,  (accordmg  as  the  context  re- 
quires a  present  or  a  past  tense,  the  optative  or  the  subjunctivis 
mood,)  to  b^  nmler.itood.  "■  When,  however,  the  particle  has 
llic  meaninir  of  asov  s),  he  understands  φ(ίτι,  on,  ειχο?  e(frt, 
or  some  einiiv.'iknt  term.  Thus,  ώ?  ετο»  εΐ'τειν,  is  for  ΰ^  φ•ΐτι 
e-rof  ειίΤίΐν,  (■/  •ηΙ)  so  ίο  speak  :  ^rPfv  ίηλον  ειναι,  for  irjiv 

(β'υμβαινει)  ,  h<fore  {it  happnis  thai)  it  is  ei-idcnt.     So 

also,  ώδ  i(5;i  he  saio  him,  for  ύς  {<ί•ονι°τη)  ιδαν  αυτόν  : 

νξΐν  αλεχτί.;  /Ore  the  cock  creio,  for  "Jt^iv  (συνεοη)  αλεχ. 

το^α  φωνητ 

59. 

Matthi.T  1.  ii.  p.  824)  thinks  that  this  use  of 
the  infiniM  • '.  a  remnant  of  the  ancient  simplicity 
of  the  I;•  I  which  the  action  required  was  ex- 
pressed li  li'i  verb  absolute,  or  the  mocxl  of  the 
verb  will  "licates  the  action  without  any  refer- 
ence to  ■  .«peech.  It  seems  much  simpler, 
however,  ι  ellipsis  of  a  verb  ;  as,  Λυτο^  (ό^α) 
πι  ir^uror  /  thou  see  to)  fight  among  the  first, 

i 


GREBK  EXERCISKl — APPENDIX  Π.  205 

-A  similar  ueage,  and  it  is  presumed  a  eimilar  ellipsis,  occurs 
in  the  subjunctive  ;  as  M»)  ■toitjs  τούτο,  Do  not  do  this,  for  (Ό^α) 
μη  iroiTjg  τούτο,  {See  that  thou)  do  not  do  this  ;  like  the  Latin  ne 
facias,,  with  vide  or  cave  understood.  The  use  of  the  infinitive 
as  above  mentioned,  was  very  common  in  Ionic ;  see  especial- 
ly the  Aphorisms  of  Hippocrates.  An  infinitive  and  impera- 
tive sometimes  are  coupled  together  in  the  same  sentence,  as 
in  the  beautiful  prayer  cited  by  Plato,  Alcib.  2.  Ζευ  βαύιΧευ, 
τα  μ.Βν  etfdXa  χαι  ευχόμενοι^  χαι  ανευχτοκ  Αμμ»  δίδο\)'  7(t  ^s  Χυγξα, 
xai  ευχόμενων  α-ταλεξειν. 

60. 

Thus,  μέλλω  7^αφε»ν,  scripturu^  sum  ;  βμελλον  ^^αφειν,  scnjp- 
tums  eram ;  μελληο'ω  ^^αφειν,  scripturus  era ;  εμε'ΚΧ'ηίία.  γξα., 
φειν,  scripturus  fui.  In  English  this  is  expressed  by  ahout  to 
do  any  thing,  intending  to  do,  &c.  The  student  will  observe 
that  the  Greeks  joined  μέλλω  with  all  the  tenses  of  the  infini- 
tive except  the  perfect,  never  with  this.  Μέλλω,  together 
with  τυγχάνω  and  others  mentioned  in  Rule  62,  are  of  singu- 
lar use  and  beauty  in  the  Greek  language.  By  associating 
μέλλω  with  the  infinitive,  and  τυγχάνω,  ειμί,  &c.  with  the 
participles  of  other  verbs,  the  tinje  and  circumstances  of  an 
action  are  most  accurately  defined.  They  may  with  proprie- 
ty be  called  auxiUaries,  and  they  bear  a  remarkable  analogy 
to  verbs  of  that  kind  in  the  English  language.  Instances  of 
their  peculiar  use  are  here  added  ;  thus  : — Inceptive  present, 
μέλλω  γζαψζη,  scripturus  sum,  I  am  going  to  ηψϊΐβ.  Middle  or 
extended  present,  τυ/χανω  γξαφων,  scribo,  I  am  writing.  In-^ 
ceptive  past,  εμελλον  ^^αφειν,  scripturus  eram,  I  was  beginning 
to  icrile.  Middle  or  extended  past,  εγξαφον  or  ετύγχαναν  γξα- 
φων,  scribebam,  I  was  loriting.  Inceptive  future,  ιχεΧΚ-ηΰω  γξα. 
φειν,  scripturus  ero,  I  shall  be  about  to  write.  Middle  or  extend- 
ed future,  εοΌμαί  γξοφων,  scriba^n,  I  shall  be  writing.  Comple- 
tive future,  εοΌμαι  γεγξαχ^<ύζ^  smpsero^  I  shall  have  done  mriling, 

62. 

P"  Τυγχάνω  answers  to  the  Latin  forte,  φΛχνω  to  fT<B^  Xaviavw 
to  dam.    See  also  Remarks  preceding. 

63. 

This  construction  constitutes  a  peculiar  feature  of  the 
Greek  syntax,  and  as  it  is  of  frequent  occurrence,  is  well 
■worthy  of  the  student's  notice.    If  a  verb  is  governed  by  an- 


106  G&EEE  EXERCISC9. — APPEXDIX  II. 

Other  verb  oi  an  adjective,  a  double  relation  is  established, 
according  to  which  the  use  of  the  infinitive  or  certain  par-  ■ 
tides  is  determined.  Either  the  verb  or  adjective  conveys 
in  itself  a  perfect  and  indi^pendent  idea  ;  or  it  has  no  perfect 
idea,  but  expresses  an  action  which  first  becomes  perfect  by 
the  addition  of  its  reference.  Thus  the  verbs  I  pray,  I per- 
euade,  I  willy  «SiC.  always  require  an  addition  Λvhich  expresses 
for  what  I  pray,  to  ivhat  I  persuade  any  one,  what  I  will.  Now 
when  such  an  imperfect  verb  or  adjective  refers  to  a  verb,  this 
reference  expresses  either  the  consequence  in  \'iew,  the  end, 
or  merely  the  object  of  the  first  verb  or  adjective.  Thus  in 
the  propositions,  1  will  write,  I  command  you  to  write,  1  admo- 
nish you  to  go,  «sic.  the  English  infinitive  is  the  consequence  in 
view  of  the  fiirst  verb,  and  is  in  most  cases  expressed  in  Latin 
by  ut.  On  the  contrary,  in  the  propositions,  1  saw  him  fall,  I 
heard  hint  say — ecio  me  esse  mortalem,  intelligo  me  errasse,  the 
infinitive  i.*  ca<?Tely  the  object,  lUDt  the  end,  of  tl^e  verbs  to  see, 
to  hear,  &.c. — Thus  much  having  been  premised,  we  deduce 
the  following  rules  : — 

1.  AVhcn  an  imporfect-verb  or  adjective  is  followed  by  a 
verb  which  expresses  the  object  or  the  consequence  of  it, 
the  latter  in  Greek  is  put  in  the  infinitive  ;  as  iso/xai  tfou  ελ- 
flsiv,  /  entreat  thee  to  a/me ;  τα^αινω  tfoi  ^?αφίΐν,  /  exhort  thee 
to  write.  To  this  rule^  hoΛvever,  there  is  a  regular  exce}>- 
tion  in  it^kiKuctbaty  which  is  followed  by  Itug  and  the  finite 
verb. 

2.  When  an  imperfect  verb  is  accompanied  by  another 
vhich  u^arka  merely  the  object  of  the  former,  the  latter  is 
put  in  the  participle — sometimes  where  in  Latin  the  parti- 
ciple 13  used,  as  vidω  te  scnbeniem,  audio  te  doccntcm,  όξω  <Sb  γξα. 
φόντα,  axovu  ffi  JjiaixovTa — sometimes  after  verbs  which  indi- 
cate a  perception  by  means  of  the  external  senses,  or  the  un- 
derstanding, where  in  Latin  tho  accusative  with  the  infmitivo 
is  used,  as  scio  me  esse  mortalem,  seiiiio  te  iralum  esse,  οιδα  ύνητος 
tjv,  aιιJ^avoμΛ^  di  χαλδίΤαιν&ντα. 

3.  The  verbs  to  say,  to  announce,  to  mean,  to  think,  to  hope, 
constitute  a  regular  exception  to  this  rule,  and  take  the  infini- 
tive. The  first  two  also  take  ότι  with  the  finite  verb  ;  ίηλουν 
however  takes  the  jvorticiplc- 

4.  If  the  former  verb  is  of  itself  perfect,  or  be  preceded 
by  a  pn)position  entirely  perfect,  then  the  object  of  it  is  ex- 
prc.=«scd  by  means  of  tJic  conjunctions  ίνα,  οφρα,  ό^ω^ ;  as  ira- 
|αινω  (foi  μαίϊιν  ^  βάμματα  ινα  (Τοφωτίξος  γίνη  ;   but  the  conse- 

qutnc•  not  iuuncdiaieJy  in  ^iow  is  expressed  by  Mtfrs  wiUi  the 


SREBK  EXERCISES. — AtPBNDlX  Π.  SOT 

infinitive ;  this  takes  place  especially  after  τοσΌυτο^,  roiwrog, 

65, 

Eiff  TO  (ίτξατιωτας  &υναγαγει\/,  ad  congregandnm  vel  congr&• 
gandos  milites.  Eue^j'erwv,  benefacimdo.  (E»s  το)  «ovsiv  Mi- 
χξον,  iurpe/aciu. 

,  66. 

Γξά.'π'τεον  μοι  εττίο'τολην,  scribendum  est  mihi  epistolam.  Ελ- 
μελητβον  rfoi  τούτου,  ^oc  //έί  curanduTn  est.  So  also  ταύτα  tfoi 
«τοιητδα,  ^icc  tibifacienda  sunt. 

67. 

The  preposition  is  often  omitted,  as  Σουνίον  I^ov  aφ^xoμε&''  we 
tame  to  the  sacred  Sunium ;  Αιβε^ι  ναιων,  dialling  in  the  upj)er 
regions  of  the  air. 

69. 

The  adverbs  in  tfi  Avere  originally  datives  .plural  from  the 
Ionic  dialect.  After  however  that  this  ΰι  was  once  considered 
merely  as  an  adverbial  termination,  and  no  longer  as  a  termi- 
nation of  the  dative  plural,  it  was  annexed  also  to  other  names 
preceded  by  α ;  as  Ολυμ^ιαίίι,  ΠλαταιαοΊ,  &c. 

70. 

Εφε3Ό$  ανεγει  (κα4')  o5ow  τ^ιων  ijfxs^wv, 

71. 

The  grammarians  commonly  understand  ίια  to  govern  the 
genitive  in  tliis  rule  :  see  however  Appendix  I.,  Remarks  on 
the  Genitive.  The  other  ellipses  are,  (εν)  ήμί^α  μι^;  ο^^η 
φιλουντων  (κατ')  ολα^ον  ιΰγνει  χ^ονον. 

72,  73. 

See  Appendix  I.,  Remarks  on  the  Genitive. 

74. 
Τα  (χ^*ΐματα)  Πλάτωνος.     Ολυμίτια^  (ή  μητη^)  Αλε|αν5|ου. 

76. 

The  rule  is  given  according  to  the  usual  mode  of  enun- 
ciating it,  and  the  passages  cited  as  examples  stand  thus 
wlien  the  ellipses  are  supplied : — Ε'Ταινω  Cs  (§vixa)  νί\ζ  φίλο= 


203  OaE£K  BX£RCI6CS. — APPENDIX  II. 

μου^ίΟ^.— ΔειλΛίί  (svexa)  του  »ou. — (EJs)  «rowuv  yivou  μοι. — Hrfo» 
(rivif)  των  «Τταυ^ων.  The  most  rational  explanation  however 
has  been  given  in  Appendix  I.,  Remarks  on  the  Genitive 

77. 
Vid.  Appendix  I.,  Remarks  on  the  Genitive. 

81. 

Tl^c  CTammariang  understand  by  the  term  ahsoluie,  merely 
that  there  is  no  governing  word  crprcssed.  They  make  the 
preposition  siri  to  be  understood  with  the  genitive,  tfuv  or  ίτι 
with  the  dative,  and  xara  or  μετά  with  the  accusative.  Thus, 
{εφ')  ίμ-ου  ιταξοντος,  ttpon  tiiy  appearing  ;  (tfjv)  ιτα^ιοντ»  ενιαυτω, 
together  wilh  (he  departed  year ;  (μετά)  δ-ον  hsea,  after  other 
things  were  suitable.  The  genitive  absokite  seems  to  have 
been  in  its  original  force  an  expression  of  time,  and  hence  the 
use  of  the  genitive  case.  When  this  duration  of  time  is  ascer- 
tained by  an  historical  person,  the  prcposiiion  en  is  often  used 
Λνίιΐι  these  genitives,  as,  sm  Kujou  fSufftXsvovrog,  in  the  reign  of 
Cyrus.  This  circuuistance  no  doubt  led  the  grammarians  to 
imagine,  that  wherever  sir»  was  not  expressed  Λvith  the  geni- 
tive absolute,  it  was  to  be  understood. 

As  regards  the  genitive  absolute,  the  Greek  language  dif- 
fers from  the  Latin  :  for  Avhere  the  liatin,  in  the  use  of  the  ab- 
lative absolute,  is  obliged,  on  account  of  the  want  of  a  parti- 
ciple in  the  perfect  active,  to  turn  the  sentence,  and  to  use  the 
perfect  participle  passive  ;  the  Greek,  on  the  other  hand, 
whose  principal  tenses  all  have  their  own  pariici]iles,  can  re- 
tain the  active  construction,  and  then  their  participle  is  rcfciTed 
to  the  subject  of  the  principal  proposition  ;  as,  viso  Ivpo  diffn- 
gaiint  ores,  is  in  Greek,  looutfai  τον  λυχον,  α!  οϊε^  ατί-ι,^ον,  not 
οφΰεντος  του  λυχου.  Thus  too  ναυτα  αχοικίας,  his  aw.litis,  and  in 
all  similar  cases.  The  nearest  approach  which  tlie  Latin 
language  can  make  to  this  construction,  omitting  the  ablative 
absolute,  is  the  use  of  a  past  participle  of  a  depi»nent  verb, 
when  they  have  one  to  employ,  or  else  of  gtium  or  mm  with 
the  pluperfect  subjunctive  ;  as  conspicati  iiiptim  ;  (juiun  hcec 
audissct.  In  Greek,  this  construction  of  the  pariiriplo  which 
wo  have  just  been  mentioning,  is  universally  mhnis.sible  when 
tlic  accompanying  action,  wliich  is  expressed  by  the  partici- 
ple, belongs  defiiiiiiveiy  to  the  subject  of  the  principal  pro- 
po.sition  ;  whereas  the  passive  construction  obtains  wht>re  the 
action  cxprcsseil  l)y  the  participle  does  not  refer,  or  does  not 
relW  «mirely,  to  the  svd'jsct  of  the  principal  propoiition  :  thus, 


GEHEK  EXERCISES. — APPENDIX  11.  £0β 

rwv  ίτολί,αιων  οφίεντων,   εφνγον  ο)  τολιται,   when  they  (not  the 
citizens  merely)  saw  the  enemy,  the  citizens  fled. 

In  the  case  of  the  nominative  absokite,  the  grammarians 
in  general  consider  the  construction  as  an  elliptical  one  ;  the 
finite  verb,  with  some  conjunction  preceding,  being  under- 
stood;  as,  ("Οταν)  αϊ  ί;μ,ε^α»  ε^χομεναι  (ηίαν),  lohen  the  days 
were  come. — {Ε-ττόιδ-η)  oi  ίτ^ατωται  χατα  το  μϊοΌν  «ττίδιον  (ετυ^χα. 
νον)  ovTec:,  iuAen  /Ac  soldiers  loere  ia  the  middle  of  the  plain,  &c. 
It  is  certainly  far  simpler,  however,  to  view  these  construc- 
tions as  αναχολουόίαι,  where  the  writer  considers  the  thing 
which  he  is  about  to  speak  of,  abstractedly  or  as  a  subject, 
but  takes  occasion,  by  means  of  a  parenthesis,  or  in  some 
other  way,  to  change  the  construction.  These  αναχολουίιαι 
occur  in  the  best  writers  in  every  language,  and  when  used 
sparingly  and  with  caution,  give  a  pleasing  variety  and  ani- 
mation to  plain  narrative,  or  didactic  style.  Our  absolute  case 
in  English  is  ahvays  a  nominative ;  and  in  Latin  the  nomina- 
tive absolute  often  occurs.  Thus  in  Cicero,  de  Fin.  2.  33, 
"  H(ec  leviora,  poema,  orationem  cum  aut  scribis  out  legis — signum^ 
tahula,  locus  amoenus,  ludi•,  vcnaiio,  villa  LucuUi  [nam  si  iuam  di- 
cerem,  latebram  haheres  ;  ad  corpus  diceres  pertinere)  sed  ea,  gucs 
dixi,  ad  corpuscle  refers  ?" 

83,  84. 

See  Appendix  I.,  Remarks  on  the  Genitive. 

85. 

The  ^vriters  on  ellipsis  supply  the  verb  ομ.νυμ(  with  the  par- 
ticles of  swearing ;  as,  μα  (ομνυμι)  Δια ;  νη  (ομνυμι)  Δια.  Ι 
cannot  resist  the  temptation  of  making  the  student  acquaint- 
ed with  another  mode  of  resolving  these  constructions,  Λvhich 
I  have  no  doubt  he  will  find  exceedingly  ingenious  and  plau- 
sible, though  it  must  be  confessed  that  the  foundation  on  which 
it  rests  is  none  of  the  most  stable.  Hoogeveen  first  suggest- 
ed, in  his  work  on  the  Greek  Particles,  (c.  2.5,  p.  630,)  that 
μα  might  l*c  formed  from  άμα,  as  |a  from  αξα  ;  and  that  the 
root  of  άμα  might  be  the  verb  αμαο),  whence  comes  μαω,  /  de- 
sire loith  eagerness,  I  imjuire,  investigate.  Everard  Scheide, 
the  editor  of  Van  Lennep's  "  Etvmologicon  Linguse  Grsecre," 
seizes  upon  this  hint,  and  supposes  μα  to  be  the  imperative, 
second  person,  contracted  from  μσ.ε  ;  and  hence  the  accusa- 
tive Δια,  for  example,  is  governed  by  this  imperative  ;  and  the 
expression,  μα  Δια,  is  equivalent  to,  "  ask  Jupiter, ^^  i.  e.  "  ask 
JupU&r  if  I  do  not  speak  the  truth  ;"  so  να»  μα  rov  Απόλλωνα, 


ilO  OHEEK  EXEaclflES. — APPE5DIX  Π. 

"  yes  !  ask  ApoUo  if  I  do  not  speak  the  tmlhP  The  eame  ΤΛτί- 
ter  makes  ναι  or  νη  to  be  an  okl  dative  form  from  νη,  frmaiio, 
etabililio  ;  so  that,  according  to  him,  ναι  μα  Δια,  or  νη  μα  Λια, 
or  simply  vou  or  νη  Δια,  {μΜ  being  supposed  to  be  understood,) 
"W'ill  properly  signify,  "  in  confirmation,"  or,  "  as  a  strengthening 
of  what  I  have  said,  ask  Jupiter  if  J  do  not  utter  the  truth.''  Vid. 
Valckenacr  de  Analogia,  L.  Gr.  ed.  Scheidc,  p.  250. 

It  is  a  matter  of  more  importance  for  the  student  to  know 
that  the  particle  μα  neither  afirms  nor  denies,  but  only  strength- 
ens or  adds  intensity  to  what  is  affirmed  or  denied.  Whether 
the  oath  taken  be  one  in  affirmation  or  denial  of  any  thing,  is 
to  be  ascertained  from  the  context.  In  general,  however,  ναι 
is  added  when  an  αβηναήοη  is  intended  to  be  conveyed,  and 
cu,  or  some  other  negative,  or  else  adversative  particle,  when 
a  negation  is  implietf.  Vid.  Hoogevecn  Doctrina  Parlicula- 
rum  L.  G.  ed.  Schiitz,  p.  292. 

86. 

Tn  Greek,  after  an  ontire  proposition  is  negatived,  it  is  al- 
ways customary  to  oegative  again  all  other  definitions  of  α 
general  nature  which  are  to  be  attached ;  such  as  any  one^ 
at  any  time,  any  tohere,  &c.  Hence  in  this  language  two  ne- 
gatives do  not,  as  in  Latin  and  English,  destroy•,  but,  on  the 
contrary,  strengthen  each  other.  We  sometimes  find  on  the 
part  of  the  Latin  writers,  more  especially  the  earl}'  ones,  an 
imitation  of  the  Greek  idiom  in  this  respect :  thus — Ennius, 
(ap.  Fcst.)  Lapideo  corde  sunt  multi,  guos  non  miscret  neminis. 
— Plautus,  Mil.  5.  1.  18.  Jura  te  non  nocituram  homini  hac  de 
re  ncmini. — Id.  Bacch.  4.  9.  114.  JVejue  ego  haud  committam  ui 
fecisse  dicas. — Id.  Epid.  4,  1,6.  JYeque  ea  nunc  ubi  sit  nescio. — 
Ibid.  5,  1,  57.  J^'eyue  Hie  haud  okjicict  mihi.  And  among  later 
Avriters — Propcrtiiis,  2,  15,  ult.  Ahsenii  nemo  ne  nocuisse  velit, 
— Ovid.  Pont.  1,  1,  66.  .Vc  nonpeccarim,  mors  quoquc  non  fa• 
del. 

91. 

Those  prepositions  which  govern  two  cases,  answer  for  the 
most  part  to  the  question  whither  with  the  accusative,  and  to 
the  question  where  with  the  dative.  The  genitive  admits  of 
variou.-i  significations,  though  more  or  less  connected  \vith  the 
idea,  out  nf  from.  The  limits  of  ihe  present  work  forViid  en- 
lariring  upon  the  meanings  of  the  prepositions  re.=:pcciivi'ly ; 
thin  falls  mort>  within  the  .«cope  of  grammatical  treatises  ;  to 
those  the  sliidcnt  is  referred. 


GREEK  EXERCISES. APPENDIX  II;  211 

92. 

This  rule  is  retained  verbaiim  from  the  former  edition  of 
tliis  work.  It  may  be  as  well  to  quote  the  words  of  Dr.  Neil- 
son  ; — "  Πα^α  and  ιτξος  are  joined,  in  this  rule,  for  the  sake  of 
conciseness,  as  they  may  commonly  be  translated  by  the  same 
words  :  3'et  tliere  is  a  marked  distinction  in  the  ideas  re- 
spectively expressed  by  them  :  iraga  in  general  implying  dura- 
tion or  possession,  and  ir^os  contingency.'"  To  this  may  be 
added,  as  a  caution  to  the  student,  that  the  term  beside,  in  the 
language  of  the  rule,  does  not  mean  besides,  or  in  addition  lo, 
(which  is  included  in  the  meaning  with  for  the  dative,)  but  by^ 
or  along  side  of;  and  that  this  signification  is  confined  exclu-. 
sivebj  to  ■π-α^α. 

99. 

The  student  must  not  confound  χάν  with  the  accent,  which 
is  compounded  of  xai  αν,  with  καν,  for  χα»  sv,  which  has  no 
accentual  mark. 


FINIS. 


ίΙΟ  OHEEK  EXEaCIflE9. — APPENDIX  II. 

"  yes  !  ask  ΛροΙΙο  if  I  do  not  speak  the  truth."  The  eame  wri- 
ter makes  ναι  or  νη  to  be  an  old  dative  form  from  νη,  finnatio^ 
stabilitio  ;  so  that,  according  to  him,  ναι  μα  Δια,  or  vtj  μα  Δια, 
or  simply  woj  or  νη  Δια,  (μα  being  supposed  to  be  understood,) 
will  properly  signify,  "  in  confirmation"  or,  "  as  a  strengthening 
of  what  I  have  said,  ask  Jupiter  if  I  do  not  utter  the  truth."  Via. 
Valckenacr  de  Analogia,  L.  Gr.  ed.  Scheide,  p.  250. 

li  is  a  matter  of  more  importance  for  the  student  to  know 
that  the  particle  μα  neither  affirms  nor  denies,  but  only  strength- 
ens or  adds  intensity  to  what  is  affirmed  or  denied.  Whether 
the  oath  taken  be  one  in  affirmation  or  denial  of  any  thing,  is 
to  be  ascertained  from  the  context.  In  general,  however,  ναι 
is  added  when  an  affirmation  is  intended  to  be  conveyed,  and 
cu,  or  some  other  negative,  or  else  adversative  particle,  when 
α  negation  is  implied.  Vid.  Hoogevecn  Doctiina  I'articula- 
rum  L.  G.  ed.  Schiitz,  p.  292. 

86. 

Tn  Greek,  after  an  fmtire  proposition  is  negatived,  it  is  al- 
ways customary  to  Qegativc  again  all  other  definitions  of  α 
general  nature  which  are  to  be  attached ;  such  as  any  one, 
at  any  time,  any  where,  &c.  Hence  in  this  language  two  ne- 
gatives do  not,  as  in  Latin  and  English,  destroy,  but,  on  the 
contrary,  strengthen  each  other.  We  sometimes  find  on  the 
part  of  the  Latin  writers,  more  especially  the  earl}'  ones,  an 
imitation  of  the  Greek  idiom  in  this  respect :  thus — Ennius, 
(ap.  Fest.)  Lnpidco  corde  sunt  mnlti,  quos  non  miscret  ncminis. 
— Plaulus,  Mil.  5.  1.  18.  Jura  te  non  nocituram  homini  hac  de 
re  ncmini. — Id.  Bacch.  4.  9.  114.  JVeque  ego  hand  committam  ut 
fecisse  dicas. — Id.  Epid.  4,  1,6.  .Vfywe  ea  nunc  vbi  sit  nescio. — 
Ibid.  5,  1,  57.  JS'cjue  tile  hand  objicict  mihi.  And  among  later 
writer.s — Propcrtius,  2,  15,  ult.  Ahsenti  nemo  ne  nocuisse  velit. 
— Ovid.  Pont.  1,  1,  66.  Λδ  tion  peccarim,  7nors  quoquc  non  fa- 
del. 

Λ 

91. 

Those  prepositions  which  govern  two  cases,  ajiswer  for  the 
most  part  to  the  question  whithrr  with  the  accusative,  and  to 
the  question  where  with  the  dative.  The  genitive  admits  of 
variou.•!  significations,  though  more  or  less  connected  with  the 
idea,  out  rf  from.  The  limits  of  llie  present  \vork  forbid  en- 
Inri^iug  iqion  the  meanings  of  the  prepositions  re.^pectivfly  ; 
this  fall.s  mor••  within  the  .«cope  of  grammatical  trefttises  j  te 
those  the  student  is  referred. 


GREEK  EXERCISES. — APPENDSX  11;  211 

92. 

This  rule  is  retained  verbatim  from  the  former  edition  of 
this  work.  It  may  be  as  well  to  quote  the  Avords  of  Dr.  Neil- 
son  ; — "  Πα^α  and  ΐίξας  are  joined,  in  this  rule,  for  the  sake  of 
conciseness,  as  they  may  commonly  be  translated  by  the  same 
"words  :  j'et  tliere  is  a  marked  distinction  in  the  ideas  re- 
spectively expressed  by  them  :  irotfa  in  general  implying  dura- 
tion or  possession,  and  νξος  contingency."  To  this  may  be 
added,  as  a  caution  to  the  student,  that  the  term  beside,  m  the 
language  of  the  rule,  does  not  mean  besides,  or  in  addition  ίο, 
(which  is  included  in  the  meaning  with  for  the  dative,)  but  by, 
or  along  side  of;  and  that  this  signification  is  confiiaed  exclu- 
sively to  ca^a. 

99. 

The  student  must  not  confound  χάν  with  the  accent,  which 
is  compounded  of  χαι  αν,  with  καν,  for  χαι  εν,  which  has  no 
accentual  mark. 


FINIS. 


i 


?  f 


/  ί 


.4     •-  '*  '^'• 


1. 


'f  *•*. 


^   *. 


I  . 


f        i 


4 


# 


'  # 


^-^ 


f    i    Λ 


^  4 


ii^ 


^4 


RETURN 


CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 

202  Main  Library 


LOAN  PERIOD  1 
HOME  USE 

2                               3 

4 

5                                    6 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

1   monrh  loans  niay  be  renewed  by  calling  642-3405 

6  month  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing  books  to  Circulation  Desk 

Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4  doys  prior  to  due  date 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 

BCUL  ocn 

i"82 

SENT  ON  ILL 

JUL  1  9  1995 

■  1  ^  niO^fTi  PV 

U•  C  DCnlVCLCT 

^ 


FORM  NO.  DD6,  60m, 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKELEY 
12/80        BERKELEY,  CA  94720 


υ.  C.BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


CD^7D3SL•3Ξ 


y" 

-     --        .<  rf 

y"''.-                 -,,,^ί-ο,^- 

THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

•«<ί,% 


